GFZ-62757EN B-62757EN

GE Fanuc CNC
Series 16/18/160/180-Model C
Operation and Maintenance Handbook

Presented By: CNC Center

For Product Needs Please Visit:
[Link]
OR Email:
sales@[Link]
OR Call:
1-800-963-3513
GE Fanuc CNC Manuals [Link]
 GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 16 / 18 / 160 / 180 – Model C

Operation and Maintenance Handbook

GFZ-62757EN/01 July 1996

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2

om
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC
units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to 3
ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all
descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be

r.c
applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool 4
builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program
to control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully
familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.

e
5

nt CONTENTS

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . s–2

6
ce
2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3

3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED 7

TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5

4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED

nc

TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–8
8
5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . s–11
.c

9
w

10
w
w

s–1
 1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
1
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
2

om
WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or 3

when there is a damage of both the user being injured and the
equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not
observed.

r.c
4
CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being

e
damaged, if the approved procedure is not observed. 5

NOTE nt
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other
than Warning and Caution.
6
ce
7

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

s–2
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

1
WARNING

1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first

checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a 2

om
production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the
single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function
or by operating the machine with neither a tool nor
workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct 3
operation of the machine may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

r.c
2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the
4
entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.

e
5
3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the
intended operation. Generally, for each machine, there is
nt a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate
varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the
correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly, possibly
6
ce
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.

4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly 7

check the direction and amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly,
nc

possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or

machine itself, or injury to the user. 8
5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory–set.
Usually, there is not need to change them. When,
however, there is not alternative other than to change a
.c

parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function

of the parameter before making any change.
9
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the
machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing
damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury
w

to the user.
10
6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch
any of the keys on the MDI panel until the position display
w

or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.

Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to
maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any
of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may
w

cause it to behave unexpectedly.

s–3
 WARNING
1
7. The operator’s manual and programming manual
supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall description of
the machine’s functions, including any optional functions.
Note that the optional functions will vary from one
machine model to another. Therefore, some functions 2

om
described in the manuals may not actually be available for
a particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.

8. Some functions may have been implemented at the 3

request of the machine–tool builder. When using such
functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine–tool builder for details of their use and any

r.c
related cautions.
4
NOTE

Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in

e
nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained
even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted
5
inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to delete all
data from nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery.
nt
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure
quick restoration of deleted data, backup all vital data, and
keep the backup copy in a safe place. 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

s–4
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

PROGRAMMING
1
This section covers the major safety precautions related to
programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the
supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully such
that you are fully familiar with their contents.
2

om
WARNING

3
1. Coordinate system setting

If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the

r.c
machine may behave unexpectedly as a result of the
program issuing an otherwise valid move command.
Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the 4
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation

e
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation 5
(positioning by nonlinear movement between the start
and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed

nt before performing programming.

Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides
with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
6
ce
3. Function involving a rotation axis

When programming polar coordinate interpolation or

normal–direction (perpendicular) control, pay careful 7
attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect
programming may result in the rotation axis speed
becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force
nc

causes the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the

latter is not mounted securely. 8
Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

4. Inch/metric conversion
.c

Switching between inch and metric inputs does not 9

convert the measurement units of data such as the
workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position.
Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which
w

measurement units are being used. Attempting to

perform an operation with invalid data specified may 10
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
cause injury to the user.
w
w

s–5
 WARNING
1
5. Constant surface speed control

When an axis subject to constant surface speed control

approaches the origin of the workpiece coordinate
system, the spindle speed may become excessively 2

om
high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum
allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable
speed incorrectly may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3
6. Stroke check

After switching on the power, perform a manual reference

r.c
position return as required. Stroke check is not possible
before manual reference position return is performed.
Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not
4
issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly
damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
causing injury to the user.

e
7. Tool post interference check 5
A tool post interference check is performed based on the
nt tool data specified during automatic operation. If the tool
specification does not match the tool actually being used,
the interference check cannot be made correctly,
possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or
causing injury to the user.
6
ce
After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post
manually, always start automatic operation and specify
the tool number of the tool to be used.
7
8. Absolute/incremental mode

If a program created with absolute values is run in

nc

incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine may

behave unexpectedly. 8
9. Plane selection

If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation,

.c

helical interpolation, or a canned cycle, the machine may

behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the
9
respective functions for details.

10. Torque limit skip

w

Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque 10

limit. If a torque limit skip is specified without the torque
limit actually being applied, a move command will be
w

executed without performing a skip.

11. Programmable mirror image

Note that programmed operations vary considerably

w

when a programmable mirror image is enabled.

s–6
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
1
12. Compensation function

If a command based on the machine coordinate system

or a reference position return command is issued in
compensation function mode, compensation is 2

om
temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected
behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore,
always cancel compensation function mode.
3

r.c
4

e
5

nt 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

s–7
 4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
HANDLING
1
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of
machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the
supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully, such
that you are fully familiar with their contents.
2

om
WARNING

3
1. Manual operation

When operating the machine manually, determine the

r.c
current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure
that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have
been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the 4
machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.

2. Manual reference position return

e
5
After switching on the power, perform manual reference
position return as required. If the machine is operated

nt without first performing manual reference position return,

it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible
before manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
6
ce
to the user.

3. Manual numeric command

7
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine
the current position of the tool and workpiece, and ensure
that the movement axis, direction, and command have
nc

been specified correctly, and that the entered values are

valid. 8
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid
command specified may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
.c

4. Manual handle feed

9
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large
scale factor, such as 100, applied causes the tool and
table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the
w

tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.

10
5. Disabled override
w

If override is disabled (according to the specification in a

macro variable) during threading, rigid tapping, or other
tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly
damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
causing injury to the operator.
w

s–8
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING
1
6. Origin/preset operation

Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when

the machine is operating under the control of a program.
Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, 2

om
possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or
causing injury to the user.

7. Workpiece coordinate system shift

3
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may
shift the workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting
to operate the machine under the control of a program,

r.c
confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program
without making allowances for any shift in the workpiece
4
coordinate system, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

e
8. Software operator’s panel and menu switches 5
Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches,
nt in combination with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify
operations not supported by the machine operator’s
panel, such as mode change, override value change, and
jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated
6
ce
inadvertently, the machine may behave unexpectedly,
possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7
9. Manual intervention

If manual intervention is performed during programmed

nc

operation of the machine, the tool path may vary when the
machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after 8
manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the
manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
.c

10. Feed hold, override, and single block

9
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block
functions can be disabled using custom macro system
variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine
w

in this case.
10
11. Dry run
w

Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the

machine. During a dry run, the machine operates at dry
run speed, which differs from the corresponding
programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
w

s–9
 WARNING
1
12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI
mode

Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a

command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool nose 2

om
radius compensation is not applied. When a command is
entered from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation
in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay
particular attention to the tool path when automatic
operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the 3
descriptions of the corresponding functions for details.

13. Program editing

r.c
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining
program is edited (modification, insertion, or deletion), the
4
machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is
resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do
not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.

e
5

nt 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

s–10
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

1
WARNING

1. Memory backup battery replacement

2

om
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the
power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an
emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is
performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only
those personnel who have received approved safety and 3
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an

r.c
insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents 4
an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

NOTE

e
5
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its
memory, because it must retain data such as programs,
nt
offsets, and parameters even while external power is not
applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is
displayed on the machine operator’s panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the
6
ce
batteries within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC’s
memory will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or
programming manual for details of the battery replacement
7
procedure.
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

s–11
 WARNING
1
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the

power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an
emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is 2

om
performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only
those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an 3
insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents
an extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.

r.c
4
NOTE

The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its

absolute position.

e
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is 5
displayed on the machine operator’s panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the
nt
batteries within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data
held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or
programming manual for details of the battery replacement
procedure.
6
ce
3. Fuse replacement
7
For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance
in the operator’s manual or programming manual
describes the fuse replacement procedure.
nc

Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary

to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. 8
For this reason, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform
this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful
.c

not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and 9

fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
w

10
w
w

s–12
 GENERAL
The Operation and Maintenance Handbook is for persons who are familiar
with NC programs and operations. It is used to refer to necessary informa-
tion quickly in operating or maintaining NC machine tools at a work site.
The Handbook only contains reference information. It does not contain other
types of information, such as essential information or notes. Read the follow-
ing manuals first.

om
The Handbook assumes that the reader is familiar with the information in the
following manuals.

Specification
Name of Manual
Number
FANUC Series DESCRIPTIONS B–62752EN
16/18/160/180–MODEL C

r.c
FANCU Series CONNECTION MANUAL B–62753EN
16/18/160/180–MODEL C (Hardware)
FANUC Series CONNECTION MANUAL B–62753EN–1
16/18/160/180–MODEL C (Function)
FANUC Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62754EN
16/18/160/180–TC

e
FANUC Series OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62764EN
16/18/160/180–MC
FANUC Series
nt
16/18/160/180–MODEL C
FANUC Series
16/18/160/180–MODEL C
MAINTENANCE MANUAL

PARAMETER MANUAL
B–62755EN

B–62760EN
ce
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E

series
FANUC AC SPINDLE DESCRIPTIONS B–65152E
MOTOR
series
FANUC CONTROL MOTOR DESCRIPTIONS B–65162E
AMPLIFIER
series
nc

FANUC CONTROL MOTOR MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65165E

series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR PARAMETER MANUAL B–65150E

series
FANUC AC SPINDLE PARAMETER MANUAL B–65160E
.c

MOTOR
series

The Operation and Maintenance Handbook provides information about the

following CNC units. The following symbols and system names are used in
the Handbook.
w
w
w
 Product Name Abbreviations System
FANUC Series 16–TC 16–TC T series or
FANUC Series 160–TC 160–TC T series (two–path control) *1

FANUC Series 16–MC 16–MC M series or

FANUC Series 160–MC 160–MC M series (two–path control) *1

FANUC Series 18–TC 18–TC T series or

T series (two–path control) *1

om
FANUC Series 180–TC 180–TC
FANUC Series 18–MC 18–MC M series
FANUC Series 180–MC 180–MC

*1) In the case of two–path control is added.

e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w
 CONTENTS

1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1

2. OPERATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2

om
3. G CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3

r.c
4. PROGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4

5. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

e
5

nt
6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 6
ce
7. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
7
nc

8. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
8

9. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

.c

9
w

10. PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

10
w

11. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY

AND SYMBOLIC KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 11
w
 CONTENTS
1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Keyboard Layout and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Operation of MDI Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.1 Screen transition chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.2 Displaying the current position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

om
1.2.3 Display for handle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2.4 Displaying the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.5 Program restart screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.2.6 Editing the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.2.7 Displaying the program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.8 Operation in the conversational programming menu . . . . . 22

r.c
1.2.9 Transferring data to and from the floppy disk . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2.10 Displaying and setting the tool compensation values . . . . . 25
1.2.11 Displaying and setting the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.12 Displaying and setting the offset values for the workpiece
coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

e
1.2.13 Displaying and setting the custom macro variables . . . . . . 29
1.2.14 Displaying and setting the data for the software operator’s
panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

nt
1.2.15 Displaying and setting the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.2.16 Displaying the internal state of the NC
(diagnostic screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.2.17 Displaying the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
ce
1.2.18 Displaying and setting the pitch error compensation
values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.2.19 Displaying the alarm messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.2.20 Displaying the operator messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.2.21 Displaying the alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.3 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
nc

1.3.1 Alarm detail screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

1.3.2 Operation method screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.3.3 Parameter contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.4 BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
.c

2. OPERATION LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3. G CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.1 T series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.2 M series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
w

4. PROGRAM FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.1 Types of Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
w

5.2 System Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5.3 Argument Assignment I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.4 Arithmetic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
w

5.5 Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

5.6 Macro Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.7 Command Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.1 Displaying CNC Internal State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.1.1 Procedure for displaying diagnostic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.1.2 Display of status in which command is not apparently
executed (No. 000 – 015) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.1.3 Information indicating automatic operation stop,

om
automatic idle statuses (No. 020 – 025) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.1.4 TH alarm statuses (No. 030, 031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.1.5 Digital servo system alarm (No. 200, 201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.1.6 Serial pulse coder alarm (No. 202, 203) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.1.7 Positional error display (No. 300) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.1.8 Machine position display (No. 301) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

r.c
6.1.9 Reference position shift function display (No. 302) . . . . . . 121
6.1.10 Inductosyn display (No. 380 and No. 381) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.1.11 Spindle data (No. 400–420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.1.12 Rigid tapping display (No. 450–457) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.1.13 Polygon synchronization mode status (No. 470–478) . . . . 124

e
6.1.14 Remote buffer protocol A status (No. 500–502) . . . . . . . . . 126
6.1.15 Display lated to MMC–IV (No. 510–513) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

nt
6.1.16 Small–diameter peck drilling cycle display
(No. 520–523) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.1.17 Display of ATC for FD alpha (No. 530–531) . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.1.18 Simplified synchronous control display (No. 540) . . . . . . . 128
ce
6.1.19 Display related to the dual position feedback function
(No. 550–553) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.2 Waveform Diagnosis Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.3 Screen Display at Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.4 System Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
nc

6.5 Interface between CNC and PMC/MT and

Displaying I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.5.1 I/O signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.5.2 Address list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
.c

7.1 Configuration of CNC Machine Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

7.2 Configuration of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.3 Total Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
w

7.4 Configuration of the Printed Circuit Boards and

LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
7.4.1 Power unit configuration and LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
7.4.2 Configuration main CPU board and LED display . . . . . . . . 217
w

7.4.3 Configuration of the option 1 board and LED display . . . . 219

7.4.4 Configuration of option 2 board and LED display . . . . . . . 221
7.4.5 Configuration of the option 3 board and LED display . . . . 224
w

7.4.6 Configuration of the loader control board and

LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
7.4.7 Configuration of I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
 7.4.8 Configuration of the I/O card with power supply
(for power supply C) and LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
7.4.9 Configuration of the background graphic board and
LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
7.4.10 Configuration of the 64–bit RISC board and
LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
8. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
8.1 How to Enter the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

om
8.2 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
9. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
9.1 Alarms Displayed on NC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
9.1.1 Program errors (P/S alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
9.1.2 Background edit alarm (BP/S alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
9.1.3 Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

r.c
9.1.4 Serial pulse coder (APC) alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
9.1.5 Servo alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
9.1.6 Overtravel alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
9.1.7 Overheat alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
9.1.8 Rigid tapping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

e
9.1.9 Serial spindle alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
9.1.10 System alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
nt
9.1.11 Alarms displayed on spindle servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
10. PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
10.1 Dynamic Display of Sequence Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
10.2 Display of PMC Diagnosis Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
ce
10.2.1 Title screen (TITLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
10.2.2 Status screen (STATUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
10.2.3 Alarm screen (ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
10.2.4 Trace screen (TRACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
nc

10.2.5 Displaying memory data ([Link]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

10.2.6 Signal waveform display function screen (ANALYS) . . . . . 411
10.3 PMC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
10.3.1 Input of PMC parameter from MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
10.3.2 Timer screen (TIMER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
.c

10.3.3 Counter screen (COUNTER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

10.3.4 Keep relay screen (KEEPRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
10.3.5 Data table screen (DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
w

10.3.6 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

10.4 Input/Output of PMC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
10.4.1 Start of the built-in type PMC programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
10.4.2 Input/output method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
w

10.4.3 Copy function (COPY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

10.5 Functional Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
10.5.1 Functional instruction list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
w

10.5.2 Detail of function command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

11. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY
AND SYMBOLIC KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.1 Keyboard Layout and Names

(1) T series

om
r.c
(4) SOFT KEYS
(1) POWER ON/OFF BUTTONS

e
Fig. 1.1 (a) 9″ CRT/MDI Panel (Standard) (T series)

(2) M series
nt
ce
nc
.c

(1) POWER ON/OFF BUTTONS (4) SOFT KEYS

w

Fig. 1.1 (b) 9″ CRT/MDI Panel (Standard) (M series)

w
w

1
 1
(2) RESET KEY
(3) HELP KEY
(5) ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

om
(9) EDIT KEY

(8) CANCEL KEY

3
(7) INPUT KEY

r.c
4

(10) FUNCTION KEYS

(12) PAGE–UP/DOWN KEYS
(11) CURSOR KEYS

e
(6) SHIFT KEY
5

(3) HELP KEY

nt
(2) RESET KEY

(5) ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

6
ce
7
(9) EDIT KEY

(8) CANCEL KEY

nc

(7) INPUT KEY 8

.c

9
(10) FUNCTION KEYS
(12) PAGE–UP/DOWN KEYS
(11) CURSOR KEYS
w

(6) SHIFT KEY

10
w
w

2
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

(3) MDI keyboard of T series CNC

om
Fig. 1.1 (c) MDI Keyboard of 9″ Small CRT/MDI Panel or 8.4″ Small
LCD/MDI Panel

e r.c
nt
Fig. 1.1 (d) MDI Keyboard of 9.5″ LCD/MDI Panel (Horizontal)
ce
nc

Fig. 1.1 (e) MDI Keyboard of 9.5″ LCD/MDI Panel (Vertical) or

14″ CRT/MDI Panel (Vertical)
.c
w
w
w

Fig. 1.1 (f) MDI Keyboard of 14″ LCD/MDI Panel (Horizontal)

3
 (4) MDI keyboard of M series CNC

om
3
Fig. 1.1 (g) MDI Keyboard of 9″ Small CRT/MDI Panel or 8.4″ Small
LCD/MDI Panel

r.c
4

e
5

nt
Fig. 1.1 (h) MDI Keyboard of 9.5″ LCD/MDI Panel (Horizontal)
6
ce
7
nc

Fig. 1.1 (i) MDI Keyboard of 9.5″ LCD/MDI Panel (Vertical) or 8

14″ CRT/MDI Panel (Vertical)
.c

9
w

10
w
w

Fig. 1.1 (j) MDI Keyboard of 14″ LCD/MDI Panel (Horizontal)

4
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

(5) Functions of MDI keyboard

No. Name Functions

(1) <Power> ON/OFF Press this button to turn CNC power ON and
button OFF.

(2) <RESET> key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an

om
alarm, etc.
RESET

(3) <HELP> key Press this button to use the help function when
uncertain about the operation of an MDI key.
HELP

(4) Soft key The soft key has various functions, according to
the Applications. The soft key functions are
displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen.

r.c
(5) Address/numerical Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric,
key and other characters.
X 5
(6) <SHIFT> key Some keys have two characters on their key-

e
SHIFT
SHIFT top. Pressing the key switches the char-
acters. Special character £ is displayed on the
screen when a character indicated at the bot-
tom right corner on the keytop can be entered.
(7) <INPUT> key
nt INPUT
When an address or a numerical key is
pressed, the data is input to the buffer, and it is
displayed on the CRT screen. To copy the data
in the key input buffer to the offset register, etc.,
ce
INPUT
press the key.
This key is equivalent to the [INPUT] key of the
soft keys, and either can be pressed to produce
the same result.
(8) Cancel <CAN> key Press this key to delete the last character or
symbol input to the key input buffer. The con-
CAN
nc

tents of the key input buffer are displayed on

the CRT screen.
Example: When the key input buffer displays
N001X100Z and the cancel CAN

key is pressed, Z is canceled and

N001X100 is displayed.
.c

(9) Program edit key Press this key when editing the program.
ALTER INSERT DELETE ALTER : Alter
w

INSERT : Insert

DELETE : Delete
w

(10) Function key Press this key to switch display screens for
each function.
POS PROG
w

5
 No. Name Functions 1
(11) Cursor move keys There are four different cursor move keys.

: This key is used to move the cursor to

the right or in the forward direction.
The cursor is moved in short units in 2

om
the forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor to
the left or in the reverse direction.
The cursor is moved in short units in
the reverse direction.
3
: This key is used to move the cursor in
a downward or forward direction.
The cursor is moved in large units in

r.c
the forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in
an upward or reverse direction.
4
The cursor is moved in large units in
the reverse direction.
(12) Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described
below.

e
PAGE 5
PAGE PAGE : This key is used to changeover the
page on the CRT screen in the forward

nt PAGE
direction.
: This key is used to changeover the
page on the CRT screen in the reverse
direction.
6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

6
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2 Operation of MDI Panel

1.2.1 Screen transition chart

SCREENS INCLUDED IN POS

POS

om
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)

[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ (OPRT) ]

ACTUAL ACTUAL ACTUAL HANDLE

POSITION POSITION POSITION INTERRU-
(ABSOLUTE) (RELATIVE) (ALL) PTION

r.c
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)

[ MONI ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

e
MONITOR

ntSCREEN
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

7
 SCREENS INCLUDED IN PROG (MEM mode)

PROG
1

PROGRAM
MEM
2

om
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [ CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]

CONTENTS PROGRAM PROGRAM

OF
PROGRAM
(CURRENT
BLOCK)
(NEXT
BLOCK) 3

r.c
[ ABS ] [ REL ]

4
PROGRAM PROGRAM
CHECK CHECK
(ABSOLUTE) (RELATIVE)

e
PROGRAM 5
MEM

[ RSTR ] [ ] [ [Link] ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

nt
PROGRAM
RESTART
6
ce
[ PRGRM] [ DIR ] [ SCHDUL]

FILE SCHEDULE 7
DIRECTORY SETTING
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

8
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

SCREENS INCLUDED IN PROG (EDIT mode)

PROG

PROGRAM
EDIT

om
[ PRGRM ] [ LIB ] [ ] [ C.A.P ] [ (OPRT) ]

PROGRAM PROGRAM C.A.P.

EDITING DIRECTORY SCREEN
SCREEN SCREEN

r.c
PROGRAM
EDIT

[ FLOPPY] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

FILE

e
DIRECTORY
OF FLOPPY

nt
SCREENS INCLUDED IN OFFSET
SETTING

OFFSET
SETTING
ce
OFFSET/GEOMETRY

[ OFFSET ] [ SETING] [ WORK ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

nc

TOOL SETTING WORK

OFFSET SCREEN COORDINATE
SCREEN SCREEN

VARIABLE
.c

[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

w

MACRO MENU OPERATOR’S

VARIABLE PROGRAM PANEL
DISPLAY MING
w
w

9
 SCREENS INCLUDED IN SYSTEM

SYSTEM

PARAMETER

[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [ SYSTEM] [ (OPRT) ] 2

om
PARAMETER DIAGNOSIS PMC SYSTEM
SETTING SCREEN SCREEN STRUCTUAL
SCREEN SCREEN
3
PARAMETER

r.c
[ ] [ PITCH ] [ [Link] ] [ [Link] ] [ (OPRT) ]
4
PITCH SERVO SPINDLE
ERROR COM- PARAMETER PARAMETER
PENSATION SCREEN SCREEN

e
PARAMETER
5

nt[ [Link]]

WAVEFORM
DIAGNOSIS
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

6
ce
SCREEN

SCREENS INCLUDED IN MESSAGE 7

MESSAGE
nc

ALARM MESSAGE
MDI
8
[ ALARM ] [ MSG ] [ HISTRY ] [ ] [ ]
.c

ALARM
MESSAGE
OPERATOR
MESSAGE
ALARM
HISTORY
9
SCREEN SCREEN SCREEN
w

SCREENS INCLUDED IN HELP

HELP
10
w

HELP (INITIAL MENU)

[ 1 ALAM ] [ 2 OPR ] [ 3 PARA ] [ ] [ ]

w

HELP HELP HELP

(ALARM (OPERATION (PARAME-
DETAIL) METHOD) TER TABLE)

10
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.2 Displaying the current position

(1) Displaying the position using absolute coordinates
(a) Press soft key [ABS].
Program number
Sequence
number
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) O1000 N00010

om
X 123.456
Y 363.233
Z 0.000
PART COUNT 5 Parameter
(No.6711)
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000 Time from
when the OP

r.c
signal is
turned off
(One machin-
MEM STRT MTN*** [Link] ing cycle)
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

Parameter DPF Inches/min is used when Parameter DPS

(bit 0 of No.3105)=1 values are input in inches. (bit 2 of No.3105)=1

e
Option
(displaying the number of parts and the operation time)

(b) Operation
nt
Soft key [(OPRT)]

(c) Related parameters

[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Parameter NDP (bit 0 of No.3115) : 0: The current position is

ce
displayed for each axis.
1: The current position is not
displayed for each axis.
Parameter PCM (bit 0 of No.6700) : The total number of machined
parts and the number of
machined parts are
nc

incremented when the

following M codes are
specified.
0: M02, M03, and the M codes
specified with parameter No.
6710
1: The M codes specified with
.c

parameter No. 6710

Parameter No. 6710: M code that counts the total number of
machined parts and the number of machined
parts in the current operation
Parameter No. 6711: Number of machined parts
w

Parameter No. 6751: Operation time (integrated time value during

automatic operation) [ms]
Parameter No. 6752: Operation time (integrated time value during
automatic operation) [min]
w

NOTE Hours and minutes are displayed on

the screen.
Parameter No. 6757: Operation time (integrated value in one
automatic operation) [ms]
w

Parameter No. 6758: Operation time (integrated value in one

automatic operation) [min]
NOTE Hours, minutes, and seconds are dis-
played on the screen.
11
 (2) Displaying the position using relative coordinates
(a) Press soft key [REL].
1
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) O1000 N00010

X 123.456
Y 363.233 2

om
Z 0.000

PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S 3
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM STRT MTN*** [Link]

r.c
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

4
(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Axis Coordinate [PRESET]

e
[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
5
Axis [EXEC]
[PTSPRE] [EXEC]

(3) Overall display

nt
(a) Press soft key [ALL].
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

6
ce
Distance from an arbitrary position

7
ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N00010
(RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)
X 246.912 X 123.456 Coordinate
system used
nc

Y 913.780 Y 456.890 for absolute

Z 1578.246 Z 789.123 commands

(MACHINE) (DISTANCE TO GO)

8
X 0.000 X 0.000 Remaining
distance to
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 move in
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 automatic
operation
.c

PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S 9
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** [Link]
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]
w

Distance from the reference position 10

(b) Operation
w

Soft key [(OPRT)] Axis Coordinate [PRESET]

[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]
Axis [EXEC]
w

[PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

12
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.3 Display for handle interrupt

(1) Press soft key [HNDL].
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is displayed.
The displayed unit is switched between inch and
metric (by setting in G20 and G21)

HANDLE INTERRUPTION O0000 N02000

(INPUT UNIT) (OUTPUT UNIT)

om
X 69.594 X 69.594 Displayed in
the unit
Y 137.783 Y 137.783 specified by
Z –61.439 Z –61.439 parameter INM
(bit 0 of
(RELATIVE) (DISTANCE TO GO) No.100)
X 0.000 X 0.000 (mm/inch)
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000

PART COUNT 5

r.c
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** [Link]
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

(2) Operation

e
Soft key [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]
[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

(3) Related signals

DGN

G041
#7
HS2ID
nt #6
HS2IC
#5
HS2IB
#4
HS2IA
#3
HS1ID
#2
HS1IC
#1
HS1IB
#0
HS1IA
ce
DGN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G042 HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA

NOTE HS3In is effective only in the M series.

nc
.c
w
w
w

13
 1.2.4 Displaying the program
(1) Program contents screen
1
(a) Press soft key [PRGRM].

PROGRAM O2000 N00130

O2000 ; Sequence
N100 G92 X0 Y0 Z70. ; number
N110 G91 G00 Y–70. ;
2

om
N120 Z–70. ; Program
N130 G42 G39 I–17.5 ; number
N140 G41 G03 X–17.5 Y17.5 R17.5 ;
N150 G01 X–25. ;
N160 G02 X27.5 Y27.5 R27.5 ;
N170 G01 X20. ;
N180 G02 X45. Y45. R45. ;
3

>_ S 0 T0000

r.c
MEM STRT *** [Link]
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]
4

(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]  See the EDIT mode screen.

e
O Program number [O SRH]
5

N Sequence number [[Link]]

nt [REWIND]

N Sequence number [P TYPE]

6
ce
N Sequence number [O TYPE]

(c) Related parameter 7

Parameter No.7310: The sequence of the axes along which the
machine moves to the restart point after the
program is restarted
nc

(d) Related signal

SRN (G006#0): Program restart 8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

14
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

(2) Program checking screen

(a) Press soft key [CHECK].

PROGRAM CHECK O2000 N00130

O0010 ;
G92 G90 X100. Y200. Z50. ; Contents of the program.
G00 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
G01 Z250. F1000 ;

om
(ABSOLUTE) (DIST TO GO) G00 G94 G80
X 0.000 X 0.000 G17 G21 G98
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 G90 G40 G50 Modal
information
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 G22 G49 G67
B
H M
T D
F S
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM STRT *** [Link]

r.c
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]

Absolute or relative coordinates can be switched by software

(b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]  See the EDIT mode screen.

e
O Program number [O SRH]

N Sequence number
nt [REWIND]

N Sequence number
[[Link]]

[P TYPE]
ce
N Sequence number [O TYPE]

(c) Related parameter

Parameter No.7310: The sequence of the axes along which the
machine moves to the restart point after the
program is restarted
nc

(d) Related signal

SRN (G006#0): Program restart

(3) Screen displaying the contents of the program currently running

.c

(a) Press soft key [CURRNT].

PROGRAM O2000 N00130

(CURRNT) (MODAL)
w

G01 X 17.500 G67 G01 F 2000

G17 F 2000 G54 G17
G41 H 2 G64 G91
G80 G69 G22
G15 G94 Modal
Block data being processed G40.1 G21 H 2 D information
w

Data with a decimal point G25 G41

corresponds to the absolute
command.
G49 T
Data without a decimal point G80
corresponds to the incre- G98 S
mental command. G50
w

>_ S 0 T0000
MEM STRT *** [Link]
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]

15
 (b) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG-EDT] → See the EDIT mode screen.
1
(4) Screen displaying the current and next blocks
(a) Press soft key [NEXT].

PROGRAM O2000 N00130

(CURRNT) (NEXT) 2

om
G01 X 17.500 G39 I –17.500
G17 F 2000 G42
G41 H 2
G80
Contents of the program
Note)
Data with a decimal point corresponds read into the buffer. 3
to the absolute command. Data without Nothing is displayed for
a decimal point corresponds to the in- single block operation.
cremental command.

r.c
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM STRT *** [Link] 4
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]

(b) Operation

e
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG-EDT] → See the EDIT mode screen. 5
1.2.5 Program restart screen

X 57.096
nt
(1) Press soft key [RSTR].

PROGRAM RESTART
DESTINATION M ***
***
***
***
O0002 N01000
***
***
***
***
***
***
6
ce
Y 56.877 *** *** *** *** ***
Z 56.943 *** *** *** *** ***
*** *** *** *** *** List of mis-
*** *** *** *** *** cellaneous 7
DISTANCE TO GO functions
specified
1 X 1.459 before restart
2 Y 10.309 T ** **
3 Z 7.320 S ****
nc

S 0 T0000 8
Blinks during
MEM **** *** *** [Link] RSTR restart.
[ RSTR ] [ ] [ [Link] ] [ L ] [ (OPRT) ]
.c

Axis sequence set in parameter No. 7310 (Displays * when the preparation
for restart is not completed. Displays the axis sequence when searching the 9
restarting block is completed. Blinks when the preparation is completed.)

(2) Operation
w

The program restart function restarts machining from the block whose 10
sequence number is specified when a tool is damaged or when the
power is turned on.
(a) P type (when a tool is damaged)
w

1 Press the feed hold button. Move the tool away from the workpiece
in the manual mode and replace it with a new one.
Change the tool compensation value, if necessary.
w

2 Set the SRN signal to 1.

3 Display the program contents screen.
4 Press soft key [REWIND] to move the cursor to the top of the
program.
16
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

5 Enter N followed by the sequence number of the program to be

restarted. Press soft key [P TYPE] to search for the sequence
number.
6 The program restart screen is displayed. The position at which
machining is restarted and the specified M, S, T, and B codes are
shown on the screen.
7 Set the SRN signal to 0.

om
8 Specify M, S, T, or B codes in the MDI mode, if necessary.
9 Return to the automatic operation mode and press the cycle start
button.
(b) Q type (When machining is restarted after being stopped for some
reason)
Used when machining is restarted after the power is turned off, the
emergency stop button is pressed, or the operation is stopped to

r.c
change the coordinate system.
1 Return the machine to the reference position, if necessary, after the
power is turned on.
2 Move the machine to the restart point in the manual mode and set
the restarting data and coordinate system.
3 Ensure that the offset value is correct.

e
4 Set the SRN signal to 1.
5 Display the program contents screen.
Press soft key [REWIND] to move the cursor to the start of the

6 Enter
nt
program.

N followed by the sequence number of the program to be

restarted. Press soft key [Q TYPE] to search for the sequence
ce
number.
7 The program restart screen is displayed. The position at which
machining is restarted and the specified M, S, T, and B codes are
shown in the screen.
8 Set the SRN signal to 0.
9 Specify M, S, T, or B codes in the MDI mode, if necessary.
nc

10 Return to the automatic operation mode and press the cycle start
button.
.c
w
w
w

17
 1.2.6 Editing the program
(1) Program editing screen (Press soft key [PRGRM].)
1
PROGRAM O2000 N00130
O2000 ; Sequence
N100 G92 X0 Y0 Z70. ; number
N110 G91 G00 Y–70. ;
N120 Z–70. ; Program 2

om
N130 G42 G39 I–17.5 ; number
N140 G41 G03 X–17.5 Y17.5 R17.5 ;
N150 G01 X–25. ;
N160 G02 X27.5 Y27.5 R27.5 ;
N170 G01 X20. ;
N180 G02 X45. Y45. R45. ;
3
>_ S 0 T0000
MEM STRT *** [Link]

r.c
[ PRGRM ] [ CHECK ] [CURRNT] [ NEXT ] [ (OPRT) ]

(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]

e
O Program number [O SRH] 5
Address or word [SRH±]
nt Address or word

[REWIND]
[SRH°]
6
ce
7
[F SRH] [CAN]

N File number [EXEC]

nc

[READ] [MERGE]
8
(The cursor moves to the end of the
program.)
[EXEC]
[STOP]
.c

[CAN]
9
O Program number [EXEC]
w

10
w
w

18
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

[PUNCH] [STOP]

[CAN]

O Program number [EXEC]

Note) To specify all the programs, enter

0–9999.

om
[DELETE] [CAN]

N File number [EXEC]

[EX–EDT] [COPY]
[CRSR
]
[
CRSR]
[
BTTM]

r.c
[ALL]
Program INPUT [EXEC]
number

[MOVE]

e
[CRSR
]
[
CRSR]
[
BTTM]
nt [ALL]
Program
number
INPUT [EXEC]
ce
[MERGE]
[
’GCRSR]
[
BTTM’]

Program INPUT [EXEC]

number
nc

[CHANGE]

ADDRESS/WORD [BEFORE]
.c

ADDRESS/WORD [AFTER]

[SKIP]
[EX–SGL]
w

[EXEC]
w
w

19
 (3) Operation of expanded editing function
(a) When copying or moving the program
[EX–EDT]
1
[COPY] NOTE
[MOVE] when moving

Move the cursor to the start of the section to be copied

[CRSR
]
2

om
Move the cursor to the end of the section to be copied
[
BTTM] [ALL]
[
CRSR]
3
Type the program number and press INPUT

[EXEC]

r.c
(b) When inserting another program in the program being edited
[EX–EDT]
4
When inserting after
[MERGE] the end of the program

Move the cursor to the position to which the other

e
program is to be inserted
5
[
’CRSR] [
BTTM’]

nt
Type the program number and press INPUT

[EXEC]

(c) When replacing an address or word

6
ce
[EX–EDT]

[CHANGE]
7
Word or address to be replaced

[BEFORE]
nc

New word or address

8
[AFTER]

[SKIP] [EX–SGL] [EXEC]

.c

9
w

10
w
w

20
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.7 Displaying the program list

(1) Press soft key [LIB].
(a) When parameter NAM (bit 0 of No. 3107) = 0

PROGRAM DIRECTORY O0001 N00010

PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)
USED: 60 3321
Memory
FREE: 2 429

om
utilization
O0240 (SHAFT XSF301 ) : ( ) condition.
O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999 One–meter
O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666 paper tape
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040 contains
about 400
characters.
Program numbers

>_ S 0 T0000

r.c
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ PRGRM ] [ LIB ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ] [ (OPRT) ]

(b) When parameter NAM (bit 0 of No. 3107) = 1

PROGRAM DIRECTORY O0001 N00010

e
PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)
USED: 60 3321
FREE: 2 429

O0001
O0002
O0010
O0020
O0040
O0050
nt
O0240 (SHAFT XSF301 ) : (
(MACRO–[Link])
(MACRO–GCODE.SUB1)
)

(TEST–[Link] NO.1)
(TEST–PROGRAM.F10–MACRO)
(TEST–[Link])
ce
O0100 (INCH/MM CONVERT CHECK NO.1)
O0200 (MACRO–[Link])
>_
EDIT **** *** *** [Link]
[ PRGRM ] [ LIB ] [ ] [ C.A.P. ] [ (OPRT) ]
nc

(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]  Same as PRGRM

O Program number [O SRH]

.c

[READ] [MERGE]
[STOP]
[CAN]

O Program number [EXEC]

w

[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]

O Program number [EXEC]

w

(3) Related parameters

Parameter NAM (No. 3107#0): Only program numbers are listed/
Program numbers and program
w

names are listed.

Parameter SOR (No. 3107#4): Programs are listed in the order of
registration/in the order of program
number.
21
 1.2.8 Operation in the conversational programming menu
(1) Press soft key [C.A.P.].
1
PROGRAM O0010 N00000
STANDARD FORMAT
G G G G
X Y
Z 2

om
H F
R M
S T
B I
J K
P Q
L 3
:

EDIT **** *** *** [Link]

r.c
[ PRGRM ] [ ] [[Link] ] [ BLOCK ] [ (OPRT) ]

4
(2) Operation
[[Link]]
PROGRAM O1234 N00004
PAGE
G00 : POSITIONING

e
PAGE
G01 : LINEAR IPL 5
G02 : CIRCULAR IPL. CW
G03 : CIRCULAR IPL. CCW
G04 : DWELL
nt G09
G10
G17
G18
G19
G20
G21
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
EXACT STOP CHECK
OFFSET&TLC VALUE SETTING (0)
XY PLANE
ZX PLANE
YZ PLANE
INCH
METRIC
6
ce
>_
EDIT **** *** *** [Link]
[ PRGRM ] [ ] [[Link] ] [ BLOCK ] [ ] 7

G Number PROGRAM O1234 N00000

nc

G00 : POSITIONING
[BLOCK]
G00 G G G
X 100. Y 50.0
8
Z (X, Y, Z, )
H OFFSET NO.
M
S
T
.c

B
:
9
w

EDIT **** *** *** [Link]

[ PRGRM ] [ ] [[Link] ] [ BLOCK ] [ (OPRT) ] 10
Numerical value INPUT … (After all the data is entered) INSERT or ALTER
w

Return to G code menu

PAGE
NOTE1 Pressing PAGE or key displays the previous or subsequent block.
w

NOTE2 Pressing soft key [PRGRM] returns to the program contents screen.

NOTE3 Pressing the DELETE

key deletes a block.

22
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.9 Transferring data to and from the floppy disk

(1) Press soft key [FLOPPY].

DIRECTORY (FLOPPY) O0001 N00000

[Link] NAME (METER) VOL
0001 PARAMETER 58.5
0002 O0001 1.9
0003 O0002 1.9

om
0004 O0010 1.3
0005 O0040 1.3
0006 O0050 1.9
0007 O0100 1.9
0008 O1000 1.9
0009 O9500 1.6

EDIT **** *** *** [Link]

r.c
[ F SRH ] [ READ ] [ PUNCH ] [ DELETE ] [ ]

(2) Operation
(a) Soft key configuration
Soft key [(OPRT)] [F SRH] File number [F SET]

e
[CAN]
[EXEC]
File number
nt [READ]

Program number
[STOP]
[CAN]
[F SET]

[O SET]
ce
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] File number [F SET]

Program number [O SET]

[STOP]
[CAN]
nc

[EXEC]
[DELETE] File number [F SET]

File name [F NAME]

[CAN]
[EXEC]
.c

[RENAME] File number [F SET]

File name [F NAME]

[CAN]
w

[EXEC]

(b) To list the files

[F SRH] File number [F SET] [CAN]
w

[EXEC]
PAGE

(c) To read the program

w

[READ] File number [F SET] Program number [O SET]

[CAN]
[EXEC]

23
 (d) To output the program
[PUNCH] File number [F SET] Program number [O SET]
1
Can be omitted when the To specify all the [CAN]
program is added to the programs, enter [EXEC]
same file. “–9999”

(e) To delete the program

[DELETE] File number [F SET] [CAN] 2

om
[EXEC]
File name [F NAME] [CAN]
[EXEC]

(f) To rename the program

3
[RENAME] File number [F SET] New file name [F NAME]
[CAN]
[EXEC]

r.c
(3) Related parameters
4
Channel I/O=0 I/O=1 I/O=2 I/O=3 (remote buffer)
Common Parameter (No. 0100)
Output Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter (No. 0131)

e
format (No. 0101) (No. 0111) (No. 0121) 5
Specifica- Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter (No. 0132)
tion number (No. 0102) (No. 0112) (No. 0122)
Transfer
rate
Transfer
method
nt
Parameter
(No. 0103)
Parameter
(No. 0113)
Not defined
Parameter
(No. 0123)
Parameter (No. 0133)

Parameter
R42 (No.
0135#3)=0
Parameter
R42 (No.
0135#2)=1
6
ce
Connector JD5A JD5A JD5B JD5C JD6A

7
0020 I/O channel selection
nc

0: Channel 1 (J5DA on the main CPU board)

1: Channel 1 (J5DA on the main CPU board) 8
2: Channel 2 (J5DB on the main CPU board)
3: Channel 3 (J5DC on the option 1 board)
.c

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101
9
NFD ASI SB2

#7(NFD) 0: The feed code is output when data is punched out.

w

1: The feed code is not output when data is punched out.

#3(ASI) 0: EIA or ISO code is used when data is input. 10
1: ASCII code is used when data is input.
w

#0(SB2) 0: The number of stop bits is one.

1: The number of stop bits is two.
w

24
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

0102 Specification number of the input/output device

0 RS-232-C (for devices other than those below)

1 FANUC Bubble Cassette B1/B2
2 FANUC Floppy Cassette F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate

om
FANUC FA Card adapter
FANUC Floppy Cassette adapter, FSP-H
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSP-G, FSP-H

r.c
0103 Baud rate (set transfer rate)

7: 600 9: 2400 11: 9600

8: 1200 10: 4800 12: 19200 [BPS]

e
NOTE This screen is displayed when the floppy disk drive is specified as
the input/output device for the unit for which the optional function
for controlling the reader/punch interface is provided.
nt
1.2.10 Displaying and setting the tool compensation values
(1) Press soft key [OFFSET].
ce
For tool compensation memory C

OFFSET O0001 N00000

NO . GEOM(H) WEAR(H) GEOM(D) WEAR(D)
001 0.000 0.000 0.000
nc

002 –1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

003 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
004 20.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
005 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
006 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
007 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
008 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
.c

X 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000
>_
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
w

(2) Operation
w

(a) For tool length compensation (H code)

[(OPRT)] Offset number [[Link]]

Axis [INP.C.]
w

Offset value [+INPUT]

Offset value [INPUT]

25
 (b) For cutter compensation (D code)
[(OPRT)] Offset number [[Link]]
1
Offset value [+INPUT]

Offset value [INPUT]

(3) Related parameters

Parameter WOE (bit 0 of No. 3290): Entering tool wear compensa- 2

om
tion values from the MDI panel is
allowed/inhibited.
Parameter GOF (bit 1 of No. 3290): Entering tool geometry com-
pensation values from the MDI
panel is allowed/inhibited. 3
(4) Related signal
KEY1 (G046#3): Tool compensation values and offset values from the
workpiece reference point can be input.

r.c
1.2.11 Displaying and setting the data 4
(1) Press soft key [SETING].

SETTING (HANDY) O0000 N00000

e
PARAMETER WRITE = 1 (0 : DISABLE 1 : ENABLE) ALM 100 5
TV CHECK = 0 (0 : OFF 1 : ON) ALM 002
PUNCH CODE = 1 (0 : EIA 1 : ISO)
INPUT UNIT = 0 (0 : MM 1 : INCH) G20/G21
I/O CHANNEL

TAPE FORMAT
nt
SEQUENCE NC.

SEQUENCE STOP =
SEQUENCE STOP =
=
=
=
0
0
0
(0–3 : CHANNEL NO.)
(0 : OFF 1 : ON)
(0 : NO CNV 1 : F10/11)
0 (PROGRAM NO.)
0 (SEQUENCE NO.)
Parameter
(No.3216)

FS15 format
6
ce
>_ S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
7
nc

SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) O1234 N00000

MIRROR IMAGE X = 1 (0 : OFF 1 : ON) Signal indi- 8

cating that
MIRROR IMAGE Y = 0 (0 : OFF 1 : ON) mirror image
MIRROR IMAGE Z = 0 (0 : OFF 1 : OM) processing is
in progress
.c

9
w

>_
MDI **** *** *** [Link] 10
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
w
w

26
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

SETTING (TIMER) O0000 N00000

Parameter
PARTS TOTAL = 0 (No.6712)(*1)
PARTS REQUIRED = 25 (No.6713)
PARTS COUNT = 10 (No.6711)

POWER ON = 0H 0M (No.6750)(*1)
OPERATING TIME = 0H 0M 0S (No.6751,6752)
CUTTING TIME = 0H 0M 0S (No.6753,6754)
FREE PURPOSE = 0H 0M 0S (No.6755,6756)

om
CYCLE TIME = 0H 0M 0S (No.6758,6759)
DATE = 95/10/04
TIME = [Link]
>_
MEM **** *** *** [Link]
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

Not counted when the option for displaying the operation time and

r.c
the number of parts is not provided.

NOTE *1 Cannot be changed on this screen (but can be changed on the

parameter screen).)

PARAMETER (SETTING) O0000 N00000

e
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV

0012
X
Y
Z
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
nt
0020 I/O CHANNEL
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
MIR
0
0
0
0
ce
0022 0

>_
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ [Link]] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
nc

(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Setting number [[Link]]

[ON:1]

[OFF:0]
.c

Numerical value [+INPUT]

Numerical value [INPUT]

w
w
w

27
 1.2.12 Displaying and setting the offset values for the workpiece
coordinate system
1
(1) Press soft key [WORK].

WORK COORDINATES O0100 N00001

NO. DATA NO. DATA

00 X 0.000 02 X 152.580 2

om
(EXT) Z 0.000 (G55) Z 58.284

01 X 100.000 03 X 300.000
(G54) Z 50.000 (G56) Z 200.000
3

>_

r.c
MEM **** *** *** [Link]
[ OFFSET ] [ SETING ] [ WORK ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
4

(2) Operation

e
Soft key [(OPRT)] Coordinate system number [[Link]] 5
Axis Numeral [MEASUR]

nt Compensation value

Compensation value
[+INPUT]

[INPUT] 6
ce
(3) Related parameters
Parameter WZO (bit 3 of No. 3290): Entering shift values of the
coordinate system (T series) or 7
offsets from the workpiece
reference point (M series) from
the MDI panel is allowed/inhibited.
nc

Parameter No.1220: External shift value of the workpiece coordinate

system (T series).
External offset from the workpiece reference
8
point (M series)
Parameter No.1221: Offset from the workpiece reference point for
G54
Parameter No.1222: Offset from the workpiece reference point for
.c

G55 9
Parameter No.1223: Offset from the workpiece reference point for
G56
Parameter No.1224: Offset from the workpiece reference point for
w

G57
Parameter No.1225: Offset from the workpiece reference point for
G58
10
Parameter No.1226: Offset from the workpiece reference point for
G59
w
w

28
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.13 Displaying and setting the custom macro variables

(1) Press soft key [MACRO].

VARIABLE O0000 N00000

NO. DATA NO. DATA

100 01000.000 108
101 10000.000 109
102 23000.000 110 –22000.00

om
103 111
104 00120.000 112
105 113
106 500000.00 114
107 115
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
U 0.000 W 0.000
>_ S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** [Link]

r.c
[ MACRO ] [ ] [ OPR ] [ TOOLLF ] [ (OPRT) ]

VAR. : O1234 N00000 (*1)

NO. NAME DATA COMMENT

500 123.456

e
501 0.000
502 3.210
503
504
505

>_
506
507

Z
nt
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
X 0.000
0.000
Y 0.000
ce
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

NOTE (*) When the Pattern data input function is provided

nc

(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Variable number [[Link]]

Axis [INP.C.]
.c

Variable value [INPUT]

[INPUT] : Delete the input value

w

(3) Related parameter

Parameter MCV (bit 2 of No. 3290): Entering macro variables from
the MDI panel is allowed/inhib-
ited.
w

(4) Related signal

KEY2 (G046#4): Data and macro variables can be input.
w

29
 1.2.14 Displaying and setting the data for the software operator’s
panel
1
(1) Press soft key [OPR].

OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000

MODE : MDI AUTO EDIT STEP JOG ZRN

2

om
STEP MULTI. : *1 *10 *100
RAPID OVRD.: 100% 50% 25% F0
JOG FEED : 1.0%
**************
FEED OVRD. : 140%
***
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) 3
X 0.000 Z 0.000

>_ S 0 T0000

r.c
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] [ TOOLLF ] [ (OPRT) ]
4

OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000

e
BLOCK SKIP :
OFF ON 5
SINGLE BLOCK : OFF
ON
MACHINE LOCK :
OFF ON
PROTECT KEY :
PROTECT RELEASE

OFF
FEED HOLD

X 0.000
nt :

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)

Z 0.000 6
ce
S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ MACRO ] [ MENU ] [ OPR ] [ TOOLLF ] [ (OPRT) ] 7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

30
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

(2) Related signals

DGN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

DGN
F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

om
DGN
F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO

DGN
F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O

DGN

r.c
F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO

DGN
F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

DGN

e
F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

DGN
F080

DGN
F081
nt
*JV15O

–J4O
*JV14O

+J4O
*JV13O

–J3O
*JV12O

+J3O
*JV11O

–J2O
*JV10O

+J2O
*JV9O

–J1O
*JV8O

+J1O
ce
(3) Related parameters
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1
nc

Selects the operations performed on the software operator’s panel.

#6(OP7) Feed hold
#5(OP6) Program protection
#4(OP5) Optional block skip, single block operation, machine lock,
.c

and dry run

#3(OP4) Manual feedrate override and rapid traverse override
#2(OP3) Selecting the axis and magnification for the manual pulse
generator
w

#1(OP2) Manual feed axis selection and manual rapid traverse

#0(OP1) Mode selection
w
w

31
 7220 Names of general–purpose software switches

7283 Names of general–purpose software switches

Decimals converted from ASCII codes are set as character codes. 2

om
Parameters No. 7220 to No. 7227: Name of general-purpose switch 1

Parameters No. 7228 to No. 7235: Name of general-purpose switch 2

3
Parameters No. 7236 to No. 7243: Name of general-purpose switch 3

Parameters No. 7244 to No. 7251: Name of general-purpose switch 4

r.c
Parameters No. 7252 to No. 7259: Name of general-purpose switch 5

Parameters No. 7260 to No. 7267: Name of general-purpose switch 6 4

Parameters No. 7268 to No. 7275: Name of general-purpose switch 7

Parameters No. 7276 to No. 7283: Name of general-purpose switch 8

e
5
To set “FANUC” as the name of general-purpose switch 1, set the
nt
parameters as follows: No. 7220 = 70, No. 7221 = 65, No. 7212 = 78, No.
7213 = 85, and No. 7214 = 67.
6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

32
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.15 Displaying and setting the parameters

(1) Press soft key [PARAM].

PARAMETER (SETTING) O0010 N00002

0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

om
0012 MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL 0
0022 0

>_
MDI **** *** *** [Link]

r.c
[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM ] [ (OPRT) ]

(2) Entering values from the MDI panel

1 Enter the MDI mode or emergency stop state.

e
2 Set PARAMETER WRITE to 1 in the setting screen.

3 Alarm 100 occurs. Press the CAN and RESET keys simultaneously

4
nt
to temporarily stop the alarm.
Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display the operation menu including
the following:
a) Enter a parameter number and press [[Link]]:
Searches for the specified number.
ce
b) Soft key [ON:1]: Sets the value at which the cursor is
positioned to 1. (Only for bit parameters)
c) Soft key [OFF:0]: Sets the value at which the cursor is
positioned to 0. (Only for bit parameters)
d) Soft key [+INPUT]: Adds the entered value to the value at
nc

which the cursor is positioned.

(Only for word parameters)
e) Soft key [INPUT]: Sets the value at which the cursor is
positioned to theentered value.
(Only for word parameters)
f) Soft key [READ]: Inputs parameters from the reader/punch
.c

interface.
g) Soft key [PUNCH]: Outputs parameters to the reader/punch
interface.
w

(3) Convenient methods for entering data

(a) To change data in units of bits

Pressing or changes the cursor to 1-bit size, which enables

w

setting in units of bits (only for bit parameters).

w

33
 (b) Use EOB to continuously set data starting from the cursor position.

(Example1) 1
When 1 2 3 4 EOB
4 5 6 7 EOB

9 9 9 9 INPUT
is entered,

0 1234
2

om
0 → 4567
0 9999
0 0
(Example2)
When
1 2 3 4 EOB EOB
9 9 9 9 INPUT 3
is entered,
0 1234

r.c
0 → 0
0 9999
0 0 4

(c) Use = to enter the same data.

(Example)

e
= = 5
When 1 2 3 4 EOB EOB INPUT is entered,

0 1234
nt
(d) For bit parameters
0
0
0
→ 1234
1234
0
6
ce
(Example)

When 1 1 EOB = EOB = INPUT

is entered,

0000000 00011000
7
0000000 00011000
0000000 00011000
0000000 00000000
nc

8
1.2.16 Displaying the internal state of the NC (diagnostic screen)
See Chapter 6 for details of self-diagnosis.
(1) Press soft key[DGNOS].
.c

DIAGNOSTIC (GENERAL) O1234 N00000

9

000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0

w

001 MOTION :0
002
003
DWELL
IN–POSITION CHECK
:0
:0
10
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
005 INTERLOCK/START–LOCK :0
w

006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0

>_
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
w

[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM ] [ (OPRT) ]

34
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.17 Displaying the system configuration

(1) Press soft key [SYSTEM].

SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) O1234 N00000

Software series
for a module
with CPU

SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION Software

00 0090 : 40 B0B1 0006 version
for a module
01 009A : 45 600M 0003

om
with CPU
81 013F : 4A B401 0001
02 309D : 41 4068 0001
Software ID
Module ID

Slot number
>_ (80 to 8F are
on the second-
MDI **** *** *** [Link] ary side.)
[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM ] [ (OPRT) ]

r.c
(2) Software configuration screen

SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE) O1234 N00000

e
Software
SYSTEM B0B1 0002 version
BASIC+OPTION–A1+OPTIPN–A2
SERVO 9080 0001 Software
PMC 4066 0001 configuration
LADDER
MACRO

>_
nt
FS16 000B
OZMM 0002
SPINDLE–1 9A10 0010
Series number
shown in the
title screen of
the PMC
Software series
Software type
ce
MDI **** *** *** [Link]
[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM ] [ ]

(3) Module configuration screen

Displays the configuration of a module mounted on a printed circuit
nc

board.
Slot number (80 to 8F) are on the secondary side

Type of the
SYSTEM CONFIG (MODULE) O1234 N56789
printed circuit
PAGE:03 board on which
SLOT 00 MAIN CPU BOARD the module is
mounted.
FLASH ROM MODULE : 6MB Module type.
.c

DRAM MODULE : 6MB

Indicates that
ADDITIONAL SRAM : ––– the hardware
CRTC MODULE : 9″CRT is not
SERVO 1/2 AXIS MODULE : MOUNTED mounted.
SERVO 3/4 AXIS MODULE : ___ Indicates that
SERIAL SPINDLE LSI : MOUNTED the hardware
w

ANALOG SPINDLE LSI : ___ is mounted.

Type of mod-
>_ ule or hard-
MEM **** *** *** [Link] ware.
w

[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM ] [ ]

PAGE
Pressing or PAGE displays the system configuration for another
w

printed circuit board.

NOTE See the section on the configuration of the printed circuit boards in
the control unit for the correspondence between each module and
displayed item.
35
 1.2.18 Displaying and setting the pitch error compensation values
(1) Press soft key [PITCH].
1
PIT–ERROR SETTING O1234 N00000

NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA

0000 1 0010 0 0020 0
0001 0 0011 1 0021 1
0002 0 0012 0 0022 0
2

om
0003 1 0013 –1 0023 1
0004 –1 0014 2 0024 3
0005 0 0015 0 0025 0
0006 1 0016 0 0026 –1
0007 0 0017 1 0027 0
0008
0009
0
1
0018
0019
0
0
0028
0029
0
0
3
>_
MDI **** *** *** [Link]

r.c
[ ] [ PITCH ] [ ] [SYSTEM ] [ (OPRT) ]

4
(2) Operation
Soft key [(OPRT)] Compensation number [[Link]]

[ON:1]

e
5
[OFF:0]

Compensation value [+INPUT]

nt Compensation value

[READ] N File number

[INPUT]

[EXEC]
6
ce
Note) EDIT mode
[CAN]
[READ] [EXEC]
Note) EDIT mode 7
[CAN]
nc

1.2.19 Displaying the alarm messages

(1) Press soft key [ALARM] 8
ALARM MESSAGE O0000 N0000

100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE

.c

510 OVER TRAVEL :+1

521 OVER TRAVEL :–2 9
w

10
S 0 T0000
w

MDI **** *** *** ALM [Link]

[ ALARM ] [ MSGHIS ] [ HISTRY ] [SYSTEM ] [ ]
w

(2) Related parameter

Parameter NPA (No. 3117#7): Switches/does not switch to the
alarm screen when an alarm occurs.

36
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.2.20 Displaying the operator messages

(1) Press soft key [MSG].

MESSAGE HISTORY O1234 N12345 Date, time,

93/04/01 [Link] PAGE : 1 and page
No. **** Message
No.

om
Display
range
(Up to 255
characters)

MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM [Link]

r.c
[ ALARM ] [ MSGHIS ] [ HISTRY ] [ ] [ ]

1.2.21 Displaying the alarm history

(1) Press soft key [HISTRY].

e
ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345

nt
91/04/18 [Link]
506 OVERTRAVEL : +X
91/04/18 [Link]
000 TURN OFF POWER
91/04/18 [Link]
000 TURN OFF POWER
ce
91/04/18 [Link]
300 APC ALARM : X–AXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST
91/04/18 [Link]
507 OVERTRAVEL : +B
nc

[ ALARM ] [ MSG ] [ HISTRY ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

(2) Deleting the alarm history

Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then [CLEAR].
.c

(3) About alarms

D When the parameter (No. 3112#3)=0
1 Alarms generated by a custom macro
w

The alarms have numbers in the range of 3000 to 3999 and are
referred to as macro alarms in the message.
(Example) #3000=1(ERROR1)
w

→Found as 3001 macro alarm in the history

2 Alarms generated by a DISP or DISPB instruction in the PMC
The alarms have numbers in the range of 1000 to 1999 and are
referred to as external alarms in the message.
w

(Example) DISP instruction A000.0 1000 ERROR1

→Found as 1000 external alarm in the history

37
 1.3 Help Function

1 Pressing HELP in any screen displays the help screen (except in the 1
PMC screen).

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N00001

om
*****HELP*****
1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE

r.c
S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** [Link]
4
[ ALARM ] [ OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ ]

1.3.1 Alarm detail screen

e
5
1 Pressing soft key [ALARM] while an alarm is generated displays the
help message for the alarm.
nt
HELP (ALARM DETAIL)

NUMBER:094
M’SAGE:P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)
O1234 N00001
6
ce
FUNCTION:RESTART PROGRAM
ALARM:
WHEN COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING IS
CONDUCTED AFTER HOLDING 7
6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION, P–TYPE (WHEN TOOL
IS DAMAGED) PROGRAM
RESTART CANNOT BE EXECUTED.
nc

S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** [Link] 8
[ ALARM ] [ OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], enter the alarm number, and then press soft
.c

key [SELECT] to display the help message for the alarm corresponding
to the entered number.
9
w

10
w
w

38
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

1.3.2 Operation method screen

1 Pressing soft key [OPERAT] displays the operation help message.

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N00001

1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET

om
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR

S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** [Link]

r.c
[ ALARM ] [OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], enter the number of the item to be displayed,
and then press soft key [SELECT] to display the operation method.
PAGE
Use and PAGE to select another page.

e
HELP (ALARM METHOD) O1234 N00001
Current
<< 1. PROGRAM EDIT >> 1/4 page/total
*DELETE ALL PROGRAMS number of
MODE

OPR

MODE
: EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM nt
: (O9999) – <DELETE>

*DELETE ONE PROGRAM

: EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
pages
ce
OPR : (O+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>

>_ S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** [Link]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ SELECT ]
nc

1.3.3 Parameter contents

Pressing soft key [PARAM] displays the parameter contents.
.c

HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N00001

Current
1/4 page/total
number of
* SETTEING (No.0000–) pages
* READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (No.0100–)
* AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (No.1000–)
w

* COORDINATE SYSTEM (No.1200–)

* STROKE LIMIT (No.1300–)
* FEED RATE (No.1400–)
* ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (No.1600–)
* SERVO RELATED (No.1800–)
* DI/DO (No.3000–)
w

S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** [Link]
[ ALARM ] [ OPERAT ] [ PARAM ] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]
w

PAGE
Use and PAGE to select another page.

39
 1.4 BOOT SYSTEM
J The BOOT system of the Series 16/18–C loads NC control software and 1
P-CODE programs from the FROM (flash ROM) into the DRAM when
the power is turned on, subsequently operating according to that data.
J In addition to the above, the BOOT system supports the following
functions:
D Writing files from a memory card to the FROM 2

om
D Displaying a directory of files in the FROM
D Deleting files from the FROM
D Writing user files, stored in the FROM, to a memory card
D Inputting/outputting data to and from the SRAM as a batch 3
D Deleting files stored on a memory card
D Formatting a memory card

r.c
Data can be read from and written to a SRAM memory card. A FROM card
is a read-only device. 4
F Displaying the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen
1 Turn on the power while holding down both the rightmost soft key
(continuation key) and the soft key to its left.

e
5

[ nt
] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

6
ce
Turn on the power while holding
down these two soft keys.

Use the same soft keys, for the 9.5″ LCD as well as the 14″ CRT. 7

2 The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen appears.

nc

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1–01

8
1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING
2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
.c

5. SRAM DATA BACKUP

6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 9
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT

9. END
***MESSAGE***
w

SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

10
[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
w

3 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the
desired item.
w

40
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

D The functions of the items are as follows.

1 SYSTEM DATA LOADING Reads ROM data from a memory card and
writes it into the FROM.
2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Displays the file directory for the FROM.
3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Deletes user files, such as ladder programs,
stored in the FROM.
4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Writes user files, such as ladder programs,

om
stored in the FROM to a memory card.
5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Writes parameters, machining programs,
and macro variables to a memory card.
6 MEMORY CARD FILE Deletes files stored on a memory card.
DELETE
7 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Formats a memory card.
8 END Terminates the system monitor.

r.c
4 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
The selected item is executed.

When the basic NC software has not been written into the FROM, the
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen automatically appears at power

e
on.

F Selecting the board to be accessed

1
nt
(BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen)
(1) When the BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen is displayed
When the CNC is fitted with the OPT2 or LCB board, it needs to
access the flash memory and SRAM mounted on a board other
than the main board. The system displays a screen enabling the
ce
selection of the board to be accessed. (This function is supported
by edition 60M1/02 and later.)
2 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] key, position the cursor to the board to
be accessed, then press the [SELECT] key.
nc

The name of the selected board is displayed on the screen.

BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION 60M1–02

[Link] F–ROM SRAM

0. MAIN 4MB 1. 0MB
1. OPT2 6MB 1. 0MB
.c

3. LCB 512KB
w

***MESSAGE***
SELECT SLOT AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

w
w

41
 F Reading files from a memory card
(SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen)
(1) Display the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen by following the 1
procedure below.
1 On the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, use the [UP] or
[DOWN] soft key to position the cursor to 1. SYSTEM DATA
LOADING.
2

om
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key. (When more than one board is
connected to the NC, the BOOT SLOT CONFIGURATION screen
appears.)

The file directory is displayed.
3
SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1
FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM

r.c
MACRO2. MEM
LADDER. ROM
END 4

e
***MESSAGE*** 5
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

nt
[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

6
ce
(2) From the file directory, select the file to be read by following the
procedure below.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the file to 7
be read.

SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1

nc

FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM
MACRO2. MEM 8
LADDER. ROM
END
.c

9
***MESSAGE***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
w

[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ] 10

w

To display the To display the

preceding screen next screen

D When the file directory is too large to fit on the screen, the screen
w

can be scrolled by pressing the or soft key.

D To return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, position

the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
42
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.

Any file name can be assigned to the files stored on a memory card.
The system automatically determines the type of a file from its contents
when reading that file.

(3) A confirmation sign appears at the bottom of the screen. To continue

the operation, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the operation,
press the [NO] soft key.

om
(4) While a file is being read, the following message is displayed on the
screen.

“READ DATA FROM MEMORY CARD”

±
“F-ROM ERASING”
±

r.c
Displaying the
“F-ROM PROGRAM” FROM file list
(SYSTEM
± DATA CHECK
“LOADING COMPLETE” screen)

³ When reading is terminated, the message, “HIT SELECT

e
KEY,” appears at the bottom of the screen.

(5) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA LOADING

F
screen. nt
Displaying the FROM file list (SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen)
(1) Select the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen.
ce
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 2.
SYSTEM DATA CHECK on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
screen.
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
When more than one board is connected to the NC, the SLOT
CONFIGURATION screen appears.
nc

³ FROM files are listed on the screen as follows:

SYSTEM DATA CHECK

[ BOARD : MAIN ]
FILE DIRECTORY (FLASH ROM : 4MB)
1. NC BASIC(10)
2. DG SERVO(1) The file size appears
.c

3. PMC0BSC(2) in parentheses
4. PMC–RB(1) (unit : 128KB)
5. NC1 OPTN(8)
6. END
w

***MESSAGE***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
w

[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

w

43
 D The names and applications of the FROM files are as follows:

File name Application Attribute 1

NC BASIC NC system software System file
DG SERVO Digital servo software D The file can be typed
GRAPHIC Graphic software over, but cannot be
deleted
d l d or output.
NCn OPTN Optional function 2

om
PMCnxxxx PMC control software
PCD xxxx Macro P-CODE program User file
CEX xxxx C executor D The file can be typed
PMC-xxxx Ladder program over, deleted, and
PMC@xxxx Loader control ladder program output. 3
n: Numeric character x: Alphabetic character

r.c
D The object files of the macro P-CODE program and the C executor can
be saved to the memory card, but cannot be decompiled into their 4
corresponding source code.

(2) To obtain detailed information about a particular system file, such as its
software series and edition, perform the following:

e
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the
5
desired file name.
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
nt
Note that this function is valid for system files only.
Example screen (when NC BASIC has been selected)

ROM FILE CHECK

6
ce
NC BASIC Example
of
0 B0B1 801B 000 M series
1 B0B1 802B 001
2 B0B1 841B 002 7
3 B0B1 842B 003
4 B0B1 881B 004
5 B0B1 882B 005
6 B0B1 8C1B 006
nc

7 B0B1 8C2B 007

8
***MESSAGE***
CONTINUE. HIT SELECT KEY.
[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
.c

9
D Any non-ASCII code, or the symbol @, appearing in the
displayed file name indicates that the contents of FROM or the
data in the read file has been destroyed. In this case, attempt
w

to read the file again.

10
3 Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA
CHECK screen.
w

(3) Return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen.

1 Position the cursor to END.
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
w

44
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

F Deleting a FROM file (SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen)

NOTE Only user files, such as the ladder and macro P-code programs,
can be deleted. System files, such as NC BASIC, cannot be de-
leted.
(1) Select the SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 3.
SYSTEM DATA DELETE.

om
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
When more than one board is connected to the NC, the SLOT
CONFIGURATION screen appears.

FROM files are listed on the screen as follows:

SYSTEM DATA CHECK

[ BOARD : MAIN ]
FILE DIRECTORY
1. NC BASIC(10)

r.c
2. DG SERVO(1)
3. PMC0BSC(2)
4. PMC–RB(1)
5. NC1 OPTN(8)
6. END

e
***MESSAGE***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ]
nt
[ YES ] [

(2) Select the file to be deleted.

NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
ce
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the
desired file name.
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
D To quit and return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
screen, position the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
nc

3 A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To

delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the deletion,
press the [NO] soft key.
Upon pressing the [YES] soft key, the specified file is deleted.

Once the file has been deleted, “HIT SELECT KEY” appears
.c

at the bottom of the screen.

(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA CHECK
screen.
w
w
w

45
 F Saving a FROM file to a memory card
(SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen)
NOTE Only user files, such as the ladder and macro P-code programs, 1
can be saved to a memory card. System files, such as NC BASIC,
cannot be saved.
(1) Select the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 4. 2

om
SYSTEM DATA SAVE.
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
When more than one board is connected to the NC, the SLOT
CONFIGURATION screen appears.
3

FROM files are listed on the screen as follows:

r.c
SYSTEM DATA SAVE
[ BOARD : MAIN ]
FILE DIRECTORY 4
1. NC BASIC(10)
2. DG SERVO(1)
3. PMC0BSC(2)
4. PMC–RB(1)
5. NC1 OPTN(8)

e
6. END
5

***MESSAGE***

[ SELECT ]
nt
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
6
ce
(2) Select the file to be saved.
7
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the
desired file name.
nc

2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.

8
D To quit and return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU
screen, position the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
3 A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To
.c

save the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the saving, 9
press the [NO] soft key.
Upon pressing the [YES] soft key, the specified file is saved to the
memory card.
w

Once the file has been saved, “HIT SELECT KEY”

appears at the bottom of the screen, together with the 10
name assigned to that saved file.
w

FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY. Name assigned to

SAVE FILE NAME:PCD_05M. 000 the saved file
w

[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

46
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

D Saved files are named as follows:

File FROM file name Memory card file name
Ladder program PMC-RB PMC-RB. xxx
Macro P-code program PCD 0.5M PCD_05M. xxx
PCD 1.0M PCD_10M. xxx
PCD 1.5M PCD_15M. xxx

D A three-digit number (000 to 031) is automatically assigned to a

saved file as the file extension. The file extension will be 000 when

om
no other files having the same file name have been saved to the
memory card. When a file having the same file name has already
been saved to the memory card, the lowest number currently
available will be assigned.
D The most recently saved file need not necessarily have the highest
extension number because it may be assigned a number that was
previously skipped. Carefully check the file name, displayed at the
bottom of the screen, once saving has been completed.

r.c
(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM DATA SAVE
screen.

F Dumping SRAM data to a memory card

(SRAM DATA BACKUP screen)

e
(1) Select the SRAM DATA BACKUP screen.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 5. SRAM
DATA BACKUP.
nt
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
When more than one board is connected to the NC, the SLOT
CONFIGURATION screen appears.
 The SRAM DATA BACKUP screen is displayed.
ce
SYSTEM DATA BACKUP
[BOARD : MAIN]
1. SRAM BACKUP (CNC  MEMORY CARD)
2. RESTORE SRAM (MEMORY CARD  CNC)
END
The size of the SRAM allocated to the
NC is displayed here.
SRAM SIZE : 0.5MB (BASIC) The amount of free memory space de-
nc

FILE NAME : SRAM0–5A. FDB creases after formatting, because part

of the memory is taken up by directo-
ries and other data.
Therefore, the use of a large–capacity
memory card is recommended.
***MESSAGE***
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
.c

[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

(2) Select whether to dump data to the memory card (BACKUP), or to load
w

data from the memory card (RESTORE).

1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the
desired function.
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.
w

D To quit and return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

screen, position the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
3 A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To
w

perform the selected operation, press the [YES] soft key. To

abandon the operation, press the [NO] soft key.
Upon pressing the [YES] soft key, data transfer between the SRAM
and memory card starts.
47

During data transfer, the name of the file being transferred blinks
as follows:
When dumping data to the memory card 1
FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A. FDB → MEMORY CARD

When loading data from the memory card

FILE NAME : SRAM0_5A. FDB → CNC 2

om
D Backup file data is dumped to the memory card in blocks of 520KB.
Backup file data can also be dumped to multiple memory cards.
D A backup file is named as follows: 3
SRAMxxx V. FDB

An alphabetic character, representing the file

r.c
size in units of 512KB, is assigned sequentially,
starting from A.
4
SRAM size allocated to NC 0.5MB:0_5
1.0MB:1_0
1.5MB:1_5
2.0MB:2_0
2.5MB:2_5

e
When a board (OPT2 or LCB) other than the main board is connected to the
5
CNC, one of the following extensions will be assigned to an SRAM backup
file:
Board type
Extension
nt Main board
FDB
OPT2
OP2

(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SRAM DATA BACKUP
LCB
LCB 6
ce
screen.

F Deleting a file from a memory card 7

(MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen)
(1) Select the MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen.
nc

1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 6.

MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen. 8
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.

Files stored on the memory card are listed on the
screen as follows:
.c

9
MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 1/1
FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM
MACRO2. MEM
w

LADDER. ROM
END
10
w

***MESSAGE***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
w

[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

48
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

(2) Select the file to be deleted.

1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to the
desired file name.

MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 1/1

FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO1. MEM
MACRO2. MEM
LADDER. ROM

om
END

***MESSAGE***
SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

r.c
[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

Previous screen Next screen

D When the file list is too large to be displayed on one screen, the

e
previous and subsequent pages can be viewed by using the
and soft keys.
D

2
nt
To return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, position
the cursor to END, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
Press the [SELECT] key.

(3) A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To delete

ce
the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the deletion, press the
[NO] soft key.
D Once the file has been deleted, “HIT SELECT KEY” appears at the
bottom of the screen.
nc

(4) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the MEMORY CARD FILE
DELETE screen.

F Formatting a memory card (MEMORY CARD FORMAT screen)

D A newly purchased memory card must be formatted before it can
be used. Also, a memory card must be formatted if its contents are
.c

destroyed or lost due to battery failure.

(1) Select the MEMORY CARD FORMAT screen.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 7.
MEMORY CARD FORMAT on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
w

MENU screen.
2 Press the [SELECT] key.

(2) A confirmation message appears at the bottom of the screen. To format

w

the memory card, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the formatting,
press the [NO] soft key.
D While the memory card is being formatted, the message
“FORMATTING MEMORY CARD” is displayed at the bottom of the
w

screen.
D Once formatting has been completed, “FORMATTING
COMPLETE HIT. SELECT KEY” appears at the bottom of the
screen.
49
 (3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN
MENU screen.
1
F Quit system monitoring
(1) Quit system monitoring.
1 Using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, position the cursor to 9. END
on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.
2

om
2 Press the [SELECT] soft key.

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60M1–02

1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING

2. SYSTEM DATA CHECH
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
3
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE

r.c
7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT

9. END 4
***MESSAGE***
SELECT MODE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

e
5

nt
(2) To quit system monitoring, press the [YES] soft key.
To continue system monitoring, press the [NO] soft key.
³ The NC system starts in the same way as when the power
is first turned on. The following messages are displayed on
6
ce
the screen:
“CHECK CNC BASIC SYSTEM”
±
7
“LOADING BASIC CNC TO DRAM”
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

50
 1. CRT/MDI OR LCD/MDI PANEL

F Error message list

D The following table lists and describes the error messages which
may be output by the system.

Message Cause and Response

D DELETE ERROR. An attempt to delete a file from flash memory
HIT SELECT KEY. failed.
Retry the deletion. If the second attempt also

om
fails, the flash memory may have been de-
stroyed. Replace the flash memory module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) An attempt to write data to flash memory
failed.
Briefly turn the system power off, then on
again. If the same message appears, the
flash memory may have been destroyed. Re-
place the flash memory module.
F FILE SAVE ERROR. An attempt to write a file to a memory card

r.c
HIT SELECT KEY. failed.
Check that the memory card is normal.
(Note) A normal memory card should have
a serviceable battery, have no failed
circuitry, and be correctly inserted
into its slot.
FLASH MEMORY NO There is insufficient flash memory to enable

e
SPACE the reading of a selected file.
Delete any unnecessary files from flash
memory. If this message continues to be dis-
played and the file still cannot be read, even
nt
FLASH ROM MODULE
NOT EXIST. HIT SELECT.
though calculations indicate that there is suf-
ficient flash memory .
No flash memory module is mounted on the
board. Mount a module.
ce
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE The selected file cannot be read into flash
memory.
The selected file itself or the flash memory
header information may have been de-
stroyed.
L LOADING ERROR. An error occurred while data was being
nc

HIT SELECT KEY. loaded into flash memory.

Do not touch the memory card while data is
being loaded into flash memory.
.c
w
w
w

51
 Message Cause and Response
M MAX EXTENSION OVER. The extension number added to a file name
HIT SELECT KEY. exceeds 31. 1
Delete any unnecessary backup files from
the memory card.
MEMORY CARD The memory card battery is exhausted.
BATTERY ALARM. Replace the memory card’s battery.
HIT SELECT.
2

om
MEMORY CARD FULL. The memory card is full. Delete any unnec-
HIT SELECT KEY. essary files from the memory card or use a
memory card with sufficient capacity.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT The memory card could not be accessed.
ERROR. Check that the memory card is normal.
HIT SELECT KEY. 3
MEMORY CARD NOT No memory card is mounted in the slot. Or,
EXIST. the memory card may not be correctly seated
HIT SELECT KEY. in its socket.

r.c
MEMORY CARD Although writing to a memory card was se-
PROTECTED. lected, the card’s write inhibit switch is en- 4
HIT SELECT KEY. abled.
Disable the memory card’s write inhibit
switch.
MEMORY CARD RESET A memory card could not be accessed.
ERROR. Check that the memory card is normal.

e
HIT SELECT KEY. 5
MEMORY CARD WRITE An attempt to write a backup file to a memory
ERROR. card failed.

S
nt
HIT SELECT KEY.
ROM PARITY ERROR:
NC BASIC. HIT SELECT.

SRAM DATA BACKUP

Check that the memory card is normal.
An NC BASIC parity error has occurred.
Check that NC BASIC has been loaded into
the flash memory module.
An attempt to write a backup file to a memory
6
ce
ERROR. HIT SELECT card failed.
KEY. Check that the memory card is normal.

D If an error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the 7

screen, together with the message “HIT SELECT KEY.” (Note that the
[SELECT] soft key is disabled for errors whose clearing requires that
the power be turned off.)
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

52
 2. OPERATION LIST

Reset

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Operating – [(OPRT)] [TIME: 0] →

time POS [EXEC]

Number of – [(OPRT)] [PART: 0] →

machined POS [EXEC]

om
parts

OT alarm At pow- –
er-up and CAN

Alarm 100 – –
RESET while pressing CAN

r.c
Registration from MDI

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Parameter f MDI or [PARAM] → Parameter No.

SYSTEM
emer-
→ [[Link]] → Data

e
INPUT
gency
stop → or [INPUT] → PWE = 0 →

RESET

Offset f
nt –
OFFSET
SETTING
[OFFSET] → Offset No. →
[NO. SRH] → Offset value
→ INPUT or [INPUT]
ce
Setting f MDI [SETTING] → Setting No. →
OFFSET
data SETTING
[NO. SRH]→Data→ INPUT

or [INPUT]

PMC pa- f MDI or [PMC] → [PMCPRM] →

nc

SYSTEM
rameter emer-
[COUNTR] or [DATA] →
(Counter, gency
data table) stop (PMC) Data → INPUT

PMC pa- f MDI or [PMC] → [PMCPRM] →

SYSTEM
rameter emer-
(timer, gency [TIMER] or [KEEPRL] →
.c

keep stop (PMC) Data → INPUT

relay)

Tool length JOG

measure- POS POS → [REL] (Relative
w

ment
coordinate system display)

OFFSET
SETTING
→ Axis → [ORIGIN] → OFFSET
SETTING

→ [OFFSET] → Offset num-

w

ber → [[Link]] → Axis →

[C INPUT]

NOTE f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

w

53
 Registration/input from external I/O device

Function
KEY PWE
Mode
Function
Operation
1
SW =1 key

Parameter f EDIT or [PARAM] → [(OPRT)] →

SYSTEM
emer-
gency → [READ] → [EXEC]
stop 2

om
PMC f Emer- [PMC] → → [I/O]→
SYSTEM
parameter gency
stop (CANNEL NO.) INPUT →
[FDCAS] → [READ] → File

No. → INPUT
→ [EXEC]
3
Offset f EDIT [OFFSET] → [(OPRT)] →
OFFSET

r.c
SETTING
→ [READ] → [EXEC]

Custom f EDIT Read by assigning a tempo- 4

macro PROG
rary program number →
variable Execute in MEM mode →
Delete program

Program f EDIT [(OPRT)] → →

e
PROG

Program number) →
5
( O
[READ] → [EXEC]

NOTE
nt
f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

Output to external I/O device

6
ce
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key
7
Parameter EDIT [PARAM] → [(OPRT)] →
SYSTEM

→ [PUNCH] → [EXEC]
nc

PMC EDIT [PMC] → → [I/O]→

SYSTEM
parameter
INPUT → [FDCAS] → 8
[WRITE] → (FILE NO) →
INPUT → [EXEC]
.c

Offset EDIT [OFFSET] → [(OPRT)] → 9

OFFSET
SETTING
→ [PUNCH]→ [EXEC]

Custom EDIT → [MACRO] →

OFFSET
w

macro SETTING

variables [(OPRT)] → →
10
[PUNCH] → [EXEC]

All EDIT [(OPRT)] → →

w

PROG
programs
[PUNCH] → –9999 →
O
[EXEC]

One EDIT
w

PROG
[(OPRT)] → →
program
[PUNCH] →
O
Program number → [EXEC]

54
 2. OPERATION LIST

Search

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Program MEM–
number or EDIT PROG
O → Program No. →
[O SRH]

Sequence MEM

om
number PROG
N → Sequence No. →
[N SRH]

Address/ EDIT Word to be searched for →

word PROG
[SRH↑] or [SRH ↓]

Address EDIT Address to be searched for

only PROG
→ [SRH↑] or [SRH ↓]

r.c
Offset – [OFFSET] → Offset No. →
OFFSET
number SETTING [[Link]]

Diagnostic – [DGNOS] → Diagnosis No.

number SYSTEM
→ [[Link]]

Parameter – [PARAM] → Parameter No.

number SYSTEM
→ [[Link]]

e
Collation

Function

Memory
SW
nt
KEY PWE
=1
Mode

EDIT
Function
key

[(OPRT)] →
Operation

→
ce
PROG
collation
[READ] → [EXEC]

NOTE f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

nc
.c
w
w
w

55
 Program editing
KEY PWE Function
Function
SW =1
Mode
key
Operation 1
Deletion f EDIT
of all PROG
O → –9999 →
DELETE

programs

Deletion f EDIT
→ Program No. →
2
O

om
PROG
of one
program
DELETE

Deletion of f EDIT
multiple PROG
N → Sequence No. → 3
blocks
DELETE

r.c
Deletion of EDIT
one block PROG EOB → DELETE

4
Word f EDIT Search for word to be
PROG
deletion
deleted → DELETE

Word f EDIT Search for word to be

e
alteration PROG
changed→ New data →
5
ALTER

Word
insertion

NOTE
f
nt EDIT
PROG
Search for word immediately
before insertion location →

New data →

f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

INSERT
6
ce
I/O to and from FANUC Cassette
KEY PWE Function
7
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

File head EDIT

N → FILE No. →
nc

PROG
search
→ [F SRH] → [EXEC]
8
File f EDIT
deletion PROG N → FILE No. →
→ [F DELETE] → [EXEC]
Program f EDIT
.c

registra- PROG
N → FILE No. →
9
tion → [READ] → [EXEC]
Output of EDIT
all PROG
O → –9999 →
w

programs → [PUNCH] → [EXEC]

Output of EDIT 10
one PROG
O → Program No. →
program
→ [PUNCH] →
w

[EXEC]

Program EDIT
collation PROG File head search → O
w

Program No. → →

[READ] → [EXEC]

NOTE f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

56
 2. OPERATION LIST

Play-back

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

NC data f TJOG Move machine. →

PROG
input THND
X Y or Z
→ INSERT
→ NC data → INSERT

om
→ EOB
→ INSERT

NOTE f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

Clear

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation

r.c
SW =1 key

Memory all At pow- –

clear er-up RESET and DELETE

Only for sub side of two-

path control

e
CAN and 2
Only for loader side

Parame-
ters/offset
nt f At pow-
er-up
–
CAN

RESET
and 5
ce
Only for main side of two-
path control

RESET and 1
Only for sub side of two-
nc

path control

RESET and 2
Only for loader side

RESET and 5
.c

Program f At pow- – DELETE

clear er-up

Only for main side of two-

w

path control

DELETE
and 1
w

Only for sub side of two-

path control

DELETE
and 2
w

Only for loader side

DELETE
and 5
57
 KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Program – –
1
being PROG and RESET

edited at
power
failure
(PS101)
2

om
PMC RAM At pow- –
module er-up X and 0
Only for loader side

X and 5 3
PMC At pow-
nonvolatile er-up Z and O

r.c
memory

Additional At pow- 4
SRAM er-up O and DELETE

area
Only for main side of two-
path control

e
O and 1 5
Only for sub side of two-

NOTE
nt path control

O
f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.
and 2 6
ce
Manual operation
7
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Manual JOG Turn on Reference point re-

nc

reference turn switch → [+X] [–X] [+Z]

point or [–Z] → Reference point
return return LED lit.
8
Jog feed JOG [+X] [–X] [+Z] or [–Z] → Set
jog feedrate → (Rapid tra-
verse button, if requred)
.c

Incremen- INC (Move distance selection 9

tal feed switch) → [+X] [–X] [+Z] or
[–Z] → (Rapid traverse but-
ton, if required)
w

Manual HND (Axis selection switch) →

handle (Turn manual pulse genera-
feed tion) → (Handle magnifica-
10
tion selection)
w
w

58
 2. OPERATION LIST

Registeration from NC tape

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

One f EDIT
program PROG
[(OPRT)] → → O
registera- → Program No. → [READ]
tion → [EXEC]

om
Plural f EDIT
program PROG
[(OPRT)] → →( O
registera- → Program No. )→[READ]
tion →[EXEC]

Collation EDIT [(OPRT)] → →

PROG
of program
in memory [READ] → [EXEC]
and NC

r.c
tape

NOTE f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

DISPLAY

e
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Program
memory
used

Command
nt EDIT

MEM or
MDI
PROG

PROG
[LIB]

Current command, Modal

command
ce
[CURRENT]

Current command, Next

command

[NEXT]
nc

MDI command, Modal com-

mand

[MDI ]

Current program in memory

[PRGRM]
.c

Current block and Current

position

[CHECK]

Current Position in workpiece coor-

w

position POS
dinate

[ABS]

Position in relative coordi-

w

nate

[REL]

Overall coordinate
w

[ALL]

Alarm – [ALARM]
MESSAGE

59
 KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Alarm [HISTRY]
1
MESSAGE
history

Screen – –
Press CAN and function key
clear
simultaneously. 2

om
Press function key to redis-
play.

Switching
screen be-
SHIFT and HELP

tween NC
3
and loader

NOTE f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

r.c
GRAPHIC FUNCTION (T series)
4

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

e
Parameter [[Link]]
setting GRAPH 5
Tool path Selection of graphic screen:

nt GRAPH

[GRAPH]

Graphic start/end:

Automatic or manual
operation
6
ce
Erasing graphic screen:

[OPRT]→ [ERASE] 7
Magnification

[ZOOM]
nc

NOTE1 f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

8
NOTE2 Function key GRAPH
is CUSTOM

GRAPH
for small MDI.
.c

9
w

10
w
w

60
 2. OPERATION LIST

GRAPHIC FUNCTION (M series)

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Parameter [PARAM]
GRAPH
setting

Tool path Selection of graphic screen:

GRAPH

om
[GRAPH]

Graphic start/end:

Automatic or manual opera-

tion

Data
GRAPH GRAPH
setting of Press several times

r.c
dynamic → PATH GRAPHIC screen
path → [PARAM]→ numeric key
graphic
→ INPUT

Dynamic MEM
GRAPH GRAPH
path Press several times
graphic

e
→ PATH GRAPHIC screen
→ [EXEC] → [(OPRT)]→
[AUTO] or [START]

nt Temporary stop of graph

[STOP]

Execu-
tion af-
Execution after
temporaly stop
ce
ter tem
tem-
poraly [START]
stop Execution from
program heading
after temporary
stop:
nc

[REWIND] →
[START]

Partial en-
largement
GRAPH Press GRAPH several times
path → PATH GRAPHIC screen
graphic
→ [SCALE] → [(OPRT)] →
.c

[←] [→] [↑] [↓] →

or M → [EXEC]
w

Displaying
GRAPH GRAPH
tool posi- Press several times
tion mark → PATH GRAPHIC screen
→ [POSITION]
w

Displaying
solid GRAPH Press GRAPH several times
graphic → PATH GRAPHIC screen
data
→ Enter numerics → INPUT
w

61
 KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Displaying
1
of blank GRAPH
Press GRAPH several times
figure → PATH GRAPHIC screen
→ [BLANK] → [(OPRT)] →
[ANEW] → [+ROT][–ROT]
[+TILT][–TILT]
2

om
Displaying MEM
GRAPH GRAPH
solid Press several times
graphic
→ PATH GRAPHIC screen
→ [EXEC] → [(OPRT)] →
[[Link]] or [[Link]] 3
Temporary stop of graph

[STOP]

r.c
Execu- Execution after
tion af- temporary stop 4
ter tem
tem-
porary [[Link]] or [[Link]]
stop Display of head
of part program

e
after temporary
stop
5
[REWIND] →

In the solid
graphic
where it
drew, the
nt GRAPH Press
[[Link]] or [[Link]]

GRAPH several times

→ PATH GRAPHIC screen
6
ce
direction of → [REVIEW] → [(OPRT)] →
displaying
[ANEW] → [+ROT][–ROT]
is changed
and it [+TILT][–TILT] 7
draws
again.

Tri-plane
nc

GRAPH GRAPH
view dis- Press several times
playing
→ PATH GRAPHIC screen 8
→ → [3-PLN] →

[(OPRT)] → [ ] [←] [→]

[↑] [↓]
.c

9
NOTE1 f mark shows the corresponding key is “1”.

NOTE2 Function key GRAPH

is CUSTOM

GRAPH
for small MDI.
w

10
w
w

62
 2. OPERATION LIST

HELP FUNCTION
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key
Displaying
HELP HELP
INITIAL
MENU
screen
Displaying [ALARM] → Alarm No. →

om
HELP
ALARM
DETAIL [SELECT]
screen
Displaying [OPERAT] → Item No. of op-
HELP
OPERA-
TION eration method → [SELECT]
METHOD
screen

r.c
Displaying [PARAM]
HELP
PARAME-
TER
TABLE
screen

SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION

e
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key
Displaying
DIAGNOS-
TIC screen
nt SYSTEM
[DGNOS]

1.
↓
Page change keys

PAGE
PAGE
ce
2. Number of the diagnos-
tic data → [[Link]]

BOOT
nc

KEY PWE Function

Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Displaying At – and the soft key to its

system power-
monitor up left
screen
.c

Reading Move cursor to

file from 1. SYSTEM DATA LODING
memory on system monitor screen
card → [SELECT] → Move cur-
sor to file to be read →
[SELECT] → [YES]
w

Displaying Move cursor to

detail 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
screen for on system monitor screen
flash ROM → [SELECT] → Move cur-
w

file list sor to item of which to dis-

play details → [SELECT]

Deleting Move cursor to

file in flash 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
w

ROM on system monitor screen

→ [SELECT] → Move cur-
sor to file to be deleted →
[SELECT] → [YES]

63
 KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW =1 key

Outputting Move cursor to

1
file in flash 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE on
ROM to system monitor screen →
memory [SELECT] → Move cursor to
card file to be output →
[SELECT] → [YES]
2

om
Batch out- Move cursor to
put of 5. SYSTEM DATA BACKUP
SRAM on system monitor screen
data to → [SELECT] → Move cur-
memory sor to 1. SRAM BACKUP or
card 2. RESTORE SRAM → 3
Batch in- [SELECT] → [YES]
put of
SRAM

r.c
data from
memory
card 4
Deleting Move cursor to
file in 6. MEMORY CARD FILE on
memory system monitor screen →
card [SELECT] → Move cursor to

e
file to be deleted →
[SELECT] → [YES]
5
Formatting Move cursor to
memory
card

Exiting
nt 7. MEMORY CARD FOR-
MAT on system monitor
screen → [SELECT] →
[YES]

Move cursor to 9. END on

6

system monitor screen →

ce
system
monitor [SELECT] → [YES]

7
P-CODE LOADER

KEY PWE Function

nc

Function Mode Operation

SW =1 key

Starting P- At – 8
CODE power- CAN and PROG

LOADER up
.c

9
w

10
w
w

64
 3. G CODE

3.1 T series

G code list (T series) (1/3)

G code
Gro p
Group F nction
Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)

om
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
G02 G02 G02 01 Circular interpolation CW or Helical in-
terpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or Helical
interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G05 G05 G05 High speed cycle cutting
G07 G07 G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation

r.c
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation
00
(G107) (G107) (G107)
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 G10.6 G10.6 Tool retract & recover
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input cancel

e
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
(G113) (G113) (G113) mode
G17

G18
G17

G18
nt G17

G18
16
XpYp plane
selection
ZpXp plane
selection
Xp: X axis or
parallel axis
Yp: Y axis or
parallel axis
ce
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane Zp: Z axis or
selection parallel axis
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
nc

G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off

G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position re-
.c

00 turn
G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 Floating reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function, multi–step skip function,
torque limit skip
w

G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting

G34 G34 G34 Variable–lead thread cutting
01
G35 G35 G35 Circular thread cutting CW
w

G36 G36 G36 Circular thread cutting CCW

G36 G36 G36 Automatic tool compensation X
G37 G37 G37 00 Automatic tool compensation Z
G39 G39 G39 Corner circular interpolation
w

G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel

G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right

65
 G code list (T series) (2/3)
G code
Gro p
Group F nction
Function 1
A B C
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max.
00 spindle speed setting
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2 Polygonal turning cancel 2

om
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 Polygonal turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
00 3
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selec-
tion

r.c
G55 G55 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selec-
tion
G56 G56 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selec-
4
14 tion
G57 G57 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selec-
tion
G58 G58 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selec-

e
tion 5
G59 G59 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selec-
tion
G65
G66
G67
G68
G65
G66
G67
G68
nt G65
G66
G67
G68
00

12
Macro calling
Macro modal call
Macro modal call cancel
Mirror image for double turrets ON or
6
ce
balance cut mode
04
G69 G69 G69 Mirror image for double turrets OFF or
balance cut mode cancel 7
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
nc

G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing

G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating
8
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle
.c

G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle

(for grinding machine) 9
G72 G72 G73 Traverse direct constant–dimension
grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
01
G73 G73 G74 Oscilation grinding cycle
w

(for grinding machine)

G74 G74 G75 Oscilation direct constant–dimension 10
grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
w

G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling

G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G86 G86 G86 10 Cycle for face boring
w

G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling

G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring

66
 3. G CODE

G code list (T series) (3/3)

G code
Gro p
Group F nction
Function
A B C
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting
cycle
01
G92 G78 G21 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 Endface turning cycle

om
G92.1 G92.1 G92.1 00 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94 Per minute feed
05
G99 G95 G95 Per revolution feed
– G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
– G91 G90 Incremental programming

r.c
– G98 G98 Return to initial level
11
– G99 G99 Return to R point level

Explanation
1. If the CNC enters the clear state (see bit 6 (CLR) of parameter 3402)

e
when the power is turned on or the CNC is reset, the modal G codes
change as follows.
(1) G codes marked with in the above table are enabled.

nt
(2) When the system is cleared due to power–on or reset, whichever
specified, either G20 or G21, remains effective.
(3) Bit 7 of parameter No. 3402 can be used to specify whether G22
or G23 is selected upon power–on. Resetting the CNC to the clear
state does not affect the selection of G22 or G23.
ce
(4) Setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter 3402 determines which code,
either G00 or G01, is effective.
(5) Setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter 3402 determines which code,
either G90 or G91, is effective.
2. G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single–shot G codes.
nc

3. G codes of different groups can be specified in the same block.

If G codes of the same group are specified in the same block, the G code
specified last is valid.
.c
w
w
w

67
 3.2 M series
G code list (M series) (1/3) 1
G code Group Function
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
G02
01
Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW 2

om
G03 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW
G02.2, G03.2 Involute interpolation
G02.3, G03.3 Exponential interpolation
G04 Dwell, Exact stop
3
G05 High speed cycle machining
G05.1 Smooth interpolation
G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation

r.c
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation
00 4
G08 Look–ahead control
G09 Exact stop
G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 Tool retract & recover

e
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel 5
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
25
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G15
G06
G17
G18
nt
17

02
Polar coordinates command cancel
Polar coordinates command
XpYp plane selection
ZpXp plane selection
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
6
ce
G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 Input in inch
G21
06
Input in mm
7
G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
nc

G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off

24
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on 8
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Return to reference position
G29 Return from reference position
.c

00
G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
9
G30.1 Floating reference position return
G31 Skip function, Multi–step skip function
G33 01 Thread cutting
w

G37 Automatic tool length measurment

G39
00
Corner offset circular interpolation
10
G40 Cutter compensation cancel/Three dimentional tool
offset cancel
w

07
G41 Cutter compensation left/Three dimentional tool offset
G42 Cutter compensation right
G40.1 (G150) Normal direction control cancel mode
w

G41.1 (G151) 19 Normal direction control left side on

G42.1 (G152) Normal direction control right side on

68
 3. G CODE

G code list (M series) (2/3)

G code Group Function
G43 Tool length compensation + direction
08
G44 Tool length compensation – direction
G45 Tool offset increase
G46 Tool offset decrease
00
G47 Tool offset double increase

om
G48 Tool offset double decrease
G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel
11
G51 Scaling
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image

r.c
G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 Machine coordinate system selection
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 14 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection

e
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59
G60
G61
G62
nt
00

15
Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
Single direction positioning
Exact stop mode
Automatic corner override
ce
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 Macro modal call cancel
nc

G68 Coordinate rotation/Three dimensional coordinate

conversion
16
G69 Coordinate rotation cancel/Three dimensional coordi-
nate conversion cancel
G72.1 Rotation copy
00
G72.2 Parallel copy
.c

G73 Peck drilling cycle

09
G74 Counter tapping cycle
G75 01 Plunge grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G76 09 Fine boring cycle
w

G77 Direct constant–dimension plunge grinding cycle

(for grinding machine)
G78 Continuous–feed surface grinding cycle
01
(for grinding machine)
w

G79 Intermittent–feed surface grinding cycle

(for grinding machine)
w

69
 G code list (M series) (3/3)
G code Group Function
G80
1
Canned cycle cancel/external operation function can-
cel
G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring cycle, external operation
function, simple electric gear box
G81.1 Chopping function
2

om
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 09 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
3
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle

r.c
G89 Boring cycle
G90
03
Absolute command 4
G91 Increment command
G92 Setting for work coordinate system or clamp at maxi-
00 mum spindle speed
G92.1 Work coordinate system preset

e
G94
5
Feed per minute
05
G95 Feed per rotation
G96
G97
G98
G99
nt 13

10
Constant surface speed control
Constant surface speed control cancel
Return to initial point in canned cycle
Return to R point in canned cycle
6
ce
G160 In–feed control function cancel (for grinding machine)
20
G161 In–feed control function (for grinding machine)
7
Explanation
1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at
nc

power–up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states

described below.
8
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as
indicated in the above table.
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at
.c

power–up or reset.
9
(3) Which status G22 or G23 at power on is set by parameter G23
(No.3402#7). However, G22 and G23 remain unchanged when the
clear state is set at reset.
w

(4) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter
No. 3402. 10
(5) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter
No. 3402.
w

(6) The user can select G17, G18, or G19 by setting bit 1 (parameter
G18) and bit 2 (parameter G19) of parameter No. 3402.
2. G codes other than G10 and G11 are one–shot G codes.
w

3. Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G code

belongs to a different group. If multiple G codes that belong to the same
group are specified in the same block, only the last G code specified is
valid.
70
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Positioning (G00) IP

Start point

Linear interpolation IP
(G01)

om
Start point

Circular interpolation
(G02, G03)
Start point

R G02
J

r.c
Center
I End point
(x, y)

(x, y) G03

Start point

e
R J

nt
Helical interpolation
(G02, G03)
Center I

Z
ce
End point

Tool path
nc

Start
point

X Y
.c
w
w
w

71
 Tape format T series M series
IP _ ;
G00P f f
1

IP _ ;
G01P f f

om
G02 R_ f f
G17 Xp_Yp_ F_ ;
G03 I_J_
G02 R_
3
G18 Xp_Zp_ F_ ;
G03 I_K_

r.c
G02 R_
G19 Yp_Zp_ F_ ;
4
G03 J_K_

e
5

G17
G02
nt
Synchronously with arc of XpYp plane

Xp_Yp_
I_J_
α_(β_)F_ ;
f f 6
ce
G03 R_
Synchronously with arc of ZpXp plane
G02 I_K_ 7
G18 Xp_Zp_ α_(β_)F_ ;
G03 R_
nc

Synchronously with arc of YpZp plane

G02 J_K_
G19 Yp_Zp_ α_(β_)F_ ;
8
G03 R_
α, β : Any one axis where circular interpolation is
not applied. Up to two other axes can be
specified.
.c

9
w

10
w
w

72
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Involute interpolation Yp Yp
(G02.2, G03.2)
Po

Pe R I
J
0
Ps I Po
J
0 R

Base circle

om
Pe
Xp Xp

Clockwise (G02.2)

Yp Yp
Ro

R Pe
Ps 0
Pe
IJ Po

r.c
End point J
0 R

I
Ps
Xp Xp



  

Exponential X (Linear axis)

e
interpolation
(G02.3, G03.3)

nt


ce
A (Rotary axis)

A
nc
.c

Dwell (G04) (Example)

w

G94 G04 P10; Dwell by 10 seconds

G95 G04 X30; Dwell by 30 revolutions
w
w

73
 Tape format T series M series
Involute interpolation on the X-Y plane f 1
G17G02.2 X_Y_I_J_R_F_;
G17 G3.2 X_Y_I_J_R_F_;
Involute interpolation on the Z-X plane
G18G02.2 Z_X_K_I_R_F_;
G18 G3.2 Z_X_K_I_R_F_; 2

om
Involute interpolation on the Y-Z plane
G19G02.2 Y_Z_J_K_R_F_;
G19 G3.2 Y_Z_J_K_R_F_;
X, Y, Z : Involute curve end coordinate
I, J, K : Center of the base circle for an involute 3
curve viewed from the start point
R : Base circle radius
F : Cutting feedrate

r.c
4

Positive rotation f

e
G02.3 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_R_F_Q_; 5
Negative rotation
G03.3X_Y_Z_I_J_K_R_F_Q_;
X_; Specifies an end point with an absolute or incre-
nt
mental value.
Y_; Specifies an end point with an absolute or incre-
mental value.
Z_; Specifies an end point with an absolute or incre-
mental value.
I_; Specifies angle I (from "1 to " 89 deg in
6
ce
units of 0.001 deg).
J_; Specifies angle J (from "1 to " 89 deg in
units of 0.001 deg).
K_; Specifies the amount to divide the linear axis for
exponential interpolation (span value). Specify
7
a positive value. When no value is specified,
the value specified in parameter No. 5643 is
used.
nc

R_; Specifies constant R for exponential interpola-

tion.
F_; Specifies the initial feedrate. 8
Specified in the same way as an ordinary F
code. Specify a composite feedrate including a
feedrate on the rotary axis.
Q_; Specifies the feedrate at the end point.
The same unit used for F is used. The CNC in-
.c

ternally performs interpolation between the initial

feedrate (F) and final feedrate(Q), depending on 9
the travel distance on the linear axis.

f f
X_
w

G94 G04 ; Dwell by second

P_ 10
X_
G95 G04 ; Dwell by revolution
w

P_
w

74
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Exact stop
Speed
(G09, G61)

Time
In–position check

om
High-speed cycle (Example)
machining (G05)
Cycle 1: connection 2, repetition 1
Cycle 2: connection 3, repetition 3
Cycle 3: connection 0, repetition 1
G05P10001L2;
Cycle is executed as 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3

r.c
High-speed remote Specify G05 only in a block using normal NC com-
buffer A (G05) mand format. Then specify move data in the special
format shown below. When zero is specified as the
travel distance along all axes, normal NC command
format can be used again for subsequent command
specification.

e
nt
ce
nc

High-speed remote High-speed remote buffer A uses binary data. On the

buffer B other hand, high-speed remote buffer B can directly
(G05) use NC language coded with equipment such as an
automatic programming unit to perform high-speed
.c

machining.

High-precision contour Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such
control errors include machining errors caused by accelera-
(G05) tion/deceleration after interpolation. To eliminate
w

these errors, the following functions are performed at

high speed by an RISC processor. These functions
are called high-precision contour control functions.
(1) Function for multiple-block look-ahead accelera-
tion/deceleration before interpolation. This func-
w

tion eliminates machining errors due to accelera-

tion/deceleration.
(2) Automatic speed control function which enables
smooth acceleration/deceleration by considering
w

changes in the figure and speed and allowable

acceleration for the machine. This is performed
by reading multiple blocks in advance.

75
 Tape format T series M series
G09 IP ; f 1
G61 ;

om
G05 P10 xxx Lnnn ; f f

XXX : Start program number of called programs

nnn : Repetition time of machining cycle 3

r.c
D Binary input operation enabled : G05 ; f f
D Binary input operation disabled : The travel
4
distance along
all axes are set
to zero
D Data format for binary input operation

e
5
Byte

Data
sequence
nt High byte
Low byte

High byte
Low byte
1st axis

2nd axis
6
ce
.
.
High byte
7
Nth axis
Low byte
Check byte
nc

All data must be specified in binary. 8

G05P01; Start high-speed machining f
X_Y_Z_;
G05P00; End high-speed machining
.c

9
G05P10000; Start HPCC mode f
G05P0; End HPCC mode
w

10
w
w

76
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Smooth interpolation Either of two types of machining can be selected,
(G05.1) depending on the program command.
D For those portions where the accuracy of the fig-
ure is critical, such as at corners, machining is
performed exactly as specified by the program
command.

om
D For those portions having a large radius of curva-
ture where a smooth figure must becreated,
points along the machining path are interpolated
with a smooth curve, calculated from the polygo-
nal lines specified with the program command
(smooth interpolation).
Smooth interpolation can be specified in high–speed
contour control mode.

r.c
Hypothetical axis inter-
Y
polation
(G07)
r

0
Z

e
1

(G07.1)
nt
Cylindrical interpolation

Z
C

R
ce
Look-ahead control With this function, the delay due to acceleration/de-
(G08) celeration and the delay in the servo system which
increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be sup-
nc

pressed.
The tool can then follow specified values accurately
and errors in the machining profile can be reduced.
.c
w
w
w

77
 Tape format T series M series
G05.1 Q2X0Y0Z0; Starting of smooth interpolation f 1
mode

G05.1 Q0; Cancelation of smooth interpola-

tion mode

om
3

G07  0; Hypothetical axis setting

r.c
G07  1; Hypothetical axis cancel
4
Where,  is any one of the addresses of the con-
trolled axes.

e
5

G07.1 Cr ;
nt
Cylindrical interpolation mode
C: Rotary axis name
r: Radius of cylinder
f f
6
ce
G07.1 C0 ;
Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel

7
G08P_ ; f
P1: Turn on look-ahead control mode.
nc

P0: Turn off look-ahead control mode.

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

78
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Change of offset values The tool compensation amount can be set or
by program changed with the G10 command.
(G10)
When G10 is used in absolute input (G90), the com-
pensation amount specified in the command be-
comes the new tool compensation amount. When
G10 is used in incremental input (G91), the com-
pensation amount specified in the command is added

om
to the amount currently set
set.

e r.c
nt ⊗: Position where the TOOL WITHDRAW switch
ce
Tool withdrawal and
return is turned on
(G10.6) F: Programmed position
f: Position to which the tool is retracted by manu-
al operation

: Retraction path
nc

: Manual operation (withdraw path)

: Return path
: Repositioning
.c

Z
w

Y
w
w

79
 Tape format T series M series
G10P_X (U)_Y (V)_Z (W)_R (C)_Q_; f 1
For geometry offset amount
P=10000+geometry offset number
For offset amount
P= wear offset number
R : Tool nose radius offset value
Q : Imaginary tool nose number 2

om
G10L_PpRr ; f
p : Offset No.
r : Tool compensation amount
Format
(1) For tool compensation memory A 3
G10L11P_R_;
(2) For tool compensation memory B
Setting/changing the geometric compensation

r.c
amount
G10L10P_R_; 4
Setting/changing the wear compensation amount
G10L11P_R_;
(3) For tool compensation memory C
Setting/changing the geometric compensation

e
amount for H code 5
G10L10P_R_;
Setting/changing the wear compensation amount
for D code
G10L12P_R_;
nt
Setting/changing the wear compensation amount
for H code

G10.6 IP _; f
6
ce
IP_: In incremental mode, retraction distance from the
position where the retract signal is turned on
In the absolute mode, retraction distance to an
7
absolute position
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

80
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Polar coordinate C
interpolation mode C axis
(G12.1, G13.1)

X axis

om
Polar coordinate
Y
command mode
(G15, G16)

x
y
X

r.c
XpYp plane selection
Y X Z
(G17)
ZpXp plane selection
(G18) X Z Y
YpZp plane selection G17 G18 G19

e
(G19)

Inch/metric conversion
(G20, G21)

check on (G22)
nt
Stored stroke limit

Stored stroke limit

check off (G23) (I, J, K)
(X, Y, Z)

X>I, Y>J, Z>K

ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

81
 Tape format T series M series
G12.1 ; f f 1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
G13.1 ;
Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel

om
G16 ; f
Polar coordinate command Xx Yy ;
X: radius, Y: angle (°)
G15 ;
3
Polar coordinate command cancel

r.c
G17 ; f f
4
G18 ;
G19 ;

e
5
G20 ; Inch input f f
G21 ; Metric input

nt
G22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_ ; on

G23 ; off
f f

6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

82
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Spindle speed (Example)
fluctuation detection on (1) When an alarm is raised after a specified
(G26) spindle speed is reached
Spindle speed Spindle speed
fluctuation detection off
(G25) r
q d
Specified

om
q d speed
r

Actual speed
No
Check check Check
Time
Specification of Start of check Alarm
another speed

r.c
(2) When an alarm is raised before a specified
spindle speed is reached
Spindle speed

r
q d Specified
q d speed

e
r

nt Check

Specification of
another speed
No check
p

Start of
check
Check

Alarm

pecified speed : (Speed specified by address S and

Actual speed

Time
ce
five–digit value)×(spindle override)
Actual speed :Speed detected with a position coder
p : Time elapses since the specified speed changes
until a check starts.
q : (Percentage tolerance for a check to start)×(speci-
fied speed)
r : (Percentage fluctuation detected as an alarm
nc

condition)×(specified speed)
d : Fluctuation detected as an alarm (specified in pa-
rameter (No.4913))

An alarm is issued when the difference between the

specified speed and the actual speed exceeds both r
and d.
.c

Reference position IP
return check
(G27) Reference position
Start point
w

Reference position Reference poisition (G28)

return (G28) IP
2nd, 3rd, 4th reference Intermediate position
position return (G30) IP
Floating reference
2nd reference
w

position return (G30.1) position (G30) Start point

Return to reference Reference position

position return start
position (G29) IP
w

Intermediate position

83
 Tape format T series M series
G26PpQqRr ; spindle fluctuation detection on f f 1
G25 ; Spindle fluctuation detection off
p: Time (in ms) from the issue of a new spindle
rotation command (S command) to the start of
checking whether the actual spindle speed is so
fast that an overheat can occur. 2

om
(When a specified speed is reached within the
time period of P, a check is started at that time.)

q : Tolerance (%) of a specified spindle speed (if a

specified spindle speed lies within this range, it is
regarded as having reached the specified value. 3
Then, the checking of an actual spindle speed is
started.)

r.c
q= (1– actual spindle speed/specified spindle
speed)
100
4
r: Spindle speed fluctuation (%) at which the actual
spindle speed is so fast that an overheat can oc-
cur
r= (1–speed that can cause overheat/specified

e
spindle speed)
100
5

nt 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

G27IP _ ; f f 9
w

G28 IP_ ; f f
P2
G30 P3 IP _ ; 10
P4
G30.1 IP_ ; P2: 2nd reference position return
w

P3: 3rd reference position return

P4: 4th reference position return

G29 IP _ ; f f
w

84
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Skip function
(G31)

Multi–step skip function

(G31)

IP

om
Skip signal

Start point

Torque limit skip

function (G31)

r.c
Equal lead thread F
cutting (G32)
F: Lead

Thread cutting

e
(G33)

cutting
(G34)
nt
Variable lead thread
ce
Circular thread cutting F
(G35, G36)
nc

Automatic tool Measured position

reach signal
compensation Starting point
Measured
(G36, G37) position
.c

Specified position
(Xa or Za) Offset value set
by this command
w
w
w

85
 Tape format T series M series
G31IP _F_ ; f f 1
Move command f f
G31 IP_F_P_;
F_: Feedrate
P_: P1-P4 2

om
Dwell
G04X (U, P)_(Q_);
X(U, P)_: Dwell time
Q_: Q1-Q4

G31 P99 IP_F_; f

3
G31 P98 IP_F_;
G31: One-shot G code (G code effective only in the

r.c
block in which it is issued)

G32 IP _F_ ; f 4

G33 IP _F_ ; f

e
5

G34 IP _FfKk ;
nt
f: longer axis lead at the start position
k: increase/decrease value per spindle
revolution
f
6
ce
f
G35 I_K_
G36 IP_ R_ _ F_ Q_
7
nc

8
G36X xa ; f
G37Z za ;
Specified position
.c

9
w

10
w
w

86
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Automatic tool length
Ç
Ç
Z
measurement
(G37) A (Start position)
Measurement position is
Rapid
traverse commanded with G37

B (Deceleration position)
Measurement

om
feedrate

C (Measurement position)
The tool stops when the
approach end signal
goes on.
0 X

Compensation value=(Current compensa-

tion value)+[(Coordinates of the point at

ÇÇÇ
which the tool is stopped)–(Coordinates of
the programmed measurement position)]

r.c
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Tool nose radius G41
compensation

ÇÇÇÇ
(G40, G41, G42)
G40

G42

G40 ; Programmed path

e
G41 ; Left of programmed path

ÇÇ
G42 ; Right of programmed path

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
Cutter compensation B
(G39 to G42) nt
Cutter compensation C
(G40 to G42)
G40

G40 ; Programmed path

ÇÇÇÇ
G41

G42
ce
G41 ; Left of programmed path
G42 ; Right of programmed path

Three dimensional tool Programmed path

compensation Path after three–dimensional tool
(G40, G41) compensation
nc

Three–dimensional tool com-

pensation vector

G40
G41
.c

The three–dimensional tool compensation vector is

obtained from the following expressions:
i⋅r
Vx = (Vector component along the
p Xp–axis)
w

j⋅r (Vector component along the

Vy =
p Yp–axis)
w

k ⋅ r (Vector component along the

Vz =
p Zp–axis)
In the above expressions, i, j, and k are the values
specified in addresses I, J, and K in the block. r is
the offset value corresponding to the specified offset
w

number. p is the value obtained from the following

expression:
p= i 2 + j2 + k 2

87
 Tape format T series M series
G92 IP _; Sets the workpiece coordinate system. f 1
(It can be set with G54 to G59.)
Hff; Specifies an offset number for tool length
offset.
G90 G37 IP _; Absolute command·G37 is valid only
in the block in which it is specified.
IP_ indicates the X-, Y-, Z-, or fourth 2

om
axis.

r.c
G40 f
G41 IP _ ;
4
G42

e
5

f
G39X(I)_Y(J)_ ;

G18
G19
nt
Corner offset circular interpolation
G17 G40
G41
G42
D(H)_ ;
6
ce
D(H): Tool offset number

7
G41 Xp_Yp_Zp_I_J_K_D_; (Start up) f
Xp: X-axis or a parallel axis
nc

Yp: Y-axis or a parallel axis

Zp: Z-axis or a parallel axis 8
G40 Xp_Yp_Zp_; (When canceling the or three-di-
mensional tool
Xp_Yp_Zp_D00; compensation mode and tool
.c

movement at the same time)

9
G40; (When only canceling the vector)
or D00;
w

10
w
w

88
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Normal direction control
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Programmed
(G40.1, G41.1 G42.1) path

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
C axis
C axis

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Tool Tool

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

om
Normal direction
(proceeding direction)

Tool length
compensation A, B, C
(G43, G44, G49)

r.c
Offset

G43: + offset Z

G44: – offset

e
Tool offset
(G45 to G48) nt Programmed path Tool center path
ce
Coordinate system
setting X
Spindle speed setting
(G50)
nc

Scaling
P4 P3
(G50, G51)
P4’ P3’

P0
.c

P2’
P1’
P1 P2
w

P1 to P4: Programmed shape

P1’ to P4’: Scaled chape
P0: Scaling center
w
w

89
 Tape format T series M series
G41.1 ; Normal direction control left f 1
G42.1 ; Normal direction control right
G40.1 ; Normal direction control cancel

om
f
G43 (Z_)H_ ; Tool length compensation A
3
G44

G17 X_
G18 Y_ ;

r.c
G43
G19 G44 Z_
Tool length compensation B 4
G43
α_H_ ; Tool length compensation C
G44

H: Offset number (H00 to H999)

e
α : Arbitrary one axis 5
G49 ; Tool length compensation cancel

f
G45 (increase)
G46 (decrease)
nt
G47 (double increase)
G48 (double decrease)
X_
Y_
Z_
Dxx;
6
ce
G50X_Z_ ; Coordinate system setting f
7
G50S_ ; Spindle speed setting
nc

8
G51X_Y_Z_P_ (or I_J_K_) ; f
G50 ; Cancel
X, Y, Z: Scaling center
P: Magnification
.c

(I, J, and K are the scaling magnifications for the X-,

Y-, and Z-axes respectively.) 9
w

10
w
w

90
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Programmable a/b : X–axis scaling magnification
mirror image c/d : Y–axis scaling magnification
(G50.1, G51.1) 0 : Scaling center

Y
Programmed
shape

om
d
Scaled shape
c
0

X
a
b

r.c
Polygon turning
(G51.2, G50.2)
Workpiece Tool
Workpiece

Local coordinate system

e
(Local coor- (Local coordinate
setting dinate sys- system)
tem)
(G52) IP (Warkpiece coordinate
system 2:G55)
(Workpiece
coordinate sys-
tem 1: G54)

nt (Parameter
value)
(Workpiece reference
position offset)
IP
(Warkpiece coordinate
system)

(Warkpiece coordinate
system 6:G59)

(Machine coordinate system)

ce
(Origin of the machine coordinate system)

(Reference position)

Machine coordinate
X
system setting
(G53)
nc

Machine coordinate
system

Machine zero

Machine reference
β
.c

position

Reference position
w
w
w

91
 Tape format T series M series
G51.1 IP _ ; f 1
G50.1 ; Cancel

om
3

r.c
G51.2P_Q_ ; Polygon turning f
G50.2 ; Polygon turning cancel 4
P, Q: Rotation ratio of spindle and workpiece

G52 IP _; Local coordinate system setting f f

e
G52P0 ; Local coordinate system cancel 5

nt 6
ce
7
G53 IP _ ; f f
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

92
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Work coordinate system Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
Workpiece
1 to 6 selection coordinate
coordinate coordinate coordinate
system 2 system 3 system 4
(G54 to G59) system 1 (G54)
(G55) (G56) (G57)

ZOFS2 ZOFS3 ZOFS4

ZOFS1 Workpiece
ZOFS5 coordinate
system 5 (G58)
EXOFS

om
Workpiece
coordinate
Machine reference ZOFS6 system 6 (G59)
position

EXOFS: External workpiece zero point offset

ZOFS1 to ZOFS6: Reference position offset for work-
piece coordinate system 1 to 6

Additional work (Example)

coordinate system G54.1P12 ;

r.c
selection (G54.1) Selecting additional work coordinate system 12

Single direction IP
positioning
(G60)

Exact stop mode

Speed
(G61)

e
Automatic corner
override
(G62
nt Programmed path
Time
ce
a
Le Ls

Override is applied from a to b

Tapping mode Speed

nc

Feed hold is ineffective

(G63) Feedrate override
is ineffective

Time
.c

Cutting mode Speed

(G64)
w

Time
w
w

93
 Tape format T series M series
G54 IP_ ; Work coordinate system 1 selection f f 1
G55 IP_ ; Work coordinate system 2 selection
G56 IP_ ; Work coordinate system 3 selection
G57 IP_ ; Work coordinate system 4 selection
G58 IP_ ; Work coordinate system 5 selection 2

om
G59 IP_ ; Work coordinate system 6 selection

3
G54.1 Pn; (n=1 to 300) f

r.c
G60 IP_ ; f 4

G61 ; f

e
5

G62 ;
nt f 6
ce
7

G63 ; f
nc

8
.c

G64 ; f
9
w

10
w
w

94
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Macro call
Main program Macro program
(G65)

O_: O0001;
G65P0001L_;
_

om
G67; M99;

Macro modal call Main program Macro program

(G66, G67)
O_: O0001;

G66P0001L_;
X_

r.c
Y_
G67; M99;

Mirror image for double

turrets
(G68, G69)
(Only when two-path

e
control)

(G68, G69)
nt
Coordinate rotation

(G68.1, G69.1 in the

case of T series)
Y’
Y
X’
ce
R
X

Three-dimentional Coordinate conversion about an axis can be carried

coordinate conversion out if the center of rotation, direction of the axis of
(G68, G69) rotation, and angular displacement are specified.
nc

Three–dimensional
Y
coordinate conversion
X
.c

Z Y

X
w
w
w

95
 Tape format T series M series
G65 P_L_ ; f f 1
P: Program number
L: Repetition count (1 to 9999)

om
G66 P_L_ ; f f
G67; Cancel 3
P: Program number
L: Repetition count (1 to 9999)

r.c
4
G68 ; f
Mirror image for double turrets

e
G69 ;
5
Mirror image cancel

G17
G18
G19
G69 ; (G69.1)
nt
G68 (G68.1) α_β_R_ ;
f f

6
ce
α, β: 2 axes corresponding to G17, G18, G19
R: Rotation angle

7
G68 Xpx1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rα ; f
Starting tree–dimensional
coordinate conversion
nc

Three–dimensional
coordinate conversion mode 8
G69 ; Canceling three–dimensional
coordinate conversion
Xp, Yp, Zp: Center of rotation (absolute coordinates)
.c

on the X, Y, and Z axis or parallel axes 9

I, J, K : Direction of the axis of rotation
R : Angular displacement
w

10
w
w

96
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Figure copy Machining can be repeated after moving or rotating
(G72.1, G72.2) the figure using a subprogram.

om
e r.c
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

97
 Tape format T series M series
Rotational copy f
1
Xp-Yp plane (specified by G17):
G72.1 P_L_Xp_Yp_R_;
Zp-Xp plane (specified by G18):
G72.1 P_L_Zp_Xp_R_; 2

om
Yp-Zp plane (specified by G19):
G72.1 P_L_Yp_Zp_R_;
P : Subprogram number
L : Number of times the operation is re- 3
peated
Xp : Center of rotation on the Xp axis
(Xp: X-axis or an axis parallel to the X-

r.c
axis)
Yp : Center of rotation on the Yp axis 4
(Yp; Y-axis or an axis parallel to the Y-
axis)
Zp : Center of rotation on the Zp axis
(Zp: Z-axis or an axis parallel to the Z-
axis)

e
5
R : Angular displacement
(A positive value indicates a counter-
clockwise angular displacement. Speci-

Linear copy
nt
fy an incremental value.)

Xp-Yp plane (specified by G17):

G72.2 P_L_I_J_;
6
ce
Zp-Xp plane (specified by G18):
G72.2 P_L_K_I_;
7
Yp-Zp plane (specified by G19):
G72.2 P_L_J_K_;
P : Subprogram number
nc

L : Number of times the operation is re-

peated 8
I : Shift along the Xp axis
J : Shift along the Yp axis
K : Shift along the Zp axis
.c

9
w

10
w
w

98
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Canned cycle for lathes Canned cycle
(G70 to G76) G90: Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting
(G90, G92, G94) cycle
G92: Thread cutting cycle
G94: End face turning cycle
Multiple repetitive cycle

om
G70: Finishing
G71: Stock removal in turning
G72: Stock removal in facing
G73: Pattern repeating
G74: End face peck drilling cycle
G75: Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
cycle
G76: Multiple thread cutting cycle

r.c
(Example) G92
X axis
Z W

4(R)
3(R)
1(R) U/2
3(R)

e
X/2
Z axis

Zero point

nt Approx.
45,

r
L
R Rapid
traverse
F Specified
by F code
ce
Detailed chamfered thread

(The chamfered angle in

the left figure is 45 degrees or less because of the
delay in the servo system.)

Canned cycle for G71: Traverse grinding cycle

nc

grinding G72: Traverse direct fixed-dimension grinding

(G71 – G74) cycle
G73: Oscillation grinding cycle
G74: Oscillation direct fixed-dimention grinding
cycle

(Example) G71
.c

G71 A__B__W__U__I__K__H__ ;
X

W

(I)
A  (K)
w

U
B (I)

(K)

A: First depth of cut

w

B: Second depth of cut

W: Grinding range
U: Dwell time
Maximum specification time: 99999.999 seconds
I: Feedrate of A and B
w

K: Feedrate of W
H: Number of repetitions
Setting value: 1 to 9999

99
 Tape format T series M series
G70 P_Q_ ; f 1
G71 U_R_ ;
G71 P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ;
G72 W_ R_ ;
G72 P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ; 2

om
G73 W_ R_ ;
G73 P_Q_U_W_F_S_T_ ;
G74 R_ ;
G74 X(u)_Z(w)_P_Q_R_F_ ; 3
G75 R_ ;
G75 X(u)_Z(w)_P_Q_R_F_ ;

r.c
G76 R_ ;
G76 X(u)_Z(w)_P_Q_R_F_ ; 4

G90 X_Z_I_F_ ;
G92

e
G94 X_Z_I_F_; 5

nt 6
ce
7

G71 A__B__W__U__I__K__H__ ; f
nc

G72 P__A__B__W__U__I__K__H__ ;
G73 A__(B__)W__U__I__K__H__ ;
G74 P__A__(B__)W__U__I__K__H__ ; 8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

100
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Canned cycle G73: High-speed peck drilling cycle
(G73, G74, G80 to G89) G74: Left-hand tapping cycle
G76: Fine boring cycle
G80: Cancel
G81: Drilling cycle, spot drilling cycle
G82: Drilling cycle, counter boring cycle
G83: Peck drilling cycle

om
G84: Tapping cycle
G85: Boring cycle
G86: Boring cycle
G87: Back boring cycle
G88: Boring cycle
G89: Boring cycle

r.c
Example

G73 (G98) G73 (G99)

Initial level

e
R point R point

q
nt d

d
q

q
d

d
ce
Z point Z point
nc
.c
w
w
w

101
 Tape format T series M series
f
G73 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
1
G74 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G76 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G81 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G82 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G83 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G84 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
2

om
G85 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G86 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G87 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G88 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G89 X__Y__Z__P__Q__R__F__K__ ;
G80 ; Cancel 3
Gjj X__Y__Z__R__Q__P__F__K__ ;

Number of repeat
Hole position data

r.c
Drilling data
Drilling mode
4
Item Address Explanation

Drilling mode GVV G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89

Hole position data X, Y Specifies the hole position by an in-

cremental or absolute value.

e
5
Drilling data Z Specifies the distance from point R to
the bottom of the hole.

Drilling data

Drilling data
nt R

Q
Specifies the distance from the initial
level to point R.

Specifies each cut-in value with G73

and G83 or the shift value with G76
and G87. (Always specified with an
6
ce
incremental value.)

Drilling data P Specifies the dwell time at the bottom

of the hole. 7
Drilling data F Specifies the feed rate.

Number of repeats K Specifies the number of repeats for a

nc

series of operation 1 to 6.

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

102
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Canned grinding cycle G75: Plunge grinding cycle
(G75, G77, G78, G79)
G77: Direct constant-dimension plunge grinding
cycle
y
G78: Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle
G79: Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle

om
(Example)
X

X(Z)

I
(R)

P (F)
J  (F) (R)

r.c
P

X(Z)

G75 I_J_K_X (Z)_R_F_P_L_ ;

e
I: Depth-of-cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.)
J: Depth-of-cut 2 ( A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.)
K:

R:
F:
nt
Total depth of cut
X (Z): Range of grinding
(A sign in the command specifies the direction of grinding.)
Feedrate for I and J
Feedrate for X (Z)
ce
P: Dwell time
L: Grinding-wheel wear compensation (Note 1)
nc
.c
w
w
w

103
 Tape format T series M series
G75 I_J_K_X (Z)_R_F_P_L_ ; f
1
G77 I_J_K_X (Z)_R_F_P_L_ ;
G78 I_J_K_X (Z)_R_F_P_L_ ;
G79 I_J_K_X (Z)_R_F_P_L_ ;

om
3

r.c
4

e
5

nt 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

104
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Canned cycle for drilling G83: Front drilling cycle
(G80 to G89)
G84: Front tapping cycle
G85: Front boring cycle
G87: Side drilling cycle
G88: Side tapping cycle

om
G89: Side boring cycle
G80: Drilling cycle cancel

Example

G83 (G87) (G99 mode) G83 (G87) (G98 mode)

r.c
(Ma) Initial level (Ma)

R point level (Mβ), P ’ R point level

dwell

e
(Mβ), P ’
q d q d
dwell

q
nt q

q
ce
Z Z
point point
P dwell
P dwell
nc

Absolute/Incremental
command (Example)
(G90/G91)
60
.c

30

50 100
w

Absolute command G90X100Y60;

ÇÇ
Incremental command G91X50Y30;

ÇÇ
Change of workpiece
coordinate system IP
w

(G92)
Y

X
w

105
 Tape format T series M series
f
G83 X(Z)_C_Z(X)_R_Q_P_F_K_(M_) ; 1
G84 X(Z)_C_Z(X)_R_Q_P_F_K_(M_) ;
G86 X(Z)_C_Z(X)_R_Q_P_F_K_(M_) ;
G87 X(Z)_C_Z(X)_R_Q_P_F_K_(M_) ;
G88 X(Z)_C_Z(X)_R_Q_P_F_K_(M_) ; 2

om
G89 X(Z)_C_Z(X)_R_Q_P_F_K_(M_) ;
G80 ; Cancel
GVV X(Z)_C_Z(X)_R_Q_P_F_K_(MVV) ;

Number of repeat
Hole position 3
data
Drilling data
Drilling mode

r.c
Designation Address Description

Drilling mode GVV G80, G83, G84, G86, G87, G88, G89 4
Hole position X/U(Z/W)C/H Specifies the hole position by an in-
cremental or absolute value.

Drilling data Z(X) Specifies the distance from point R to

the bottom of the hole.

e
5
R Specifies the distance from the initial
level to point R level.

nt Q

P
Specifies each cut-in value with G83
(G87). This value is always specified
with an incremental value to specify
radius.

Specifies the dwell time at the bottom

6
ce
of the hole.

F Specifies the feedrate.

Number of repeats K Specifies the number of repeats for a 7

series of operations.

M code of MVV M-code (specified by a parameter) of

nc

C-axis clamp C-axis clamp.

G90_; Absolute command f f 8

G91_; Incremental command
G90_G91_; Change of workpiece coordinate system
.c

9
w

10
G92IP _ ; f
w
w

106
 4. PROGRAM FORMAT

Function Explanation
Workpiece coordinate The workpiece coordinate system preset function
system preset presets a workpiece coordinate system shifted by
(G92.1) manual intervention to the pre-shift workpiece coordi-
nate system. The latter system is displaced from the
machine zero point by a workpiece zero point offset
value.

Feed/minute,

om
Move Move
Feed/revolution distance distance
(G94, G95) F F
per minute per revolution

Feed/minute (G94) Feed/revolution (G95)

r.c
Constant surface speed Surface speed
control
(G96, G97)

e
Constant surface speed
control X
(G96, G97)

nt
Initial point return/ G98
Z(X=0)
ce
R point return Initial point
(G98, G99)
G99
R point

Z point
nc

Infeed control
(Example)
(G160, G161)
r r r r End
point
Start point
.c

Z
w
w
w

107
 Tape format T series M series
G92.1 IP 0; f f 1
P0 ; Specifies axis addresses subject to the
workpiece coordinate system preset
operation. Axes that are not specified
are not subject to the preset operation.

G94 · · · · · F_ ; f f
2

om
G95 · · · · · F_ ;

r.c
G96 Ss ; f
G97 ; Cancel
4
s: Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)

e
G96 Ss Pα ; f 5
G97 ; Cancel
α: 1 to 8

s:

G98_ ;
nt
(X axis, Y axis, Z axis, 4th axis to 8th axis)
Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)

f f
6
ce
G99_ ;

7
nc

G161 Rr ; f
G160 ; Cancel 8
r: Cut in depth
.c

9
w

10
w
w

108
 5. CUSTOM MACRO

5.1 Types of Variables

Type of variable Variable number
Local variable #1 – #33

Common variable #100 – #149

#500 – #531

Additional common variable (Note 1) #100 – #199

om
#500 – #999

System variable (Note 2) #1000 – #19099

NOTE1 Common variables #150 to #199 and #532 to #999 can be added.
Part program length reduces by 8.5 m.
NOTE2 Details are shown in 5.2.

r.c
5.2 System Variable
Variable
Contents Purpose Series
number
#1000–#1015 Corresponds to UI000 to UI015 Interface input T/M
#1032 Unified input of UI000 to UO015 i
signall

e
#1100–#1115 Corresponds to UO000 to Interface T/M
UO015 output signal
#1132 Unified output of UO000 to

#1133

#2001–#2064
nt
UO015
Unified output of UO100 to
UO131
Wear offset value X axis offset T
ce
(Offset No. 1–64)
#2701–#2749 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–49)
#10001–#10099 Wear offset value
(Offset No. 1–99)
#15001–#15099 Geometry offset value
nc

(Offset No. 1–99)

#2101–#2164 Wear offset value Z axis offset T
(Offset No. 1–64)
#2801–#2849 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–49)
#11001–#11099 Wear offset value
.c

(Offset No. 1–99)

#16001–#16099 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–99)
#2201–#2264 Wear offset value Tool nose T
w

(Offset No. 1–64) radius com-

pensation
i
#2901–#2969 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–64)
#12001–#12099 Wear offset value
w

(Offset No. 1–99)

#17001–#17099 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–99)
w

109
 Variable
Contents Purpose Series
number
#2301–#2364 Wear offset value Imaginary tool T
1
(Offset No. 1–64) tip position
#2301–#2364 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–64)
#13001–#13099 Wear offset value
(Offset No. 1–99)
2

om
#13001–#13099 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–99)
#2401–#2449 Wear offset value Y axis offset T
(Offset No. 1–49)
3
#2451–#2499 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–49)
#14001–#14099 Wear offset value

r.c
(Offset No. 1–99)
#19001–#19099 Geometry offset value
(Offset No. 1–99)
4
#2001–#2200 Tool compensation Tool M
(offset no. 1–200) compensation
( ff
(offset memory
#10001–#10999 Tool compensation
A)

e
(offset no. 1–999)
5
#2001–#2200 Wear offset value Tool M
(offset no. 1–200) compensation
#2201–#2400

#10001–#10999

#11001–#11999
nt
Geometry offset value
(offset no. 1–200)
Wear offset value
(offset no. 1–999)
Geometry offset value
(offset
( ff
B)
memory

6
ce
(offset no. 1–999)
#2001–#2200 Wear offset of H code Tool M
(offset no. 1–200) compensation 7
( ff
(offset memory
#2201–#2400 Geometry offset of H code
C)
(offset no. 1–200)
#10001–#10400 Wear offset of H code
nc

(offset no. 1–999)

#11001–#11999 Geometry offset of H code 8
(offset no. 1–999)
#12001–#12999 Wear offset of D code
(offset no. 1–999)
.c

#13001–#13999 Geometry offset of D code

(offset no. 1–999) 9
#3000 Alarm T/M
#3001 Clock 1 (unit: 1ms) Clock T/M
w

#3002 Clock 2 (unit: 1 hour)

#3003 Control of single T/M 10
block stop, wait
signal for FIN
w

#3004 Control of feed- T/M

hold, feedrate
override, exact
stop check
w

#3005 Setting T/M

#3007 Mirror image check signal Status of T/M
mikrror image

110
 5. CUSTOM MACRO

Variable
Contents Purpose Series
number
#3011 Year, month, day Clock T/M
#3012 Hour, minute, second
#3901 No. of parts machined No. of parts T/M
#3902 No. of parts required

om
#4001–#4022 G code (group 01–22) Modal T/M
#4102 B code i f
information
i

#4107 D code
#4109 F code
#4111 H code
#4113 M code
#4114 Sequence number

r.c
#4115 Program number
#4119 S code
#4120 T code
#4130 P code
#5001–#5008 1st axis block end position Block end T/M
to position (Work-

e
8th axis block end position piece coordi-
nate)

#5021–#5028 1st axis current position Machine T/M

#5041–#5048
tont
8th axis current position

1st axis current position

to
8th axis current position
coordinate

Workpiece
coordinate
T/M
ce
#5061–#5068 1st axis skip signal position Skip signal T/M
to position
8th axis skip signal position (Workpiece
coordinate)

#5081–#5088 1st axis tool offset value Tool offset val- T/M
to ue
nc

8th axis tool offset value

#5101–#5108 1st axis servo position deviation Servo position T/M

to deviation
8th axis servo position devi-
ation

#2500 External workpiece zero point 1st axis M

.c

#2600 offset value 2nd axis

#2700 3rd axis
#2800 4th axis

#2501 G54 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis M

w

#2601 value 2nd axis

#2701 3rd axis
#2801 4th axis

#2502 G55 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis M

#2602 value 2nd axis
w

#2702 3rd axis

#2802 4th axis

#2503 G56 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis M

#2603 value 2nd axis
w

#2703 3rd axis

#2803 4th axis

111
 Variable
Contents Purpose Series
number
1
#2504 G57 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis M
#2604 value 2nd axis
#2704 3rd axis
#2804 4th axis

#2505 G58 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis M

#2605 value 2nd axis
2

om
#2705 3rd axis
#2805 4th axis

#2506 G59 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis M

#2606 value 2nd axis
#2706 3rd axis 3
#2806 4th axis

#5201–#5208 External workpiece zero point 1st axis to T/M

offset value 8th axis

r.c
#5221–#5228 G54 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis to T/M
value 8th axis 4
#5241–#5248 G55 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis to T/M
value 8th axis

#5261–#5268 G56 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis to T/M

e
value 8th axis
5
#5281–#5288 G57 workpiece zero point offset 1st axis to T/M
value 8th axis

#5301–#5308

#5321–#5328
nt
G58 workpiece zero point offset
value

G59 workpiece zero point offset

value
1st axis to
8th axis

1st axis to
8th axis
T/M

T/M 6
ce
#7001–#7008 G54.1 P1 workpiece zero point 1st axis to M
offset value 8th axis

#7021–#7028 G54.1 P2 workpiece zero point 1st axis to M

offset value 8th axis 7
: :
#7941–#7948 G54.1 P48 workpiece zero point 1st axis to M
nc

offset value 8th axis

#14001–#14008 G54.1 P1 workpiece zero point 1st axis to M 8

offset value 8th axis

#14021–#14028 G54.1 P2 workpiece zero point 1st axis to M

offset value 8th axis
.c

: :
9
#19980–#19988 G54.1 P48 workpiece zero point 1st axis to M
offset value 8th axis
w

10
w
w

112
 5. CUSTOM MACRO

5.3 Argument Assignment I/II

Correspondence Table between Correspondence Table between

Argument Assignment I Addresses and Argument Assignment II Addresses
Macro Variables and Macro Variables

Argument Argument
Macro Macro
Assignment I Assignment II
Variables Variables
Addresses Addresses

om
A #1 A #1

B #2 B #2

C #3 C #3

D #7 I1 #4

E #8 J1 #5

r.c
F #9 K1 #6

H #11 I2 #7

I #4 J2 #8

J #5 K2 #9

K #6 I3 #10

e
M #13 J3 #11

Q #17 K3 #12

T
nt #18

#19

#20
I4

J4

K4
#13

#14

#15
ce
U #21 I5 #16

V #22 J5 #17

W #23 K5 #18

X #24 I6 #19

Y #25 J6 #20
nc

Z #26 K6 #21

I7 #22

J7 #23

K7 #24
.c

I8 #25

J8 #26

K8 #27
w

I9 #28

J9 #29

K9 #30
w

I10 #31

J10 #32

K10 #33
w

113
 5.4 Arithmetic Commands
Purpose Expression Contents 1
Definition and #i=#j Definition, substitution
substitution of
variables

Addition arithmetic #i=#j+#k Sum

2

om
#i=#j – #k Subtraction

#i=#jOR#k Logical sum

(at every bit of 32 bits)

#i=#jXOR#k Exclusive OR
(at every bit of 32 bits)
3
Multiplication #i=#j*#k Product
arithmetic

r.c
#i=#j/#k Quotient

#i=#jAND#k Logical product

(at every bit of 32 bits)
4
Functions #i=SIN [#j] Sine (degree unit)

#i=ASIN [#j] Arcsine (degree unit)

e
#i=COS [#j] Cosine (degree unit) 5
#i=ACOS [#j] Arccosine (degree unit)

#i=TAN [#j] Tangent (degree unit)

nt #i=ATAN [#j]/[#k]

#i=SQRT [#j]

#i=ABS [#j]
Arctangent (degree unit)

Square root

Absolute value
6
ce
#i=BIN [#j] Conversion from BCD to BIN

#i=BCD [#j] Conversion from BIN to BCD

7
#i=ROUND [#j] Rounding off

#i=FIX [#j] Discard fractions less than 1

nc

#i=FUP [#j] Add 1 for fractions less than 1

#i=LN [#j] Logarithm 8

#i=EXP [#j] Index

Combination of – The above arithmetic operations

arithmetic operations and functions can be combined.
.c

The order of priority in an arithme-

tic operation is function, multi- 9
plication arithmetic then addition
arithmetic.
w

10
w
w

114
 5. CUSTOM MACRO

5.5 Control Command

Kind of
Purpose Expression
operation
Conditional branch IF [<conditional expression>] #j EQ #k (=)
GOTO n
#j NE #k (0)
Branch to sequence number n
n.
#j GT #k (>)

om
Conditional execution IF [<conditional expression>]
ex ression>]
THEN st #j LT #k (<)
Execute macro statement st. #j GE #k (y)

#j LE #k (x)

Iteration WHILE [<conditional expres- #j EQ #k (=)

sion>] DO m
#j NE #k (0)
(m = 1
1, 2
2, 3)

r.c
#j GT #k (>)
If omitted conditional expression,
ex ression,
blocks from DO m to END m are #j LT #k (<)
executed eternally
eternally.
#j GE #k (y)

#j LE #k (x)

e
5.6 Macro Call
Program Parame-
Name

Simple
call
nt Format

G65P (program number)

L (repetition count)
<argument assignment>
No. ter No.
Remarks

Refer to 5.3 for

argument
assignment.
ce
Modal G66P (program number)
call L (repetition count)
<argument assignment>

Macro Gxx 9010 6050 Refer to 5.3 for

call by <argument assignment> argument
to to
G code assignment
assignment.
nc

Max. 10 G codes from 9019 6059

G01–G64 and Set G or M code
G68–G9999 that calls a pro-
gram specified
s ecified in
Macro Mxx 9020 6080 the parameter.
call by <argument assignment>
to to
M code
Max. 10 M codes from 9029 6089
.c

M006 to M99999999

Sub- Mxx ; 9001 6071 Displayed on pro-

pro- gram check screen
to to
gram but no MF nor M
w

callll by
b 9009 6079 code
d iis sent.
t
Mxx ;
M code Set an M code that
Max. 9 M codes from
calls a sub-pro-
M006–M99999999
gram specified by
the parameter.
w
w

115
 Program Parame-
Name Format Remarks
No. ter No.

Sub- Tt ; P9000 6001#5 Calls sub-program

1
pro- (Sub- TCS P9000. T code t is
gram pro- stored in common
call by gram) variable #149 as
T code an argument.

Multi- Main program Can be called up

2

om
plex to 4 loops includ-
call O. O. O. ing simple call and
G65P. G65P. G65P.
modal call.
M99 M99 DDD M99

3
Macro Macro
(level 1) (level 4)

r.c
5.7 Command Range 4
Item Contents
Variables Local variable: #1–#33

e
Common variable: #100–#149, #500–#531 5
Additional common variable: #100–#199, #500–#999
System variable: #1000–#19099

Value of variables
nt
Constant in expression
Maximum value
Minimum value

Maximum value

1047

10–29

99999999
6
ce
Minimum value
0.0000001
Decimal point possible

Arithmetic precision Decimal 8 digits

7
Macro call duplex Max. 4 loops
nc

Iteration 1 to 3
classification no.

Nesting Max. 5 loops

8
Nesting of Max. 4 loops (8 loops including macro calls)
subprograms
.c

9
w

10
w
w

116
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

6.1 Displaying CNC Internal State

6.1.1 Procedure for displaying diagnostic screen

Display the CNC internal state as below:

SYSTEM

om
[DGNOS]

Input a diagnostic data

No. to be displayed.
Change by page change key

r.c
[[Link]]

6.1.2 Display of status in which command is not apparently

executed (No. 000 – 015)

No. Display Internal status when 1 is displayed

e
000 WATING FOR FIN M, S, T function is being executed
SIGNAL
001 MOTION Move command in automatic operation is being

002
003
DWELL
nt
IN–POSITION
CHECK
executed
Dwell is being executed
In-position check is being performed
ce
004 FEEDRATE OVER- Override 0%
RIDE 0%
005 INTERLOCK/ Interlock is on.
START–LOCK
006 SPINDLE SPEED Waiting for spindle speed arrival signal to turn
ARRIVAL CHECK on
nc

010 PUNCHING Data is being output via reader puncher inter-

face
011 READING Data is being input via reader puncher interface
012 WAITING FOR Waiting for index table clamp/unclamp before B
(UN)CLAMP axis index table indexing start/after B axis index
table indexing end to complete
.c

013 JOG FEEDRATE Jog override 0%

OVERRIDE 0%
014 WAITING FOR RE- One of the emergency stop, external reset, re-
SET, ESP, RRW set & rewind or MDI panel reset key is on.
w

OFF
015 EXTERNAL PRO- External program number search is active.
GRAM NUMBER
SEARCH
016 BACKGROUND Background is being used.
w

ACTIVE
w

117
 6.1.3 Information indicating automatic operation stop, automatic
idle statuses (No. 020 – 025)
1
No. Display Internal status when 1 is displayed
020 CUT SPEED UP/ Set when emergency stop turns on or when ser-
DOWN vo alarm occurs
021 RESET BUTTON Set when reset key turns on 2

om
ON
022 RESET AND Reset and rewind turned on
REWIND ON
023 EMERGENCY Set when emergency stop turns on
STOP ON 3
024 RESET ON Set when external reset, emergency stop, reset
or reset & rewind key is on.
025 STOP MOTION OR A flag which stops pulse distribution. It is set to

r.c
DWELL 1 in the following cases.
(1) External reset is set to on. 4
(2) Reset & rewind is set to on.
(3) Emergency stop is set to on.
(4) Feed hold is set to on.

e
(5) The MDI panel reset key turned on. 5
(6) Switched to the manual mode
(JOG/HANDLE/INC).

nt (7) Other alarm occurred.

(There is also an alarm which is not set.)

Causes for cycle start LED turned off

6
ce
020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 7
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
nc

025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Emergency stop signal input

8
External reset signal input
MDI reset button turned on
Reset & rewind input
.c

Servo alarm generation

Changed to another mode or feed hold 9
Single block stop

6.1.4 TH alarm statuses (No. 030, 031)

w

No. Display Internal status when 1 is displayed 10

030 CHARACTER The position of the character which turned TH
NUMBER TH DATA alarm on is displayed in the number of charac-
w

ters from the beginning of the block at TH

alarm.
031 TH DATA Read code of character which turned TH alarm
on
w

118
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

6.1.5 Digital servo system alarm (No. 200, 201)

Diagnostic display of the detailed content of digital servo system alarm No.
414
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

OFA : Overflow alarm has occurred.

om
FBA : Wire breakage alarm has occurred.
(See No. 201.)
DCA : Regenerative discharge circuit alarm has occurred.
HVA : Overvoltage alarm has occurred.
HCA : Abnormal current alarm has occurred.
OVC : Overcurrent alarm has occurred.

r.c
LV : Undervoltage alarm has occurred.
OVL : Overload alarm has occurred.
(See No. 201.)

The detailed content of wire breakage alarm, overload alarm is displayed.

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

e
201 ALD EXP

When No. 200 OVL = 1:

ALD nt
1: Motor overheat
0: Amplifier overheat
When No. 200 FBA = 1:
ce
ALD EXP Detail of alarm
1 0 Built-in pulse coder wire breakage (hard)
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder wire breakage (hard)
0 0 Pulse coder wire breakage (soft)
nc

6.1.6 Serial pulse coder alarm (No. 202, 203)

Diagnostic display of the detailed content of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350
(pulse coder alarm).
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c

202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPHA

SPHA : Soft phase data trouble alarm has occurred.

CKA : Clock alarm has occurred.
w

BZA : Battery zero alarm has occurred.

RCA : Speed count trouble alarm has occurred.
PHA : Phase data trouble alarm has occurred.
w

BLA : Battery low alarm has occurred.

CSA : Check sum alarm has occurred.
w

119
 Diagnostic display of the detailed content of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351
(communication alarm).
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1
203 DTE CRCE STBE PRMA

DTE : Data error has occurred.

CRC : CRC error has occurred. 2

om
STBE : Stop bit error has occurred.
PRMA : The parameter illegal alarm has been given.

Servo parameter illegal alarm No. 417 is also displayed.

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS

r.c
OFS : A/D conversion of a digital servo current value is abnormal.
MCC : The contact of the servo amplifier’s magnetic contactor has 4
melted.
LDA : The LED of the serial pulse coder is abnormal.
PMS : A feedback error occurred.

e
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5
280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT

nt
When servo alarm No. 417 is detected by the NC, the cause of the alarm is
indicated. When the same alarm is detected by the servo system, bit 4
(PRM) of DGN No. 0203 is set to 1.
AXS : In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that exceeds
6
ce
the range of 1 to the number of controlled axes (such as 4 instead
of 3), or non–sequential value is set.
DIR : In parameter No. 2022, used for specifying the direction of 7
rotation of the motor, a valid value (111 or –111) has not been set.
PLS : In parameter No. 2024, used for specifying the number of
position feedback pulses per motor rotation, an invalid value,
nc

such as 0 or a negative value, has been set.

PLC : In parameter No. 2023, used for specifying the number of velocity 8
feedback pulses per motor rotation, an invalid value, such as 0
or a negative value, has been set.
MOT : In parameter No. 2020, used for specifying the motor model, an
invalid value has been set.
.c

9
6.1.7 Positional error display (No. 300)
No.
w

300 SERVO ERROR

10
The positional error is displayed in Least command units.
w

6.1.8 Machine position display (No. 301)

No.
301
w

MACHINE POSITION

The machine position from the reference point is displayed in least command
units.
120
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

6.1.9 Reference position shift function display (No. 302)

No.
302 DISTANCE FROM DECELERATION DOG TO THE FIRST GRID POINT

The distance from the deceleration dog to the first grid point is displayed on
the output unit.

om
6.1.10 Inductosyn display (No. 380 and No. 381)
No.
380 DEVIATION BETWEEN MOTOR ABSOLUTE POSITION AND OFFSET DATA

The deviation between the absolute position of the motor and the offset data
is displayed. That is, the remainder of (M (absolute motor position) – S

r.c
(offset data)) / l (1–pitch interval) is displayed in detection units.
No.
381 OFFSET DATA OF INDUCTOSYN

Offset data, received by the CNC at the time of macine position calculation,
is displayed in detection units.

e
6.1.11 Spindle data (No. 400–420)
No.
400

SIC
#7nt #6 #5 #4
SAI
#3
SS2
#2
SSR
#1
POS

0: The module required for spindle serial control is not installed.

#0
SIC
ce
1: The module required for spindle serial control is installed.
POS 0: The module required for spindle analog control is not installed.
1: The module required for spindle analog control is installed.
SSR 0: Spindle serial control is not used.
1: Spindle serial control is used.
nc

SS2 0: The 2nd spindle is not used in spindle serial control.

1: The 2nd spindle is used in spindle serial control.
SAI 1: Spindle analog control is not used.
0: Spindle analog control is used.
No.
.c

401 Alarm status of the serial spindle unit for the 1st spindle

No.
w

402 Alarm status of the serial spindle unit for the 2nd spindle
w
w

121
 Information related to communication errors in the spindle serial output
interface
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1
408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE

CRE 1: A CRC error occurred (warning).

FRE 1: A framing error occurred (warning). 2

om
SNE 1: The sender/receiver is incorrect.
CER 1: A receiver error occurred.
CME 1: In automatic scanning, no response is returned.
SCA 1: A communication alarm is issued on the spindle amplifier side.
3
SSA 1: A system alarm is issued on the spindle amplifier side.
(These states represent the causes of spindle alarm No. 749. These states
are caused mainly by noise, disconnection, and momentary power failure.)

r.c
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409
4
SPE S2E S1E SHE

Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated.

e
SPE In spindle serial control, serial spindle parameters 5
0: Satisfy start condition of spindle unit
1: Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit
S2E

S1E
nt
0: 2nd spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1: 2nd spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
0: 1st spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
6
ce
1: 1st spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
SHE 0: Serial communication module is correct on CNC side.
1: An error occurred in serial communication module on CNC side. 7
No.
410 Display of the load meter for the 1st spindle (%)
nc

Load meter (load data) of the 1st spindle when the serial spindle is used 8
No.
411 Display of the speed meter for the 1st spindle (rpm)
.c

Speed meter (motor speed) of the 1st spindle when the serial spindle is used 9
No.
412 Display of the load meter for the 2nd spindle (%)
w

Load meter (load data) of the 2nd spindle when the serial spindle is used 10
No.
413 Display of the speed meter for the 2nd spindle (rpm)
w

Speed meter (motor speed) of the 2nd spindle when the serial spindle is used
No.
w

414 SRLERRS1

Motion error on the 1st spindle during synchronous control

122
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

No.
415 SRLERRS2

Motion error on the 2nd spindle during synchronous control

No.
416 SRLSYCERR

om
Absolute value of the synchronous error between the 1st and the 2nd spindle
synchronous control
No.
417 Data returned by the 1st spindle position coder

Data returned by the 1st spindle position coder

r.c
No.
418 Positional shift of the 1st spindle

Positional shift of the 1st spindle in each mode, including a positional loop
No.

e
419 Data returned by the 2nd spindle position coder

Data returned by the 2nd spindle position coder

No.
420
nt Positional shift of the 2nd spindle

Positional shift of the 2nd spindle in each mode, including a positional loop
ce
The above four DGN items (No. 417 to 420) directly display the data received
from the serial spindle control unit.

6.1.12 Rigid tapping display (No. 450–457)

No.
nc

450 SPINDLE MOTION ERROR

The position deviation of the spindle during rigid tapping is displayed in

detection units.
No.
.c

451 SPINDLE MOTION PULSE

The number of pulses issued to the spindle during rigid tapping, is displayed
in detection units.
w

No.
454 TOTAL PULSE OF SPINDLE MOTION
w

The cumulative number of pulses, issued to the spindle during rigid tapping,
is displayed in detection units.
No.
455
w

SYNC. PULSE (SUM)

The momentary value (signed, cumulative) of a spindle–converted move

command difference during rigid tapping is displayed in detection units.
123
 No.
456 SYNC. ERROR
1
The momentary value (signed) of a spindle–converted position deviation
difference during rigid tapping is displayed in detection units.
No.
457 SYNC. WIDTH 2

om
The width (maximum value) of a synchronization error during rigid tapping
is displayed in detection units.

3
6.1.13 Polygon synchronization mode status (No. 470–478)
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

r.c
470 SC0 LGE SCF PST SPL

4
#0(SPL) : Spindle polygon synchronization is in progress.
#1(PST) : Spindle polygon synchronization mode is starting.
#2 : Spindle polygon synchronization mode is being released.
#3 : The spindle speed is being changed in spindle polygon

e
synchronization mode. 5
#4(SCF) : The spindle speed has been changed in spindle polygon
synchronization mode.
#5 nt
: Not used
#6(LGE) : In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the two spindles have
different loop gains.
#7(SC0) : In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the specified speed is
6
ce
zero.

This data indicates the cause of P/S alarm 5018 or 218. 7

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
471 NPQ PQE NSP SUO QCL PCL
nc

#0 to #3 →Cause of P/S alarm No. 5018

P/S alarm No. 5018 can be cleared by issuing a reset. The cause
8
indication is retained until the cause is removed or until polygon
synchronization mode is released.
#4 to #7 →Cause of P/S alarm No. 218
.c

If P/S alarm No. 218 occurs, polygon synchronization mode is

released. The cause indication, however, is retained until P/S 9
alarm No. 218 is cleared by issuing a reset.
#0 : The speed specified for spindle polygon synchronization is too
low. (The unit speed becomes 0 for internal operations.)
w

#1(PCL) : The first spindle (master axis in polygon synchronization) is

clamped.
10
#2(QCL) : The second spindle (slave axis in polygon synchronization) is
w

clamped.
#3(SUO) : The speed specified in spindle polygon synchronization is too
high. (The speed is restricted to the upper limit for internal
operations.)
w

#4(NSP) : A spindle required for control is not connected. (The serial

spindle, second spindle, etc. is not connected.)
#5 : A negative Q value is specified while the QDRC bit (bit 1 of
parameter No. 7603) is set to 1.
124
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#6(PQE) : The P value or Q value, specified with G51.2, falls outside the
predetermined range. Alternatively, the P and Q values are not
specified as a pair.
#7(NPQ) : Although the P and Q values are not specified with G51.2, an R
value is specified. Alternatively, none of the P, Q, or R value is
specified.
DGN
474 Rotation ratio of the master axis in spindle polygon

om
synchronization (specified P value)

In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the rotation ratio (specified P

value) of the current master axis (first spindle) is displayed.
DGN
475 Rotation ratio of the slave axis in spindle polygon synchronization
(specified Q value)

r.c
In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the rotation ratio (specified Q
value) of the current slave axis (second axis) is displayed.
DGN
476 Phase difference between two spindles in spindle polygon
synchronization (specified R value)

e
In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the current phase difference
(specified R value) is displayed. (The units are the minimum input increment
nt
for the rotation axis of the machine.)
If the RDGN bit (bit 5 of parameter 7603) is set to 1, the shift amount specified
for the serial spindle (number of specified pulses, calculated at a rate of 4096
pulses per 360 degrees) is displayed.
This diagnostic data indicates the actual speed of each spindle in
ce
synchronization mode.
DGN
477 Actual speed of the master axis for spindle polygon
synchronization (rpm)
nc

In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the actual speed of the master

axis (first spindle) is displayed.
DGN
478 Actual speed of the slave axis in spindle polygon synchronization (rpm)
.c

In spindle polygon synchronization mode, the actual speed of the slave axis
(second spindle) is displayed.
w
w
w

125
 6.1.14 Remote buffer protocol A status (No. 500–502)
No.
1
500 Displays the transmit command

1 : SYN 5 : SAT
2 : RDY 6 : GTD
3 : RST 7 : RTY 2

om
4 : ALM 8 : SDI
No.
501 Displays the receive command
3
1 : SYN 5 : CLB 9 : WAT
2 : RDY 6 : SET 10 : RTY
3 : ARS 7 : DAT 11 : RDI

r.c
4 : AAL 8 : EOD 12 : SDO
No.
4
502 Displays the remote buffer status

0 : Not ready for operation

e
1 : Reset 5
2 : Run
3 : Alarm
nt
4 : Line breakage

6.1.15 Display lated to MMC–IV (No. 510–513)

DGN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6
ce
510

7
This data indicates the internal MMC–IV information (not available to general
users).
DGN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
nc

511
8
This data indicates the internal MMC–IV information (not available to general
users).
DGN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c

512 PA1 PA0 BNK THH THL PRA 9

This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in
MMC–IV.
w

#0(PRA) 1 : A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM.

10
#2(THL) 0 : The temperature of the MMC board is too low.
1 : Normal
w

#3(THH) 0 : The temperature of the MMC board is too high.

1 : Normal
#4 0 : Normal
1 : An NMI has occurred on the MMC board.
w

#5(BNK) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,

0 : An alarm occurred in the lower half of shared RAM.
1 : An alarm occurred in the upper half of shared RAM.
126
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#6 (PA0) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,

1 : An alarm occurred at an even–numbered address.
#7 (PA1) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
1 : An alarm occurred at an odd–numbered address.
DGN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
513

om
This data indicates the internal MMC–IV information.
#4 For the VIDEO signal,
1 : The CNC/PMC screen is selected.
0 : The MMC screen is selected.

6.1.16 Small–diameter peck drilling cycle display (No. 520–523)

r.c
No.
520 PECKING COUNTER

The total count of the retract movements, performed during cutting after G83
is specified, is displayed. This count is cleared to zero when G83 is next

e
specified.
No.
521 PECKING BY SKIP SIGNAL
nt
The total count of the retract movements, performed by overload signal
reception during cutting after G83 is specified, is displayed. This count is
cleared to zero when G83 is next specified.
ce
No.
522 PECKING POINTER

The coordinates of the drilling axis where a retract movement was started
are displayed in units of the least input increment.
nc

No.
523 (PECK OLD POS – NEW POS)

The difference between the coordinates of the drilling axis where the
previous retract movement was started, and the coordinates of the drilling
.c

axis where the current retract movement was started, is displayed in units
of the least input increment.

6.1.17 Display of ATC for FD alpha (No. 530–531)

w

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
530 A99 A98 A97 A96 A95 A43

A43 : An unusable T code is specified with M06Tjj.

w

A95 : M06 is specified when the machine coordinate along the Z–axis
is positive.
A96 : Parameter No. 7810 for the current tool number is set to 0.
w

A97 : In canned cycle mode, M06 is specified.

In a block containing a reference position return command, M06
is specified.
In tool compensation mode, M06 is specified.
127
 A98 : M06 is specified when a reference position return operation has
not been performed after the power was turned on or the
emergency stop state was released. 1
During a tool exchange operation, the machine lock signal or
Z–axis ignore signal was turned on for the Z–axis.
A99 : During a tool exchange operation, a wrench alarm was detected.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
531 585 584 583 582 581 580 502
2

om
502 : Excessive pulse distribution to the spindle (system error)
580 : Spindle servo alarm (excessive error in the stop state)
581 : Spindle servo alarm (excessive error during movement) 3
582 : Spindle servo alarm (excessive drift)
583 : Spindle servo alarm (LSI overflow)

r.c
584 : ATC and spindle positioning sequence error (system error)
585 : Spindle servo alarm (excessive error during ATC magazine 4
indexing)

6.1.18 Simplified synchronous control display (No. 540)

No.

e
5
540 SYNC. ERROR

nt
The position deviation difference between the master axis and a
synchronized slave axis, is displayed in detection units.

6.1.19 Display related to the dual position feedback function

6
ce
(No. 550–553)
No.
7
550 Closed loop error

Data is displayed in detection units.

nc

No.
8
551 Semi–closed loop error

Data is displayed in detection units.

.c

No.
9
552 Error between semi–closed and closed loops

Data is displayed in detection units.

w

No. 10
553 Amount of dual position compensation
w

Data is displayed in detection units.

w

128
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

6.2 Waveform Diagnosis Display

The purpose of this function is to tune the servo motor easily by graphically
displaying the changes in servo motor error, torque and pulse distribution in
waveform.
(1) Setting a parameter
1 Set the parameter for wave analysis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

om
3112 SGD

#0(SGD) 0: Graphic function is effective

*1: Wave analysis is effective
(The usual graphic function cannot be used)
2 Turn off the power once, then on again.
(2) Displaying parameter screen for wave diagnosis.

r.c
1 Display SYSTEM contents screen by pressing SYSTEM
key.

2 Press key twice to display [[Link]] soft key.

3 Display the parameter screen of Waveform diagnoses by pressing
[[Link]] soft key.

e
4 Position the cursor and enter the required data. Data can be
entered from the keyboard. Press the INPUT
key after entering the

5
nt
required data.
Those items indicated by ***** cannot be set.
When the cursor is positioned to an item to be set, guidance
information for that item is displayed in the box displayed in the
ce
right-hand half of the screen. Use the displayed information for
reference. When one screen cannot display all the guidance
PAGE
information, press the page change keys ( PAGE and ) to
display the remaining part of the information.

WAVE DIAGNOS. (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345

nc

GRP CONDITION 100

GRP CONDITION
SAMPLING TIME *****MS
(ONE–S TYPE)
TRIGGER ******* 0:START
1:START &TRG↑
(CH–1) (CH–2) 2:START &TRG↓
.c

(MEMORY TYPE)
DATA NO. 11 22 100:DATA OF
UNIT 1000 10 MEMORY
SIGNAL ******* ******* 1/3

>_ S 0 T0000
w

EDIT **** *** *** [Link]

[ [Link] ] [[Link] ] [ [Link] ] [ ] [ ]
w

(a) One-shot type waveform diagnosis (parameter)

Display start condition
0: Starts data collection when the [START] soft key is pressed. Data
is collected for a specified sampling period, after which the data is
w

plotted.
1: Starts data collection on a rising edge of a trigger signal after the
[START] soft key is pressed. Data is collected for a specified
sampling period, after which the data is plotted.
129
 2: Starts data collection on a falling edge of a trigger signal after the
[START] soft key is pressed. Data is collected for a specified
sampling period, after which the data is plotted. 1
Sampling period: Sets the period during which data is to be collected.
Setting range: 10 to 32760
Units: 1 ms
Trigger: Sets a PMC address and bit. Set this item when 1 or 2 is specified
for the display start condition. This item specifies a trigger for 2

om
starting data collection.
Example: G0007.2: ST signal
Data number: The table below lists the numbers of data subject to
waveform display. A number from 1 to 8 can be entered in
the squares (j) of the data numbers below. 3
Data No. Description Units

r.c
00 No waveform is displayed. –
0V Servo error along the n-th axis (8 ms) Pulses (detection units)
(position deviation)
4
1V Number of pulses distributed to the Pulses (increment system)
n-th axis (move command)
2V Torque value for the n-th axis % (ratio to the maximum
(actual current) current)

e
5
3V Servo error along the n-th axis (2 ms) Pulses (detection units)
(position deviation)
5V
6V

7V
nt
Actual speed along the n-th axis
Current command for the n-th axis

Thermal simulation data for the n-th

axis
RPM
% (ratio to the maximum
current)
% (OVC alarm ratio)
6
ce
90 Combined speed along the first, Pulses (increment system)
second, and third axes
99 On/off state of the machine signal None 7
specified with a signal address
10V Actual speed of the spindle along the % (ratio to the maximum
n-th axis speed)
nc

11V Load meter for the spindle on the n-th % (ratio to the maximum
axis power) 8
Data units : Weighting used when the data subject to analysis is 1. This
item is set automatically. Set this item only when different units
are to be used.
.c

Setting range: 1 to 1000

Units: 0.001 increments
9
Signal address: PMC address and bit number. Set this item when the data
number 99 is specified. The example given in the trigger
item, above, applies.
w

(b) Memory-type waveform diagnosis (parameter) 10

Display start condition
w

100: Plots data sampled in memory type mode.

Sampling time: Not applicable

Trigger: Not applicable

w

Data number: The table below lists the numbers of data subject to
waveform display. A number from 1 to 8 can be entered
in the squares (V) of the data numbers below. No number
can be set for data that has not been saved.
130
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

Data No. Description Units

00 No waveform is displayed. –
0V Servo error along the n-th axis (8 ms) Pulses (detection units)
(position deviation)
1V Number of pulses distributed to the Pulses (increment system)
n-th axis (move command)
2V Torque value for the n-th axis % (ratio to the maximum
(actual current) current)

om
5V Actual speed along the n-th axis RPM
6V Current command for the n-th axis % (ratio to the maximum
current)
7V Thermal simulation data for the n-th % (OVC alarm ratio)
axis

Data unit : Weighting used when data subject to analysis is 1. This item is

r.c
set automatically. Set this item only when different units are to be
used.
Setting range: 1 to 1000
Units: 0.001
Signal address: Not applicable
(3) Graphic display

e
(a) Plotting of one-shot waveform diagnosis data
One-shot waveform diagnosis data is sampled and simultaneously
nt
displayed graphically. Unlike memory type data, one-shot
waveform diagnosis data is not saved for later output.
The sampling of one-shot waveform diagnosis data is started when
the [START] soft key is pressed on the waveform diagnosis (graph)
screen and the start condition is satisfied.
ce
After waveform diagnosis data has been collected for the specified
sampling period, sampling stops.

1 Press the SYSTEM

function key. When the continuation menu

key is pressed, the [[Link]] soft key appears. Then,

nc

press the [[Link]] soft key to display the waveform

diagnosis (parameter) screen. Waveform diagnosis
(parameter) setting is explained in an earlier description.
2 Press the [[Link]] soft key.
3 The waveform diagnosis (graph) screen appears. The soft
keys for operation selection are displayed.
.c

WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345

CH1 SAMPLING CH2
w
w
w

EDIT **** *** ***

[ START ] [ TIME³ ] [ ²TIME ] [H–DOBL ] [ H–HALF ]

131
 4 Press the [START] soft key.
In the upper part of the screen, the word SAMPLING blinks,
indicating that data sampling has started. Upon the 1
completion of data collection, a waveform is displayed
automatically.

WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345

CH1 CH2 2

om
3

r.c
EDIT **** *** *** 4
[ START ] [ TIME³ ] [ ²TIME ] [H–DOBL ] [ H–HALF ]

e
(b) Plotting of memory-type waveform diagnosis data 5
To plot memory-type waveform diagnosis data, set 100 for the
display start condition. When the [START] soft key is pressed while
nt
data is being memorized, data saving stops, and the waveform for
the saved data is displayed. Whether data is being memorized can
be checked by using the waveform diagnosis (memory data)
screen.
The memory-type waveform diagnosis data width is a maximum of
6
ce
32,760 ms.

1 Press the SYSTEM

function key. When the continuation menu 7
key is pressed, the [[Link]] soft key appears. Then,
press the [[Link]] soft key to display the waveform
nc

diagnosis (parameter) screen. Waveform diagnosis

(parameter) setting is explained in an earlier description.
8
2 Press the [[Link]] soft key.
3 The waveform diagnosis (graphic) screen appears. The soft
keys for operation selection are also displayed.
.c

9
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345
CH1 CH2
w

10
w
w

EDIT **** *** ***

[ START ] [ TIME³ ] [ ²TIME ] [H–DOBL ] [ H–HALF ]

132
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

4 Press the [START] soft key.

In the upper-left part of the screen, the words NOT READY
blink, indicating that saved data is still being read. Once the
saved data has been read, waveform display is started. The
display in the upper-left part of the screen changes from NOT
READY to the date on which the data was saved.

WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345

CH1 DATE = 93/01/13 [Link] CH2

om
r.c
EDIT **** *** ***
[ START ] [ TIME³ ] [ ²TIME ] [H–DOBL ] [ H–HALF ]

(c) Operation selection keys

e
[ [Link] ] [[Link] ] [ [Link] ] [ ] [ ]

Press
nt
[ START ]

[ START ]
[ TIME³ ]

[ CH–1° ]
[ ²TIME ]

[ CH–1± ]
[H–DOBL ]

[ V–DOBL ]
[ H–HALF ]

[ V–HALF ]
ce
[ START ] [ CH–2° ] [ CH–2± ] [ V–DOBL ] [ V–HALF ]
nc

Fig. 1 Soft Key Display

[START] : Plots the waveform of the object being analyzed.

[TIME³] : Shifts the CH-1/CH-2 waveform to the right.
[²TIME] : Shifts the CH-1/CH-2 waveform to the left.
.c

[H-DOBL] : Increases the horizontal width of the CH-1/CH-2 waveform by

a factor of 2.
[H-HALF] : Reduces the horizontal width of the CH-1/CH-2 waveform by a
factor of 2.
w

[CH-1°] : Shifts the CH-1 zero point level up.

[CH-1±] : Shifts the CH-1 zero point level down.
[V-DOBL] : Increases the height of the CH-1/CH-2 waveform by a factor of
2.
w

[V-HALF] : Reduces the height of the CH-1/CH-2 waveform by a factor of

2.
[CH-2°] : Shifts the CH-2 zero point level up.
w

[CH-2±] : Shifts the CH-2 zero point level down.

133
 (4) Selection of memory data
(a) Displaying the memory data screen
1
1 Press the SYSTEM
function key. When the continuation menu

key is pressed, the [[Link]] soft key appears. Then,

press the [[Link]] soft key to display the waveform
diagnosis (parameter) screen.
2

om
2 Press the [[Link]] soft key.
3 The waveform diagnosis (memory data) screen appears. The
soft keys for operation selection are also displayed.

WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345

3
CONDITION : 100 TRIGGER : G0123.4

DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS

r.c
POS ERROR X Y Z A B C U V
MOTION CMD X Y Z A B C U V
CURRNT(%) X Y Z A B C U V 4
SPEED(RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT X Y Z A B C U V
SMPL TIME : 2.0 SEC
DATE : MEMORY

e
EDIT **** *** *** [Link]
5
[ SELECT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ START ]

4
nt
The operation selection soft keys are as follows:
[ [Link] ] [[Link] ] [ [Link] ]

Press
[ ] [ ]
6
ce
[ SELECT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ START ]

7
[ ] [ ] [ PUNCH ] [ ] [ ]
nc

Fig. 2 Soft Key Display

8
(b) Selecting memory data
1 Display the waveform diagnosis (memory data) screen.
2 Position the cursor and enter the required data. For sampling
.c

axis selection, move the cursor to the desired data type, type 9
in desired axis names, then press the [SELECT] soft key or the
INPUT
key. The entered axis names appear in the sampling
w

axis field to the right of the selected data type field.

10
Example: XYZ + [SELECT] or INPUT

3 When axis selection is completed, a sampling period for one

w

axis is displayed. Then, press the [START] soft key to start

data sampling.
NOTE1 Those items indicated by ***** cannot be set.
NOTE2 To change the selected axes, type in the desired
w

axes again, then press the [SELECT] soft key. If the

[SELECT] soft key is pressed without having typed
in any axes, no axes are selected.
134
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

NOTE3 If selected axes are changed during waveform data

sampling, the sampling operation stops. In such a
case, press the [START] soft key to restart data sam-
pling.
NOTE4 The initial sampling axis setting is such that no sam-
pling axis is selected.
(c) Memory data parameter

om
1 Data saving termination condition
100: Terminates data saving when a servo alarm is issued.
101: Terminates data saving when a servo alarm is issued or
the rising edge of a trigger signal is detected.
102: Terminates data saving when a servo alarm is issued or
the falling edge of a trigger signal is detected.
The data saving width is 32,760 ms, maximum. If a specified

r.c
saving termination condition is not satisfied upon the elapse of
32760 ms, older data is replaced by newer data.
In the case of data saving termination by the issue of a servo alarm,
the termination of data saving can be delayed by the period (in ms)
set in parameter No. 3120.
2 Trigger: Sets a PMC address and bit. Set this item when
101 or 102 is specified for the termination

e
condition. This item specifies a trigger for
terminating data collection.
Example: G0007.2: ST signal

Data type
Position
3 nt
Data type: The table below lists the data types subject to
waveform display.

Description
Servo error along the n-th axis (8 ms)
Unit
Pulses (detection units)
ce
deviation
Move Number of pulses distributed to the n-th Pulses
command axis (increment system)
Actual Torque value on the n-th axis % (ratio to the maxi-
current mum current)
nc

Actual Actual speed along the n-th axis RPM

speed
Current Current command for the n-th axis % (ratio to the maxi-
command mum current)
Thermal Thermal simulation data for the n-th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
simulation
.c

4 Sampling axis: Displays the names of the axes subject to

sampling.
5 Sampling time: Displays a sampling period for one axis.
6 Date and time of saving: Displays MEMORY during data
w

sampling. When data sampling is

terminated, the date of the
termination is displayed.
(5) Output of waveform diagnosis data
w

Servo alarm type waveform diagnosis data can be output to an

input/output unit connected to the reader/punch interface.
Set the input/output unit to be used for output in parameter No. 0020 and
Nos. 0100 to 0135.
w

In addition, set a code in bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0020.

(a) Output of waveform diagnosis data
Servo alarm type waveform diagnosis data can be output to an
input/output unit, according to the procedure below.
135
 1 Set the EDIT mode.

2 Press the SYSTEM

function key, then select the waveform 1
diagnosis (memory data) screen.

3 Press the soft keys [[Link]], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC],

in this order.
2

om
For an explanation of input/output to and from the FANUC Floppy
Cassette or FA Card, see item (b).

WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345

3
CONDITION : 100 TRIGGER : G0123.4

DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS

POS ERROR X Y Z A B C U V

r.c
MOTION CMD X Y Z A B C U V
CURRNT(%) X Y Z A B C U V
SPEED(RPM) NONE 4
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT X Y Z A B C U V
SMPL TIME : 2.0 SEC
DATE : 93/01/13 [Link]

e
EDIT **** *** *** [Link] 5
[ SELECT ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ START ]

[
nt ]

]
[

[
]

]
[ PUNCH ]

[
Press

]
[

[CANCEL ]
] [

[ EXEC ]
]
6
ce
7
(b) Output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card
nc

In the item below, a FANUC Floppy Cassette is referred to as a

Cassette, and a FANUC FA Card as a Card.
8
(i) Directory
When the directory of a Cassette or Card is displayed, the name
of a file containing servo alarm type waveform diagnosis data is
registered as WAVE DIAGNOS.
.c

The procedure for displaying the directories is described later. 9

(ii) Output to the Cassette/Card
Servo alarm type waveform diagnosis data can be output to a
Cassette or Card by following the procedure below.
w

1 Set EDIT mode. 10

2 Press the SYSTEM
function key, then select the waveform
w

diagnosis (memory data) screen.

3 Open the write protect switch of the Cassette or Card.

4 Press the [[Link]], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys,

w

in this order.
Specify a file number at the end.
The file name WAVE DIAGNOS is assigned.
136
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

If the Cassette or Card used as the output destination already

contains a file having the same name as that specified, P/S alarm
No. 86 is issued. To a Cassette or Card, only one file of waveform
diagnosis data of servo alarm type can be output. When output to
a Cassette or Card containing unnecessary servo alarm type
waveform diagnosis data is needed, delete the file having the same
name from the Cassette or Card beforehand.
Deleting a file is described later.
(iii) Displaying the directory of a Cassette or Card

om
The directory of a Cassette or Card can be displayed by following
the procedure below.
1 Set EDIT mode.

2 Press the PROG function key, then select the program screen.

3 Press . Then press [FLOPPY].

r.c
PAGE
4 Press the page change key .

In this way, the directory is displayed.

(iv) Deleting a file from a Cassette or Card
A file can be deleted from a Cassette or Card by following the

e
procedure below.
1 Set EDIT mode.

3
4
5
nt
Press the PROG function key, then select the program screen.

Open the write protect switch of the Cassette or Card.

Press [FLOPPY].
Press [DELETE].
ce
6 Type in a file number, then press [F SET].
7 Press [EXEC].
The file having the specified file number is deleted. After the
file is deleted, all subsequent file numbers are decremented by
1.
nc

NOTE The floppy directory display function is optional.

.c
w
w
w

137
 6.3 Screen Display at Power On
(1) Slot configuration display 1
PCB modules mounted on the slots are displayed. The CRT displays
this screen when a hardware trouble or invalid leading of PCB has
occurred.
(a) Screen display
2

om
SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY

0: 003E4000 0:
1: 30464202
2: 00504303
1:
2:
3
3: 3:
4: 4:
5: 5:

r.c
: :
: :
4

e
5
Slot No. (2ndary)
Module ID code, Software ID code, Logical No. (*1)
Slot No. (Primary)
nt
*1) Module ID code of PCBs ĘĘjjnn

Slot No. of CNC (Logical No.)

Module function (Software ID code)
Type of PCBs (Module ID code)
6
ce
(b) Module ID code
B9 : Series 16 main CPU
BA : Series16/18 option 2
7
BD : Series 18 main CPU (For 4–axis)
3F : Remote buffer DNC1
9D : PMC–RC
nc

B4 : PMC–RB5/RB6
46 : I/O card (Sink type) 8
5F : I/O card (Source type)
A8 : I/O card with power supply (Sink type)
B1 : I/O card with power supply (Source type)
6D : CAP–II
.c

A9 : Graphic
9
(c) Software ID code
40 : Main CPU
41 : PMC–RC
w

42 : Built–in I/O card

43 : Sub CPU 10
45 : Graphic
49 : CAP II
w

4A : Remote buffer
4F : PMC–RE
50 : Additional 4–axis control (FS16 option 2)
53 : Loader control
59 : RISC board for high–precision contour control
w

5A : Sub CPU for background drawing

5C : Built–in I/O card
5E : MMC–IV or HSSB interface
67 : PMC–RB5/RB6
138
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

(2) Screen of waiting for setting module configuration information

B0B1 – 01

om
SLOT 01 (3046) : END END : End
SLOT 02 (0050) : Blank :
Waiting
Module ID
code
Slot No.

r.c
(3) Display of the software series and version

ÅÅÅÅÅ
e
B0B1 – 01
ÅÅÅÅÅ
CNC control software

nt ÅÅÅÅÅ
SERVO : 9070–01 Servo CPU software

ÅÅÅÅÅ
SUB : xxxx–xx Sub CPU (Remote buffer)
OMM : yyyy–yy OMM/Macro Executer
PMC : zzzz–zz PMC Ladder soft
ce
OMM : Order–Made Macro

(4) Initial screen (different on some machines)

nc

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010

X 235.891
Y 509.818
.c

Z –50.000
PART COUNT 11
RUN TIME 0H18M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M23S
w

ACT.F 1200 MM/M S 0 T0000

MEM STRT MTN *** [Link]
[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ (OPRT) ]
w
w

139
 6.4 System Configuration Screen
Software and hardware configuration are displayed on the system 1
configuration screen when the CNC becomes ready for operation.
(1) Display method

Function key SYSTEM

.
2

om
±
Soft key [SYSTEM].
±

Page key PAGE or

PAGE
, selecting screens (2) to (4). 3
(2) PCB configuration screen
(a) Screen display

r.c
Software series of module with CPU
4

ÅÅÅÅÅ
SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) PAGE01

ÅÅÅÅÅ
SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION
00 0090 : 40 B0B1 0006 Software version of module
0D 009A : 45 600M 0003 with CPU

e
02 013F : 4A B401 0001
03 019D : 41 4068 0001 5

nt ÅÅÅÅÅ
Software ID (type)
6
ce
7
Module ID
Slot No.
(80X8F is 2nd side)
nc

(b) Module ID code

B9 : Series 16 main CPU 8
BA : Series16/18 option 2
BD : Series 18 main CPU (For 4–axis)
3F : Remote buffer DNC1
9D : PMC–RC
.c

B4 : PMC–RB5/RB6
46 : I/O card (Sink type)
9
5F : I/O card (Source type)
A8 : I/O card with power supply (Sink type)
B1 : I/O card with power supply (Source type)
w

6D : CAP–II
45 : Graphic (CAP–II) 10
9A : Graphic
w
w

140
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

(c) Software ID code

40 : Main CPU
41 : PMC–RC
42 : Built–in I/O card
43 : Sub CPU
45 : Graphic
49 : CAP II
4A : Remote buffer
4F : PMC–RE

om
50 : Additional 4–axis control (FS16 option 2)
53 : Loader control
59 : RISC board for high–precision contour control
5A : Sub CPU for background drawing
5C : Built–in I/O card
5E : MMC–IV or HSSB interface
67 : PMC–RB5/RB6
(3) Software configuration screen

r.c
Kind of software
Software series

SYSTEM CONFIG (SOFTWARE)

SYSTEM BDB1 0001 ÅÅÅÅÅ

ÅÅÅÅÅ
Software version

ÅÅÅÅÅ
BASIC+OPTION–A1 Software

e
configuration
SERVO 9080 0001

ÅÅÅÅÅ
PMC 4062 0001
LADDER FS16 0001 Character written on

ÅÅÅÅÅ
MACRO BBBB bbbb PMC title screen
nt ÅÅÅÅÅ
Character written on
macro compiler and on
CAP.
ce
(4) Module configuration screen
The configuration of the modules mounted on each board is
nc

displayed.
Slot number
(80 to 8F are on the secondary side.)

SYSTEM CONFIG (MODULE) O1234 N56789

Type of the
SLOT 00 MAIN CPU BOARD printed circuit
.c

board on which
the module is
FLASH ROM MODULE : 6MB mounted
DRAM MODULE : 6MB
ADDITIONAL SRAM : –––
CRTC MODULE : 9″CRT
w

SERVO 1/2 AXIS MODULE : MOUNTED

SERVO 3/4 AXIS MODULE : ––– Indication showing that
SERIAL SPINDLE LSI : MOUNTED the module is mounted
ANALOG SPINDLE LSI : ––– or the module type
Module name
w

MEM **** *** *** [Link]

[ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [SYSTEM ] [ ]
w

System configuration of another PCB is displayed by page key

PAGE
( or PAGE ).

NOTE See Maintenance Manual for display of each module.

141
 6.5 Interface between CNC and PMC/MT and
Displaying I/O Signals 1
(1) One–path control
Addresses of interface signals between CNC and PMC/MT.

om
G000
X000

CNC PMC MT

F000
Y000

3

r.c
(2) Two-path control
The figure below shows the addresses of the interface signals between 4
the CNC and the PMC.
Note, however, that some of signals common to paths 1 and 2 are
allocated to path 1.

e
5
CNC PMC MT
G000

Path 1 nt F000

X000

6
ce
Path 2 Y000

G1000

F1000

7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

142
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

6.5.1 I/O signal list

f : Available
F : Available only with
2–path control
– : Unavailable

om
T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
*+ED1 to *+ED8 External deceleration signal G118 f f
*+L1 to *+L8 Overtravel signal G114 f f
*-ED1 to *-ED8 External deceleration signal G120 f f
*-L1 to *-L8 Overtravel signal G116 f f
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2 f f

r.c
*AFV0 to *AFV7 2nd feedrate override G013 f f
signal

*BECLP B–axis clamp completion G038#7 – f

signal

*BEUCP B–axis unclamp completion G038#6 – f

e
signal

*CHLD Chopping hold signal G051#7 – f

*CHP8 to Chopping feedrate override G051#0 to – f

*CHP0

*CRTOF
nt
signals

Automatic erase CRT

screen display cancel
signal
#3

G062#1 f f
ce
*DEC1 to Deceleration signal for X009 f f
*DEC8 reference position return

*EAXSL Control axis selection F129#7 f f

status signal
(PMC axis control)

*ESP X008#4 f f
nc

Emergency stop signal

*ESP G008#4 f f
*ESPA G071#1 f f
Emergency stop
E t signal
i l
*ESPB G075#1 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
*ESPC G205#1 f f
*FLWU Follow–up signal G007#5 f f
.c

*FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signal G012 f f

*FV0E to *FV7E Feedrate override signal G151 f f

(PMC axis control)
w

*FV0O to Software operator’s panel F078 f f

*FV7O signal (*FV0 to *FV7)

*HROV0 to 1% step rapid traverse G096#0 to f f

*HROV6 override signal #6
w

*IT Interlock signal G008#0 f f

*IT1 to *IT8 Interlock signal for each G130 f f

axis

f f
w

*JV0 to *JV15 Manual feedrate override G010,

signal G011

*JV0O to Software operator’s panel F079, f f

*JV15O signal(*JV0 to *JV15) F080

143
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
*PLSST Polygon spindle stop signal G038#0 f
1
-
*SCPF Spindle clamp completion G028#5 f -
signal

*SP Feed hold signal G008#5 f f

f f
2

om
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6
*SSTP1 G027#3 f –
*SSTP2 Stop signal in each spindle G027#4 f –
*SSTP3 G027#5 f –
3
*SUCPF Spindle unclamp G028#4 f –
completion signal

*TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override G049#0 to – f

r.c
signal G050#1

*TSB Tailstock barrier select G060#7 f – 4

signal

+J1 to +J8 Feed axis and direction G100 f f

selection signal

+J1O to +J4O Software operator’s panel F081#0,#2, f f

e
signal (+J1 to +J4) #4,#6 5
+Jg, –Jg, +Ja, Feed axis and direction G086#0 to f f
–Ja selection signals #3

+LM1 to +LM8

+MIT1,+MIT2
nt
Stroke limit external setting
signal

Manual feed interlock

signal for each axis
G110

X004#2,#4
–

f
f

–
6
ce
+MIT1,+MIT2 Tool offset write signal X004#2,#4 f –

+MIT1 to +MIT4 Interlock signal for each G132#0 to – f

axis and direction #3 7
–J1 to –J8 Feed axis and direction G102 f f
selection signal
nc

–J1O to –J4O Software operator’s panel F081#1,#3, f f

signal (–J1 to –J4) #5,#7
8
–LM1 to –LM8 Stroke limit external setting G112 – f
signal

–MIT1,–MIT2 Manual feed interlock f –

signal for each axis X004#3,#5
.c

–MIT1,–MIT2 Tool offset write signal f – 9

–MIT1 to –MIT4 Interlock signal for each G134#0 to – f
axis and direction #3

ABTQSV Servo axis abnormal load F090#0 f f

w

detected signal
10
ABTSP1 First–spindle abnormal load F090#1 f f
detected signal
w

ABTSP2 Second–spindle abnormal F090#2 f f

load detected signal

AFL Miscellaneous function lock G005#6 f f

signal
w

AL Alarm signal F001#0 f f

144
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
ALMA F045#0 f f
Al
Alarm i l
signal
ALMB F049#0 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
ALMC F168#0 f f
ALNGH Tool axis direction handle G023#7 – f
feed mode signal

om
AR0 to AR15 Actual spindle speed signal F040, f –
F041

ARSTA G071#0 f f
Alarm resett signal
Al i l
ARSTB G075#0 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
ARSTC G205#0 f f
B00 to B31 2nd auxiliary function code F030 to f f

r.c
signal F033

BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 f f

BCLP B–axis clamp signal F061#1 – f
BDT1,BDT2 to Optional block skip signal G044#0, f f
BDT9 G045

BDTO Software operator’s panel F075#2 f f

e
signal(BDT)

BF 2nd auxiliary
y function F007#4 f –
BF
BFIN
BFIN
BGEACT
nt
strobe signal

2nd auxiliary
y function
completion signal

Background busy signal

F007#7
G005#4
G005#7
F053#4
–
f
–
f
f
–
f
f
ce
BGEN Power Mate background G092#4 f f
busy signal

BGIALM Power Mate read/write G092#3 f f

alarm signal

BGION Power Mate read/write G092#2 f f

inprogress signal
nc

BUCLP B–axis unclamp signal F061#0 – f

CDZ Chamferring signal G053#7 f –
CFINA F046#1 f f
Spindle
S i dl switch
it h completion
l ti
CFINB F050#1 f f
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
.c

CFINC F169#1 f f
CHPA F046#0 f f
Power line
P li switch
it h signal
i l
CHPB F050#0 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
CHPC F269#0 f f
w

CHPCYL Chopping cycle signal F039#3 – f

CHPMD Chopping–in–progress F039#2 – f
signal
w

CHPST Chopping start signal G051#6 – f

CLRCH1 to Torque limit reach signals F180 f f

CLRCH8 for butt–type reference
position setting
w

CON Cs contour control change G027#7 f f

signal

145
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
COSP Spindle command signal F064#5 F –
1
CSS Constant surface speed F002#2 f f
signal

CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2 f f
CTH1B,CTH2B
Clutch/gear
Cl t h/ signal
i l
G074#3,#2 f f 2

om
(serial spindle)
s indle)
CTH1C,CTH2C G204#3,#2 f f
CUT Cutting feed signal F002#6 f f
DEFMDA G072#3 f f
DEFMDB
Differential
Diff ti l mode
d command
d
G076#3 f f
3
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
DEFMDC G206#3 f f
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3 f f

r.c
DM00 F009#7 f f
DM01 F009#6 f f
4
Decode M signal
DM02 F009#5 f f
DM30 F009#4 f f
DMMC Direct operation select G042#7 f f

e
signal 5
DNCI DNC operation select G043#5 f f
signal

DRN

DRNE

DRNO
nt
Dry run signal

Dry run signal

(PMC axis control)

Software operator’s panel

G046#7

G150#7

F075#5
f

f
f

f
6
ce
signal(DRN)

DSP1, DSP2, Spindle motor speed Y(n+1) f f

DSP3 detection signals #0 to #2 7
DSV1 to DSV8 Servo motor speed Y(n+0) f f
detection signals
nc

DTCH1 to Controlled axis detach G124 f f

DTCH8 signal
8
EA0 to EA6 Address signal for external G002#0 to f f
data input #6

EABUFA F131#1 f f
f f
.c

EABUFB Buffer full signal

g F134#1
EABUFC (PMC axis control) F137#1 f f
9
EABUFD F140#1 f f
EACNT1 to Controlling signal F182 f f
w

EACNT8 (PMC axis control)

EADEN1 to Distribution completion F112 f f 10

EADEN8 signal (PMC axis control)

EAX1 to EAX8 Control axis select signal G136 f f

w

(PMC axis control)

EBSYA F130#7 f f
EBSYB Axis control command read F133#7 f f
com letion signal
completion
w

EBSYC (PMC axis control) F136#7 f f

EBSYD F139#7 f f

146
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
EBUFA G142#7 f f
EBUFB Axis control command read G154#7 f f
EBUFC signal (PMC axis control) G166#7 f f
EBUFD G178#7 f f

om
EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to f f
#6
EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to f f
Axis control command #6
EC0C to EC6C signal (PMC axis control) G167#0 to f f
#6
EC0D to EC6D G179#0 to f f
#6

r.c
ECKZA F130#1 f f
ECKZB Followingg zero checking
g F133#1 f f
ECKZC signal (PMC axis control) F136#1 f f
ECKZD F139#1 f f
ECLRA G142#6 f f

e
ECLRB Reset signal
g G154#6 f f
ECLRC (PMC axis control) G166#6 f f
ECLRD
ED0 to ED15

EDENA
nt
Data signal for external
data input
G178#6
G000,
G001

F130#3
f
f

f
f
f

f
ce
EDENB Auxiliaryy function executing
g F133#3 f f
EDENC signal (PMC axis control) F136#3 f f
EDEND F139#3 f f
EDGN Slave diagnosis selection F177#7 f f
signal
nc

EF External operation signal F008#0 – f

EFD External operation signal F007#1 – f

for high–speed interface

EFIN External operation function G005#1 – f

completion signal
.c

EFINA G142#0 f f
EFINB Auxiliary function G154#0 f f
com letion signal
completion
EFINC (PMC axis control) G166#0 f f
EFIND G178#0 f f
w

EGENA F130#4 f f
EGENB Axis moving
g signal
g F133#4 f f
EGENC (PMC axis control) F136#4 f f
w

EGEND F139#4 f f
EIALA F130#2 f f
EIALB Alarm signal
g F133#2 f f
w

EIALC (PMC axis control) F136#2 f f

EIALD F139#2 f f

147
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
EID0A to G146 to f f
1
EID31A G149
EID0B to G158 to f f
EID31B Axis control data signal
g G161
(PMC axis control) f f
EID0C to G170 to 2

om
EID31C G173
EID0D to G182 to f f
EID31D G185
EIF0A to G144, f f
EIF15A G145 3
EIF0B to G156, f f
EIF15B Axis control feedrate signal
g G157
(PMC axis control) f f

r.c
EIF0C to G168,
EIF15C G169
EIF0D to G180, f f
4
EIF15D G181
EINPA F130#0 f f
EINPB In–position signal
g F133#0 f f

e
EINPC (PMC axis control) F136#0 f f 5
EINPD F139#0 f f
EKC0 to EKC7 Key code signal G098 f f
EKENB

EKSET
nt
Key code read completion
signal

Key code read signal

F053#7

G066#7
f

f
f
f

f
f
6
ce
EM11A to F132,
EM48A F142
EM11B to F135, f f
EM48B Auxiliaryy function code F145 7
EM11C to signal (PMC axis control) F138, f f
EM48C F148
nc

EM11D to F141, f f
EM48D F151
8
EMBUFA G142#2 f f
EMBUFB Buffering
g disable signal
g G154#2 f f
EMBUFC (PMC axis control) G166#2 f f
.c

EMBUFD G178#2 f f
9
EMFA F131#0 f f
EMFB Auxiliaryy function strobe F134#0 f f
EMFC signal (PMC axis control) F137#0 f f
w

EMFD F140#0 f f 10
EMSBKA G143#7 f f
EMSBKB Block stop disable signal
g G155#7 f f
w

EMSBKC (PMC axis control) G167#7 f f

EMSBKD G179#7 f f
ENB F001#4 f f
w

ENB2 Spindle enable signal F038#2 f –

ENB3 F038#3 f –

148
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
ENBKY External key input mode G066#1 f f
selection signal

EOTNA F130#6 f f
EOTNB Negative–direction F133#6 f f
overtravel signal
EOTNC (PMC axis control) F136#6 f f

om
EOTND F139#6 f f
EOTPA F130#5 f f
EOTPB Positive–direction F133#5 f f
overtravel signal
EOTPC (PMC axis control) F136#5 f f
EOTPD F139#5 f f
EOV0 Override 0% signal F129#5 f f

r.c
(PMC axis control)

EPARM Slave parameter selection F177#6 f f

signal

EPRG Slave program selection F177#4 f f

signal

ERDIO Slave external read start F177#1 f f

e
signal

EREND Read completion signal for F060#0 f f

external data input

ERS
ESBKA
ESBKB
nt
External reset signal

Block stop signal

g
G008#7
G142#3
G154#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
ce
ESBKC (PMC axis control) G166#3 f f
ESBKD G178#3 f f
ESEND Search completion signal F060#1 f f
for external data input

ESKIP Skip signal X004#6 f f

(PMC axis control)
nc

ESOFA G142#4 f f
ESOFB Servo off signal
g G154#4 f f
ESOFC (PMC axis control) G166#4 f f
ESOFD G178#4 f f
.c

ESRSYC Simple spindle G064#6 f f

synchronous control signal

ESTB Read signal for external G002#7 f f

data input
w

ESTPA G142#5 f f
ESTPB Axis control temporaryy stop G154#5 f f
ESTPC signal (PMC axis control) G166#5 f f
f f
w

ESTPD G178#5
ESTPIO Slave read/write stop signal F177#2 f f
EVAR Slave macro variable F177#5 f f
selection signal
w

EXHPCC HPCC operation signal F066#7 – f

EXLM Stored stroke limit select G007#6 f f

signal

149
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
EXRD External read start signal G058#1 f f
1
EXSTP External read/punch stop G058#2 f f
signal

EXWT External punch start signal G058#3 f f

EWTIO Slave external write start F177#3 f f
2

om
signal

F1D F1–digit feed select signal G016#7 – f

FIN Completion signal G004#3 f f

FRP1 to FRP8 Floating reference position F116 f f 3

return end signal

FSCSL Cs contour control change F044#1 f f

completion signal

r.c
FSPPH Spindle phase synchronous F044#3 f f
control completion signal 4
FSPSY Spindle synchronous speed F044#2 f f
control completion signal

G08MD Lock–ahead control mode F066#0 – f

e
signal
5
GOQSM Tool offset value write G039#7 f –
mode select signal

GR1,GR2

GR1O,GR2O,G
R3O
nt Gear selection signal
(input)

Gear selection signal

(output)
G028#1,#2

F034#0 to
#2
f

–
f

f 6

f
ce
GR21 Gear selection signal
g G029#0 –
GR31 (input) G029#2 f –
HDO0 to HDO7 High–speed skip status F122 f f 7
signal

HEAD Path selection signal G063#0 F F

(Tool post selection signal)
nc

HROV 1% step rapid traverse G096#7 f f

override select signal 8
HS1A to HS1D Manual handle feed axis G018#0 to f f
selection signal #3

HS1AO Software operator’s panel F077#0 f f

.c

signal (HS1A)
9
HS1BO Software operator’s panel F077#1 f f
signal (HS1B)

HS1CO Software operator’s panel F077#2 f f

w

signal (HS1C)

HS1DO Software operator’s panel F077#3 f f 10

signal (HS1D)

HS1IA to HS1ID Manual handle interruption G041#0 to f f

w

axis select signal #3

HS2A to HS2D Manual handle feed axis G018#4 to f f

selection signal #7

HS2IA to HS2ID Manual handle interruption G041#4 to f f

w

axis select signal #7

HS3A to HS3D Manual handle feed axis G019#0 to – f

selection signal #3

150
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
HS3IA to HS3ID Manual handle interruption G042#0 to – f
axis select signal #3

IGNVRY All–axis VRDY OFF alarm G066#0 f f

ignore signal

IGVRY1 to Each–axis VRDY OFF G192 f f

om
IGVRY8 alarm ignore signal

INCH Inch input signal F002#0 f f

INCMDA Incremental command G072#5 f f
external
t l setting
tti ttype
INCMDB G076#5 f f
orientation signal (serial
INCMDC spindle) G206#5 f f
INCSTA F047#1 f f
Incremental method

r.c
INCSTB orientation signal F051#1 f f
(serial spindle)
INCSTC F170#1 f f
INDXA G072#0 f f
Orientation stop
sto position
osition
INDXB change signal G076#0 f f
(serial spindle)
INDXC G206#0 f f

e
INHKY Key input disable signal F053#0 f f
INP1 to INP8 In–position signal F104 f f
INTGA G071#5 f f
INTGB
INTGC
IOLACK
nt
Signal for controlling
velocity integration
(serial spindle)

I/O Link confirmation signal

G075#5
G205#5
G092#0
f
f
f
f
f
f
ce
IOLNK Slave I/O Link selection F177#0 f f
signal

IOLS I/O Link specification signal G092#1 f f

KEY1 to KEY4 Memory protect signal G046#3 to f f
#6

KEYO Software operator’s panel F075#6 f f

nc

signal (KEY1 to KEY4)

LDT1A F045#4 f f
L dd
Load t ti signal
detection i l1
LDT1B F049#4 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
LDT1C F168#4 f f
f f
.c

LDT2A F045#5
Load
L dddetection
t ti signal
i l2
LDT2B F049#5 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
LDT2C F168#5 f f
M00 to M31 Miscellaneous function F010 to f f
w

code signal F013

M200 to M215 2nd M function code signal F014 to f f

F015

M300 to M315 3rd M function code signal F016 to f f

w

F017

MA CNC ready signal F001#7 f f

MABSM Manual absolute check F004#2 f f

signal
w

MAFL Miscellaneous function lock F004#4 f f

check signal

151
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
MBDT1, MBDT2 Optional block skip check F004#0, f f
1
to MBDT9 signal F005

MCFNA G071#3 f f
Power line switch
MCFNB completion signal G075#3 f f
MCFNC
(serial spindle)
G205#3 f f 2

om
MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signal G043#0 to f f
#2

MD1O Software operator’s panel F073#0 f f

signal (MD1)
3
MD2O Software operator’s panel F073#1 f f
signal (MD2)

MD4O Software operator’s panel F073#2 f f

r.c
signal (MD4)

MDRN Dry run check signal F002#7 f f 4

MDTCH1 to Controlled axis detach F110 f f
MDTCH8 status signal

MEDT Memory edit select check F003#6 f f

signal

e
5
MF Auxiliary function strobe F007#0 f f
signal

MF2

MF3

MFIN
nt
2nd M function strobe
signal

3rd M function strobe signal

Auxiliary function
completion signal
F008#4

F008#5

G005#0
f

f
f

f
6
ce
MFIN2 2nd M function completion G004#4 f f
signal
7
MFIN3 3rd M function completion G004#5 f f
signal

MFNHGA Main spindle MCC status G072#6 f f

nc

signal
i l while
hil changing
h i
MFNHGB G076#6 f f
sspindles
indles signal
MFNHGC (serial spindle) G206#6 f f
8
MH Manual handle feed select F003#1 f f
check signal

MHPCC HPCC mode signal F066#6 – f

.c

MI1 to MI8 Mirror image signal G106 f f 9

MINC Incremental feed select F003#0 f f
check signal
w

MINP External program input start G058#0 f f

signal
10
MIX1 to MIX7 Composite control axis G128#0 to F –
selection signals #6
w

MJ JOG feed select check F003#2 f f

signal

MLK All–axis machine lock G044#1 f f

signal
w

MLK1 to MLK8 Each–axis machine lock G108 f f

signal

152
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
MLKO Software operator’s panel F075#4 f f
signal(MLK)

MMDI Manual data input select F003#3 f f

check signal

MMEM Automatic operation select F003#5 f f

om
check signal

MMI1 to MMI8 Mirror image check signal F108 f f

MMLK All–axis machine lock F004#1 f f
check signal

MORA1A Signal for completion of F046#6 f f

i dl orientation
spindle i t ti with
ith a
MORA1B F050#6 f f
magnetic sensor
MORA1C (serial spindle) F169#6 f f

r.c
MORA2A Signal for approximate F046#7 f f
i dl orientation
spindle i t ti with
ith a
MORA2B F050#7 f f
magnetic sensor
MORA2C (serial spindle) F169#7 f f
MORCMA G073#0 f f
Command for sspindle
indle
MORCMB orientaion with a magnetic G077#0 f f

e
sensor (serial spindle)
MORCMC G207#0 f f
MP1, MP2 Manual handle feed G019#4, f f

MP1O

MP2O
nt
amount selection signal
(incremental feed signal)

Software operator’s panel

signal (MP1)

Software operator’s panel

#5

F076#0

F076#1
f

f
f

f
ce
signal (MP2)

MPOFA G073#2 f f
Motor
M t power stopt signal
i l
MPOFB G077#2 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
MPOFC G207#2 f f
MRDYA G070#7 f f
nc

Machine
M hi readyd signal
i l
MRDYB G074#7 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
MRDYC G204#7 f f
MREF Manual reference position F004#5 f f
return selection check
signal
.c

MRMT DNC operation select F003#4 f f

check signal

MSBK Single block check signal F004#3 f f

MSDFON Motor speed detection G016#0 f f

w

function enable signal

MTCHIN TEACH IN select check F003#7 f f

signal
w

MV1 to MV8 Axis moving signal F102 f f

MVD1 to MVD8 Axis moving direction F106 f f
signal

NOWT No–wait signal G063#1 F F

w

NOZAGC Perpendicular/angular axis G063#5 f f

control disable signal

153
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
NPOS1 to Position display neglect G198 f f
1
NPOS8 signal

NRROA Short–distant movement G072#2 f f

command d while
hil changing
h i
NRROB G076#2 f f
the orientation stop
sto position
osition
NRROC signal (serial spindle) G206#2 f f 2

om
OFN0 to Tool offset number select G039#0 f –
OFN5,OFN6 signal to #5,
G040#0

OP Automatic operation signal F000#7 f f

3
ORARA F045#7 f f
Orientation
O i t ti completion
l ti
ORARB F049#7 f f
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
f f

r.c
ORARC F168#7
ORCMA G070#6 f f
Orientation
O i t ti command d
4
ORCMB G074#6 f f
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
ORCMC G204#6 f f
OUT0 to OUT7 Software operator’s panel F072 f f
general–purpose switch

e
signal 5
OVC Override cancel signal G006#4 f f

OVCE

OVLS1 to
OVLS7

OVRIDA
nt
Override cancellation signal
(PMC axis control)

Superimposed control axis

selection signals
G150#5

G190#0 to
#6

G072#4
f

f
f

f
6
ce
Analog
A l overrideid commandd
OVRIDB G076#4 f f
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
OVRIDC G206#4 f f
7
PC1DEA Signal indicating the status F047#0 f f
off th
the d
detected
t t d
PC1DEB F051#0 f f
one–rotation
one rotation position
osition coder
nc

PC1DEC signal (serial spindle) F170#0 f f

PC2SLC 2nd position coder G028#7 f – 8
selection signal

PECK2 Small–diameter peck F066#5 – f

drilling in progress signal

PK1 to PK8 Parking signals G122 f –

.c

PK1 to PK7 Parking signals G122#0 to F –

9
#6

PKESS1 First spindle synchronous G122#6 f f

control signal (G031#6)
w

PKESS2 Second spindle G122#7 f f 10

synchronous control signal (G031#7)

PN1, PN2, PN4, Workpiece number search G009#0 to f f

w

PN8, PN16 signal 4

PORA2A Signal for approximate F046#5 f f

spindle
i dl orientation
i t ti with
ith a
PORA2B F050#5 f f
position
osition coder
PORA2C (serial spindle) F169#5 f f
w

PRC Position record signal G040#6 f –

154
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
PRGDPL program screen display F053#1 f f
mode signal

PRTSF Target parts count reached F062#7 f f

signal

PSAR Spindle polygon speed F063#2 f –

om
arrival signal

PSE1 Master axis not arrival F063#0 f –

signal

PSE2 Polygon synchronous axis F063#1 f –

not arrival signal

PSW01 to Position switch signal F070#0 to f f

PSW10 F071#1

r.c
PSYN Polygon synchronization F063#7 f –
under way signal

R01I to R12I G032#0 to f f

G033#3
R01I2 to R12I2 Spindle motor speed G034#0 to f f
command signal G035#3

e
R01I3 to R12I3 G036#0 to f f
G037#3
R01O to R12O S12–bit code signal F036#0 to f f

RCFNA
RCFNB
RCFNC
nt
Output
O t t switch
it h completion
l ti
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
F037#3

F046#3
F050#3
F169#3
f
f
f
f
f
f
ce
RCHA G071#7 f f
P
Power liline status
t t check
h k
RCHB G075#7 f f
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
RCHC G205#7 f f
RCHHGA G072#7 f f
High–output
High out ut MCC status
RCHHGB signal while a magnetic G076#7 f f
nc

sensor (serial spindle)

RCHHGC G206#7 f f
RCHPA F046#2 f f
O t t switch
Output it h signal
i l
RCHPB F050#2 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
RCHPC F169#2 f f
.c

RCYO Retry complete signal F063#5 – f

RGHTH Tool axis perpendicular G023#6 – f

direction handle feed mode
signal
w

RGSPM Spindle rotation direction F065#1 – f

RGSPP signal F065#0 – f
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0 f f

f
w

RGTSP1, Rigid tapping spindle G061#4, –

RGTSP2 selection signal #5

RLSOT3 Stroke check 3 release G007#4 f f

signal
w

RMTDI0 to Input signal for remote G052 f f

RMTDI7 buffer

155
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
RMTDO0 to Output signal for remote F069 f f
1
RMTDO7 buffer

ROTAA Rotation direction G072#1 f f

command d while
hil changing
h i
ROTAB G076#1 f f
the orientation stop
sto position
osition
ROTAC signal (serial spindle) G206#1 f f 2

om
ROV1,ROV2 Rapid traverse override G014#0, f f
signal #1

ROV1E, ROV2E Rapid traverse override G150#0, f f

signal (PMC axis control) #1
3
ROV1O Software operator’s panel F076#4 f f
signal (ROV1)

ROV2O Software operator’s panel F076#5 f f

r.c
signal (ROV2)

RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053#3 f f 4

RPBSY Read/punch in–progress F053#2 f f
signal

RPDO Rapid traversing signal F002#1 f f

e
RRW Reset&rewind signal G008#6 f f 5
RSLA G071#6 f f
O t t switch
Output it h requestt
RSLB G075#6 f f
RSLC
RST

RT
nt
signal (serial spindle)

Reset signal
s indle)

Manual rapid traverse

selection signal
G205#6
F001#1

G019#7
f
f

f
f
f

f
6
ce
RTAP Rigid tapping in–progress F076#3 f f
signal
7
RTE Manual rapid traverse G150#6 f f
selection signal
(PMC axis control)
nc

RTO Software operator’s panel F077#6 f f

signal (RT)
8
RTNCY Retry start signal G064#0 – f
RTNMVS Retry point signal F066#3 – f
RTRCT Retract signal G066#4 – f
.c

RTRCTF Retract completion signal F065#4 – f 9

RVS Retrace signal G007#0 – f
RVSL Retrace–in–progress signal F082#2 – f
w

RWD Rewinding signal F000#0 f f

S00 to S31 Spindle speed code signal F022 to f f 10
F025

SA Servo ready signal F000#6 f f

w

SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029#4 f f

SARA F045#3 f f
S
Speed d arrival
i l signal
i l
SARB F049#3 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
w

SARC F168#3 f f
SBK Single block signal G046#1 f f

156
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
SBKO Software operator’s panel F075#3 f f
signal (SBK)

SCLP Spindle clamp signal F038#0 f –

SDTA F045#2 f f
Speed
S d detection
d t ti signal
i l
SDTB F049#2 f f

om
(serial spindle)
s indle)
SDTC F168#2 f f
SF Spindle speed strobe signal F007#2 f f
SFIN Spindle function completion G005#2 f f
signal

SFRA G070#5 f f
CW command d signal
i l
SFRB G074#5 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)

r.c
SFRC G204#5 f f
SGN G033#5 f f
Spindle
S i dl motor
t command d
SGN2 G035#5 f f
olarity select signal
polarity
SGN3 G037#5 f f
SHA00 to G078#0 to f f

e
SHA11 Spindle orientation external G079#3
stop position
sto osition command
SHB00 to signal G080#0 to f f
SHB11 G081#3
SHC00 to
SHC11

SIND
nt
Spindle orientation stop
position external command
signal

Spindle
S i dl motor
t speed d
G208#0 to
G209#3

G033#7
f

f
f

f
ce
SIND2 G035#7 f f
command select signal
SIND3 G037#7 f f
Skip signal X004#7 f f
SKIP
Overload torque signal X004#7 – f
SKIP2 to Skip signal X004#2 to f f
nc

SKIP6, SKIP7, #6, #0, #1

SKIP8

SKIPP Skip signal G006#6 f –

SLCSEQ Retry point selection signal G064#1 f

SLPCA, SLPCB Spindle return select signal G064#2, F –

#3
.c

SLSPA, SLSPB Spindle command select G063#2, F –

signal #3

SLVA G073#1 f f
Slave operation
Sl ti command d
w

SLVB G077#1 f f
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SLVC G207#1 f f
SLVSA F046#4 f f
Slave operation
Sl ti status
t t
f f
w

SLVSB F050#4
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SLVSC F169#4 f f
SMZ Error detect signal G053#6 f –
SOCNA G071#4 f f
w

Soft
S ft start/stop
t t/ t cancell signal
i l
SOCNB G075#4 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
SOCNC G205#4 f f

157
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
SOR Spindle orientation signal G029#5 f f
1
SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override G030 f f
signal

SPAL Spindle fluctuation F035#0 f f

detection alarm signal 2

om
SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000#4 f f

SPO Software operator’s panel F075#7 f f

signal (*SP)

SPPHS Spindle phase synchronous G038#3 f f

control signal
3
SPSLA G071#2 f f
Spindle
S i dl select
l t signal
i l
SPSLB G075#2 f f

r.c
(serial spindle)
s indle)
SPSLC G205#2 f f
4
SPSTP Spindle stop complete G028#6 f –
signal

SPSYC Spindle synchronous G038#2 f f

control signal

e
SRLNI0 to Group number specification G091#0 to f f 5
SRLNI3 signals #3

SRLNO0 to Group number output F178#0 to f f

SRLNO3

SRN
SRNMV
nt
signals

Program restart signal

Program restart under way
signal
#3

G006#0
F002#4
f
f
f
f
6
ce
SRVA G070#4 f f
CCW command d signal
i l
SRVB G074#4 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
SRVC G204#4 f f 7
SSIN G033#6 f f
S i dl motor
Spindle t command d
SSIN2 G035#6 f f
nc

olarity select signal

polarity
SSIN3 G037#6 f f
SSTA F045#1 f f
8
S
Speed d zero signal
i l
SSTB F049#1 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
SSTC F168#1 f f
f f
.c

ST Cycle start lamp signal G007#2

STL Cycle start signal F000#5 f f
9
STLK Start lock signal G007#1 f –

STRD Input and run simultaneous G058#5 – f

w

mode select signal

STWD Output and run G058#6 – f 10

simultaneous mode select
signal
w

SUCLP Spindle unclamp signal F038#1 f –

SVF1 to SVF8 Servo off signal G126 f f
SWS1 G027#0 f –
w

SWS2 Spindle selection signal G027#1 f –

SWS3 G027#2 f –

158
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
SYCAL Spindle synchronous F044#4 f f
control alarm signal/
phase error monitor signal

SYN1O to Synchronous control under F118 f –

SYN8O way signals

om
SYN1O to Synchronous/composite/ F118#0 to F –
SYN7O superimposed control #6
under way signals

SYNC1 to Simple synchronous axis G138 f f

SYNC8 select signal

SYNC to Synchronous control axis G138 f –

SYNC8 selection signals

SYNC to Synchronous control axis G138#0 to F –

r.c
SYNC7 selection signals #6

SYNCJ1 to Simple synchronous G140 – f

SYNCJ8 manual feed axis select
signal

SYNMOD EGB mode signal F065#6 f

f f

e
T00 to T31 Tool function code signal F026 to
F029

TAP Tapping signal F001#5 f f

TF
TFIN

THRD
nt
Tool function strobe signal
Tool function completion
signal

Thread cutting signal

F007#3
G005#3

F002#3
f
f

f
f
f

f
ce
TIALM Tool post interference alarm F064#7 F –
signal

TICHK Tool post interference F064#6 F –

check signal

TL01 to TL64 G047#0 to f –

#6
nc

Tool g
group number select
TL01 to TL256 signal G047#0 to – f
G048#0
TLCH Tool change signal F064#0 f f

TLCHI Individual tool change F064#2 – f

signal
.c

TLMA F045#6 f f
Torque limit
T li it signal
i l
TLMB F049#6 f f
(serial spindle)
s indle)
TLMC F168#6 f f
w

TLMHA G070#1 f f
Torque limit command
TLMHB HIGH signal G074#1 f f
(serial spindle)
TLMHC G204#1 f f
TLMLA G070#0 f f
w

Torque limit
T li it command d LOW
TLMLB G074#0 f f
signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
TLMLC G204#0 f f
TLNW New tool select signal F064#1 f f
w

TLRST Tool change reset signal G048#7 f f

159
 T M
Symbol Signal name Address
series series
TLRSTI Individual tool change reset G048#6 – f
1
signal

TLSKP Tool skip signal G048#5 f f

TMRON General–purpose G053#0 f f

integrating meter start 2

om
signal

TRACT Tool retraction mode signal F092#3 f f

TRESC Tool retraction signal G059#0 f f

TRQL1 to Torque limit reached signal F114 f –

TRQL8
3
TRRTN Tool return signal G059#1 f f
TRSPS Tool return completion F092#5 f f

r.c
signal

UI000 to UI015 Input signal for custom G054, f f 4

macro G055

UINT Interrupt signal for custom G053#3 f f

macro

f f

e
UO000 to F054,
UO015 F055
5
Output signal
g for custom
UO100 to macro F056 to f f
UO131 F059
WATO

WOQSM
nt
Waiting signal

Workpiece coordinate
system shift value write
mode select signal
F063#6

G039#6
F

f
F

– 6
ce
WOSET Workpiece coordinate G040#7 f –
system shift value write
signal 7
XAE X004#0 f f
YAE Measuring
g position reached X004#1 – f
nc

ZAE signal X004#1 f –

ZAE X004#2 – f 8
ZP1 to ZP8 Reference position return F094 f f
end signal

ZP21 to ZP28 2nd reference position F096 f f

.c

return end signal

9
ZP31 to ZP38 3rd reference position F098 f f
return end signal

ZP41 to ZP48 4th reference position F100 f f

w

return end signal

ZPX Spindle orientation F094 f – 10

completion signal

ZRF1 to ZRF8 Reference position F120 f f

w

establishment signal

ZRN Manual reference position G043#7 f f

return selection signal

ZRNO Software operator’s panel F073#4 f f

w

signal (ZRN)

160
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

6.5.2 Address list

(1) List of Addresses (One–Path Control)
Following shows table of addresses:
In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals are
covered with shade ( ) in the signal address figure as shown below.
This means either T series or M series does not have this signal. Upper part
is for T series and lower part is for M series.

om
[Example 1]
Signals EXLM and ST are common signals, STLK is for T series only
and RLSOT and RVS are for M series only.
#7 #6 #2 #1 #0
G007 RLSOT T series
SA ST STLK RVS M series

r.c
MT→PMC
Address Bit number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(T series)

SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE

X004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

e
SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
(M series)

X008

X009
nt
*DEC8 *DEC7 *DEC6
*ESP

*DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1

ce
PMC→CNC
Address Bit number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
nc

G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8

G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0

.c

G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN

G005 BFIN AFL BFIN TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN

w

G006 SKIPP OVC *ABSM SRN

G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLWU RLSOT3 ST STLK RVS

w

G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

w

G009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

161
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
1
G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0

2

om
G014 ROV2 ROV1

G016 F1D MSDFON

3
G018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A

r.c
G019 RT MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A

4
G023 ALNGH RGHTH

G027 CON *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1 SWS3 SWS2 SWS1

e
5
G028 PC2SLC SPSTP *SCPF *SUCPF GR2 GR1

G029

G030
nt
SOV7
*SSTP

SOV6
SOR

SOV5
SAR

SOV4 SOV3
GR31

SOV2 SOV1
GR21

SOV0
6
ce
G031 PKESS2 PKESS1

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

7

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

nc

G034 R08I2 R07I2 R06I2 R05I2 R04I2 R03I2 R02I2 R01I2 8

G035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R12I2 R11I2 R10I2 R09I2

.c

G036 R08I3 R07I3 R06I3 R05I3 R04I3 R03I3 R02I3 R01I3 9

G037 SIND3 SSIN3 SGN3 R12I3 R11I3 R10I3 R09I3
w

G038 SPPHS SPSYC *PLSST

*BECLP *BEUCP
10
G039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
w

G040 WOSET PRC OFN6

w

G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA

G042 DMMC HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA

162
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

G044 MLK BDT1

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

om
G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01

G048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP TL256

r.c
G049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TOV1 *TLV0

G050 *TLV9 *TLV8

G051 *CHLD CHPST *CHP8 *CHP4 *CHP2 *CHP0

e
G052 RMTDI7 RMTDI6 RMTDI5 RMTDI4 RMTDI3 RMTDI2 RMTDI1 RMTDI0

G053

G054
CDZnt
UI007
SMZ

UI006 UI005 UI004

UINT

UI003 UI002 UI001

TMRON

UI000
ce
G055 UI015 UI014 UI013 UI012 UI011 UI010 UI009 UI008

G058 STWD STRD EXWT EXSTP EXRD MINP

G059 TRRTN TRESC

nc

G060 *TSB

G061 RGTSP2 RGTSP1 RGTAP

.c

G062 *CRTOF

G063 NOZAGC
w

G064 ESRSYC SLCSEQ RTNCY

G066 EKSET RTRCT ENBKY IGNVRY

w

G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA

w

G071 RCHA RSLA INTGA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA

G072 RCHHGA MFNHGA INCMDA OVRIDA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA

163
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G073 MPOFA SLVA MORCMA
1
G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CHT2B TLMHB TLMLB

G075 RCHB RSLB INTGB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB

2

om
G076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB

G077 MPOFB SLVB MORCMB

3
G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

r.c
G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

4
G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00

G081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08

e
5
G082 Reserve for order made macro

G083

G086
nt Reserve for order made macro

–Ja +Ja –Jg +Jg

6
ce
G091 SRLNI3 SRLNI2 SRLNI1 SRLNI0

G092 BGEN BGIALM BGION IOLS IOLACK

7

G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0

nc

G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0 8

G100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1

.c

G102 –J8 –J7 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1 9

G106 MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
w

G108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1

10
G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
w

G112 –LM8 –LM7 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1

w

G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1

G116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1

164
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 *+ED8 *+ED7 *+ED6 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1

G120 *–ED8 *–ED7 *–ED6 *–ED5 *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1

(T series)
PK8 PK7
PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1
G122 PKESS2 PKESS1

om
PKESS2 PKESS1

(M series)

G124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1

G126 SVF8 SVF7 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1

r.c
G130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1

G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1

G134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1

e
G136 EAX8 EAX7 EAX6 EAX5 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1

G138

G140
nt
SYNC8 SYNC7 SYNC6 SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2

SYNCJ8 SYNCJ7 SYNCJ6 SYNCJ5 SYNCJ4 SYNCJ3 SYNCJ2 SYNCJ1

SYNC1
ce
G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA EFINA

G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A

G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

nc

G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A

G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A

.c

G147 EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A EID9A EID8A

G148 EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A

w

G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A

G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E

w

G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E

w

G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB

G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B

165
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B
1
G157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B

G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B

2

om
G159 EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B EID9B EID8B

G160 EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B

3
G161 EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EID26B EID25B EID24B

r.c
G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC EFINC

4
G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C

G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C

e
5
G169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C

G170

G171
nt
EID7C

EID15C
EID6C EID5C

EID14C EID13C
EID4C

EID12C
EID3C EID2C

EID11C EID10C
EID1C

EID9C
EID0C

EID8C
6
ce
G172 EID23C EID22C EID21C EID20C EID19C EID18C EID17C EID16C

G173 EID31C EID30C EID29C EID28C EID27C EID26C EID25C EID24C

7

G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND

nc

G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D 8

G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D

.c

G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D 9

G182 EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D EID1D EID0D
w

G183 EID15D EID14D EID13D EID12D EID11D EID10D EID9D EID8D

10
G184 EID23D EID22D EID21D EID20D EID19D EID18D EID17D EID16D
w

G185 EID31D EID30D EID29D EID28D EID27D EID26D EID25D EID24D

w

G192 IGVRY8 IGVRY7 IGVRY6 IGVRY5 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1

G198 NPOS8 NPOS7 NPOS6 NPOS5 NPOS4 NPOS3 NPOS2 NPOS1

166
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 MRDYC ORCML SFRC SRVC CTH1C CTH2C TLMHC TLMLC

G205 RCHC RSLC INTGC SOCNC MCFNC SPSLC *ESPC ARSTC

G206 RCHHGC MFNHGC INCMDC OVRIDC DEFMDC NRROC ROTAC INDXC

om
G207 MPOFC SLVC MORCMC

G208 SHC07 SHC06 SHC05 SHC04 SHC03 SHC02 SHC01 SHC00

G209 SHC11 SHC10 SHC09 SHC08

r.c
CNC→PMC
Address Bit number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD

e
F001 MA TAP ENB DEN BAL RST AL

F002

F003
nt
MDRN

MTCHIN
CUT

MEDT MMEM
SRNMV

MRMT
THRD

MMDI
CSS

MJ
RPDO

MH
INCH

MINC
ce
F004 MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1

F005 MBDT9 MBDT8 MBDT7 MBDT6 MBDT5 MBDT4 MBDT3 MBDT2

F007 BF BF TF SF EFD MF
nc

F008 MF3 MF2 EF

F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30

.c

F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00

F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

w

F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

w

F014 M207 M206 M205 M204 M203 M202 M201 M200

w

F015 M215 M214 M213 M212 M211 M210 M209 M208

F016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300

167
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F017 M315 M314 M313 M312 M311 M310 M309 M308
1
F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00

F023 S15 S14 S13 S12 S11 S10 S09 S08

2

om
F024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16

F025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24

3
F026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00

r.c
F027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08

4
F028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16

F029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24

e
5
F030 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00

F031

F032
B15

B23
nt B14

B22
B13

B21
B12

B20
B11

B19
B10

B18
B09

B17
B08

B16
6
ce
F033 B31 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24

F034 GR3O GR2O GR1O

7

F035 SPAL
nc

F036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O 8

F037 R12O R11O R10O R09O

.c

F038 ENB3 ENB2 SUCLP SCLP 9

F039 CHPCYL CHPMD
w

F040 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0

10
F041 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR09 AR08
w

F044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL

w

F045 ORARA TLMA LDT2A LDT1A SARA SDTA SSTA ALMA

F046 MORA2A MORA1A PORA2A SLVSA RCFNA RCHPA CFINA CHPA

168
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F047 INCSTA PC1DEA

F049 ORARB TLMB LDT2B LDT1B SARB SDTB SSTB ALMB

F050 MORA2B MORA1B PORA2B SLVSB RCFNB RCHPB CFINB CHPB

om
F051 INCSTB PC1DEB

F053 EKENB BGEACT RPALM RPBSY PRGDPL INHKY

F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000

r.c
F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008

F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100

F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108

e
F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116

F059

F060
nt
UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127 UO126 UO125 UO124

ESEND EREND
ce
F061 BCLP BUCLP

F062 PRTSF

F063 PSYN RCYO PSAR PSE2 PSE1

nc

F064 TLCHI TLNW TLCH

F065 SYNMOD RTRCTF RGSPM RGSPP

.c

F066 EXHPCC MMPCC PECK2 RTNMVS G08MD

F069 RMTDO7 RMTDO6 RMTDO5 RMTDO4 RMTDO3 RMTDO2 RMTDO1 RMTDO0

w

F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01

F071 PSW10 PSW09

w

F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0

w

F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O

F075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO

169
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F076 ROV2O ROV1O RTAP MP2O MP1O
1
F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO

F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O

2

om
F079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O

F080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O

3
F081 –J4O +J4O –J3O +J3O –J2O +J2O –J1O +J1O

r.c
F082 RVSL

4
F090 ABTSP3 ABTSP2 ABTSP1 ABTQSV

F092 TRSPS TRACT

e
5
F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1

F096

F098
nt
ZP28

ZP38
ZP27

ZP37
ZP26

ZP36
ZP25

ZP35
ZP24

ZP34
ZP23

ZP33
ZP22

ZP32
ZP21

ZP31
6
ce
F100 ZP48 ZP47 ZP46 ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41

F102 MV8 MV7 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1

7

F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1

nc

F106 MVD8 MVD7 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1 8

F108 MMI8 MMI7 MMI6 MMI5 MMI4 MMI3 MMI2 MMI1

.c

F110 MDTCH8 MDTCH7 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1 9

F112 EADEN8 EADEN7 EADEN6 EADEN5 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1
w

F114 TRQL8 TRQL7 TRQL6 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1

10
F116 FRP8 FRP7 FRP6 FRP5 FRP4 FRP3 FRP2 FRP1
w

F118 SYN8O SYN7O SYN6O SYN5O SYN4O SYN3O SYN2O SYN1O

w

F120 ZRF8 ZRF7 ZRF6 ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1

F122 HDO7 HDO6 HDO5 HDO4 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0

170
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F129 *EAXSL EOV0

F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA

F131 EABUFA EMFA

om
F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A

F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB

F134 EABUFB EMFB

r.c
F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B

F136 EBSYC EOTNC EOTPC EGENC EDENC EIALC ECKZC EINPC

F137 EABUFC EMFC

e
F138 EM28C EM24C EM22C EM21C EM18C EM14C EM12C EM11C

F139

F140
nt
EBSYD EOTND EOTPD EGEND EDEND EIALD ECKZD EINPD

EABUFD EMFD
ce
F141 EM28D EM24D EM22D EM21D EM18D EM14D EM12D EM11D

F142 EM48A EM44A EM42A EM41A EM38A EM34A EM32A EM31A

F145 EM48B EM44B EM42B EM41B EM38B EM34B EM32B EM31B

nc

F148 EM48C EM44C EM42C EM41C EM38C EM34C EM32C EM31C

F151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D

.c

F168 ORARC TLMC LDT2C LDT1C SARC SDTC SSTC ALMC

F169 MORA2C MORA1C PORA2C SLVSC RCFNC RCHPC CFINC CHPC

w

F170 INCSTC PC1DEC

F177 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG EWTIO ESTPIO ERDIO IOLNK

w

F178 SRLNO3 SRLNO2 SRLNO1 SRLNO0

w

F180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1

F182 EACNT8 EACNT7 EACNT6 EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1

171
 (2) List of Addresses (Two–Path Control)
Signals addresses for each path are usually assigned as follows:
1
However, for the signals common to both paths, those signals are assigned
to path 1. Interface signals between the CNC and PMC are as shown below:
The signals with suffix #1 are those for path 1 and the signals with suffix #2
are those for path 2.
2

om
Signal address Contents
G000–G255 Signals on path 1 (PMC→CNC)
F000–F255 Signals on path 1 (CNC→PMC)
G1000–G1255 Signals on path 2 (PMC→CNC)
F1000–F1255 Signals on path 2 (CNC→PMC)
3

r.c
MT→PMC
Address Bit number 4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(T series)
ESKIP –MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 –MIT1#1 +MIT1#1 ZAE#1 XAE#1
SKIP#1
X004 SKIP6#1 SKIP5#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 SKIP2#1 SKIP8#1 SKIP7#1

e
ESKIP ZAE#1 YAE#1 XAE#1
SKIP#1 SKIP5#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1
5
SKIP6#1 SKIP2#1 SKIP8#1 SKIP7#1
(M series)

X007

X008
nt *DEC7#2 *DEC6#2 *DEC5#2 *DEC4#2 *DEC3#2 *DEC2#2 *DEC1#2

*ESP 6
ce
X009 *DEC7#1 *DEC6#1 *DEC5#1 *DEC4#1 *DEC3#1 *DEC2#1 *DEC1#1

(T series)
–MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 –MIT1#2 +MIT1#2 ZAE#2 XAE#2
7
SKIP#2 SKIP6#2
X013 SKIP5#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2 SKIP8#2 SKIP7#2
ZAE#2 YAE#2 XAE#2
SKIP#2 SKIP6#2 SKIP5#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2
SKIP2#2 SKIP8#2 SKIP7#2
nc

(M series)

8
PMC→CNC
Address Bit number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c

G000 ED7#1 ED6#1 ED5#1 ED4#1 ED3#1 ED2#1 ED1#1 ED0#1 9

G001 ED15#1 ED14#1 ED13#1 ED12#1 ED11#1 ED10#1 ED9#1 ED8#1

w

G002 ESTB#1 EA6#1 EA5#1 EA4#1 EA3#1 EA2#1 EA1#1 EA0#1

10
G004 MFIN3#1 MFIN2#1 FIN#1
w

G005 BFIN#1 AFL#1 BFIN#1 TFIN#1 SFIN#1 EFIN#1 MFIN#1

w

G006 SKIPP#1 OVC#1 *ABSM#1 SRN#1

G007 RLSOT#1 EXLM#1 *FLWP#1 RLSOT3#1 ST#1 STLK#1 RVS#1

172
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G008 ERS#1 RRW#1 *SP#1 *ESP#1 *IT#1

G009 PN16#1 PN8#1 PN4#1 PN2#1 PN1#1

G010 *JV7#1 *JV6#1 *JV5#1 *JV4#1 *JV3#1 *JV2#1 *JV1#1 *JV0#1

om
G011 *JV15#1 *JV14#1 *JV13#1 *JV12#1 *JV11#1 *JV10#1 *JV9#1 *JV8#1

G012 *FV7#1 *FV6#1 *FV5#1 *FV4#1 *FV3#1 *FV2#1 *FV1#1 *FV0#1

G013 *AFV7#1 *AFV6#1 *AFV5#1 *AFV4#1 *AFV3#1 *AFV2#1 *AFV1#1 *AFV0#1

r.c
G014 ROV2#1 ROV1#1

G016 F1D#1 MSDFON#1

G018 HS2D#1 HS2C#1 HS2B#1 HS2A#1 HS1D#1 HS1C#1 HS1B#1 HS1#1

e
G019 RT#1 MP2#1 MP1#1 HS3D#1 HS3C#1 HS3B#1 HS3A#1

G023

G027
nt
ALNGH#1 RGHTH#1

CON#1 *SSTP3#1 *SSTP2#1 *SSTP1#1 SWS3#1 SWS2#1 SWS1#1

ce
G028 PC2SLC#1 SPSTP#1 *SCPF#1 *SUCPF#1 GR2#1 GR1#1

G029 *SSTP#1 SOR#1 SAR#1 GR31#1 GR21#1

G030 SOV7#1 SOV6#1 SOV5#1 SOV4#1 SOV3#1 SOV2#1 SOV1#1 SOV0#1

nc

G031 PKESS2#1 PKESS1#1

G032 R08I#1 R07I#1 R06I#1 R05I#1 R04I#1 R03I#1 R02I#1 R01I#1

.c

G033 SIND#1 SSIN#1 SGN#1 R12I#1 R11I#1 R10I#1 R09I#1

G034 R08I2#1 R07I2#1 R06I2#1 R05I2#1 R04I2#1 R03I2#1 R02I2#1 R01I2#1

w

G035 SIND2#1 SSIN2#1 SGN2#1 R12I2#1 R11I2#1 R10I2#1 R09I2#1

G036 R08I3#1 R07I3#1 R06I3#1 R05I3#1 R04I3#1 R03I3#1 R02I3#1 R01I3#1

w

G037 SIND3#1 SSIN3#1 SGN3#1 R12I3#1 R11I3#1 R10I3#1 R09I3#1

w

G038 *BECLP#1 *BEUCP#1 SPPHS SPSYC *PLSST#1

SPPHS#1 SPSYC#1

G039 GOQSM#1 WOQSM#1 OFN5#1 OFN4#1 OFN3#1 OFN2#1 OFN1#1 OFN0#1

173
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G040 WOSET#1 PRC#1 OFN6#1
1
G041 HS2ID#1 HS2IC#1 HS2IB#1 HS2IA#1 HS1ID#1 HS1IC#1 HS1IB#1 HS1IA#1

G042 HS3ID#1 HS3IC#1 HS3IB#1 HS3IA #1

2

om
G043 ZRN#1 DNCI#1 MD4#1 MD2#1 MD1#1

G044 MLK#1 BDT1#1

3
G045 BDT9#1 BDT8#1 BDT7#1 BDT6#1 BDT5#1 BDT4#1 BDT3#1 BDT2#1

r.c
G046 DRN#1 KEY4#1 KEY3#1 KEY2#1 KEY1#1 SBK#1

4
G047 TL128#1 TL64#1 TL32#1 TL16#1 TL08#1 TL04#1 TL02#1 TL01#1

G048 TLRST#1 TLRSTI#1 TLSKP#1 TL256#1

e
5
G049 *TLV7#1 *TLV6#1 *TLV5#1 *TLV4#1 *TLV3#1 *TLV2#1 *TOV1#1 *TLV0#1

G050

G051
nt
*CHLD#1 CHPST#1 *CHP8#1 *CHP4#1
*TLV9#1 *TLV8#1

*CHP2#1 *CHP0#1
6
ce
G053 CDZ#1 SMZ#1 UINT#1 TMRON#1

G054 UI007#1 UI006#1 UI005#1 UI004#1 UI003#1 UI002#1 UI001#1 UI000#1

7

G055 UI015#1 UI014#1 UI013#1 UI012#1 UI011#1 UI010#1 UI009#1 UI008#1

nc

G058 EXWT#1 EXSTP#1 EXRD#1 MINP#1 8

G059 TRRTN#1 TRESC#1

.c

G060 *TSB#1 9
G061 RGTSP2#1 RGTSP1#1 RGTAP#1
w

G062 *CRTOF#1
10
G063 NOZAGC#1 SLSPB SLSPA NOWT HEAD
w

G064 ESRSYC#1 SLPCB SLPCA SLCSEQ#1 RTNCY#1

w

G066 EKSET RTRCT ENBKY IGNVRY#1

G070 MRDYA#1 ORCMA#1 SFRA#1 SRVA#1 CTH1A#1 CTH2A#1 TLMHA#1 TLMLA#1

174
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G071 RCHA#1 RSLA#1 INTGA#1 SOCNA#1 MCFNA#1 SPSLA#1 *ESPA#1 ARSTA#1

G072 RCHHGA#1 MFNHGA#1 INCMDA#1 OVRIDA#1 DEFMDA#1 NRROA#1 ROTAA#1 INDXA#1

G073 MPOFA#1 SLVA#1 MORCMA#1

om
G074 MRDYB#1 ORCMB#1 SFRB#1 SRVB#1 CTH1B#1 CTH2B#1 TLMHB#1 TLMLB#1

G075 RCHB#1 RSLB#1 INTGB#1 SOCNB#1 MCFNB#1 SPSLB#1 *ESPB#1 ARSTB#1

G076 RCHHGB#1 MFNHGB#1 INCMDB#1 OVRIDB#1 DEFMDB#1 NRROB#1 ROTAB#1 INDXB#1

r.c
G077 MPOFB#1 SLVB#1 MORCMB#1

G078 SHA07#1 SHA06#1 SHA05#1 SHA04#1 SHA03#1 SHA02#1 SHA01#1 SHA00#1

G079 SHA11#1 SHA10#1 SHA09#1 SHA08#1

e
G080 SHB07#1 SHB06#1 SHB05#1 SHB04#1 SHB03#1 SHB02#1 SHB01#1 SHB00#1

G081

G082
nt SHB11#1 SHB10#1 SHB09#1 SHB08#1

Reserved for order made macro

ce
G083 Reserved for order made macro

G091 SRLNI3#1 SRLNI2#1 SRLNI1#1 SRLNI0#1

G092 BGEN#1 BGIALM#1 BGION#1 IOLS#1 IOLACK#1

nc

G096 HROV#1 *HROV6#1 *HROV5#1 *HROV4#1 *HROV3#1 *HROV2#1 *HROV1#1 *HROV0#1

G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0

.c

G100 +J7#1 +J6#1 +J5#1 +J4#1 +J3#1 +J2#1 +J1#1

G102 –J7#1 –J6#1 –J5#1 –J4#1 –J3#1 –J2#1 –J1#1

w

G106 MI7#1 MI6#1 MI5#1 MI4#1 MI3#1 MI2#1 MI1#1

G108 MLK7#1 MLK6#1 MLK5#1 MLK4#1 MLK3#1 MLK2#1 MLK1#1

w

G110 +LM7#1 +LM6#1 +LM5#1 +LM4#1 +LM3#1 +LM2#1 +LM1#1

w

G112 –LM7#1 –LM6#1 –LM5#1 –LM4#1 –LM3#1 –LM2#1 –LM1#1

G114 *+L7#1 *+L6#1 *+L5#1 *+L4#1 *+L3#1 *+L2#1 *+L1#1

175
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G116 *–L7#1 *–L6#1 *–L5#1 *–L4#1 *–L3#1 *–L2#1 *–L1#1
1
G118 *+ED7#1 *+ED6#1 *+ED5#1 *+ED4#1 *+ED3#1 *+ED2#1 *+ED1#1

G120 *–ED7#1 *–ED6#1 *–ED5#1 *–ED4#1 *–ED3#1 *–ED2#1 *–ED1#1

2

om
(T series)
PK7#1
PKESS2#1 PK6#1 PK5#1 PK4#1 PK3#1 PK2#1 PK1#1
G122 PKESS1#1

PKESS2#1 PKESS1#1

(M series)
3

G124 DTCH7#1 DTCH6#1 DTCH5#1 DTCH4#1 DTCH3#1 DTCH2#1 DTCH1#1

r.c
G126 SVF7#1 SVF6#1 SVF5#1 SVF4#1 SVF3#1 SVF2#1 SVF1#1 4

G128 MIX7 MIX6 MIX5 MIX4 MIX3 MIX2 MIX1

e
G130 *IT7#1 *IT6#1 *IT5#1 *IT4#1 *IT3#1 *IT2#1 *IT1#1 5

G132 +MIT4#1 +MIT3#1 +MIT2#1 +MIT1#1

G134

G136
nt EAX7#1 EAX6#1 EAX5#1
–MIT4#1 –MIT3#1 –MIT2#1 –MIT1#1

EAX4#1 EAX3#1 EAX2#1 EAX1#1

6
ce
G138 SYNC7#1 SYNC6#1 SYNC5#1 SYNC4#1 SYNC3#1 SYNC2#1 SYNC1#1
7
G140 SYNCJ7#1 SYNCJ6#1 SYNCJ5#1 SYNCJ4#1 SYNCJ3#1 SYNCJ2#1 SYNCJ1#1
nc

G142 EBUFA#1 ECLRA#1 ESTPA#1 ESOFA#1 ESBKA#1 EMBUFA#1 EFINA#1

8
G143 EMSBKA#1 EC6A#1 EC5A#1 EC4A#1 EC3A#1 EC2A#1 EC1A#1 EC0A#1
.c

G144 EIF7A#1 EIF6A#1 EIF5A#1 EIF4A#1 EIF3A#1 EIF2A#1 EIF1A#1 EIF0A#1

9
G145 EIF15A#1 EIF14A#1 EIF13A#1 EIF12A#1 EIF11A#1 EIF10A#1 EIF9A#1 EIF8A#1
w

G146 EID7A#1 EID6A#1 EID5A#1 EID4A#1 EID3A#1 EID2A#1 EID1A#1 EID0A#1

10
G147 EID15A#1 EID14A#1 EID13A#1 EID12A#1 EID11A#1 EID10A#1 EID9A#1 EID8A#1
w

G148 EID23A#1 EID22A#1 EID21A#1 EID20A#1 EID19A#1 EID18A#1 EID17A#1 EID16A#1

w

G149 EID31A#1 EID30A#1 EID29A#1 EID28A#1 EID27A#1 EID26A#1 EID25A#1 EID24A#1

G150 DRNE#1 RTE#1 OVCE#1 ROV2E#1ROV1E#1

176
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G151 *FV7E#1 *FV6E#1 *FV5E#1 *FV4E#1 *FV3E#1 *FV2E#1 *FV1E#1 *FV0E#1

G154 EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1 ESOFB#1 ESBKB#1 EMBUFB#1 EFINB#1

G155 EMSBKB#1 EC6B#1 EC5B#1 EC4B#1 EC3B#1 EC2B#1 EC1B#1 EC0B#1

om
G156 EIF7B#1 EIF6B#1 EIF5B#1 EIF4B#1 EIF3B#1 EIF2B#1 EIF1B#1 EIF0B#1

G157 EIF15B#1 EIF14B#1 EIF13B#1 EIF12B#1 EIF11B#1 EIF10B#1 EIF9B#1 EIF8B#1

G158 EID7B#1 EID6B#1 EID5B#1 EID4B#1 EID3B#1 EID2B#1 EID1B#1 EID0B#1

r.c
G159 EID15B#1 EID14B#1 EID13B#1 EID12B#1 EID11B#1 EID10B#1 EID9B#1 EID8B#1

G160 EID23B#1 EID22B#1 EID21B#1 EID20B#1 EID19B#1 EID18B#1 EID17B#1 EID16B#1

G161 EID31B#1 EID30B#1 EID29B#1 EID28B#1 EID27B#1 EID26B#1 EID25B#1 EID24B#1

e
G166 EBUFC#1 ECLRC#1 ESTPC#1 ESOFC#1 ESBKC#1 EMBUFC#1 EFINC#1

G167

G168
nt
EMSBKC#1 EC6C#1 EC5C#1 EC4C#1 EC3C#1 EC2C#1 EC1C#1 EC0C#1

EIF7C#1 EIF6C#1 EIF5C#1 EIF4C#1 EIF3C#1 EIF2C#1 EIF1C#1 EIF0C#1

ce
G169 EIF15C#1 EIF14C#1 EIF13C#1 EIF12C#1 EIF11C#1 EIF10C#1 EIF9C#1 EIF8C#1

G170 EID7C#1 EID6C#1 EID5C#1 EID4C#1 EID3C#1 EID2C#1 EID1C#1 EID0C#1

G171 EID15C#1 EID14C#1 EID13C#1 EID12C#1 EID11C#1 EID10C#1 EID9C#1 EID8C#1

nc

G172 EID23C#1 EID22C#1 EID21C#1 EID20C#1 EID19C#1 EID18C#1 EID17C#1 EID16C#1

G173 EID31C#1 EID30C#1 EID29C#1 EID28C#1 EID27C#1 EID26C#1 EID25C#1 EID24C#1

.c

G178 EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 EFIND#1

G179 EMSBKD#1 EC6D#1 EC5D#1 EC4D#1 EC3D#1 EC2D#1 EC1D#1 EC0D#1

w

G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1

G181 EIF15D#1 EIF14D#1 EIF13D#1 EIF12D#1 EIF11D#1 EIF10D#1 EIF9D#1 EIF8D#1

w

G182 EID7D#1 EID6D#1 EID5D#1 EID4D#1 EID3D#1 EID2D#1 EID1D#1 EID0D#1

w

G183 EID15D#1 EID14D#1 EID13D#1 EID12D#1 EID11D#1 EID10D#1 EID9D#1 EID8D#1

G184 EID23D#1 EID22D#1 EID21D#1 EID20D#1 EID19D#1 EID18D#1 EID17D#1 EID16D#1

177
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G185 EID31D#1 EID30D#1 EID29D#1 EID28D#1 EID27D#1 EID26D#1 EID25D#1 EID24D#1
1
G190 OVLS7#1 OVLS6#1 OVLS5#1 OVLS4#1 OVLS3#1 OVLS2#1 OVLS1#1

G192 IGVRY7#1 IGVRY6#1 IGVRY5#1 IGVRY4#1 IGVRY3#1 IGVRY2#1 IGVRY1#1

2

om
G198 NPOS7#1 NPOS6#1 NPOS5#1 NPOS4#1 NPOS3#1 NPOS2#1 NPOS1#1

PMC→CNC 3
Address Bit number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

r.c
G1000 ED7#2 ED6#2 ED5#2 ED4#2 ED3#2 ED2#2 ED1#2 ED0#2

4
G1001 ED15#2 ED14#2 ED13#2 ED12#2 ED11#2 ED10#2 ED9#2 ED8#2

G1002 ESTB#2 EA6#2 EA5#2 EA4#2 EA3#2 EA2#2 EA1#2 EA0#2

e
5
G1004 MFIN3#2 MFIN2#2 FIN#2

G1005

G1006
nt
BFIN#2 AFL#2

SKIPP#2
BFIN#2

OVC#2
TFIN#2 SFIN#2

*ABSM#2
EFIN#2 MFIN#2

SRN#2
6
ce
G1007 RLSOT#2 EXLM#2 *FLWP#2 RLSOT3#2 ST#2 STLK#2 RVS#2

G1008 ERS#2 RRW#2 *SP#2 *ESP#2 *IT#2 7

G1009 PN16#2 PN8#2 PN4#2 PN2#2 PN1#2

nc

G1010 *JV7#2 *JV6#2 *JV5#2 *JV4#2 *JV3#2 *JV2#2 *JV1#2 *JV0#2 8

G1011 *JV15#2 *JV14#2 *JV13#2 *JV12#2 *JV11#2 *JV10#2 *JV9#2 *JV8#2

.c

G1012 *FV7#2 *FV6#2 *FV5#2 *FV4#2 *FV3#2 *FV2#2 *FV1#2 *FV0#2 9

G1013 *AFV7#2 *AFV6#2 *AFV5#2 *AFV4#2 *AFV3#2 *AFV2#2 *AFV1#2 *AFV0#2
w

G1014 ROV2#2 ROV1#2

10
G1016 F1D#2 MSDFON#2
w

G1018 HS2D#2 HS2C#2 HS2B#2 HS2A#2 HS1D#2 HS1C#2 HS1B#2 HS1A#2

w

G1019 RT#2 MP2#2 MP1#2 HS3D#2 HS3C#2 HS3B#2 HS3A#2

G1023 ALNGH#2 RGHTH#2

178
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1027 CON#2 *SSTP3#2 *SSTP2#2 *SSTP1#2 SWS3#2 SWS2#2 SWS1#2

G1028 PC2SLC#2 SPSTP#2 *SCPF#2 *SUCPF#2 GR2#2 GR1#2

G1029 *SSTP#2 SOR#2 SAR#2 GR31#2 GR21#2

om
G1030 SOV7#2 SOV6#2 SOV5#2 SOV4#2 SOV3#2 SOV2#2 SOV1#2 SOV0#2

G1031 PKESS2#2 PKESS1#2

G1032 R08I#2 R07I#2 R06I#2 R05I#2 R04I#2 R03I#2 R02I#2 R01I#2

r.c
G1033 SIND#2 SSIN#2 SGN#2 R12I#2 R11I#2 R10I#2 R09I#2

G1034 R08I2#2 R07I2#2 R06I2#2 R05I2#2 R04I2#2 R03I2#2 R02I2#2 R01I2#2

G1035 SIND2#2 SSIN2#2 SGN2#2 R12I2#2 R11I2#2 R10I2#2 R09I2#2

e
G1036 R08I3#2 R07I3#2 R06I3#2 R05I3#2 R04I3#2 R03I3#2 R02I3#2 R01I3#2

G1037

G1038
nt
SIND3#2 SSIN3#2 SGN3#2

*BECLP#2 *BEUCP#2
R12I3#2 R11I3#2

SPPHS#2 SPSYC#2
R10I3#2 R09I3#2

*PLSST#2
ce
G1039 GOQSM#2 WOQSM#2 OFN5#2 OFN4#2 OFN3#2 OFN2#2 OFN1#2 OFN0#2

G1040 WOSET#2 PRC#2 OFN6#2

G1041 HS2ID#2 HS2IC#2 HS2IB#2 HS2IA#2 HS1ID#2 HS1IC#2 HS1IB#2 HS1IA#2

nc

G1042 HS3ID#2 HS3IC#2 HS3IB#2 HS3IA#2

G1043 ZRN#2 DNCI#2 MD4#2 MD2#2 MD1#2

.c

G1044 MLK#2 BDT1#2

G1045 BDT9#2 BDT8#2 BDT7#2 BDT6#2 BDT5#2 BDT4#2 BDT3#2 BDT2#2

w

G1046 DRN#2 KEY4#2 KEY3#2 KEY2#2 KEY1#2 SBK#2

G1047 TL128#2 TL64#2 TL32#2 TL16#2 TL08#2 TL04#2 TL02#2 TL01#2

w

G1048 TLRST#2 TLRSTI#2 TLSKP#2 TL256#2

w

G1049 *TLV7#2 *TLV6#2 *TLV5#2 *TLV4#2 *TLV3#2 *TLV2#2 *TOV1#2 *TLV0#2

G1050 *TLV9#2 *TLV8#2

179
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1051 *CHLD#2 CHPST#2 *CHP8#2 *CHP4#2 *CHP2#2 *CHP0#2
1
G1053 CDZ#2 SMZ#2 UINT#2 TMRON#2

G1054 UI007#2 UI006#2 UI005#2 UI004#2 UI003#2 UI002#2 UI001#2 UI000#2

2

om
G1055 UI015#2 UI014#2 UI013#2 UI012#2 UI011#2 UI010#2 UI009#2 UI008#2

G1058 EXWT#2 EXSTP#2 EXRD#2 MINP#2

3
G1059 TRRTN#2 TRESC#2

r.c
G1060 *TSB#2

4
G1061 RGTSP2#2 RGTSP1#2 RGTAP#2

G1062 *CRTOF#2

e
5
G1063 NOZAGC#2

G1064

G1066
nt ESRSYC#2

RTRCT#2
SLCSEQ#2 RTNCY#2

IGNVRY#2
6
ce
G1070 MRDYA#2 ORCMA#2 SFRA#2 SRVA#2 CTH1A#2 CTH2A#2 TLMHA#2 TLMLA#2

G1071 RCHA#2 RSLA#2 INTGA#2 SOCNA#2 MCFNA#2 SPSLA#2 *ESPA#2 ARSTA#2

7

G1072 RCHHGA#2 MFNHGA#2 INCMDA#2 OVRIDA#2 DEFMDA#2 NRROA#2 ROTAA#2 INDXA#2

nc

G1073 MPOFA#2 SLVA#2 MORCMA#2 8

G1074 MRDYB#2 ORCMB#2 SFRB#2 SRVB#2 CTH1B#2 CTH2B#2 TLMHB#2 TLMLB#2

.c

G1075 RCHB#2 RSLB#2 INTGB#2 SOCNB#2 MCFNB#2 SPSLB#2 *ESPB#2 ARSTB#2 9

G1076 RCHHGB#2 MFNHGB#2 INCMDB#2 OVRIDB#2 DEFMDB#2 NRROB#2 ROTAB#2 INDXB#2
w

G1077 MPOFB#2 SLVB#2 MORCMB#2

10
G1078 SHA07#2 SHA06 #2 SHA05#2 SHA04#2 SHA03#2 SHA02#2 SHA01#2 SHA00#2
w

G1079 SHA11#2 SHA10#2 SHA09#2 SHA08#2

w

G1080 SHB07#2 SHB06#2 SHB05#2 SHB04#2 SHB03#2 SHB02#2 SHB01#2 SHB00#2

G1081 SHB11#2 SHB10#2 SHB09#2 SHB08#2

180
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1082 Reserved for order made macro

G1083 Reserved for order made macro

G1091 SRLNI3#2 SRLNI2#2 SRLNI1#2 SRLNI0#2

om
G1092 BGEN#2 BGIALM#2 BGION#2 IOLS#2 IOLACK#2

G1096 HROV#2 *HROV6#2 *HROV5#2 *HROV4#2 *HROV3#2 *HROV2#2 *HROV1#2 *HROV0#2

G1100 +J7#2 +J6#2 +J5#2 +J4#2 +J3#2 +J2#2 +J1#2

r.c
G1102 –J7#2 –J6#2 –J5#2 –J4#2 –J3#2 –J2#2 –J1#2

G1106 MI7#2 MI6#2 MI5#2 MI4#2 MI3#2 MI2#2 MI1#2

G1108 MLK7#2 MLK6#2 MLK5#2 MLK4#2 MLK3#2 MLK2#2 MLK1#2

e
G1110 +LM7#2 +LM6#2 +LM5#2 +LM4#2 +LM3#2 +LM2#2 +LM1#2

G1112

G1114
nt –LM7#2

*+L7#2
–LM6#2

*+L6#2
–LM5#2

*+L5#2
–LM4#2 –LM3#2

*+L4#2 *+L3#2
–LM2#2 –LM1#2

*+L2#2 *+L1#2
ce
G1116 *–L7#2 *–L6#2 *–L5#2 *–L4#2 *–L3#2 *–L2#2 *–L1#2

G1118 *+ED7#2 *+ED6#2 *+ED5#2 *+ED4#2 *+ED3#2 *+ED2#2 *+ED1#2

nc

G1120 *–ED7#2 *–ED6#2 *–ED5#2 *–ED4#2 *–ED3#2 *–ED2#2 *–ED1#2

(T series)
PK7#2
PKESS2#2 PK6#2 PK5#2 PK4#2 PK3#2 PK2#2 PK1#2
G1122 PKESS1#2

PKESS2#2 PKESS1#2
.c

(M series)

G1124 DTCH7#2 DTCH6#2 DTCH5#2 DTCH4#2 DTCH3#2 DTCH2#2 DTCH1#2

w

G1126 SVF7#2 SVF6#2 SVF5#2 SVF4#2 SVF3#2 SVF2#2 SVF1#2

G1130 *IT7#2 *IT6#2 *IT5#2 *IT4#2 *IT3#2 *IT2#2 *IT1#2

w

G1132 +MIT4#2 +MIT3#2 +MIT2#2 +MIT1#2

w

G1134 –MIT4#2 –MIT3#2 –MIT2#2 –MIT1#2

G1136 EAX7#2 EAX6#2 EAX5#2 EAX4#2 EAX3#2 EAX2#2 EAX1#2

181
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1138 SYNC7#2 SYNC6#2 SYNC5#2 SYNC4#2 SYNC3#2 SYNC2#2 SYNC1#2
1
G1140 SYNCJ7#2 SYNCJ6#2 SYNCJ5#2 SYNCJ4#2 SYNCJ3#2 SYNCJ2#2 SYNCJ1#2

G1142 EBUFA#2 ECLRA#2 ESTPA#2 ESOFA#2 ESBKA#2 EMBUFA#2 EFINA#2

2

om
G1143 EMSBKA#2 EC6A#2 EC5A#2 EC4A#2 EC3A#2 EC2A#2 EC1A#2 EC0A#2

G1144 EIF7A#2 EIF6A#2 EIF5A#2 EIF4A#2 EIF3A#2 EIF2A#2 EIF1A#2 EIF0A#2

3
G1145 EIF15A#2 EIF14A#2 EIF13A#2 EIF12A#2 EIF11A#2 EIF10A#2 EIF9A#2 EIF8A#2

r.c
G1146 EID7A#2 EID6A#2 EID5A#2 EID4A#2 EID3A#2 EID2A#2 EID1A#2 EID0A#2

4
G1147 EID15A#2 EID14A#2 EID13A#2 EID12A#2 EID11A#2 EID10A#2 EID9A#2 EID8A#2

G1148 EID23A#2 EID22A#2 EID21A#2 EID20A#2 EID19A#2 EID18A#2 EID17A#2 EID16A#2

e
5
G1149 EID31A#2 EID30A#2 EID29A#2 EID28A#2 EID27A#2 EID26A#2 EID25A#2 EID24A#2

G1150

G1151
nt
DRNE#2 RTE#2 OVCE#2 ROV2E#2ROV1E#2

*FV7E#2 *FV6E#2 *FV5E#2 *FV4E#2 *FV3E#2 *FV2E#2 *FV1E#2 *FV0E#2

6
ce
G1154 EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ESTPB#2 ESOFB#2 ESBKB#2 EMBUFB#2 EFINB#2

G1155 EMSBKB#2 EC6B#2 EC5B#2 EC4B#2 EC3B#2 EC2B#2 EC1B#2 EC0B#2

7

G1156 EIF7B#2 EIF6B#2 EIF5B#2 EIF4B#2 EIF3B#2 EIF2B#2 EIF1B#2 EIF0B#2

nc

G1157 EIF15B#2 EIF14B#2 EIF13B#2 EIF12B#2 EIF11B#2 EIF10B#2 EIF9B#2 EIF8B#2 8

G1158 EID7B#2 EID6B#2 EID5B#2 EID4B#2 EID3B#2 EID2B#2 EID1B#2 EID0B#2

.c

G1159 EID15B#2 EID14B#2 EID13B#2 EID12B#2 EID11B#2 EID10B#2 EID9B#2 EID8B#2 9

G1160 EID23B#2 EID22B#2 EID21B#2 EID20B#2 EID19B#2 EID18B#2 EID17B#2 EID16B#2
w

G1161 EID31B#2 EID30B#2 EID29B#2 EID28B#2 EID27B#2EID26B#2 EID25B#2EID24B#2

10
G1166 EBUFC#2 ECLRC#2 ESTPC#2 ESOFC#2 ESBKC#2 EMBUFC#2 EFINC#2
w

G1167 EMSBKC#2 EC6C#2 EC5C#2 EC4C#2 EC3C#2 EC2C#2 EC1C#2 EC0C#2

w

G1168 EIF7C#2 EIF6C#2 EIF5C#2 EIF4C#2 EIF3C#2 EIF2C#2 EIF1C#2 EIF0C#2

G1169 EIF15C#2 EIF14C#2 EIF13C#2 EIF12C#2 EIF11C#2 EIF10C#2 EIF9C#2 EIF8C#2

182
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1170 EID7C#2 EID6C#2 EID5C#2 EID4C#2 EID3C#2 EID2C#2 EID1C#2 EID0C#2

G1171 EID15C#2 EID14C#2 EID13C#2 EID12C#2 EID11C#2 EID10C#2 EID9C#2 EID8C#2

G1172 EID23C#2 EID22C#2 EID21C#2 EID20C#2 EID19C#2 EID18C#2 EID17C#2 EID16C#2

om
G1173 EID31C#2 EID30C#2 EID29C#2 EID28C#2 EID27C#2 EID26C#2 EID25C#2 EID24C#2

G1178 EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD#2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2 EMBUFD#2 EFIND#2

G1179 EMSBKD#2 EC6D#2 EC5D#2 EC4D#2 EC3D#2 EC2D#2 EC1D#2 EC0D#2

r.c
G1180 EIF7D#2 EIF6D#2 EIF5D#2 EIF4D#2 EIF3D#2 EIF2D#2 EIF1D#2 EIF0D#2

G1181 EIF15D#2 EIF14D#2 EIF13D#2 EIF12D#2 EIF11D#2 EIF10D#2 EIF9D#2 EIF8D#2

G1182 EID7D#2 EID6D#2 EID5D#2 EID4D#2 EID3D#2 EID2D#2 EID1D#2 EID0D#2

e
G1183 EID15D#2 EID14D#2 EID13D#2 EID12D#2 EID11D#2 EID10D#2 EID9D#2 EID8D#2

G1184

G1185
nt
EID23D#2 EID22D#2 EID21D#2 EID20D#2 EID19D#2 EID18D#2 EID17D#2 EID16D#2

EID31D#2 EID30D#2 EID29D#2 EID28D#2 EID27D#2 EID26D#2 EID25D#2 EID24D#2

ce
G1190 OVLS7#2 OVLS6#2 OVLS5#2 OVLS4#2 OVLS3#2 OVLS2#2 OVLS1#2

G1192 IGVRY7#2 IGVRY6#2 IGVRY5#2 IGVRY4#2 IGVRY3#2 IGVRY2#2 IGVRY1#2

G1198 NPOS7#2 NPOS6#2 NPOS5#2 NPOS4#2 NPOS3#2 NPOS2#2NPOS1#2

nc

CNC→PMC
Address Bit number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
.c

F000 OP#1 SA#1 STL#1 SPL#1 RWD#1

F001 MA#1 TAP#1 ENB#1 DEN#1 BAL#1 RST#1 AL#1

w

F002 MDRN#1 CUT#1 SRNMV#1 THRD#1 CSS#1 RPDO#1 INCH#1

F003 MTCHIN#1 MEDT#1 MMEM#1 MRMT#1 MMDI#1 MJ#1 MH#1 MINC#1

w

F004 MREF#1 MAFL#1 MSBK#1 MABSM#1 MMLK#1 MBDT1#1

w

F005 MBDT9#1 MBDT8#1 MBDT7#1 MBDT6#1 MBDT5#1 MBDT4#1 MBDT3#1MBDT2#1

F007 BF#1 BF#1 TF#1 SF#1 EFD#1 MF#1

183
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F008 MF3#1 MF2#1 EF#1
1
F009 DM00#1 DM01#1 DM02#1 DM30#1

F010 M07#1 M06#1 M05#1 M04#1 M03#1 M02#1 M01#1 M00#1

2

om
F011 M15#1 M14#1 M13#1 M12#1 M11#1 M10#1 M09#1 M08#1

F012 M23#1 M22#1 M21#1 M20#1 M19#1 M18#1 M17#1 M16#1

3
F013 M31#1 M30#1 M29#1 M28#1 M27#1 M26#1 M25#1 M24#1

r.c
F014 M207#1 M206#1 M205#1 M204#1 M203#1 M202#1 M201#1 M200#1

4
F015 M215#1 M214#1 M213#1 M212#1 M211#1 M210#1 M209#1 M208#1

F016 M307#1 M306#1 M305#1 M304#1 M303#1 M302#1 M301#1 M300#1

e
5
F017 M315#1 M314#1 M313#1 M312#1 M311#1 M310#1 M309#1 M308#1

F022

F023
nt
S07#1

S15#1
S06#1

S14#1
S05#1

S13#1
S04#1

S12#1
S03#1

S11#1
S02#1

S10#1
S01#1

S09#1
S00#1

S08#1
6
ce
F024 S23#1 S22#1 S21#1 S20#1 S19#1 S18#1 S17#1 S16#1

F025 S31#1 S30#1 S29#1 S28#1 S27#1 S26#1 S25#1 S24#1

7

F026 T07#1 T06#1 T05#1 T04#1 T03#1 T02#1 T01#1 T00#1

nc

F027 T15#1 T14#1 T13#1 T12#1 T11#1 T10#1 T09#1 T08#1 8

F028 T23#1 T22#1 T21#1 T20#1 T19#1 T18#1 T17#1 T16#1

.c

F029 T31#1 T30#1 T29#1 T28#1 T27#1 T26#1 T25#1 T24#1 9

F030 B07#1 B06#1 B05#1 B04#1 B03#1 B02#1 B01#1 B00#1
w

F031 B15#1 B14#1 B13#1 B12#1 B11#1 B10#1 B09#1 B08#1

10
F032 B23#1 B22#1 B21#1 B20#1 B19#1 B18#1 B17#1 B16#1
w

F033 B31#1 B30#1 B29#1 B28#1 B27#1 B26#1 B25#1 B24#1

w

F034 GR3O#1 GR2O#1 GR1O#1

F035 SPAL#1

184
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F036 R08O#1 R07O#1 R06O#1 R05O#1 R04O#1 R03O#1 R02O#1 R01O#1

F037 R12O#1 R11O#1 R10O#1 R09O#1

F038 ENB3#1 ENB2#1 SUCLP#1 SCLP#1

om
F039 CHPCYL#1 CHPMD#1

F040 AR7#1 AR6#1 AR5#1 AR4#1 AR3#1 AR2#1 AR1#1 AR0#1

F041 AR15#1 AR14#1 AR13#1 AR12#1 AR11#1 AR10#1 AR09#1 AR08#1

r.c
F044 SYCAL FSPPH FSPSY
FSCSL#1
SYCAL#1 FSPPH#1 FSPSY#1

F045 ORARA#1 TLMA#1 LDT2A#1 LDT1A#1 SARA#1 SDTA#1 SSTA#1 ALMA#1

F046 MORA2A#1 MORA1A#1 PORA2A#1 SLVSA#1 RCFNA#1 RCHPA#1 CFINA#1 CHPA#1

e
F047 INCSTA#1 PC1DEA#1

F049

F050
nt
ORARB#1 TLMB#1 LDT2B#1 LDT1B#1 SARB#1 SDTB#1 SSTB#1 ALMB#1

MORA2B#1 MORA1B#1 PORA2B#1 SLVSB#1 RCFNB#1 RCHPB#1 CFINB#1 CHPB#1

ce
F051 INCSTB#1 PC1DEB#1

F053 EKENB BGEACT#1 RPALM#1 RPBSY#1 PRGDPL INHKY

F054 UO007#1 UO006#1 UO005#1 UO004#1 UO003#1 UO002#1 UO001#1 UO000#1

nc

F055 UO015#1 UO014#1 UO013#1 UO012#1 UO011#1 UO010#1 UO009#1 UO008#1

F056 UO107#1 UO106#1 UO105#1 UO104#1 UO103#1 UO102#1 UO101#1 UO100#1

.c

F057 UO115#1 UO114#1 UO113#1 UO112#1 UO111#1 UO110#1 UO109#1 UO108#1

F058 UO123#1 UO122#1 UO121#1 UO120#1 UO119#1 UO118#1 UO117#1 UO116#1

w

F059 UO131#1 UO130#1 UO129#1 UO128#1 UO127#1 UO126#1 UO125#1 UO124#1

F060 ESEND#1 EREND#1

w

F061 BCLP#1 BUCLP#1

w

F062 PRTSF#1

F063 PSYN#1 WATO#1 RCYO#1 PSAR#1 PSE2#1 PSE1#1

185
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F064 TIALM TICHK COSP TLCHI#1 TLNW#1 TLCH#1
1
F065 SYNMOD#1 RTRCTF#1 RGSPM#1 RGSPP#1

F066 PECK2#1 RTNMVS#1 G08MD#1

2

om
F070 PSW08#1 PSW07#1 PSW06#1 PSW05#1 PSW04#1 PSW03#1 PSW02#1 PSW01#1

F071 PSW10#1 PSW09#1

3
F072 OUT7#1 OUT6#1 OUT5#1 OUT4#1 OUT3#1 OUT2#1 OUT1#1 OUT0#1

r.c
F073 ZRNO#1 MD4O#1 MD2O#1 MD1O#1

4
F075 SPO#1 KEYO#1 DRNO#1 MLKO#1 SBKO#1 BDTO#1

F076 ROV2O#1 ROV1O#1 RTAP#1 MP2O#1 MP1O#1

e
5
F077 RTO#1 HS1DO#1 HS1CO#1 HS1BO#1 HS1AO#1

F078

F079
nt
*FV7O#1 *FV6O#1 *FV5O#1 *FV4O#1 *FV3O#1 *FV2O#1 *FV1O#1 *FV0O#1

*JV7O#1 *JV6O#1 *JV5O#1 *JV4O#1 *JV3O#1 *JV2O#1 *JV1O#1 *JV0O#1

6
ce
F080 *FV15O#1 *FV14O#1 *FV13O#1 *FV12O#1 *FV11O#1 *FV10O#1 *FV9O#1 *FV8O#1

F081 –J4O#1 +J4O#1 –J3O#1 +J3O#1 –J2O#1 +J2O#1 –J1O#1 +J1O#1

7

F082 RVSL#1
nc

F090 ABTSP2#1 ABTSP1#1 ABTQSV#1 8

F092 TRSPS#1 TRACT#1

.c

F094 ZP7#1 ZP6#1 ZP5#1 ZP4#1 ZP3#1 ZP2#1 ZP1#1 9

F096 ZP27#1 ZP26#1 ZP25#1 ZP24#1 ZP23#1 ZP22#1 ZP21#1
w

F098 ZP37#1 ZP36#1 ZP35#1 ZP34#1 ZP33#1 ZP32#1 ZP31#1

10
F100 ZP47#1 ZP46#1 ZP45#1 ZP44#1 ZP43#1 ZP42#1 ZP41#1
w

F102 MV7#1 MV6#1 MV5#1 MV4#1 MV3#1 MV2#1 MV1#1

w

F104 INP7#1 INP6#1 INP5#1 INP4#1 INP3#1 INP2#1 INP1#1

F106 MVD7#1 MVD6#1 MVD5#1 MVD4#1 MVD3#1 MVD2#1 MVD1#1

186
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F108 MMI7#1 MMI6#1 MMI5#1 MMI4#1 MMI3#1 MMI2#1 MMI1#1

F110 MDTCH7#1 MDTCH6#1 MDTCH5#1 MDTCH4#1 MDTCH3#1 MDTCH2#1 MDTCH1#1

F112 EADEN7#1 EADEN6#1 EADEN5#1 EADEN4#1 EADEN3#1 EADEN2#1 EADEN1#1

om
F114 TRQL7#1 TRQL6#1 TRQL5#1 TRQL4#1 TRQL3#1 TRQL2#1 TRQL1#1

F116 FRP7#1 FRP6#1 FRP5#1 FRP4#1 FRP3#1 FRP2#1 FRP1#1

F118 SYN7O#1 SYN6O#1 SYN5O#1 SYN4O#1 SYN3O#1 SYN2O#1 SYN1O#1

r.c
F120 ZRF7#1 ZRF6#1 ZRF5#1 ZRF4#1 ZRF3#1 ZRF2#1 ZRF1#1

F122 HDO7#1 HDO6#1 HDO5#1 HDO4#1 HDO3#1 HDO2#1 HDO1#1 HDO0#1

F129 *EAXSL#1 EOV0#1

e
F130 EBSYA#1 EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1 EGENA#1 EDENA#1 EIALA#1 ECKZA#1 EINPA#1

F131

F132
nt EABUFA#1

EM28A#1 EM24A#1 EM22A#1 EM21A#1 EM18A#1 EM14A#1 EM12A#1 EM11A#1

EMFA#1
ce
F133 EBSYB#1 EOTNB#1 EOTPB#1 EGENB#1 EDENB#1 EIALB#1 ECKZB#1 EINPB#1

F134 EABUFB#1 EMFB#1

F135 EM28B#1 EM24B#1 EM22B#1 EM21B#1 EM18B#1 EM14B#1 EM12B#1 EM11B#1

nc

F136 EBSYC#1 EOTNC#1 EOTPC#1 EGENC#1 EDENC#1 EIALC#1 ECKZC#1 EINPC#1

F137 EABUFC#1 EMFC#1

.c

F138 EM28C#1 EM24C#1 EM22C#1 EM21C#1 EM18C#1 EM14C#1 EM12C#1 EM11C#1

F139 EBSYD#1 EOTND#1 EOTPD#1 EGEND#1 EDEND#1 EIALD#1 ECKZD#1 EINPD#1

w

F140 EABUFD#1 EMFD#1

F141 EM28D#1 EM24D#1 EM22D#1 EM21D#1 EM18D#1 EM14D#1 EM12D#1 EM11D#1

w

F142 EM48A#1 EM44A#1 EM42A#1 EM41A#1 EM38A#1 EM34A#1 EM32A#1 EM31A#1

w

F145 EM48B#1 EM44B#1 EM42B#1 EM41B#1 EM38B#1 EM34B#1 EM32B#1 EM31B#1

F148 EM48C#1 EM44C#1 EM42C#1 EM41C#1 EM38C#1 EM34C#1 EM32C#1 EM31C#1

187
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F151 EM48D#1 EM44D#1 EM42D#1 EM41D#1 EM38D#1 EM34D#1 EM32D#1 EM31D#1
1
F177 EDGN#1 EPARM#1 EVAR#1 EPRG#1 EWTIO#1 ESTPIO#1 ERDIO#1 IOLNK#1

F178 SRLNO3#1 SRLNO2#1 SRLNO1#1 SRLNO0#1

om
F180 CLRCH8#1 CLRCH7#1 CLRCH6#1 CLRCH5#1 CLRCH4#1 CLRCH3#1 CLRCH2#1 CLRCH1#1

F182 EACNT7#1 EACNT6#1 EACNT5#1 EACNT4#1 EACNT3#1 EACNT2#1 EACNT1#1

PMC→CNC

r.c
Address Bit number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4
F1100 OP#2 SA#2 STL#2 SPL#2 RWD#2

F1001 MA#2 TAP#2 ENB#2 DEN#2 BAL#2 RST#2 AL#2

e
5
F1002 MDRN#2 CUT#2 SRNMV#2 THRD#2 CSS#2 RPDO#2 INCH#2

F1003

F1004
nt
MTCHIN#2 MEDT#2 MMEM#2 MRMT#2 MMDI#2 MJ#2 MH#2

MREF#2 MAFL#2 MSBK#2 MABSM#2 MMLK#2 MBDT1#2

MINC#2

6
ce
F1005 MBDT9#2 MBDT8#2 MBDT7#2 MBDT6#2 MBDT5#2 MBDT4#2 MBDT3#2 MBDT2#2

F1007 BF#2 BF#2 TF#2 SF#2 EFD#2 MF#2 7

F1008 MF3#2 MF2#2 EF#2

nc

F1009 DM00#2 DM01#2 DM02#2 DM30#2 8

F1010 M07#2 M06#2 M05#2 M04#2 M03#2 M02#2 M01#2 M00#2

.c

F1011 M15#2 M14#2 M13#2 M12#2 M11#2 M10#2 M09#2 M08#2 9

F1012 M23#2 M22#2 M21#2 M20#2 M19#2 M18#2 M17#2 M16#2
w

F1013 M31#2 M30#2 M29#2 M28#2 M27#2 M26#2 M25#2 M24#2

10
F1014 M207#2 M206#2 M205#2 M204#2 M203#2 M202#2 M201#2 M200#2
w

F1015 M215#2 M214#2 M213#2 M212#2 M211#2 M210#2 M209#2 M208#2

w

F1016 M307#2 M306#2 M305#2 M304#2 M303#2 M302#2 M301#2 M300#2

F1017 M315#2 M314#2 M313#2 M312#2 M311#2 M310#2 M309#2 M308#2

188
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1022 S07#2 S06#2 S05#2 S04#2 S03#2 S02#2 S01#2 S00#2

F1023 S15#2 S14#2 S13#2 S12#2 S11#2 S10#2 S09#2 S08#2

F1024 S23#2 S22#2 S21#2 S20#2 S19#2 S18#2 S17#2 S16#2

om
F1025 S31#2 S30#2 S29#2 S28#2 S27#2 S26#2 S25#2 S24#2

F1026 T07#2 T06#2 T05#2 T04#2 T03#2 T02#2 T01#2 T00#2

F1027 T15#2 T14#2 T13#2 T12#2 T11#2 T10#2 T09#2 T08#2

r.c
F1028 T23#2 T22#2 T21#2 T20#2 T19#2 T18#2 T17#2 T16#2

F1029 T31#2 T30#2 T29#2 T28#2 T27#2 T26#2 T25#2 T24#2

F1030 B07#2 B06#2 B05#2 B04#2 B03#2 B02#2 B01#2 B00#2

e
F1031 B15#2 B14#2 B13#2 B12#2 B11#2 B10#2 B09#2 B08#2

F1032

F1033
nt
B23#2

B31#2
B22#2

B30#2
B21#2

B29#2
B20#2

B28#2
B19#2

B27#2
B18#2

B26#2
B17#2

B25#2
B16#2

B24#2
ce
F1034 GR3O#2 GR2O#2 GR1O#2

F1035 SPAL#2

F1036 R08O#2 R07O#2 R06O#2 R05O#2 R04O#2 R03O#2 R02O#2 R01O#2

nc

F1037 R12O#2 R11O#2 R10O#2 R09O#2

F1038 ENB3#2 ENB2#2 SUCLP#2 SCLP#2

.c

F1039 CHPCYL#2 CHPMD#2

F1040 AR7#2 AR6#2 AR5#2 AR4#2 AR3#2 AR2#2 AR1#2 AR0#2

w

F1041 AR15#2 AR14#2 AR13#2 AR12#2 AR11#2 AR10#2 AR09#2 AR08#2

F1044 SYCAL#2 FSPPH#2 FSPSY#2 FSCSL#2

w

F1045 ORARA#2 TLMA#2 LDT2A#2 LDT1A#2 SARA#2 SDTA#2 SSTA#2 ALMA#2

w

F1046 MORA2A#2 MORA1A#2 PORA2A#2 SLVSA#2 RCFNA#2 RCHPA#2 CFINA#2 CHPA#2

F1047 INCSTA#2 PC1DEA#2

189
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1049 ORARB#2 TLMB#2 LDT2B#2 LDT1B#2 SARB#2 SDTB#2 SSTB#2 ALMB#2
1
F1050 MORA2B#2 MORA1B#2 PORA2B#2 SLVSB#2 RCFNB#2 RCHPB#2 CFINB#2 CHPB#2

F1051 INCSTB#2 PC1DEB#2

2

om
F1053 BGEACT#2 RPALM#2 RPBSY#2

F1054 UO007#2 UO006#2 UO005#2 UO004#2 UO003#2 UO002#2 UO001#2 UO000#2

3
F1055 UO015#2 UO014#2 UO013#2 UO012#2 UO011#2 UO010#2 UO009#2 UO008#2

r.c
F1056 UO107#2 UO106#2 UO105#2 UO104#2 UO103#2 UO102#2 UO101#2 UO100#2

4
F1057 UO115#2 UO114#2 UO113#2 UO112#2 UO111#2 UO110#2 UO109#2 UO108#2

F1058 UO123#2 UO122#2 UO121#2 UO120#2 UO119#2 UO118#2 UO117#2 UO116#2

e
5
F1059 UO131#2 UO130#2 UO129#2 UO128#2 UO127#2 UO126#2 UO125#2 UO124#2

F1060

F1061
nt ESEND#2 EREND#2

BCLP#2 BUCLP#2
6
ce
F1062 PRTSF#2

F1063 PSYN#2 WATO#2 RCYO#2 PSAR#2 PSE2#2 PSE1#2

7

F1064 TLCHI#2 TLNW#2 TLCH#2

nc

F1065 SYNMOD#2 RTRCTF#2 RGSPM#2 RGSPP#2 8

F1066 PECK2#2 RTNMVS#2 G08MD#2

.c

F1070 PSW08#2 PSW07#2 PSW06#2 PSW05#2 PSW04#2 PSW03#2 PSW02#2 PSW01#2 9

F1071 PSW10#2 PSW09#2
w

F1072 OUT7#2 OUT6#2 OUT5#2 OUT4#2 OUT3#2 OUT2#2 OUT1#2 OUT0#2

10
F1073 ZRNO#2 MD4O#2 MD2O#2 MD1O#2
w

F1075 SPO#2 KEYO#2 DRNO#2 MLKO#2 SBKO#2 BDTO#2

w

F1076 ROV2O#2 ROV1O#2 RTAP#2 MP2O#2 MP1O#2

F1077 RTO#2 HS1DO#2 HS1CO#2 HS1BO#2 HS1AO#2

190
 6. STATUS DISPLAY BY SELF–DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1078 *FV7O#2 *FV6O#2 *FV5O#2 *FV4O#2 *FV3O#2 *FV2O#2 *FV1O#2 *FV0O#2

F1079 *JV7O#2 *JV6O#2 *JV5O#2 *JV4O#2 *JV3O#2 *JV2O#2 *JV1O#2 *JV0O#2

F1080 *FV15O#2 *FV14O#2 *FV13O#2 *FV12O#2 *FV11O#2 *FV10O#2 *FV09O#2 *FV08O#2

om
F1081 –J4O#2 +J4O#2 –J3O#2 +J3O#2 –J2O#2 +J2O#2 –J1O#2 +J1O#2

F1082 RVSL#2

F1090 ABTSP2#2 ABTSP1#2 ABTQSV#2

r.c
F1092 TRSPS#2 TRACT#2

F1094 ZP7#2 ZP6#2 ZP5#2 ZP4#2 ZP3#2 ZP2#2 ZP1#2

F1096 ZP27#2 ZP26#2 ZP25#2 ZP24#2 ZP23#2 ZP22#2 ZP21#2

e
F1098 ZP37#2 ZP36#2 ZP35#2 ZP34#2 ZP33#2 ZP32#2 ZP31#2

F1100

F1102
nt ZP47#2

MV7#2
ZP46#2

MV6#2
ZP45#2

MV5#2
ZP44#2

MV4#2
ZP43#2

MV3#2
ZP42#2

MV2#2
ZP41#2

MV1#2
ce
F1104 INP7#2 INP6#2 INP5#2 INP4#2 INP3#2 INP2#2 INP1#2

F1106 MVD7#2 MVD6#2 MVD5#2 MVD4#2 MVD3#2 MVD2#2 MVD1#2

F1108 MMI7#2 MMI6#2 MMI5#2 MMI4#2 MMI3#2 MMI2#2 MMI1#2

nc

F1110 MDTCH7#2 MDTCH6#2 MDTCH5#2 MDTCH4#2 MDTCH3#2 MDTCH2#2 MDTCH1#2

F1112 EADEN7#2 EADEN6#2 EADEN5#2 EADEN4#2 EADEN3#2 EADEN2#2 EADEN1#2

.c

F1114 TRQL7#2 TRQL6#2 TRQL5#2 TRQL4#2 TRQL3#2 TRQL2#2 TRQL1#2

F1116 FRP7#2 FRP6#2 FRP5#2 FRP4#2 FRP3#2 FRP2#2 FRP1#2

w

F1118 SYN7O#2 SYN6O#2 SYN5O#2 SYN4O#2 SYN3O#2 SYN2O#2 SYN1O#2

F1120 ZRF7#2 ZRF6#2 ZRF5#2 ZRF4#2 ZRF3#2 ZRF2#2 ZRF1#2

w

F1122 HDO7#2 HDO6#2 HDO5#2 HDO4#2 HDO3#2 HDO2#2 HDO1#2 HDO0#2

w

F1129 *EAXSL#2 EOV0#2

F1130 EBSYA#2 EOTNA#2 EOTA#2 EGENA#2 EDENA#2 EIALA#2 ECKZA#2 EINPA#2

191
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F1131 EABUFA#2 EMFA#2
1
F1132 EM28A#2 EM24A#2 EM22A#2 EM21A#2 EM18A#2 EM14A#2 EM12A#2 EM11A#2

F1133 EBSYB#2 EOTNB#2 EOTB#2 EGENB#2 EDENB#2 EIALB#2 ECKZB#2 EINPB#2

2

om
F1134 EABUFB#2 EMFB#2

F1135 EM28B#2 EM24B#2 EM22B#2 EM21B#2 EM18B#2 EM14B#2 EM12B#2 EM11B#2

3
F1136 EBSYC#2 EOTNC#2 EOTC#2 EGENC#2 EDENC#2 EIALC#2 ECKZC#2 EINPC#2

r.c
F1137 EABUFC#2 EMFC#2

4
F1138 EM28C#2 EM24C#2 EM22C#2 EM21C#2 EM18C#2 EM14C#2 EM12C#2 EM11C#2

F1139 EBSYD#2 EOTND#2 EOTD#2 EGEND#2 EDEND#2 EIALD#2 ECKZD#2 EINPD#2

e
5
F1140 EABUFD#2 EMFD#2

F1141

F1142
nt
EM28D#2 EM24D#2 EM22D#2 EM21D#2 EM18D#2 EM14D#2 EM12D#2 EM11D#2

EM48A#2 EM44A#2 EM42A#2 EM41A#2 EM38A#2 EM34A#2 EM32A#2 EM31A#2

6
ce
F1145 EM48B#2 EM44B#2 EM42B#2 EM41B#2 EM38B#2 EM34B#2 EM32B#2 EM31B#2

F1148 EM48C#2 EM44C#2 EM42C#2 EM41C#2 EM38C#2 EM34C#2 EM32C#2 EM31C#2 7

F1151 EM48D#2 EM44D#2 EM42D#2 EM41D#2 EM38D#2 EM34D#2 EM32D#2 EM31D#2

nc

F1177 EDGN#2 EPARM#2 EVAR#2 EPRG#2 EWTIO#2 ESTPIO#2 ERDIO#2 IOLNK#2 8

F1178 SRLNO3#2 SRLNO2#2 SRLNO1#2 SRLNO0#2
.c

F1180 CLRCH8#2 CLRCH7#2 CLRCH6#2 CLRCH5#2 CLRCH4#2 CLRCH3#2 CLRCH2#2 CLRCH1#2

9
F1182 EACNT7#2 EACNT6#2 EACNT5#2 EACNT4#2 EACNT3#2 EACNT2#2 EACNT1#2
w

10
w
w

192
 7. HARDWARE

7.1 Configuration of CNC Machine Tool

Machine tool magnetic cabinet

Heat

om
exchanger

Operator’s
panel interface

r.c
Manual pulse
generator

Control unit
I/O unit

(Note1)

e
nt
Multi–tap
transformer for
the control unit

Spindle
ce
amplifier

Power
supply Host
computer
nc

Distribution
board
.c
w
w
w

193
 1

CRT/MDI
unit
2

om
Machine
operator’s
panel I/O device
3

Relay connector

r.c
4
Power Sensor /
magnetic actuator
circuit

e
5
(Note 2) Servo
Servo motor
nt
amplifier

(Note 2) Spindle
6
ce
motor

7
nc

NOTE1 Refer to the “FANUC I/O Unit Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual
(B-61813E)”.
NOTE2 Refer to the following manuals: 8
“FANUC AC Servo Motor α Series Descriptions (B-65142E)”
“FANUC AC Spindle Motor α Series Descriptions (B-65152E)”
“FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER α Series Descriptions
.c

(B–65162E)”
9
w

10
w
w

194
 7. HARDWARE

7.2 Configuration of the Control Unit

(1) For Series 16/160

Background OSI Data Control unit HSSB

graphic Ethernet server graphic interface
board board board board board

om
Back- Commu- Data Graphic High–
ground nication server selection speed
graphic CPU function function serial bus
CPU interface
(For Su-
per CAP
M)

r.c
MMC RISC Loader I/O card Option–3
board board control board
board

MMC–IV High Loader DI/DO CAP CPU

e
CPU precision control (40/40) (CAP–II)
contour CPU (80/56)
control (104/72)
Hard disk 64–bit 4 axes (156/112) PMC CPU
drive RISC control (PMC–
CPU High–

nt
Floppy
disk drive

Printer
Keyboard
RS–232–
C
Loader
PMC
DI/DO
speed
skip
RC3/RC4)
ce
ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
Opotion

ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
nc
.c
w
w
w

195
 1

om
3

r.c
4
Option–2 Option–1 Main Power
board board CPU supply
board unit

2–path Commu- CNC CPU ON/OFF

e
control nication control
SUB CPU CPU 5
(Remote
4/6–axes buffer,l 4/6–axes Power
control DNC1, control supply
Spindle DNC2) Spindle I/F unit AI or

nt
I/F High–
speed
skip Ana-
log I/O
CRT/MDI
I/O Link
PMC–
RB5/RB6
RS–232–C

2
Memory
card I/F
BI

6
ce
ÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Basic system
7

ÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
nc

Main Power
CPU supply
.c

9
w

2 slot 10
3 slot
4 slot
6 slot
w

8 slot
w

196
 7. HARDWARE

(2) For Series 18/180

Control unit HSSB Data

graphic interface server
board board board

om
Graphic High– Data
selection speed server
function serial bus function
interface

r.c
Background MMC Loader I/O card Option–3
graphic board control board
board board

Back- MMC–IV Loader DI/DO PMC CPU

ground CPU control (40/40) (PMC–RC3/
graphic CPU (80/56) RC4)
CPU (104/72)

e
(For Su- Hard disk 4 axes (156/112) CAP CPU
per CAP drive control
M) Floppy Loader High–
disk drive PMC speed
DI/DO skip
Printer

nt Keyboard
RS–232–
C

ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
ce
Opotion

ÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜÜ
nc
.c
w
w
w

197
 (3) When power supply C is used.

Power
Main CPU
supply
board
unit

CNC CPU Power sup- 2

om
ply unit C
4–axes con-
trol
Spindle I/F DI/DO
CRT/MDI (40/40)
(Graphic) (80/56)
I/O Link (104/72)
PMC– 3
RB5/RB6
RS–232–C

2 High speed
Memory skip

r.c
card I/F

Option–2
board
Option–1
board
Main
CPU
Power
supply
4
board unit

2–path Commu- CNC CPU ON/OFF

control nication control
SUB CPU CPU

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
(Remote
4/6–axes 4/6–axes Power Basic system

e
buffer,l
control DNC1, control supply
5

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Spindle DNC2) Spindle I/F unit AI or
I/F High– CRT/MDI BI
speed I/O Link

ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
skip Ana- PMC–
log I/O
nt RB5/RB6
RS–232–C

2
Memory
card I/F
6

ÜÜÜÜÜ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ce
Basic system

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÜÜÜÜÜ Main
CPU
Power
supply
I/O
Card
7
nc

8
Main Power
CPU supply
.c

2 slot 9

2 slot
w

3 slot
4 slot
6 slot 10
w
w

198
 7. HARDWARE

7.3 Total Connection

(1) When power supply unit AI/BI is used.
NOTE Refer to item 7.1.1 for CRT/MDI connection.

PSU
AC-IN(CP1)

om
AC-OUT(CP2)
AC-OUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)

F–BUS VGA

r.c
CRT(JA1A)
CRT(JA1B)

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
HSSB interface
HSSB(COP7)
To intelligent terminal

e
MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)

C
O
N
nt
R232-1(JD5A)
R232-2(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)

FANUC I/O LINK

ce
T IOLINK(JD1A)
R
O
L A–OUT1(JA8A) ANALOG OUTPUT
FOR TOOL DRIVE
U
N
I
nc

T
.c

SPDL–1(JA7A)
w

TO 2ND SPINDLE
APCBAT(JA4A) 6V
w

BATTERY FOR
ABSOLUTE PC

AMP1(JS1A)
w

SCALE1(JF21)

199
 1

om
200–240VAC POWER

ÂÂ ON/OFF

ÂÂ CRT/MDI
UNIT
(See chap. 7)
3

r.c
RS232C I/O DEVICE 4

MPG

ÂÂ Â
e
5

Â
CPD1 OPERATOR’S OPERATOR’S
PANEL

Â
JD1A PANEL : :
nt INTE
JD1B
UNIT

JD1A
RFACE

MAGNETICS
6

ÂÂ
I/O UNIT
ce
CABINET
JD1B MODEL–A
CP32 DC24V
POWER 7
BRAKER
200VAC
nc

AC REACTOR MCC BRAKER

200VAC
8
EMERGENCY STOP
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B
.c

POSITION CODER 9
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
JA7B JY2 SPINDLE MOTOR
w

JA7A SPM TB2

TB1 CX2B JX1B 10
w

1ST AXIS
SERVO MOTOR
TB2 CX2A JX1A
JS1B TB2
SVM JF1 SERIAL PULSE
w

CODER
1ST AXIS
LINEAR SCALE

200
 7. HARDWARE

AMP2(JS2A)

om
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JS3A)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JS4A)
SCALE4(JF24)
AMP5(JS5A)

Ç
AMP6(JS6A)

r.c
SV–CHK(JA26) SERVO CHECK (5,6 AXIS)

OPTION 1 BOARD

RS422–1(JD6A)

e
R232–3(JD5C)

nt
OPTION 2 BOARD

A–OUT2(JA8B)
A–IN(JA6)
ce
C HDI(JA5)
O SPDL–2(JA7B)
N
BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE
T APCBAT(JA4B) 6V PULSE CODER
R
(FOR LINEAR SCALE)
O
L SV–CHK(JA26) SERVO CHECK (5TH AND 6TH AXIS)
(FS16/160 ONLY)
nc

U AMP1(JS1A–2)
N SCALE1(JF21–2)
I
T AMP2(JS2A–2)
SCALE2(JF22–2)
AMP3(JS3A–2)
SCALE3(JF23–2)
.c

AMP4(JS4A–2)
SCALE4(JF24–2)
AMP5(JS5A–2)

AMP6(JS6A–2)
w

OPTION 3
w

FANUC I/O LINK

IOLINK(JD1A)

R422–2(JD6B)
R232–4(JD5D)
w

R232–5(JD5E)

201
 1

2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE 2

om
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)
3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)
4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)
5TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC
3
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)
6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOROR/PC
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)

r.c
4

REMOTE BUFFER OR DNC1 (RS422)

e
5
REMOTE BUFFER (RS232C)

ntANALOG OUTPUT FOR TOOL DRIVE

ANALOG I/O
6
ce
HIGH SPEED DI
CONNECTION CONFORMS TO THAT OF
MAIN CPU BOARD
7
nc

SUB 1ST AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE

(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO MAIN 1ST AXIS)
SUB 2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE
8
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO MAIN 1ST AXIS)
SUB 3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO MAIN 1ST AXIS)
.c

SUB 4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE

(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO MAIN 1ST AXIS) 9
SUB 5TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO MAIN 1ST AXIS)
FS16/160
SUB 6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC ONLY
w

(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO MAIN 1ST AXIS)

10
w

TO I/O UNIT MODEL A (FOR PMC–RC)

w

202
 7. HARDWARE

I/O CARD

om
HDI(JA5B)

DO–1(C54)
DO–2(C55)
DO–3(C58)
DI–1(C50)
DI–2(C51)
DI–3(C52)

r.c
DI–4(C53)
DI–5(C56)
C DI–6(C57)
O
N
T
R
MMC–IV CPU

e
O
L NC CRT(JA1B)
U CRT(JA1A)
N
I
T
nt R232–1(JD5F)
R232–2(JD5G)

FDD(JD8)
ce
CENTRO(JD9)

EX KEY(JD21)
nc

KEYBOARD(CD32A)

MOUSE(CD32B)
.c

* USED FOR DEVELOPMENT OF AN APPLICATION.

CANNOT BE USED FOR ACTUAL RUNNING.
w
w
w

203
 1

om
HIGH–SPEED SKIP SIGNAL

DO 40 POINTS
DO 40 POINTS
DO 40 POINTS
3
DI 40 POINTS MEGNETICS CABINET
DI 40 POINTS
DI 12 POINTS

r.c
DI 12 POINTS
DI 40 POINTS
4
DI 12 POINTS

e
5

nt RS232C I/O DEVICE

ÂÂ 6

ÂÂ
* FLOPPY DISK UNIT

JD8 PW1 100VAC

ÂÂ
IN
ce
*
PRINTER POWER
7
*
CUSTOM KEYBOARD
nc

*
FULL KEYBOARD 8

*
MOUSE
.c

9
w

10
w
w

204
 7. HARDWARE

SERVO CHECK BOARD INTERFACE

om
LOADER CONTROL
BOARD
CHECK(JA8C)

ESP(CNPW)

r.c
BRAKE(CNBK)

AMP1(JS1A) CONNECTION TO

e
THE SERVO AMP
CONFORMS TO
THAT OF 1ST AXIS
OF MAIN CPU
AMP2(JS2A) BOARD.

C
O
N
T
R
nt
ce
O AMP3(JS3A)
L

U
N
I AMP4(JS4A)
T
nc

RDIO(CRM1)
.c

WF(CNWF)
w

TP(CNTP)
w

ADDITIONAL I/O

Â
FANUC I/O LINK JD1A DI/DO FOR
IOLINK(JD1A) JD1B I/O LINK
w

24V POWER

205
 1

RECTIFIER FOR BRAKE EMERGENCY STOP CONTROL CIRCUIT 2

om
EMG(24V)

100VAC

GND
3

r.c
4
LOADER BODY
1ST AXIS
SERVO
MOTOR

e
5
2ND AXIS
SERVO
MOTOR
nt 3RD AXIS
SERVO
6
ce
MOTOR

4TH AXIS
SERVO 7
MOTOR
nc

OVERTRAVEL LIMIT
24V
8
ACTUATOR
SENSOR
.c

9
ACTUATOR
SENSOR WORKFEEDER
w

OPERATOR’S
10
SW, LED PANEL FOR
LOADER
w
w

206
 7. HARDWARE

(2) When power supply C is used

NOTE Refer to item (3) for CRT/MDI connection.

PSU–I/O BOARD 200VAC

ÂÂ
24V–IN(CP1A)

om
24V–OUT(CP1B)

ÂÂ
DI–1(C50)
DI–2(C51)

ÂÂ
DI–3(C52)

ÂÂ
DI–4(C53)
DO–1(C54)
DO–1(C55)

r.c
Main CPU CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R232-1(JD5A)
R232-2(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)

e
FANUC I/O LINK
C IOLINK(JD1A)
O
N
T
R
O
L
nt
A–OUT1(JA8A) ANALOG OUTPUT
FOR TOOL DRIVE
ce
U
N
I
T
nc
.c

SPDL–1(JA7A)
w

APCBAT(JA4A) TO 2ND SPINDLE

6V
w

Battery for absolute pulse

coder (linear scale)
AMP1(JS1A)
w

207
 1

om
24VDC POWER SOURCE

ÂÂ
ÂÂ
CP11/CP5

CN1
LCD/MDI
CRT/MDI
3
MAGNETICS CK1 UNIT
CABINET

r.c
4
RS232C I/O DEVICE

MPG

ÂÂ Â
e
5

Â
24VDC CPD1 OPERATOR’S OPERATOR’S
PANEL

Â
JD1A PANEL : :
nt INTE
JD1B
UNIT

JD1A
RFACE

MAGNETICS
6

ÂÂ
I/O UNIT
ce
CABINET
JD1B MODEL–A
24VDC CP32
7
BRAKER
200VAC
nc

AC REACTOR MCC BRAKER

200VAC
8
EMERGENCY STOP
CX1A TB2 CX3
PSM CX4
CX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B
.c

POSITION CODER 9
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
JA7B JY2 SPINDLE MOTOR
w

JA7A SPM TB2

TB1 CX2B JX1B 10
w

1ST AXIS
SERVO MOTOR
TB2 CX2A JX1A
JS1B TB2
SVM JF1 SERIAL PULSE
w

CODER

208
 7. HARDWARE

om
SCALE1(JF21)

AMP2(JS2A)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JS3A)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JS4A)
SCALE4(JF24)

r.c
AMP5(JS5A)

AMP6(JS6A)

SV–CHK(JA26) SERVO CHECK (5, 6 AXIS)

e
nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

209
 1

om
1ST AXIS
LINEAR SCALE

2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE

(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)
3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE 3
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)
4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC/LINEAR SCALE
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)

r.c
5TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)
4
6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PC
(CONNECTION CONFORMS TO 1ST AXIS)

e
5

nt 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

210
 7. HARDWARE

(3) CRT/MDI unit interface

(a) When 9″CRT/MDI or 9″PDP/MDI is used (MMC–IV cannot be
used)
9″CRT/MDI unit
9″PDP/MDI unit
7.2″LCD unit

Power supply ON/OFF button

unit
CP4

om
ON
ON button
ON1
COM
Short ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF button
OFF2

CRT, PDP, LCD unit

r.c
CP2, CP3 or CN2 CRT, PDP, LCD power
CP5

Main CPU board

JA1 CN1 Video input

Soft key cable

e
Keyboard PCB
(MDI unit)

nt JA2 CK2

CK1
ce
Protective ground.
Be sure to connect.

The separate display unit is not provided with an ON/OFF button.

nc
.c
w
w
w

211
 (b) When 14″CRT/MDI is used (MMC–IV cannot be used)
14″CRT/MDI unit
Power supply
1
ON/OFF button
unit
CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF
OFF1 OFF button 2

om
OFF2

CRT unit

CP2 or CP3 CN2(CRT)CRT power

3
CP5 CP5(VGA board)

r.c
Main CPU board 4
JA1 JN1 Video input

JA2

e
5
Soft key cable
JA2

nt Keyboard PCB

CK2

CK1
6
ce
7
Protective grouond.
Be sure to connect.
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

212
 7. HARDWARE

(c) When LCD/MDI is used (MMC–IV cannot be used)

LCD/MDI unit

Power supply ON/OFF button

unit
CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF

om
OFF1 OFF button

OFF2

LCD unit

CP5 CP5 LCD power

r.c
Main CPU board

JA1 JN1 Video input

JA2

e
Soft key cable

JA2
Keyboard PCB

nt CK2

CK1
ce
Protective ground.
Be sure to connect.
nc
.c
w
w
w

213
 (d) When MMC–IV is provided without NC’s graphic function
14″CRT/MDI unit (analog)
9.5″LCD/MDI unit (analog)
1
Power supply ON/OFF button
unit
CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF 2

om
OFF1 OFF button
OFF2

CRT, LCD unit

CP2, CP3 or CP5 CP11(CRT)CRT, LCD

3
CP5(LCD) power

Main CPU board

r.c
JA1 JA1 video input

Soft kye cable

JA2
Keyboard PCB

e
MMC–IV board 5
CK2
JA1A

nt JA1B
CK1

6
ce
Protective ground. 7
Be sure to connect.
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

214
 7. HARDWARE

(e) When MMC–IV is provided with NC’s graphic function.

14″CRT/MDI unit (analog)
9.5″LCD/MDI unit (analog)

Power supply ON/OFF button

unit
CP4
ON
ON1 ON button
COM
Short ON2
OFF

om
OFF1 OFF button
OFF2

CRT, LCD unit

CP2, CP3, CP5 CN2(CRT)CRT, LCD

CP5(LCD) power

Control unit graphic

r.c
board
JA1A JA1 video input

Soft kye cable

JA1B
Keyboard PCB

e
Main CPU board
CK2
JA1

nt JA2
CK1
ce
MMC–IV board

JA1A
Protective ground.
Be sure to connect.

JA1B
nc
.c
w
w
w

215
 7.4 Configuration of the Printed Circuit Boards
and LED Display 1
7.4.1 Power unit configuration and LED display
(1) Parts layout
Drawing number: A16B–1212–0901 (Power supply unit Al)
A16B–1212–0871 (Power supply unit Bl) 2

om
A20B–1005–0420 (Power supply unit)

No. Description
CP1 200VAC power input
3
F1 AC power fuses

CP2, CP3 200VAC power output

r.c
Lithium battery for memory
backup 4

PIL Pilot lamp

ALM Alarm lamp

e
CP4 ON/OFF power control 5
CP5 +24V output
CP6 +24E output
nt F3
F4
+24V fuse
+24E fuse

Fig. 7.4.1 Power Unit Parts Layout

6
ce
(2) LED display
7
Table 7.4.1 (a) LED Display of the Power Unit

No. LED display NC status

nc

1 PIL
(green) 200 VAC power is supplied to connector CP1.

2 ALM
(red) Indicates that overvoltage, overcurrent, or 8
voltage drop occurs at the output of the direct
current power supply.

(3) Maintenance parts

.c

Table 7.4.1 (b) Maintenance Parts List 9

Power
Symbol Rating Individual code
supply
w

AI F1 7.5A A60L-0001-0245#GP75
F3 3.2A A60L-0001-0075#3.2 10
F4 5AS A60L-0001-0046#5.0
BI F1 7.5A A60L-0001-0245#GP75
w

F3 5A A60L-0001-0075#5.0
F4 5AS A60L-0001-0046#5.0
C – 7.5A A60L-0001-0046#7.5R
w

Lithium battery code A98L-0031-0012

(For power supply AI, BI)
Lithium battery code A98L–0031–0006
(For ppower supply C)

216
 7. HARDWARE

7.4.2 Configuration main CPU board and LED display

(1) Parts layout

Drawing number: A16B–3200–0190 (Series 16)

A16B–3200–0210 (Series 18)

Connector Connector
name number Use
LED

om
CRT JA1 CRT video signal
MDI JA2 MDI keyboard
R232–1 JD5A RS–232–C serial port
R232–2 JD5B RS–232–C serial port
MPG JA3 Manual pulse generator
(1) IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK
SPDL–1 JA7A Serial spindle
(2) (3) (4) A–OUT1 JA8A Analog output
APCBAT JA4A Battery for use with the APC
(10) SERVO1 JS1A Axis 1 servo amplifier
SERVO2 JS2A Axis 2 servo amplifier

r.c
SERVO3 JS3A Axis 3 servo amplifier
SERVO4 JS4A Axis 4 servo amplifier
ROM for SERVO5 JS5A Axis 5 servo amplifier
boot SERVO6 JS6A Axis 6 servo amplifier
SCALE1 JF21 Axis 1 scale
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
SCALE2 JF22 Axis 2 scale
SCALE3 JF23 Axis 3 scale
SCALE4 JF24 Axis 4 scale
SV–CHK JA26 SERVO CHECK

e
Fig. 7.4.2 Parts Layout for the Main CPU Board

No. Name
nt
Table 7.4.2 (a) Module List for the Main CPU Board

Specifications
F u n c-
tion
Display of system
configuration screen
ce
(1) DRAM A20B–2901–0941 CNC DRAM:4MB
module
d l system
t
A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB
RAM
A20B–2902–0461 DRAM:8MB
(2) SRAM A20B–2902–0350 Expand- ADDITIONAL SRAM:256KB
module
d l ed
d SRAM
A20B–2902–0351 ADDITIONAL SRAM:768KB
nc

A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM:2.25MB

(3) FROM/ A20B–2902–0341 CNC sys- FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB
SRAM t
tem, S
Ser-
A20B–2902–0343 FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB
module sys-
vo sys
A20B–2902–0411 tem FLASH ROM MODULE:6MB
A20B–2902–0410 Graphic FLASH ROM MODULE:8MB
.c

system
system,
A20B–2902–0500 SRAM for FLASH ROM MODULE:
system 12MB
(4) Spindle A20B–2901–0980 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI
module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI
w

A20B–2901–0981 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI

A20B–2901–0982 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI
(5) PMC A20B–2902–0480 PMC SLOTxx PMC MODULE
module control SLC : MOUNTED
w

A20B–2902–0481 SLOTxx PMC MODULE

SLC : –––
(6) HSSBC A20B–2902–0490 CRT text CRTC MODULE : HSSB
module display
w

control
CRTC A20B–2902–0271 CRTC MODULE:9″CRT
module
d l
A20B–2902–0275 CRTC MODULE:VGA
A20B–2902–0276 CRTC MODULE:9″CRT

217
 (7) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 5/6 AXIS
module control
5th or 6th
A20B–2902–0061
axis
1
(8) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS
module control
A20B–2902–0061 3rd or 4th
axis
(9) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS 2

om
module control
A20B–2902–0061 1st or 2nd
axis

3
(2) LED display
(a) LED display transition when the power is turned on

r.c
j : Off J : Lit L : Flashing
The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.
4

Table 7.4.2 (b) LED Display (1) for the Main CPU Board

No. LED display NC status

e
1 STATUS jjjj When power is off
5
2 STATUS JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is
turned on
3

4
STATUS

STATUS
nt JjJJ

jjJJ
Waiting for each processor to set its ID within
the system
All processors have completed setting their
IDs within the system
6
ce
5 STATUS JJjJ Completion of FANUC BUS startup
6 STATUS jJjJ Completion of PMC startup
7 STATUS JjjJ Completion of setting information of hardware 7
configuration for each board within the sys-
tem
8 STATUS jjjJ Completion of each processor’s startup within
nc

the system
9 STATUS JJJj Completion of the initial execution of the 8
PMC ladder
10 STATUS jJJj Waiting for digital servo system startup
11 STATUS Jjjj Startup has been completed and the system
is now in normal operation mode.
.c

9
(b) LED display when an error occurs

Table 7.4.2 (c) LED Display (2) for the Main CPU Board
w

No. LED display NC status

10
1 STATUS jJjj RAM parity error occurred in the main CPU
board or a servo alarm occurred in the option
ALARM JJj
2 board.
w

2 STATUS jJjj Servo alarm (SERVO WATCHDOG ALARM)

occurred.
ALARM jJJ
3 STATUS jJjj Some other system error occurred.
w

ALARM jJj
4 STATUS JJJJ The system had been stopped before the
CPU was activated.
ALARM
J

218
 7. HARDWARE

(c) LED display when the system is activated without the option 2
board (having the sub-CPU) mounted
Table 7.4.2 (d) LED Display (3) for the Main CPU Board

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS JJjj An error occurred at SRAM on the Option 2
ALARM jjj board (having the sub-CPU). Replace the
Option 2 board.

om
7.4.3 Configuration of the option 1 board and LED display
(1) Parts layout
Drawing number : A16B-2200-0913 (communications function
with remote buffer)
: A16B-2200-0914 (communications function

r.c
with DNC1)

Connector Connector
name number Use
LED
CPU

(1)
R232–3 JD5C RS–232–C serial port
R422–1 JD6A RS–422 serial port

e
Communication
function ROM

JNA

F–BUS
nt
ce
back plane
connector

Fig. 7.4.3 (a) Parts Layout for the Option 1 Board

nc

Table 7.4.3 (a) Module List for the Option 1 Board

Name of Display of system

No. Specifications Function
module configuration screen
1 Commu- A20B–2900–0361 Commu- COMMUNICATION
nication nication MOUNTED
.c

control control
module
w
w
w

219
 (2) LED display

1
Communication function
status display

1 2 3 4
STATUS 2

om
ALARM

r.c
(a) LED display for the communications function (remote buffer)
4
(i) LED display transition when the power is turned on
j : Off J : Lit L : Flashing
: Don’t care
The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.

e
Table 7.4.3 (b) LED Display (1) for the Option 1 Board 5
No. LED display NC status
1

2
STATUS
ALARM
STATUS
ALARM
nt JJJJ
Jjj


jJ
jjj
Startup status immediately after the power
has been turned on

Remote buffer startup stage has terminated

and the system is now in normal operation
mode.
6
ce
(ii) LED display when an error occurs
Table 7.4.3 (c) LED Display (2) for the Option 1 Board 7
No. LED display NC status
1 STATUS

LL A fault occurred in the communications
nc

control of the option 1 board

ALARM jjj
8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

220
 7. HARDWARE

7.4.4 Configuration of option 2 board and LED display

(1) Parts layout
Drawing number : A16B-2203-0030 (SUB CPU and additional axis
for Series 16)
A16B-2203-0031 (additional axis only for
Series 16)
A16B-2203-0033 (SUB CPU for Series 18)

om
Connector Connector
name number Use
LED
HDI JA5 High-speed skip signal
A-IN JA6 Analog input
SPDL-2 JA7B Serial spindle
A- OUT2 JA8B Analog output
APCBAT JA4B Battery for use with the APC
AMP1 JS1A-2 Axis 1 servo amplifier
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) AMP2 JS2A-2 Axis 2 servo amplifier

r.c
AMP3 JS3A-2 Axis 3 servo amplifier
AMP4 JS4A-2 Axis 4 servo amplifier
AMP5 JS5A-2 Axis 5 servo amplifier
AMP6 JS6A-2 Axis 6 servo amplifier
JNA SCALE1 JF21-2 Axis 1 scale
SCALE2 JF22-2 Axis 2 scale
SCALE3 JF23-2 Axis 3 scale
F–BUS (6) (7) (8) SCALE4 JF24-2 Axis 4 scale
SV- CHK JA26 Servo check
Back plane

e
connector

nt
Fig. 7.4.4 (a) Parts Layout of the Option 2 board for Series 16

Table 7.4.4 (a) Module List of the Option 2 Board for Series 16

F u n c- Display of system
ce
No. Name Specifications
tion configuration screen
(1) FROM A20B–2902–0081 2nd path FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB
module
d l macro
A20B–2902–0082 FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB
(2) SRAM A20B–2902–0350 CNC ADDITIONAL SRAM: 256KB
module
d l system
A20B–2902–0351 ADDITIONAL SRAM: 768KB
RAM
nc

A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2.25MB

(3) DRAM A20B–2901–0941 CNC DRAM:4MB
module
d l system
A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB
RAM
A20B–2902–0461 DRAM:8MB
(4) Spindle A20B–2901–0984 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI
.c

module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI

A20B–2901–0985 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI
A20B–2901–0986 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI
(5) HAM A20B–2900–0280 Analog H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O:
module I/O+HDI HDI+ANALOG
w

A20B–2900–0281 HDI H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O: HDI

(6) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 5/6 AXIS
module control
A20B–2902–0061 5th or
w

6th axis
(7) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS
module control
A20B–2902–0061 3rd or
4th axis
w

(8) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS

module control
A20B–2902–0061 1st or
2nd axis

221
 Connector Connector
name number Use
LED 1
HDI JA5 High-speed skip signal
A-IN JA6 Analog input
SPDL-2 JA7B Serial spindle
A-OUT2 JA8B Analog output
APCBAT JA4B Battery for use with the APC

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) AMP1 JS1A-2 Axis 1 servo amplifier 2

om
AMP2 JS2A-2 Axis 2 servo amplifier
AMP3 JS3A-2 Axis 3 servo amplifier
AMP4 JS4A-2 Axis 4 servo amplifier

SCALE1 JF21-2 Axis 1 scale

JNA
SCALE2 JF22-2 Axis 1 scale

F–BUS
SCALE3
SCALE4
JF23-2
JF24-2
Axis 1 scale
Axis 1 scale
3
(6) (7)
SV-CHK JA26 Servo check
Back plane
connector

r.c
Fig. 7.4.4 (b) Parts Layout of the Option 2 board for Series 18 4

Table 7.4.4 (b) Module List of the Option 2 Board for Series 18

F u n c- Display of system

e
No. Name Specifications
tion configuration screen 5
(1) FROM A20B–2902–0081 2nd path FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB
module
d l macro
A20B–2902–0082 FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB
(2) SRAM
module
d l
nt
A20B–2902–0350
A20B–2902–0351
A20B–2902–0352
CNC
system
RAM
t
ADDITIONAL SRAM: 256KB
ADDITIONAL SRAM: 768KB
ADDITIONAL SRAM:
2.25MB
6
ce
(3) DRAM A20B–2901–0941 CNC DRAM:4MB
module
d l system
t
A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB
RAM
A20B–2902–0461 DRAM:8MB 7
(4) Spindle A20B–2901–0984 Spindle SERIAL SPINDLE LSI
module control ANALOG SPINDLE LSI
nc

A20B–2901–0985 SERIAL SPINDLE LSI

A20B–2901–0986 ANALOG SPINDLE LSI
8
(5) HAM A20B–2900–0280 Analog H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O:
module I/O+HDI HDI+ANALOG
A20B–2900–0281 HDI H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O:
HDI
.c

(6) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS 9

module control
A20B–2902–0061 3rd or 4th
axis
(7) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS
w

module control
A20B–2902–0061 1st or 2nd 10
axis
w
w

222
 7. HARDWARE

(2) LED display

(a) LED display for the sub-CPU
(i) LED display transition when the power is turned on
j : Off J : Lit L : Flashing
The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.
Table 7.4.4 (c) LED Display (1) for the Option 2 Board
No. LED display NC status

om
1 STATUS jjjj When power is off
2 STATUS JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is
turned or CPU is not running
3 STATUS jJJJ Initializing RAM
4 STATUS JjJJ Software ID has been set, initialization of
keys, ALL CLEAR
5 STATUS jjJJ Waiting for software initialization 1

r.c
6 STATUS JJjJ Waiting for software initialization 2,
Initializing SRAM
7 STATUS jJjJ Initializing position coder
8 STATUS jJJj Waiting for digital servo system startup
9 STATUS Jjjj Startup has been completed and the system
is now in normal operation mode.

e
(ii) LED display when an error occurs
Table 7.4.4 (d) LED Display (2) for the Option 2 Board
No.
1 STATUS
ALARM
nt
LED display
jJjj
Jjj
NC status
RAM parity error occurred.
Replace the RAM MODULE.
jJjj
ce
2 STATUS Servo alarm (watch dog, etc.) occurred.
ALARM jjJ
3 STATUS jJjj Other alarm occurred.
ALARM jjj

(iii) LED display when system is not started

nc

Table 7.4.4 (e) LED Display (3) for the Option 2 Board
No. LED display Case and required action
1 STATUS JJJJ An SRAM parity error occurred. Replace the
option 2 board. In addition, check the LED
ALARM Jjj
display for the main CPU board.
.c

2 STATUS JJjj A DRAM parity alarm occurred. Replace the

DRAM module.
ALARM Jjj
3 STATUS JJjj A DRAM module of at least 2M is not
mounted, or another alarm occurred. Check
ALARM jjj
w

and replace the DRAM module.

(b) LED display for additional axes

Table 7.4.4 (f) LED Display (4) for the Option 2 Board
w

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS jjjj Power is off.
2 STATUS JJJJ Initialization has been terminated (normal
w

state) after power on.

3 STATUS JJJJ A servo alarm (such as watchdog alarm) was
issued.
ALARM jjJ

223
 7.4.5 Configuration of the option 3 board and LED display
(1) Parts layout
1
Drawing number : A16B-3200-0055 (PMC-RC and CAP II)
A16B-3200-0054 (PMC-RC only)
A16B-3200-0057 (CAP II only)

Connector Connector
LED
name number Use 2

om
IOLINK JD1A2 FANUC I/O LINK

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

3

r.c
JNA
4
F–BUS

Back plane
connector

e
5
Fig. 7.4.5 (a) Parts Layout of the Option 3 Board

No.

(1) ROM
Name
nt
Table 7.4.5 (a) Module List of the Option 3 Board

Specifications

A20B–2900–0290
Function

CAP–II
Display of system
configuration screen
SYSTEM ROM MODULE
6
ce
module system :1MB
for CAP
A20B–2900–0291 SYSTEM ROM MODULE
:768KB 7
(2) ROM A20B–2901–0390 CPU for No. display
module CAP–II
for CAP
nc

(3) ROM A20B–2901–0413 DRAM+ SRAM MODULE :512KB

module SRAM for DRAM MODULE :512KB 8
for CAP CAP–II
(4) DRAM A20B–2902–0191 DRAM for ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR)
module PMC DRAM(APPLICATION) :2MB
for PMC
A20B–2902–0192 ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR)
.c

DRAM(APPLICATION) :1MB
9
A20B–2902–0193 ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR)
DRAM(APPLICATION)
:512KB
A20B–2902–0194 ADDITIONAL DRAM(MGR)
w

A20B–2902–0196 DRAM :2MB

10
A20B–2902–0197 DRAM :1MB
A20B–2902–0198 DRAM :512KB
w

(5) PMC A20B–2901–0960 PMC MODULE:PMP2

d l
module
A20B–2902–0250 PMC MODULE:PMP2
w

224
 7. HARDWARE

(2) LED display Status Status

display display for
The STATUS LEDs in for the the CAP II
PMC-RC function
the front upper section 1 2 3 4
STATUS
of the option 3 board
are used for two ALARM
independent functions
as shown in the figure
on the right.

om
Fig. 7.4.5 (b) Location of LED Display for the Option 3 Board

(a) LED display for the graphics display function when CAP II is not
installed
(i) LED display transition when the power is turned on
j : Off J : Lit L : Flashing

: Don’t care

r.c
The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.
Table 7.4.5 (b) LED Display (1) for the Option 3 Board

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is
turned on

e
2 STATUS

jJ Waiting for each processor in the system to
set its ID
3 STATUS

Jj Waiting for each processor in the system to

4 STATUS
nt

jj
complete startup
The CAP II function startup has been com-
pleted and the system is now in normal op-
eration.
ce
(ii) LED display when an error occurs
Table 7.4.5 (c) LED Display (2) for the Option 3 Board

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS

LL NMI from another board (STATUS LEDs 3
and 4 are flashing simultaneously). Check
nc

other boards’ LED displays.

2 STATUS

jL A CAP II sub-memory parity error occurred.
Initialize the sub-memory.
3 STATUS

Lj A bus error occurred (incorrect memory ac-
cess). Replace the option 3 board.
4 STATUS

LL A ROM parity error occurred (STATUS LEDs
.c

3 and 4 are flashing alternately). Replace the

CAP II ROM module.
w
w
w

225
 (b) LED display for the PMC-RC functions
(i) LED display transition when the power is turned on
j : Off J : Lit L : Flashing
: Don’t care
1
The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.
Table 7.4.5 (d) LED Display (3) for the Option 3 Board
No. LED display NC status
JJ


2

om
1 STATUS Startup status immediately after power is
turned on
2 STATUS jJ

Waiting for each processor in the system to
set its ID
3 STATUS Jj

Waiting for each processor in the system to
complete startup 3
4 STATUS jj

The PMC-RC function startup has been com-
pleted and the system is now in normal op-
eration.

r.c
(ii) LED display when an error occurs
4
Table 7.4.5 (e) LED Display (4) for the Option 3 Board
No. LED display NC status
1 STATUS LL

NMI from another board (LEDs are flashing
simultaneously). Check other boards’ LED

e
displays. 5
2 STATUS jL

The parity error of the memory for LADDER or
work occurred. Initialize the memory for LAD-

4
STATUS

STATUS
ntLj

JL


DER or replace it for work RAM MODULE.
A bus error occurred (incorrect memory ac-
cess). Replace the option 3 board.
Communication error occurred in I/O Link.
Check the Link device and the cables.
6
ce
5 STATUS LJ

The parity error etc. occurred in the PMC con-
trol module. Replace the PMC control mod-
ule.
7
6 STATUS LL

A checksum error occurred in the system pro-
gram memory. The DRAM module for the
PMC may have failed.
nc

(c) Alarm LED display (common to CAP II and PMC-RC)

8
Table 7.4.5 (f) LED Display (4) for the Option 3 Board
No. LED display Description NC status
1 ALARM jjJ An I/O link error Check the link devices and
occurred. cables.
.c

2 ALARM jJj A parity error The SRAM module for CAP-II 9

occurred in the may be out of order.
SRAM for CAP–II
3 ALARM jJJ A parity error Option 3 board or the DRAM
w

occurred in the module for PMC may have

DRAM for PMC failed.
10
4 ALARM Jjj A parity error The DRAM module for CAP-II
occurred in the may have failed.
DRAM for CAP–II
w

5 ALARM JjJ A parity error Option 3 board or the DRAM

occurred in the module for PMC may have
DRAM for PMC failed.
6 ALARM JJj The CPU for PMC Check whether the main board
w

is not started has been activated normally.

7 ALARM JJJ The operation of The PMC module may have
the PMC module failed.
is abnormal

226
 7. HARDWARE

7.4.6 Configuration of the loader control board and LED display

(1) Parts layout
Drawing number : A16B-2203-0080

LED Connector Connector

name number Use

BRAKE CNBK Brake output

om
ESP CNPW Emergency stop
(1) (2)
IO–1 CNWF DI/DO for workpiece feeder
TP CNTP DI/DO for teach pendant

IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK

A–OUT JA8 Servo waveform check output

AMP1 JS1A Servo amplifier for first axis

AMP2 JS2A Servo amplifier for second axis
AMP3 JS3A Servo amplifier for third axis

r.c
(5) (3) (4)
AMP4 JS4A Servo amplifier for fourth axis

IO- 2 CRM1 DI/ DO for loader main body

AMP1

Fig. 7.4.6 (a) Parts Layout of the Loader Control Board

e
Table 7.4.6 (a) Module List for the Loader Control Board

No.

(1)
Name

FROM
module
nt Specifications

A20B–2902–0082
Function

ROM for
macro of
loader side
Display of system
configuration screen
FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB
ce
(2) DRAM A20B–2901–0941 Loader DRAM:4MB
module system
A20B–2901–0942 RAM DRAM:2MB

(3) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS

module control 3rd
A20B–2902–0061 or 4th axis
nc

(4) Servo A20B–2902–0070 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS

module control 1st
A20B–2902–0061 or 2nd axis
(5) PMC A20B–2900–0142 PMC PMC MODULE: BSI+SLC
module
d l control
A20B–2900–0143 PMC MODULE: BSI
.c
w
w
w

227
 (2) LED display
(i) LED display transition when the power is turned on
j : Off J : Lit L : Flashing
1
The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.
Table 7.4.6 (b) LED Display (1) for the Loader Control Board

No. LED display NC status 2

om
1 STATUS jjjj When power is off
2 STATUS JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is
turned or CPU is not running
3 STATUS jJJJ Initializing RAM
4 STATUS JjJJ Software ID has been set, initialization of 3
keys, ALL CLEAR
5 STATUS jjJJ Waiting for software initialization 1

r.c
6 STATUS JJjJ Waiting for software initialization 2,
Initializing SRAM
7 STATUS jJjJ Initializing position coder
4
8 STATUS jJJj Waiting for digital servo system startup
9 STATUS Jjjj Startup has been completed and the system
is now in normal operation mode.

e
(ii) LED display when an error occurs
5
Table 7.4.6 (c) LED Display (2) for the Loader Control Board

No.
1

2
STATUS
ALARM
STATUS
nt
LED display
jJjj
Jjj
jJjj
NC status
RAM parity error occurred.
Replace the RAM MODULE.
Servo alarm (watch dog, etc.) occurred.
6
ce
ALARM jjJ
3 STATUS jJjj Other alarm occurred.
7
ALARM jjj
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

228
 7. HARDWARE

7.4.7 Configuration of I/O card

(1) Sink type output

Name Code Function

I/O card A16B-2200-0950 DI : 104 DO : 80 With high-speed skip
( i k ttype
(sink
A16B-2200-0951 DI : 104 DO : 72 With high-speed skip
output)
out ut)
A16B-2200-0952 DI : 80 DO : 56 With high-speed skip

om
A16B-2200-0953 DI : 40 DO : 40 With high-speed skip
A16B-2200-0954 High-speed skip only
A16B-2200-0955 DI : 104 DO : 80 Without high-speed skip
A16B-2200-0956 DI : 104 DO : 72 Without high-speed skip
A16B-2200-0957 DI : 80 DO : 56 Without high-speed skip
A16B-2200-0958 DI : 40 DO : 40 Without high-speed skip
I/O card A20B-9001-0480 DI : 52 DO : 40

r.c
add-on Use with A16B-2200-0950 or A16B-2200-0955
board listed above

NOTE This printed circuit board has no LED display.

(2) Sink type output

e
Name Code Function
I/O card A16B-2202-0720 DI : 104 DO : 80 With high-speed skip
( i k ttype
(sink
A16B-2202-0721 DI : 104 DO : 72 With high-speed skip
output)
out ut)
nt
A16B-2202-0722
A16B-2202-0723
A16B-2202-0725
A16B-2202-0726
DI : 80 DO : 56 With high-speed skip
DI : 40 DO : 40 With high-speed skip
DI : 104 DO : 80 Without high-speed skip
DI : 104 DO : 72 Without high-speed skip
ce
A16B-2202-0727 DI : 80 DO : 56 Without high-speed skip
A16B-2202-0728 DI : 40 DO : 40 Without high-speed skip
I/O card A20B-8001-0150 DI : 52 DO : 40
add-on Use with A16B-2200-0950 or A16B-2200-0955
board listed above
nc

NOTE This printed circuit board has no LED display.

.c
w
w
w

229
 7.4.8 Configuration of the I/O card with power supply
(for power supply C) and LED display
1
(1) Sink type output

Name Code Function

I/O card A16B–2202–0690 DI : 104 DO : 72
( i k ttype
(sink
output)
out ut)
A16B–2202–0691 DI : 80 DO : 56 2

om
A16B–2202–0692 DI : 40 DO : 40
Power A20B–1005–0420 To be used with the above I/O card
supply

D LED display 3
PIL Lights when DC input power voltage is applied to CP1A
(Green)

r.c
(2) Source type output
4
Name Code Function
I/O card A16B–2202–0870 DI : 104 DO : 72
( i k ttype
(sink
A16B–2202–0871 DI : 80 DO : 56
output)
out ut)
A16B–2202–0872 DI : 40 DO : 40

e
Power A20B–1005–0420 To be used with the above I/O card 5
supply

PIL
LED display

(Green)
nt
Lights when DC input power voltage is applied to CP1A
6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

230
 7. HARDWARE

7.4.9 Configuration of the background graphic board and LED

display
(1) Parts layout
Drawing number : A16B-2203-0032

LED

om
(1) (2) (3)

e r.c
Fig. 7.4.9 (a) Parts Layout of the Background Graphic Board

Table 7.4.9 (a) Module List of the Background Graphic Board

No.

(1)
Name

FROM
nt
Specifications

A20B–2902–0081
Function

Background
Display of system
configuration screen
FLASH ROM MODULE:4MB
ce
module graphic
gra hic
A20B–2902–0082 system FLASH ROM MODULE:2MB

(2) SRAM A20B–2902–0350 System ADDITIONAL SRAM: 256KB

module RAM
A20B–2902–0351 ADDITIONAL SRAM: 768KB
A20B–2902–0352 ADDITIONAL SRAM: 2.25MB
(3) DRAM A20B–2901–0941 System DRAM:4MB
nc

module RAM
A20B–2902–0461 DRAM:8MB

(2) LED display

(a) LED display transition when the power is turned on
.c

The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.

j : OFF J : ON
Table 7.4.9 (b) LED Display (1) for Background Graphic Board
w

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS jjjj When power is off
2 STATUS JJJJ Startup status immediately after power is turned
or CPU is not running
w

3 STATUS jJJJ Initializing RAM

4 STATUS JjJJ Software ID has been set, initialization of keys,
ALL CLR
5 STATUS jjJJ Waiting for software initialization 1
w

6 STATUS JJjJ Waiting for software initialization 2,

Initializing SRAM
7 STATUS Jjjj Initialization has been completed (steady state).

231
 (b) LED display when an error occurs
j : OFF J : ON
1
Table 7.4.9 (c) LED Display (2) for Background Graphic Board

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS jJjj RAM parity error occurred.
ALARM Jjj 2

om
(c) LED display when system is not started
j : OFF J : ON
Table 7.4.9 (d) LED Display (3) for Background Graphic Board
3
No. LED display NC status
1 STATUS JJJJ SRAM parity error occurred.
Jjj

r.c
ALARM
2 STATUS JJjj DRAM parity error occurred.
4
ALARM Jjj

e
5

nt 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

232
 7. HARDWARE

7.4.10 Configuration of the 64–bit RISC board and LED display

(1) Parts layout
Drawing number : A16B–3200–0150

LED

om
LVALM LED

r.c
(1)

F21 5A Fuse

Fig. 7.4.10 Parts Layout of the 64–bit RISC Board

e
Table 7.4.10 (a) Module List for the 64–bit RISC Board

No.
(1)
Name
FPROM
module
ntSpecifications
A20B–2901–0292
Function
ROM for RISC
board system
ROM : 512KB
ce
(2) LED display
(a) LED display transition when the power is turned on
The STATUS LEDs are green and the ALARM LEDs are red.
j : OFF J : ON
nc

Table 7.4.10 (a) LED Display (1) for the 64–bit RISC Board

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS jjjj When power is off
2 STATUS JJJJ Start up status immediately after power is
turned or CPU is not turning
.c

3 STATUS jjjJ DRAM or SRAM test in progress (If an error

was detected during a test, the LEDs re-
main in the state in which they were during
the test.)
4 STATUS jjJj ROM test in progress (If an error was de-
w

tected during a test, the LEDs remain in the

state in which they were during the test.)
5 STATUS Jjjj Waiting for a main CPU request (1)
6 STATUS JjjJ Waiting for a main CPU request (2)
w

7 STATUS JjJj Waiting for a main CPU request (3)

8 STATUS JJjj Waiting for a main CPU request (4)
w

233
 (b) LED display transition when the power is turned on
j : OFF L : Blink
1
Table 7.4.10 (b) LED Display (2) for the 64–bit RISC Board

No. LED display NC status

1 STATUS jjjL Waiting for RISC mode to selected
2 STATUS jLjL Waiting for an NC statement to be entered
2

om
3 STATUS jLLj Command being executed in RISC mode
4 STATUS Ljjj Resetting
5 STATUS LjLL Override 0 for pre–interpolation accelera-
tion/deceleration (waiting for the override
level to be changed) 3
(c) LED display upon occurrence of an error
j : OFF J : ON

r.c
Table 7.4.10 (c) LED Display (3) for the 64–bit RISC Board
4
No. LED display NC status
1 STATUS jjjJ An error occurred on the RISC board during
the DRAM or SRAM test
2 STATUS jjJj An error occurred in the ROM module dur-

e
ing a test. 5
3 STATUS jjJJ A sync signal from the main CPU was not
detected.
4

5
STATUS

STATUS
nt jJjj

JJJj

(d) Alarm LED display

An error occurred when the F–BUS was
accessed.
System error 6
ce
j : OFF J : ON
Table 7.4.10 (d) LED Display (4) for the 64–bit RISC Board
7
No. LED display NC status
1 STATUS Jjj The RISC CPU has not been started.
nc

2 STATUS jJj SRAM parity

3 STATUS jjJ DRAM parity 8
Table 7.4.10 (e) LED Display (5) for the 64–bit RISC Board

No. LED display NC status

.c

1 LVALM J RISC board or Power abnormal

The RISC board or power supply unit may 9
be defective.
w

(3) Maintenance parts

Table 7.4.10 (f) Maintenance Parts List
10
Symbol Rating Specifications
w

F21 5A A60L–0001–0075#5.0
w

234
 8. PARAMETERS

8.1 How to Enter the Parameters

(1) Enabling writing the parameters
1 Enter the MDI mode or emergency stop state.

OFFSET
2 Press the SETTING key several times to display the handy screen for
setting.

om
3 Move the cursor to the PARAMETER WRITE field and enter 1
and then INPUT
.

4 Alarm 100 occurs. Press the CAN and RESET keys simultaneously
to temporarily stop the alarm.

r.c
(2) Entering the parameters

1 Press the SYSTEM

key on the CRT/MDI panel several times to select
the parameter screen.

e
PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234 N12345

0000

0001
0

0
nt 0

0
SEQ
0

0
0

0
0

0
INI
0

0
ISO

0
0
FCV
TVC
0

0
ce
0012 RMV MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL 0
nc

S 0 T0000
REF **** *** *** [Link]
[PARAM] [DGNOS] [PMC] [SYSTEM] [(OPRT)]
.c

2 Pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the operation menu including

the items below.
Enter a parameter number and press [[Link]] : Searches for the
specified number.
w

Soft key [ON:1] : Sets the value at which the cursor is positioned to 1.
(Only for bit parameters)
Soft key [OFF:0] : Sets the value at which the cursor is positioned to 0.
w

(Only for bit parameters)

Soft key [+INPUT] : Adds the entered value to the value at which the
cursor is positioned. (Only for word parameters)
Soft key [INPUT] : Sets the value at which the cursor is positioned to
w

the entered value. (Only for word parameters)

Soft key [READ] : Inputs parameters from the reader/punch interface.
Soft key [PUNCH] : Outputs parameters to the reader/punch interface.
235
 3 Convenient methods for entering data
3–1 To change data in units of bits
1
Pressing or changes the cursor to 1-bit size,
which enables setting data in units of bits (only for bit
parameters).

3–2 Use EOB to continuously set data starting from the cursor 2

om
position.
(Example 1)
When 1 2 3 4 EOB
4 5 6 7
3
EOB
9 9 9 9 INPUT
is entered,

0 1234

r.c
0 4567

4
0 9999
0 0

(Example 2)

1 2 3 4 9 9 9

e
When EOB EOB
5
9 INPUT
is entered,

nt 0
0
0
0


1234
0
9999
0
6
ce
3–3 Use = to enter the same data.
7
(Example)
When 1 2 3 4 EOB = EOB = INPUT
is
nc

entered,
8
0 1234
0 1234


0 1234
0 0
.c

9
3–4 For bit parameters
(Example)
When 1 1 = = is entered,
w

EOB EOB INPUT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
10
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0


w

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 After all necessary parameters are entered, reset the

PARAMETER WRITE field to 0 on the SETTING screen.
w

236
 8. PARAMETERS

8.2 Parameter List

1) Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 0000 –)
2) Reader/Puncher interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 0100 –)
3) Axis control/Incremental system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1000 –)
4) The coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1200 –)
5) Stroke limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1300 –)

om
6) Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1400 –)
7) Acceleration/Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1600 –)
8) Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 1800 –)
9) DI/DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3000 –)
10) CRT/MDI, Display, and Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3100 –)
11) Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3400 –)
12) Pitch error compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3600 –)

r.c
13) Spindle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 3700 –)
14) Tool offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5000 –)
15) Grinding–wheel wear compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5071 –)
16) Canned cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5100 –)
17) Rigid tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5200 –)

e
18) Scaling/Coordinate rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5400 –)
19) Uni-directional positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5430 –)

nt
20) Polar coordinate interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5450 –)
21) Normal direction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5480 –)
22) Index table indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5500 –)
23) Involute interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5600 –)
ce
24) Exponential interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5630 –)
25) Straightness compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 5710 –)
26) Custom macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6000 –)
27) Pattern data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6100 –)
28) Skip functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6200 –)
nc

29) Automatic tool offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6240 –)

30) External data input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6300 –)
31) Graphic display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6500 –)
32) Run hour · parts count display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6700 –)
33) Tool life management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6800 –)
.c

34) Position switch function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 6900 –)

35) Manual operation/automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7000 –)
36) Manual handle feed/Handle interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7100 –)
w

37) Butt-type reference position setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7181 –)

38) Software operator’s panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7200 –)
39) Program restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7300 –)
40) High speed machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7500 –)
w

High speed cycle machining

High speed remote buffer
41) Polygon turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7600 –)
w

42) External pulse input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7680 –)

43) Hobbing machine and electric gear box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 7700 –)
44) Axis control by PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8000 –)
237
 45) Two-path control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8100 –)
46) Inclined axis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8200 –)
1
47) B-axis function (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8240 –)
48) Simple synchronous control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8300 –)
49) Program check termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8341 –)
50) Chopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8360 –)
2

om
51) High–precision contour control (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8400 –)
52) Macro executer and etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (No. 8650 –)

3
Data Types and Valid Data Ranges of Parameters
Data Type Valid data range Data Type Valid data range

r.c
Bit Word
0 or 1 0 to
32767 4
Bit axis Word axis
Byte 0 to
127 2–word
0 to
99999999
Byte axis 0 to 255 2–word axis

e
5
NOTE1 There is something to which the range of setting is limited depend-
ing on the parameter No.
nt
NOTE2 A part of the parameter can be input with the setting screen.
NOTE3 In the description of a bit-type parameter, the explanation written
at the left-hand side of a slash (/) corresponds to setting 0, and that
at the right-hand side corresponds to setting 1.
6
ce
NOTE4 <Axis> indicated at the right column in a parameter list shows that
the corresponding parameters are specified for each axis.
7
1) Parameters for SETTING
nc

Number Contents Remarks

0000 For Setting

8
#7 :
#6 :
#5 SEQ : Automatic insertion of sequence No. is, not PRM3216
.c

performed (0)/performed (1) 9

#4 :
#3 :
#2 INI : Input increment by mm (0)/by inch (1)
w

#1 ISO : Data output by EIA code (0)/by ISO code (1)

#0 TVC : TV check is not performed (0)/performed (1) 10
0001 Parameter relating to tape format
w

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
w

#3 :
#2 :
#1 FCV : FS16 standard (0)/FS15 Tape format (1)
#0 :

238
 8. PARAMETERS

0002 Parameter relating to tape format

#7 SJZ : For manual reference position return, M series

deceleration dogs are used when a reference PRM
position is not established, and positioning is 1005#3=1
performed when a reference position is
established (0)/deceleration dogs are used at
all times (1)

om
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 RDG : Remote diagnosis is not performed (0)/
performed (1)

r.c
0012 Parameter for axis detaching, mirror image <Axis>

#7 RMV : Detach of the each axis is not performed (0)/ PRM

performed (1) 1005#7
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :

e
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :

0020
nt
#0 MIR : Setting of mirror image for each axis is OFF
(0)/ON (1)
Selection of channel for input/output devices
ce
Setting 0 1 2 3 (remote buffer)

Common PRM0100

Output
PRM 0101 PRM 0111 PRM 0121 PRM 0131
format
nc

Specification
PRM 0102 PRM 0112 PRM 0122 PRM 0132
number

Transfer
PRM 0103 PRM 0113 PRM 0123 PRM 0133
rate

Transfer PRM 0135 PRM 0135

Not set
.c

method #3=0 #3=1

Connector
JD5A JD5B JD5C JD6A
number

10 : DNC1/DNC2
w

12 : DNC1#2
20 : Data transfer to and from the Power Mate of group 0 via the
I/O Link.
to
w

35 : Data transfer to and from the Power Mate of group 15 via the
I/O Link.
w

239
 2) For reader/puncher interface

Number Contents Remarks 1

0100 Common to each channel

#7 ENS : Reading of data by EIA code, if NULL code is ALM001

red in the data, ignore it (0)/make alarm (1)
#6 IOP : Input/output of an NC program is stopped by 2

om
resetting the CNC (0)/by pressing the [STOP]
soft key (1).
#5 ND3 : DNC operation is performed to read blocks one
by one (0)/until the buffer becomes full (1).
#4 : 3
#3 NCR : When output EOB by ISO code, LF, CR, CR (0)
/CR output (1)

r.c
#2 :
#1 CTV : TV check in control-out is performed (0)/not 4
performed (1)
#0 :

0101 Parameter relating to CHANNEL 1

(I/O CHANNEL=0)

e
5
#7 NFD : FEED before & after of data is output (0)/not
output (1)
#6
#5
#4
:
:
:
nt
#3 ASI : Data input by EIA or ISO code (0)/ASCII code
(1)
6
ce
#2 :
#1 :
#0 SB2 : Number of stop bit is 1 bit (0)/2 bits (1) 7
0102 Spec. No. of I/O devices of CHANNEL 1
(I/O CHANNEL=0)
nc

0 :
RS-232-C (Except of under-mentioned)
1 :
FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2 8
2 :
FANUC CASSETTE F1
3 :
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA
Card, FSP-H, FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE
4 : RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are not
.c

used.)
5 : PORTABLE TAPE READER
9
6 : FSP-G, FSP-H, FANUC PPR

0103 Baud rate setting of CHANNEL 1

w

(I/O CHANNEL=0)
10
1 : 50 Baud 7 : 600 Baud
2 : 100 Baud 9 : 2400 Baud
3 : 110 Baud 10 : 4800 Baud
w

4 : 150 Baud 11 : 9600 Baud

6 : 300 Baud 12 :19200 Baud

0111 Parameter relating to CHANNEL 1 PRM0101

w

(I/O CHANNEL=1)

0112 Spec. No. of I/O devices of CHANNEL 1 PRM0102

(I/O CHANNEL=1)

240
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

0113 Baud rate setting of CHANNEL 1 PRM0103

(I/O CHANNEL=1)

0121 Parameter relating to CHANNEL 2 PRM0101

(I/O CHANNEL=2)

0122 Spec. No. of I/O devices of CHANNEL 2 PRM0102

om
(I/O CHANNEL=2)

0123 Baud rate setting of CHANNEL 2 PRM0103

(I/O CHANNEL=2)

0131 Parameter relating to CHANNEL 3 PRM0101

(I/O CHANNEL=3)

0132 Spec. No. of I/O devices of CHANNEL 3 PRM0102

r.c
(I/O CHANNEL=3)

0133 Baud rate setting of CHANNEL 3 PRM0103

(I/O CHANNEL=3)

0134 Parameter relating to REMOTE BUFFER

e
#7 :
#6 :
#5 CLK : Baud rate clock of RS-422 interface is used,
inner clock (0)/outer clock (1)

#3 :
nt
#4 NCD : CD (Signal quality detection) of RS-232-C
interface, checked (0)/not checked (1)

#2 SYN : “SYN”, “NAK” code in protocol B is not

controlled (0)/controlled (1)
ce
#1 PRY : Without parity bit (0)/With parity bit (1)
#0 :
0135 Parameter relating to REMOTE BUFFER

#7 RMS : In case of extended protocol A, the byte

nc

location of SAT data part is, usually not

appointed 0 (0)/ send back unconditionally (1)
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 R42 : Interface is, RS-232-C (0)/RS-422 (1)
#2 PRA : Communication protocol is B (0)/A (1)
.c

#1 ETX : The END CODE for protocol A is, CR code (0)/

EXT code (1) in ASCII/ISO
#0 ASC : Communication code except of NC data is ISO
code (0)/ASCII code (1)
w

0140 Parameter relating to BCC check

#7 :
#6 :
w

#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
w

#1 :
#0 : A BCC value is checked (0)/not checked (1).

241
 Number Contents Remarks

0141 System for connection between the CNC and 1

host (DNC1 interface) (0: PTP, 1: Multi-point)

0142 Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface)

(2-52)

0143 Time limit specified for the timer monitoring a 2

om
response (1 – 60) [sec]

0144 Time limit specified for the timer monitoring the

EOT signal (1 – 60) [sec]

0145 Time required for switching RECV and SEND 3

(1 – 60) [sec]

0146 Number of times the system retries holding

r.c
communication (1 – 10) [Number of times]

0147 Number of times the system sends the

4
message in response to the NAK signal (1 –
10) [Number of times]

0148 Number of characters in overrun (10 – 255)

e
[Characters] 5
0149 Number of characters in the data section of the
communication packet (80 – 256) [Characters]

0161
nt
Communication method

#7 SRS : The number of stop bits is 1 (0)/2 (1).

#6 :
When
PRM
6
ce
#5 PEO : Vertical parity is based on odd parity (0)/even 1401#4=1
parity (1).
#4 SRP : A vertical parity check is not made (0)/made
(1).
7
#3 :
#2 SRL : The serial interface character consists of 7 bits
nc

(0)/8 bits (1).

#1 :
#0 : 8
0171 Number of data items transferred from the PLC
to NC (1 to 32).
.c

0172 Number of data items transferred from the NC

to PLC (1 to 32). 9
0173 Station address (1 to 15)
w

0174 Baud rate

0 : 2400 2 : 9600 4 : 38400 6 : 76800 [bps] 10

1 : 4800 3 : 19200 5 : 57600
w
w

242
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

0175 Monitoring timer used from the completion of 1–32767

local station connection preparation sequence [msec]
to the start of a normal sequence

0176 Polling time monitoring timer

0177 Monitoring timer used from the start of SAI

om
transmission to the end of BCC transmission

0178 Timer used from the completion of reception to

the start of transmission

0201 Transfer condition PRM

0002#0=1

#7 :

r.c
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 NCR : The EOB code used in output is “LF,CR,CR”
(0)/“LF” only (1).
#1 ASC : The code used for data output is ISO (0)/ASCII

e
(1).
#0 SB2 : The number of stop bits is 1 (0)/2 (1).
0203

1 : 50
2 : 100
3 : 110
nt
Baud rate (for remote diagnosis)

4 : 150
5 : 200
6 : 300
7 : 600
8 : 1200
9 : 2400
10 : 4800
11 : 9600
[bps]
ce
0204 Channel used for remote diagnosis

0, 1 : Reader/punch interface channel 1, 2 : Channel 2

0206 Device ID number for remote diagnosis (0 to

20)
nc

0211 Password 1 for remote diagnose (All remote

diagnosis functions)

0212 Password 2 for remote diagnose (Part

programs)

0213 Password 3 for remote diagnose (Parameters)

.c

0221 Keyword 1 for remote diagnose PRM 0211

0222 Keyword 2 for remote diagnose PRM 0212

w

0223 Keyword 3 for remote diagnose PRM 0213

0231 Output format for DNC1 interface #2 PRM 0101

0233 Baud rate for DNC1 interface #2 PRM 0103

w

0241 System for connection between the CNC and

host (DNC1 interface) (1 : PTP, 2 : Multi–point)

0242 Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface

w

#2) (2 – 52)

243
 Number Contents Remarks

0900 Data server function 1

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
2

om
#2 :
#1 :
#0 DSV : The data server function is enabled (0)/
disabled (1)
3
0911 Altemate MDI character

0912 Character not provided in MDI keys

r.c
3) Parameter for Axis control/Incremental system 4

Number Contents Remarks

1001 Parameter relating to least input increment

e
5
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0 INM
:
:
:
:
nt
: Least command increment on linear axis is,
6
ce
mm system (0)/inch system (1)
1002 Parameter relating to number of control axis 7
#7 :
#6 :
nc

#5 XIK : When an axis-by-axis interlock signal is applied

during nonlinear positioning, only the interlock
axis is stopped (0)/all axes are stopped (1). 8
#4 :
#3 AZR : For G28, specified when a reference position M series
has not yet been established, deceleration
dogs are used (0)/ALM 90 is issued (1).
.c

#2 SFD : The reference position shift function is not used PRM 9

(0)/used (1). 1005#1
#1 DLZ : Reference position return function without dog
is, disable (0)/enable (1)
w

#0 JAX : Number of simultaneous controlled axis in

manual operation is, 1 axis (0)/3 axis (1) 10
w
w

244
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

1004 Parameter relating to least input increment

b7 IPR : Least input increment of each axis is set to 1 M series

time (0)/10 times (1) as of least command
increment
b6 :
b5 : ISC ISA CODE Least input increment

om
b4 :
0 0 IS–B 0.001 mm or 0.001 deg
b3 :
b2 : 0 1 IS–A 0.01 mm or 0.01 deg
b1 ISC : 1 0 IS–C 0.0001 mm or 0.0001 deg
b0 ISA :
1005 Parameter relating to external deceleration <Axis>

r.c
#7 RMB : Setting to detach of axis control for each axis is
not effective (0)/effective (1)
#6 MCC : At axis removal, the MCC is turned off (0)/only PRM
motor activation is turned off (1). 0012#7
#5 EDM : External deceleration in the negative (–) PRM1426,
direction is applicable to rapid traverse (0)/ 1427
rapid traverse and cutting feed (1).

e
#4 EDP : External deceleration in the positive (+) PRM1426,
direction is applicable to rapid traverse (0)/ 1427
rapid traverse and cutting feed (1).

#2 :
nt
#3 HJZ : For manual reference position return when a
reference position is established, deceleration
dogs are used (0)/the setting of bit 7 of
parameter No. 0002 is followed.
M series
ce
#1 DLZ : Function for setting the reference position PRM
without dogs disabled (0)/enabled (1) 1002#1
#0 ZRN : A command is issued in automatic operation
before a return to reference position has not
been performed since the power was turned
on, an alarm is generated (0)/alarm is not
nc

generated (1)
1006 Parameter relating to controlled axis <Axis>

#7 :
#6 :
#5 ZMI : Initial set for direction of reference position
.c

return and backlash compensation is, +

direction (0)/ – direction (1)
#4 :
#3 DIA : The command of amount of travel for each axis T series
is made by radius (0)/diameter (1)
w

#2 :
#1 ROS : The machine coordinate system of a rotation When
axis is of rotation axis type (0)/linear axis type PRM
(1). 1006#0=1
w

#0 ROT : The setting of axis is, linear axis (0)/rotary axis

(1)
w

245
 Number Contents Remarks

1007 Parameter relating to rotation axis 1

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 RAA : Absolute commands for a rotation axis conform
2

om
to bit 1 of PRM1008#1 (0)/the end point
coordinate is the absolute value of the
command value while the rotation direction is
determined from the sign of the command
value (1). 3
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :

r.c
1008 Setting of rotation axis <Axis> 4
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :

e
#3 RAA : The rotation direction and end point Rotation 5
coordinates specified by an absolute command axis control
follow the setting of #1 (0)/the end point
nt
coordinates are represented by the absolute
values of specified values, and the direction is
represented by the sign of the specified values
(1).
#2 RRL : Relative coordinates are not rounded by the PRM1260
6
ce
amount of the shift per one rotation (0)/are
rounded by the amount of the shift per one
rotation (1) 7
#1 RAB : In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in
the direction in which the distance to the target
is longer (0)/shorter (1)
nc

#0 ROA : The roll over function of a rotation axis is PRM

invalid (0)/valid (1) 1006#0=1
8
1010 Setting of number of CNC controlled axis (1 to
number of controlled axes)

1020 Setting of name of each axis used for

.c

programming 9
X : 88 Y : 89 Z : 90 <Axis>
A : 65 B : 66 C : 67 PRM3405
U : 85 V : 86 W: 87 for T series
w

10
w
w

246
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate <Axis>

system

0 : Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis

1 : X axis of the basic three axes
2 : Y axis of the basic three axes
3 : Z axis of the basic three axes

om
5 : Axis parallel to the X axis
6 : Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 : Axis parallel to the Z axis

1023 Setting of axis number for each servo axis (1 to <Axis>

No. of controlled axis)

r.c
4) Parameter for Coordinate system

Number Contents Remarks

1201 Parameters for coordinates

e
#7 WZR : Upon reset, the workpiece coordinate system T series
is not returned (0)/returned (1) to that specified
with G54
#6 :

#4 :
nt
#5 AWK : When to change workpiece origin offset, value
is changed from preprocessing step (0)/
changed immediately (1)
ce
#3 FPC : When the floating reference position is set, the
relative position display is not preset (0)/is
preset (1)
#2 ZCL : When manual reference position return is
performed the local coordinate system is, not
canceled (0)/canceled (1)
#1 ZPI : The coordinate value of automatic coordinate PRM1250,
nc

system is set PRM 1250 (0)/PRM 1250 & PRM 1251

1251 (1)
#0 ZPR : When manual reference position return is
performed the automatic coordinate system is
not set (0)/set automatically (1)
.c

1202 Workpiece origin offset

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
w

#4 :
#3 RLC : Upon reset, the local coordinate system is not
canceled (0)/canceled (1).
#2 G50 : When the workpiece coordinate system ALM010
w

function is selected, coordinate system setting T series

is executed (0)/an alarm is issued (1).
#1 EWS : The meanings of the workpiece shift value and T series
external workpiece origin offset value are the
w

same (0)/different (1).

#0 EWD: The shift direction of the external workpiece T series
origin offset is the same as the sign (0)/
opposite to the sign (1).

247
 Number Contents Remarks

1220 Offset of the external workpiece origin <Axis> 1

1221 Offset of the workpiece origin in workpiece <Axis>
coordinate system 1 (G54)

1222 Offset of the workpiece origin in workpiece OFFSET

coordinate system 2 (G55) screen 2

om
1223 Offset of the workpiece origin in workpiece
coordinate system 3 (G56)

1224 Offset of the workpiece origin in workpiece

coordinate system 4 (G57) 3
1225 Offset of the workpiece origin in workpiece
coordinate system 5 (G58)

r.c
1226 Offset of the workpiece origin in workpiece
coordinate system 6 (G59) 4
1240 Coordinate value of the first reference position <Axis>
on each axis in the machine coordinate system

1241 Coordinate value of the second reference <Axis>

e
position on each axis in the machine coordinate
5
system

1242

1243
nt
Coordinate value of the third reference position
on each axis in the machine coordinate system

Coordinate value of the fourth reference

position on each axis in the machine coordinate
<Axis>

<Axis>
6
ce
system

1244 Coordinate value of the floating reference <Axis>

position Set auto- 7
matically

1250 Coordinate value of the reference position used <Axis>

nc

when automatic coordinate system setting is PRM

performed (mm input) 1201#1=0
8
1251 Coordinate value of the reference position on <Axis>
each axis used for setting a coordinate system PRM
automatically when input is performed in inches 1201#1=1
.c

1260 The amount of travel per rotation 9

1290 Distance between two opposed tool posts in T series
mirror image
w

10
w
w

248
 8. PARAMETERS

5) Parameters of Stroke Limit

Number Contents Remarks

1300 Relating to Stroke Limit

#7 BFA : When a command that exceeds a stored

stroke limit is issued, an alarm is generated

om
after the stroke limit is exceeded (0)/before the
limit is exceeded (1)
#6 LZR : The stored stroke limits are checked during the
time from power-on to manual return to the
reference position (0)/not checked (1)
#5 RL3 : Stored stroke limit3 release signal RLSOT3 is
disabled (0)/enabled (1)
#4 :
#3 :

r.c
#2 LMS : The EXLM signal for switching stored stroke PRM1320,
limit is disable (0)/enable (1) 1321,
1326, 1327
#1 :
#0 OUT : An inhibition area of the second stored stroke
limits is set, inside (0)/outside (1)

e
1301 Stroke limit check performed before movement

#7 PLC : Stroke limit check before movement is not

#6
#5
#4
#3
:
:
:
:
nt
performed (0)/performed (1)
ce
#2 NPC : As part of the stroke limit check performed
before movement, the movement specified in
G31 (skip) and G37 (automatic tool length
measurement (for M series) or automatic tool
compensation (for T series)) blocks is checked
(0)/not checked (1)
nc

#1 :
#0 :

1310 Relating to Stroke Limit <Axis>

#7 :
#6 :
.c

#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
w

#1 OT3 : Stored stroke limits 3 for each axis are, not

checked (0)/checked (1)
#0 OT2 : When the inside of the stored stroke limits 2 is
set as the inhibition area, whether stored
stroke limits 2 are checked for each axis is set,
w

stored stroke limits 2 are not checked (0)/

checked (1)
1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke limit 1 in the <Axis>
w

positive direction on each axis

1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke limit 1 in the <Axis>

negative direction on each axis

249
 Number Contents Remarks

1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke limit 2 in the <Axis> 1

positive direction on each axis

1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke limit 2 in the <Axis>

negative direction on each axis

1324 Coordinate value of stored stroke limit 3 in the <Axis> 2

om
positive direction on each axis

1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke limit 3 in the <Axis>

negative direction on each axis

1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke limit 1 in <Axis> 3

the positive direction on each axis PRM
1300#2=1

r.c
1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke limit 1 in <Axis>
the negative direction on each axis PRM 4
1300#2=1

1330 Profile of a chuck T series

0 : Holds a workpiece on the inner surface.
1 : Holds a workpiece on the outer surface.

e
5
1331 Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (L) T series
[Increment system]

1332

1333
nt
Dimensions of the claw of a chuck (W)
(Radius value) [Increment system]

Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a

workpiece is held (L1) [Increment system]
T series

T series
6
ce
1334 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a T series
workpiece is held (W1) (Radius value)
[Increment system]
7
1335 Chuck position CZ along the X-axis (workpiece T series
coordinate system) [Increment system]
nc

1336 Chuck position CZ along the Z-axis (workpiece T series 8

coordinate system) [Increment system]

1341 Length of a tailstock (L) [Increment system] T series

1342 Diameter of a tailstock (D) [Increment system] T series

.c

1343 Length of a tailstock (L1) [Increment system] T series

9
1344 Diameter of a tailstock (D1) [Increment system] T series
w

1345 Length of a tailstock (L2) [Increment system] T series

1346 Diameter of a tailstock (D2) [Increment system] T series 10

1347 Diameter of the hole of a tailstock (D3) T series
w

[Increment system]

1348 Z coordinate of a tailstock (TZ) (Workpiece T series

coordinate system) [Increment system]
w

250
 8. PARAMETERS

6) Parameter of Feedrate

Number Contents Remarks

1401 Parameter relating to Feedrate

#7 :
#6 RDR : Dry run for rapid traverse command is, disable
(0)/enable (1)

om
#5 TDR : Dry run during tapping in the tapping cycle
(G74, G84) (including rigid tapping) is enable
(0)/ disable (1)
#4 RFO : When cutting feedrate override is 0% during
rapid traverse, the machine tool does not stop
moving (0)/stops moving (1)
#3 :
#2 JZR : Manual return to the reference position at Jog T series

r.c
feedrate is not performed (0)/performed (1)
#1 LRP : Positioning (G00) is nonlinear (0)/linear (1).
#0 RPD : Manual rapid traverse before the completion of
return to reference position is disable
(0)/enable (1)

1402 Parameter relating to Manual feed per

e
revolution

#7 :
#6
#5
#4 JRV
:
: nt
: Manual feed per revolution is, not performed
(0)/performed (1)
#3 OV2 : The secondary feedrate override value is 1%
T series
ce
(PMCDGN G013) (0)/0.01% (G094, G095) (1).
#2 :
#1 :
#0 NPC : The feed per rotation command is ineffective
when a position coder is not provided (0)/
provided (1)
nc

1403 Units used for feed per minute, threading retract T series

#7 RTV : Overriding during threading retraction is

enabled (0)/disabled (1).
#6 :
#5 :
.c

#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 MIF : The unit of F for feed per minute is [mm/min]
w

(0)/0.001 mm/min] (1).

w
w

251
 Number Contents Remarks

1404 Helical interpolation, reference position return 1

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
2

om
#2 F8A : With inch input, Valid data range for an F
command in feed per minute mode 9600
deg/min (0)/24000 deg/min (1)
#1 DLF : After a reference position has been
established, a manual reference position return 3
operation is performed at the rapid traverse
rate (PRM1420) (0)/at the manual rapid
traverse rate (PRM1424) (1).

r.c
#0 HFC : When helical interpolation involves a linear axis
that is longer than an arc, the maximum 4
feedrate is clamped to the feedrate along the
linear axis (0)/the combined feedrate along the
linear axis and arc (1).

e
1410 Dry run rate (feedrate of jog override is 100%)
[mm/min]
5
1411 Cutting feedrate in the automatic mode at M series

1414
nt
power-on [mm/min]

Feedrate for reverse movement by the retrace

function [mm/min]
M series
0: Pro-
grammed
6
ce
command

1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis <Axis>

(Rapid traverse override is 100%) [mm/min] 7
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
nc

1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis <Axis>

[mm/min] PRM1430 8
1423 Manual continuous feedrate for each axis (jog <Axis>
feedrate) [mm/min]
.c

1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis <Axis>

If 0 is set, the rate set in PRM1420 is assumed
9
[mm/min]

1425 FL rate of return to the reference position for <Axis>

w

each axis [mm/min]

1426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed <Axis>

10
[mm/min] PRM
1005#4 5
1005#4,
w

1427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for

each axis [mm/min]
w

252
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

1428 Feedrate for reference position return before <Axis>

establishing reference position [mm/min] M series

Before a reference After a reference

position is set position is set
Reference position Reference position
return feedrate return feedrate

om
setting function setting function
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
Reference position
return by G28
Raped traverse PRM1420 PRM1420
command (G00) in
automatic operation PRM1428
Manual Without PRM1420 or
reference dogs*1 PRM1424*2
PRM1424

r.c
position With
return PRM1424 PRM1428
dogs
Manual raped PRM1423 or
PRM1424
traverse PRM1424*1

*1 To be selected with bit 0 of PRM1401

*2 To be selected with bit 1 of PRM1404

e
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min] M series
PRM1422

1431

1432
nt
Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the
look-ahead control mode [mm/min]

Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the

look-ahead control mode [mm/min]
M series

<Axis>
M series
ce
PRM 1431

1450 Change of feedrate for one graduation on the M series

manual pulse generator during F1 digit feed
Fmax1 or Fmax2

F =
100
(PRM1450)
nc

Fmax1=PRM 1460
Fmax2=PRM 1461

1451 Feedrate for F1 digit command F1 [mm/min] M series

Setting
1452 Feedrate for F1 digit command F2 [mm/min] entry y is
acceptable.
.c

1453 Feedrate for F1 digit command F3 [mm/min]

It is
1454 Feedrate for F1 digit command F4 [mm/min] possible to
increase
1455 Feedrate for F1 digit command F5 [mm/min] and
w

1456 Feedrate for F1 digit command F6 [mm/min] decrease

according
1457 Feedrate for F1 digit command F7 [mm/min] to F1D
signal.
i l
1458 Feedrate for F1 digit command F8 [mm/min]
w

1459 Feedrate for F1 digit command F9 [mm/min]

1460 Upper limit of feedrate for F1 digit command M series

(F1 to F4) [mm/min]
w

1461 Upper limit of feedrate for F1 digit command

(F5 to F9) [mm/min]

253
 7) Parameters of acceleration/deceleration control

Number Contents Remarks 1

1601 Parameter relating to acceleration/deceleration

#7 :
#6 ACD : Automatic corner deceleration function is used
(0)/not used (1) 2

om
#5 NCI : Imposition check at deceleration is performed
(0)/not performed (1)
#4 RTO : Block overlap in rapid traverse is not performed PRM 1722
(0)/performed (1)
#3 : 3
#2 OVB : Cutting feed block overlap is not performed (0)/ M series
is performed (1).
#1 :

r.c
#0 :
1602 Acceleration/deceleration control 4
#7 :
#6 LS2 : Acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed G08.1
interpolation during look-ahead control is

e
exponential (0)/linear (1). 5
#5 :
#4 CSD : Automatic corner deceleration is controlled by

#3
#2
#1
:
:
:
nt
angle (0)/feedrate (1).

#0 FWB : Linear acceleration/deceleration before

6
ce
interpolation is type A (0)/type B (1)
1610 Acceleration/deceleration control <Axis>
7
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
nc

#4 JGL : Acceleration/deceleration for manual feed is PRM

exponential (0)/linear or bell-shaped (1). 1610#0,#1,
#3 : 1624
8
#2 :
#1 CTB : On an axis-by-axis basis, bell-shaped PRM1622
acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
.c

interpolation is not used (0)/used (1).

#0 CTL : On an axis-by-axis basis, linear PRM1622 9
acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation is not used (0)/used (1).
w

1620 Time constant of linear acceleration/ <Axis>

deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis 10
[msec]

1621 Time constant T2 used in bell-shaped <Axis>

w

acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for

each axis [msec]

1622 Time constant of exponential function <Axis>

w

acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for

each axis [msec]

254
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

1623 FL rate of exponential function acceleration/ <Axis>

deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
[mm/min]

1624 Time constant of exponential function <Axis>

acceleration/deceleration in manual continuous
feed for each axis [msec]

om
1625 FL rate of exponential function acceleration/ <Axis>
deceleration in manual continuous feed for
each axis [mm/min]

1626 Time constant of exponential function <Axis>

acceleration/deceleration in the thread cutting T series
cycle for each axis (G92 in G code system A)

r.c
[msec]

1627 FL rate of exponential function acceleration/ <Axis>

deceleration in the thread cutting cycle for each T series
axis (G92 in G code system A) [mm/min]

1630 Maximum machining speed during linear In

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation look-ahead

e
[mm/min] control
mode
mode,
1631 Time until the machining speed reaches the PRM1770,

1710
nt
maximum speed during acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation

Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) of the inner

circular cutting rate in automatic corner
1771 are
[msec] enabled.

M series
Automatic
ce
override [%] corner
override
1711 Angle (θp) to recognize the inner corner in
automatic override [deg]

1712 Amount of automatic override for an inner

corner [%]
nc

1713 Distance Le from the starting point in inner

corner automatic override

1714 Distance Ls up to the ending point in inner

corner automatic override
.c

1722 Rapid traverse deceleration ratio when blocks <Axis>

in rapid traverse are overlapped [%] PRM
1601#4

1730 Maximum allowable feedrate for arc radius R Feedrate

w

clamping
clam ing
1731 Arc radius R for a maximum allowable feedrate for
based on an arc radius feedrate
based on
w

1732 Minimum allowable clamping feedrate for an arc

feedrate based on an arc radius radius

1740 Critical angle subtended by two blocks M series

specifying automatic corner deceleration
w

[0.001 deg]

255
 Number Contents Remarks

1741 Feedrate for terminating automatic corner <Axis> 1

deceleration (for acceleration/deceleration after M series
interpolation)

1762 Time constant of exponential acceleration/ <Axis>

deceleration in cutting feed in look-ahead M series
control mode [msec]
2

om
1763 FL rate for exponential acceleration/ <Axis>
deceleration in cutting feed in look-ahead M series
control mode [mm/min]
3
1768 Time constant of linear acceleration/ M series
deceleration in cutting feed in look-ahead
control mode [msec]

r.c
1770 Maximum machining speed during linear Accelera-
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation tion/ 4
[mm/min] decelera-
tion before
interpola-
inter ola-
1771 Time needed until the machining speed tion (look-

e
reaches the maximum machining speed during ahead 5
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation control
[msec] mode)

1777
nt
Minimum allowable feedrate for automatic
corner deceleration (for acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation)
M series

<Axis>
M series 6
ce
1778 Minimum speed of for the automtic corner <Axis>
deceleration function (for linear acceleration/ M series
deceleration before interpolation) 7
1779 Critical angle subtended by two blocks for M series
automatic corner deceleration (for look–ahead
nc

control)

1780 Allowable feedrate difference for the corner 8

deceleration function based on a feedrate
difference (acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation)
.c

1781 Allowable feedrate difference for the corner <Axis>

deceleration function based on a feedrate 9
difference (acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation)
w

1783 Allowable error in automatic corner <Axis>

deceleration based on a feedrate difference 10
(linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation)
w

1784 Feedrate for overtravel alarm deceleration

during acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (stroke limit)
w

256
 8. PARAMETERS

8) Parameters of Servo

Number Contents Remarks

1800 Backlash compensation, DRDY alarm

#7 :
#6 :
#5 TRC : The servo trace function is disabled (0)/ PRM 1870

om
enabled (1).
#4 RBK : Backlash compensation applied separately for PRM 1851,
cutting feed and rapid traverse is not 1852
performed (0)/performed (1)
#3 FFR : The feed-forward function is enabled for cutting
only (0)/cutting and rapid traverse (1).
#2 OZR : If manual reference position return is
performed using the feed hold function when

r.c
there is a remaining distance to travel, a
miscellaneous function is being executed, a
dwell operation is being performed, or a
canned cycle is being executed, ALM091 is
issued (0)/not issued (1).
#1 CVR : A servo alarm is generated when DRDY is set ALM 404

e
ON before output of MCON (0)/alarm is not
generated (1)
#0 :

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

257
 Number Contents Remarks

1801 Parameter relating to inposition 1

#7 :
#6 :
#5 CIN : In-position width parameter setting when a
block for cutting is followed by another block
for cutting
2

om
#4 CCI : In-position width parameter setting when a PRM1826,
block for cutting is followed by another block 1827
for cutting
CIN CCI PRM1826 PRM1827 3
Same as rapid
0 0 (Not used)
traverse
When the next

r.c
block specifies When the next
an operation block also
1 0 4
other than specifies
cutting cutting
When rapid When cutting
traverse is to feed is to be
be performed performed

e
1 1 regardless of regardless of 5
what is what is
specified by specified by
the next block the next block
#3
#2
:
:
nt
#1 PM2 : Spindle-to-motor gear ratio when the speed
control function based on the servo motor is
T series
6
ce
used
#0 PM1 : Spindle-to-motor gear ratio when the speed T series
control function based on the servo motor is
used
7
PM2 PM1 Magnification
0 0 1/1
nc

0 1 1/2
1 0 1/4 8
1 1 1/8
spindle speed
Magnification=
motor speed
.c

1802 Speed control based on the servo motor T series 9

#7 :
#6 :
#5 DPS : In speed control based on the servo motor, a
w

position coder is used (0)/not used (1).

#4 : 10
#3 :
#2 :
w

#1 :
#0 CTS : Speed control based on the servo motor is not
applied (0)/applied (1).
w

258
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

1804 VRDY OFF ignore signal

#7 :
#6 SAK : When the IGNVRY signal is 1 or the IGNVRYx
signal for each axis is 1, SA is set to 0 (0)/
1 (1).
#5 :

om
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :
1815 Parameter relating to position detector <Axis>

r.c
#7 ZMG : The reference position method is the grid
method (0)/magnetic switch method (1).
#6 :
#5 APC : Position transducer is incremental position
transducer (0)/absolute pulse coder (1)
#4 APZ : When the absolute position detector is used,
machine position and absolute position

e
transducer is not corresponding (0)/
corresponding (1)
#3 :
#2 : nt
#1 OPT : A separate pulse coder is not used (0)/

#0 :
used (1)
ce
1816 Parameter relating to detection multiply <Axis>

#7 : Flexible
#6 DM3 : DM3 DM2 DM1 DMR DM3 DM2 DM1 DMR feed gear
#5 DM2 : 0 0 0 1/2 1 0 0 5/2 In case of
#4 DM1 : parameter
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 3
#3 : (No. 2084
nc

#2 : 0 1 0 3/2 1 1 0 7/2 and 2085

#1 : 0 1 1 2 1 1 1 4 are not
#0 : used.)
Detection unit =
Move amount per one rotation of the motor
Position feedback pulse per one rotation of
the motor
DMR
.c

1817 Tandem control <Axis>

#7 :
w

#6 TAN : Tandem control is not applied (0)/applied (1).

#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
w

#2 :
#1 :
#0 :
w

259
 Number Contents Remarks

1819 Follow-up, feed-forward <Axis> 1

#7 NAH : In look-ahead control mode, the advance M series
feed-forward function is used (0)/not used (1).
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
2

om
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 FUP : When the servo system is turned off, a
follow-up operation is performed based on 3
*FLWU (0)/is not performed (1).
1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR) <Axis>

r.c
Least command increment
CMR =
Detection unit 4
CMR t 1 Setting value = (1/CMR) +100
CMR y 1 Setting value = 2 CMR
1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit]

e
1825 Servo loop gain for each axis [0.01 sec–1] <Axis>
5
Std=3000

1826

1827
nt
Inposition width for each axis [Detection unit]

Inposition width for successive cutting feed

blocks for each axis [Detection unit]
<Axis>

<Axis>
T series
PRM
6
ce
1801#4

1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in <Axis>

movement [Detection unit] PRM 1420 7
Setting value = PRM 1825
Rapid traverse 1
1.2
60 PRM 1825 Detecting unit
nc

1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the <Axis> 8

stopped state [Detection unit] Std=5000

1832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis <Axis>

[Detection unit]
.c

1836 Servo error amount where reference position <Axis> 9

return is possible [Detection unit] PRM
2000#0

1850 Grid shift for each axis [Detection unit] <Axis>

w

1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis <Axis> 10

[Detection unit]

1852 Backlash compensating value used for rapid <Axis>

w

traverse for each axis [Detection unit] PRM

1800#4=1

1870 Number of the program for storing servo trace

w

data

1871 Program number where servo trace data is

stored (when the program number is 8 digits)

260
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

1874 Numerator of the conversion coefficient for <Axis>

inductosyn position detection

1875 Denominator of the conversion coefficient for <Axis>

inductosyn position detection

1876 One-pitch interval of the inductosyn <Axis>

om
1877 Amount of inductosyn shift <Axis>

1880 Abnormal load detection alarm timer [msec]

1890 Detection speed of the servo motor speed

detection function [rpm]

1891 Signal output address of the servo motor speed

r.c
detection function [rpm]

2000 Parameter for servo <Axis>

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :

e
#4 :
#3 PRMCAL: Automatic calculation of parameter values
according to the number of PC pulses is
not performed (0)/performed (1)
#2 : nt
#1 DGPRM : When the power is turned on, the digital
servo parameter specific to the motor is
set (0)/not set (1).
#0 PLC01 : Incremental system is 1/1000mm (0)/
ce
PRM2023,
1/10000mm (1) 2024, 1836
2001 Parameter for pulse coder <Axis>

#7 AMR7:
Motor
#6 AMR6: #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
type
nc

#5 AMR5:
#4 AMR4: 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 5-0
#3 AMR3:
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4-0S,
#2 AMR2: 3-0S
#1 AMR1:
#0 AMR0: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Servo
Motor
.c

α series
w
w
w

261
 Number Contents Remarks

2003 Parameter for velocity control <Axis> 1

#7 VOFST : VCMD is not offset (0)/offset (1)
#6 OVSCMP : Overshoot compensation is invalidated PRM 2045
(0)/validated (1)
#5 BLENBL : In speed control, backlash compensation PRM 2048
is, not improved (0)/proved (1)
2

om
#4 IPSPRS : In speed control, 1 pulse when the
direction is reversed one pulse is not
ignored (0)/ignored (1)
#3 PIENBL : Velocity control by IP control (0)/PI control
(1) 3
#2 OBENBL : Velocity control observer is not used (0)/ PRM 2047,
used (1) 2050, 2051
#1 TGALRM : The detecting level of the motor rotation PRM 2064

r.c
without feedback alarm is set to standard
(0)/set by parameter 1892 (1) 4
#0 *NDL8 : 0

2004 Parameter for pulse coder <Axis>

#7 :

e
#6 : 5
#5 :
The standard value for this parameter is
#4 :
set when the power is turned on.
#3
#2
#1
#0
TRW1
TRW0
TINB0
TINA0
:
:
:
:
nt
Do not set it to other than the standard
value
6
ce
2005 Parameter for servo <Axis>

#7 :
#6 BRKCTL : Gravity shaft break control function is PRM2083 7
ineffective (0)/effective (1)
#5 :
#4 :
nc

#3 :
#2 : 8
#1 FEEDFD : Feedforward function is ineffective (0)/ PRM2068,
effective (1) 2069, 2092
#0 :
.c

2006 Parameter for servo <Axis>

9
#7 :
#6 DCBEMF : While decelerating, back electromotive
force compensation is ineffective (0)/
w

effective (1)
#5 : 10
#4 ACCFB : Acceleration feedback while stopping
function is ineffective (0)/effective (1)
w

#3 :
#2 PKVER : Current loop gain velocity depending PRM 2074
variable function is ineffective (0)/
effective (1)
#1 :
w

#0 FCBLCM : In fully closed feedback, backlash PRM 2048

compensation pulses are dealt normally
(0)/not used (1)

262
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

2009 Parameter for servo <Axis>

#7 BLSTP : Backlash acceleration stop function is

ineffective (0)/effective (1)
#6 BLCUT : Backlash acceleration stop function in PRM2066,
cutting mode is ineffective (0)/effective (1) 2082
#5 :

om
#4 :
#3 :
#2 ADBLSH : New type backlash acceleration stop PRM2048,
function is ineffective (0)/effective (1) 2087
#1 :
#0 SERDMY : Dummy function for the serial pulse coder
is not used (0)/used (1)

r.c
2010 Parameter for servo <Axis>

#7 POLENB: Function for switching the punch and laser

is not used (0)/used (1)
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :

e
#3 BLTEN : Multiply backlash acceleration amount is PRM2048

1 (0)/
10 (1)
#2 :
#1
#0
2012

#7
:
:

:
nt
Parameter for servo <Axis>
ce
#6 :
VCMD2 VCMD1 Serial PC
#5 VCMD2 :
#4 VCMD1 : 0 0 0.9155 rpm/5V
0 1 14 rpm/5V
#3 : 1 0 234 rpm/5V
#2 : 1 1 3750 rpm/5V
nc

#1 MCNFB : Machine velocity feedback function is

ineffective (0)/effective (1) PRM2088
#0 :
2015 High-speed positioning function <Axis>

#7 :
.c

#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
w

#2 :
#1 SSG1 : Integration function at low speed is not PRM2029,
used (0)/used (1) 2030
#0 PGTWN : Polygonal lines for the position gain are not PRM2028
w

used (0)/used (1)

w

263
 Number Contents Remarks

2019 Digital servo function <Axis> 1

#7 DFBCT : The dual feedback function is not used (0)/
used (1).
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
2

om
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :
3
2020 Motor model <Axis>

2021 Load inertia ratio (LDINT) <Axis>

r.c
2022 Motor rotation direction (DIRCTL) <Axis>
111=CCW, –111=CW 4
2023 No. of speed detection feedback pulses <Axis>
(PULCO) PRM
2000#0

e
5
PRM PRM
2000#0=0 2000#0=1

2024
nt
Serial PC A/
PC 8192 819

No. of position detection feedback pulses

(PPLS)
<Axis>
PRM
6
ce
2000#0

1 Position detecting by built-in type of pulse coder

7
PRM PRM
2000#0=0 2000#0=1
Serial PC A/
PC 12500 1250
nc

2 In case of separate type of position detector, Setting 8

value=the feedback pulse/motor one revolution
4
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is 1, use the value
obtained by dividing, by 10, the value used when this bit is 0.
.c

2028 Speed at which the position gain is doubled <Axis>

PRM 9
2015#0

2029 Speed at which the integration function is <Axis>

w

disabled during acceleration PRM

2015#1 10
2030 Speed at which the integration function is
enabled during deceleration
w

2031 Simplified synchronization alarm detection level <Axis>

(TCDIFF)

2032 Integral gain change–over parameter (PUNCH) <Axis>

w

2033 Vibration–damping control position feedback <Axis>

pulse (PFBPLS)

264
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

2034 Vibration–damping control gain (GAINBT) <Axis>

2035 Number of directly set feed–forward shifts <Axis>

(FMFSFL)

2036 Slave axis damping compensation (SBDMPL) <Axis>

om
2037 (Reserve) <Axis>

2038 Spindle feed back coefficient <Axis>

2039 Second–stage acceleration of the Two–stage <Axis>

backlash acceleration function (BL3QUT)

2040 Current loop gain (PK1) <Axis>

2041 Current loop gain (PK2) <Axis>

r.c
2042 Current loop gain (PK3) <Axis>

2043 Velocity loop gain (PK1V) <Axis>

2044 Velocity loop gain (PK2V) <Axis>

e
2045 Imperfect integration coefficient (PK3V) <Axis>

2046 Velocity loop gain (PK4V) <Axis>

2047

2048

2049
nt
Velocity control observer parameter (POA1)

Velocity control backlash compensation

impovement (BLCMP)

Maximum zero width of dual feedback

<Axis>

<Axis>

<Axis>
ce
2050 Velocity control observer parameter (POK1) <Axis>

2051 Velocity control observer parameter (POK2) <Axis>

2052 Not used <Axis>

nc

2053 Current dead band compensation (PPMAX) <Axis>

2054 Current dead band compensation (PDDP) <Axis>

2055 Current dead band compensation (PHYST) <Axis>

2056 Back electromotive force compensation <Axis>

.c

(EMFCMP)

2057 Current phase control (PVPA) <Axis>

2058 Current phase control (PALPH) <Axis>

w

2059 Back electromotive force compensation <Axis>

(EMFBAS)

2060 Torque limit (TQLIM) <Axis>

w

2061 Back electromotive force compensation <Axis>

(EMFLMT)

2062 Overload protection coefficient (OVC1) <Axis>

w

2063 Overload protection coefficient (OVC2) <Axis>

265
 Number Contents Remarks

2064 TG alarm level (TGALMLV) <Axis> 1

PRM
2003#1

2065 Overload protection coefficient (OVCLMT) <Axis>

2066 250 m sec acceleration feedback (PK2VAUX) <Axis> 2

om
2067 Torque command filter (TCFIL) <Axis>

2068 Feedforward coefficient (FALPH) <Axis>

2069 Feedforward filter coefficient (VFFLT) <Axis> 3

2070 Backlash compensation acceleration <Axis>
parameter (ERBLM)

r.c
2071 Backlash compensation acceleration <Axis>
parameter (PBLCT) 4
2072 Static–friction compensation acceleration <Axis>
(SFCCML)

2073 Static–friction compensation stop decision time <Axis>

e
(PSPTL) 5
2074 Velocity depending type current loop gain <Axis>

2076

2077
nt
(AALPH)

Acceleration feedback gain (WKAC)

Overshoot provention counter (OSCTP)

<Axis>

<Axis>
6
ce
2078 Numerator of dual position feedback <Axis>
conversion coefficient

2079 Denominator of dual position feedback <Axis> 7

conversion coefficient

2080 Primary delay time constant of dual position <Axis>

nc

feedback

2081 Zero width of dual position feedback <Axis>

8
2082 Backlash acceleration stop amount (BLEND) <Axis>

2083 Gravity axis break control timer (MOFCT) <Axis>

.c

PRM
9
2005#6

2084 Flexible feed gear numerator n <Axis>

w

2085 Flexible feed gear denominator m <Axis>

10
Position feedback
n pulses/motor rev.
=
w

m 1,000,000

2086 Rated current parameter (RTCURR) <Axis>

2087 New type backlash acceleration torque offset <Axis>

w

(TCPRLD)

266
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

2088 Machine velocity feedback gain (MCNFB) <Axis>

PRM
2012#2

PRM 2023
PRM 2088= 4096
α

PRM 2024

om
2089 Base pulse for backlash acceleration (BLBSL) <Axis>

2091 Nonlinear switch input amount <Axis>

2092 Advance feed-forward coefficient [0.01%] <Axis>

2093 Incomplete integral (speed command mode) <Axis>

(VMPK3V)

r.c
2094 Second backlash acceleration (BLCMP2) <Axis>

2095 Mechanical distortion compensation (AHDRT) <Axis>

2096 Radius parameter for radial error serial output <Axis>

(RADUS)

e
2097 Static–friction compensation stop (SMCNT) <Axis>

2098 Phase progress compensation coefficient in <Axis>

2099

2102
nt
deceleration (PIPVPL)

1 pulse suppress level (ONEPSL)

Final clamp value of the actual current limit

(DBLMI)
<Axis>

<Axis>
ce
2103 Restored amount in abnormal load detection <Axis>
(ABVOF)

2104 Threshold in the alarm of abnormal load <Axis>

detection (ABTSH)
nc

2105 Torque constant (TRQCST) <Axis>

2107 Speed loop gain override (VLGOVR) <Axis>

2109 Fine Acc/Dec time constant (BELLTC) <Axis>

2110 Current phase control 2 (MGSTCM) <Axis>

.c

2111 Deceleration torque limit (DETQLM) <Axis>

2112 Linear motor AMR conversion factor <Axis>

(AMRDML)
w

2113 Notch filter cutoff frequency (NFILT) <Axis>

2114 Second–stage acceleration multiplier of the <Axis>

Two–stage backlash acceleration function
w

(BL3OVR)

2115 Arbitrary data serial output address (SRTADL) <Axis>

2116 Abnormal load detection friction compensation <Axis>

w

(FRCCMP)

267
 Number Contents Remarks

2118 Maximum value for dual position feedback <Axis> 1

error difference detection (DERMXL)

2121 Super–precision pulse conversion factor <Axis>

(SBPDNL)

2122 Super–precision detection resistance <Axis> 2

om
conversion factor (SBAMPL)

9) Parameter of DI/DO

Number Contents Remarks

3
3001 Parameter for Interface

r.c
#7 MHI : Exchange of strobe and completion signals for
the M, S, T and B codes are normal (0)/ high 4
speed (1)
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

e
#2 RWM : RRW signal is put out only when the tape
5
reader is being rewound (0)/ when a program
in memory is being rewound (1)
#1
#0

#7
:
:
3002

:
nt
Override polarity
6
ce
#6 :
#5 :
#4 IOV : The manual feed and cutting feed override 7
signal uses negative logic (0)/positive logic (1).
#3 :
#2 :
nc

#1 :
#0 : 8
3003 Parameter for Interlock signal

#7 MVG : During dynamic graphic processing, the axis T series

.c

movement in-progress signal is output (0)/not

output (1). 9
#6 MVX : The axis movement in-progress signal is set to
0 at the time of distribution completion (0)/
in-position (1).
w

#5 DEC : Deceleration signals (*DEC1 to *DEC8) for

manual reference position return specify 10
deceleration when they are 0 (0)/when they are
1 (1)
w

#4 :
#3 DIT : Interlock for each axis direction is, enable (0)/ +MIT1 -
disable (1) –MIT4
#2 ITX : Interlock signals for each axis is, enable (0)/ *IT1 - *IT8
w

disable (1)
#1 :
#0 ITL : Interlock signal is enable (0)/ disable (1) *IT, *IT, STLK
STLK (T)

268
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3004 Overtravel

#7 :
#6 :
#5 OTH : The hardware overtravel function is used (0)/
not used (1).
#4 :

om
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :

3006 Reference position return deceleration signal

#7 :

r.c
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 GDC : The address of the reference position return

e
deceleration signal is X009 (0)/G196 (1).

3010 Delay time of strobe signals MF, SF, TF, BF

3011

3017
nt
completion signal (FIN)

Output time of reset signal RST

[msec]

Acceptable width of M, S, T and B function

[msec]

[16 msec]
ce
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
(1 - 8)

3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code

(1 - 5)
nc

3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

(1 - 8)

3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code

(1 - 8)
.c
w
w
w

269
 10) Parameters of CRT/MDI, Display, and Edit

Number Contents Remarks 1

3100 Parameter for CRT / MDI

#7 COR : 9-inch high resolution CRT is used as a

monochrome display (0)/color display (1)
#6 : 2

om
#5 :
#4 FPT : The CAP-II keyboard is not used (0)/used (1). T series
#3 FKY : The standard keys are used for MDI keyboard
(0)/ The full keys are used (1)
#2 : 3
#1 :
#0 :

r.c
3101 CRT

#7 SBA : The current positions are displayed in the order T series 4

of tool post 1 then tool post 2 (0)/tool post 2 (2-path
then tool post 1 (1). control)
#6 :
#5 :

e
#4 BGD : The display of a foreground program in the 5
background is disabled (0)/enabled (1).
#3 :
#2

#0
3102
:

:
nt
#1 KBF : At screen or mode switching, the key buffer is
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).

The selection of language used in the display English is

6
ce
on theCRT (Option) a standard

#7 : When all 7
#6 SPN : Spanish the bits are
#5 HNG : Korean (Hangul character) set to 0,
#4 ITA : Italian English is
nc

#3 CHI : Chinese (Taiwanese) used.

#2 FRN : French
#1 GRM: German
8
#0 JPN : Japanese

3103 Current position display order

.c

#7 ABR : When the absolute and relative current T series

9
positions are displayed, tool post 1 is displayed (2-path
on the first screen, then tool post 2 is displayed control)
on the second screen (0)/ a selected tool post
is displayed on the first screen, then the tool
w

post that is not selected is displayed on the

second screen (1). 10
#6 :
#5 :
w

#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
w

#0 :

270
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3104 Parameters for position display

#7 DAC : For displaying absolute positions, cutter

compensation (M series) or tool-tip radius
compensation (T series) is considered (0)/not
considered (1)
#6 DAL : For displaying absolute positions, tool length

om
compensation (M series) or tool offset (T
series) is considered (0)/not considered (1)
#5 DRC : For displaying relative positions, cutter
compensation (M series) or tool-tip radius
compensation (T series) is considered (0)/not
considered (1)
#4 DRL : For displaying relative positions, tool length
compensation (M series) or tool offset (T

r.c
series) is considered (0)/not considered (1)
#3 PPD : When a coordinate system is set, the relative
position display is not preset (0)/preset (1)
#2 :
#1 :
#0 MCN : The machine position display is not displayed PRM

e
according to the unit of input (0)/displayed 0000#2
according to the unit of input (1)

3105 Parameters for data display

#6 :
nt
#7 SMF : During simplified synchronous control,
movement along a slave axis is included (0)/
not included (1) in the actual speed display.
M series
ce
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 DPS : Actual spindle speed and T code are not
always displayed (0)/always displayed (1)
#1 PCF : The movement of the PMC controlled axes are
nc

added to the actual speed display (0)/not

added (1)
#0 DPF : Display of the actual speed on the current
position display screen, program check screen
and program screen(MDI mode)is, not
displayed (0)/displayed (1)
.c
w
w
w

271
 Number Contents Remarks

3106 1
#7 OHS : Operation history sampling is performed (0)/not
performed (1).
#6 DAK : For absolute coordinate display in M series
three-dimensional coordinate conversion,
programmed coordinates are displayed (0)/
2

om
coordinates in the workpiece coordinate
system are displayed (1).
#5 SOV : A spindle override value is not displayed (0)/ PRM
displayed (1). 3105#2
#4 OPH : The operation history screen is not displayed 3
(0)/displayed (1).
#3 SPD : Names for actual spindle speed values are T series
displayed regardless (0)/depending (1) of the

r.c
selected spindle position coder.
#2 : 4
#1 GPL : On the program list screen, the list–by–group
function is disabled1 (0)/enabled (1).
#0 :

e
3107 Parameters for program display
5
#7 MDL : Display of the modal state on the program MDI mode
display screen is, not displayed (0)/displayed

#6 :
(1) nt
#5 DMN : The G code menu is displayed (0)/not
displayed (1)
#4 SOR : In the Display of the program directory,
6
ce
programs are listed in the order of registration
(0)/in the order of program number (1)
#3 : 7
#2 DNC : Upon reset, the program display for DNC
operation is not cleared (0)/cleared (1)
#1 :
nc

#0 NAM : In the Program list, only program numbers are

indicated (0)/program numbers and program 8
names (1)

3108 T code display

#7 :
.c

#6 : 9
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
w

#2 PCT : For T code display, programmed T numbers M series

are displayed (0)/PMC T numbers are
displayed (1).
10
#1 :
#0 :
w
w

272
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3109 Parameter for display of tool offset

#7 :
#6 BGO : When the <OFFSET> function key on the
background drawing screen is pressed, the
machining screen is displayed (0)/background
drawing data is displayed (1).

om
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 IKY : On the tool compensation screen, the [INPUT] T series
soft key is displayed (0)/not displayed (1).
#1 DWT : At the display of tool wear/geometry Com-
compensation, the character “W” is displayed pensation
at the left of each number (0)/not displayed (1) memory B

r.c
#0 :

3111 Parameter for CRT display

#7 NPA : When an alarm is generated, the display shifts

to the alarm screen (0)/does not shift (1)
#6 OPS : The speedometer on the operating monitor

e
screen indicates the spindle motor (0)/speed of
the spindle (1)
#5 OPM : The operating monitor is not displayed (0)/

#4
#3
:
:
nt
displayed (1)

#2 SVP : The synchronization errors displayed on the

spindle adjustment screen is the instant values
ce
(0)/peak hold values (1)
#1 SPS : The spindle setting screen is not displayed (0)/
displayed (1)
#0 SVS : The servo setting screen is displayed (0)/not
display (1)
nc

3112 Parameter for servo waveform display

#7 :
#6 :
#5 OPH : The operation history log function is displayed
(0)/enable (1).
#4 :
.c

#3 EAH : As alarm history information, macro alarm and

external alarm messages are recorded (0)/not
recorded (1).
#2 OMH: The history of external operator messages is
w

not displayed (0)/displayed (1).

#1 :
#0 SGD : Generally used graphic display (0)/servo
waveform display (1)
w
w

273
 Number Contents Remarks

3113 External operator message 1

#7 MS1 : Selects the number of external operator
message history data characters and the
number of history items.
#6 MS0 :
MS1 MS0
Number of Number of 2

om
characters history items
0 0 255 8
0 1 200 10
1 0 100 18
1 1 50 32 3
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

r.c
#2 :
#1 : 4
#0 MHC : The external operator message history can be
deleted (0)/cannot be deleted (1).

3114 Changing the screens

e
#7 : 5
#6 ICS : When the <CUSTOM> function key is pressed
while the custom screen is being displayed :
nt
the screen is changed (0)/the screen is not
changed (1).
#5 IUS : When the <CUSTOM> or <GRAPH> function
key is pressed while the user or graph screen
is being displayed : the screen is changed (0)/
6
ce
the screen is not changed (1).
#4 IMS : When the <MESSAGE> function key is
pressed while the message screen is being 7
displayed : the screen is changed (0)/the
screen is not changed (1).
#3 ISY : When the <SYSTEM> function key is pressed
nc

while the system screen is being displayed :

the screen is changed (0)/the screen is not 8
changed (1).
#2 IOF : When the <OFFSET/SETTING> function key is
pressed while the offset/setting screen is being
displayed : the screen is changed (0)/ the
.c

screen is not changed (1).

#1 IPR : When the <PROG> function key is pressed
9
while the program screen is being displayed :
the screen is changed (0)/the screen is not
changed (1).
w

#0 IPO : When the <POS> function key is pressed while

the position display screen is being displayed : 10
the screen is changed (0)/the screen is not
changed (1).
w
w

274
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3115 Parameter for current position display <Axis>

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 SFM : In current position display, axis name 2-path
subscripts are provided for all coordinates (0)/ control
machine coordinates only (1).
#1 NDA : Absolute coordinates and relative coordinates
are displayed (0)/not displayed (only machine
coordinates being displayed) (1).
#0 NDP : The current position for each axis is, displayed
(0)/not displayed (1)

r.c
3120 Time from the output of an alarm to the
termination of sampling [msec]

3122 Time interval used to record time data in

operation history [Minute]

e
3123 Time until screen clear function is applied
[Minute]

3130 Axis display order for current position display 2-path

3131
nt
screens

Subscript for the name of each axis

control

2-path
control
ce
3132 Axis name (absolute coordinate) for current
position display

3133 Axis name (relative coordinate) for current

position display

3134 Axis display order on workpiece coordinate

nc

system screen and workpiece shift screen

3141 Name of the path (first character) 2-path

control

3147 Name of the path (seventh character)

.c
w
w
w

275
 Number Contents Remarks

3151 Number of the axis for which the first load PRM 1
meter for the servo motor is used 3111#5

3152 Number of the axis for which the second load

meter for the servo motor is used

3153 Number of the axis for which the third load 2

om
meter for the servo motor is used

3154 Number of the axis for which the fourth load

meter for servo motor is used

3155 Number of the axis for which the fifth load 3

meter for servo motor is used

3156 Number of the axis for which the sixth load

r.c
meter for servo motor is used

3157 Number of the axis for which the seventh load 4

meter for servo motor is used

3158 Number of the axis for which the eighth load

meter for servo motor is used

e
3160 Rated load of the load meter for each axis 5
3201 Parameter for program registration

#7 : nt
#6 NPE : At the program registration, M02, M30 and M99
is assumed as completion of registration (0)/
not assumed (1)
6
ce
#5 N99 : When an M99 block is specified, program PRM
registration is terminated (0)/not terminated (1). 3201#6=0
#4 :
#3 : 7
#2 REP : When program registration, if the program
number is same as an existing one, an alarm is
generated (0)/the existing program is deleted
nc

then the new program is registered (1)

#1 RAL : In case of the program registeration, all 8
programs are registered (0)/only one program
is registered (1)
#0 RDL : In case of program registration by MINP signal, EXRD
the new program is registered following the signal
.c

programs already registered (0)/all registered 9

programs are deleted, then the new program is
registered (1)
w

10
w
w

276
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3202 Parameter for program protect

#7 :
#6 PSR : Search for the program number of a protected
program is disabled (0)/enabled (1)
#5 :
#4 NE9 : Editing of programs with program numbers

om
9000 to 9999 are not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)
#3 :
#2 CND : With the [ARRANGE] soft key, main program
arrangement is not performed (0)/performed
(1).
#1 OLV : When a program other than the selected
program is deleted or output the display of the
selected program is not held (0)/held (1).

r.c
#0 NE8 : Editing of programs with program numbers
8000 to 8999 are not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)

3203 MDI operation

#7 MCL : Whether a program coded in the MDI mode is

cleared by reset (0)/not cleared (1)

e
#6 MER : When MDI operation is terminated in single
block mode, program deletion is not performed
(0)/performed (1).
nt
#5 MIE : During MDI operation, program editing is
enabled (0)/disabled (1).
#4 PIO : Program input/output is performed on a
tool-post-by-tool-post basis (0)/on a two-path
basis (1).
T series
(2-path
control)
ce
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :

3204 Small MDI panel

nc

#7 :
#6 :
#5 SPR : Program numbers in the 9000 range for
specific programs are not added (0)/added (1)
with 90000000
#4 P9E : Editing of subprograms 90000000 to 99999999
.c

are not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)

#3 P8E : Editing of subprograms 80000000 to 89999999
is not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)
#2 EXK : With the small MDI panel, the input character
w

extension function is not used (0)/used (1).

#1 :
#0 PAR : With the small MDI panel, [,] is used without
modification (0)/used as (,) (1).
w

3210 Password O9000

O9999
3211 Keyword PRM
3202#4
w

3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted PRM

automatically 0000#5=1

277
 Number Contents Remarks

3290 Parameter for protect of data input 1

#7 KEY : The KEY1 to KEY4 signals are used (0)/KEY1
is used for program protection (1).
#6 MCM: Macro variable input from the MDI panel is
enabled regardless of which mode is set (0)/
enabled in MDI mode only.
2

om
#5 :
#4 IWZ : During operation, workpiece origin offset and
workpiece shift value modification are enabled
(0)/disabled (1).
#3 WZO: Input of workpiece origin offset with MDI keys 3
is not inhibited (0)/inhibit (1)
#2 MCV : Input of Macro variables with MDI keys is, not
inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)

r.c
#1 GOF : Input of a tool geometry compensation value
with MDI keys is not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1) 4
#0 WOF: Input of a tool wear compensation value with
MDI keys is not inhibited (0)/inhibited (1)

3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input

e
by MDI is disabled
5
3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start
number) whose input by MDI is disabled

Number
nt
11) Parameters for programs

Contents Remarks
6
ce
3401 Parameter for G code

#7 GSC : The G code system of lathe is A/B/C type T series 7

#6 GSB : The G code system of lathe is A/B/C type T series

GSC GSB G code

nc

0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B 8
1 0 G code system C
#5 ABS : When in the MDI operation, program command PRM
is assumed as an incremental command (0)/ 3401#4=1
.c

absolute command (1) 9

#4 MAB : When in the MDI operation, switching between
the absolute and incremental commands is
performed by G90 or G91 (0)/depending on the
w

ABS setting in parameter 3401#5 (1)

#3 : 10
#2 :
#1 FCD : When an F code is specified before a G code, T series
a feedrate is determined by the modal G code
w

(0)/G code in the same block (1).

#0 DPI : When a decimal point is omitted in an address, Calculation
the least input increment is assumed (0)/the type
unit of mm, inches, or sec. is assumed (1)
w

278
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3402 Parameter for G code

#7 G23 : Upon power-up, G22 is set (0)/G23 is set (1). T series

#6 CLR : Cause reset state the CNC with Reset
signal(0)/cause clear state (1)
#5 :
#4 :

om
#3 G91 : When the power is turned, the mode is G90
(0)/G91 (1)
#2 G19 : When the power is turned, the mode is M series
G17/G18/G19
#1 G18 : When the power is turned, the mode is M series
G17/G18/G19
G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode

r.c
0 0 G17 mode (plane XY)
0 1 G18 mode (plane ZX)
1 0 G19 mode (plane YZ)
#0 G01 : When the power is turned, the mode is G00
(0)/G01 (1)

e
3403 Circular interpolation

#7 :
nt
#6 AD2 : Specification of the same address two or more
times in a block is enabled (0)/disabled (1)
#5 CIR : When R, I, J, and K are not specified for
circular interpolation, a linear movement is
made (0)/an alarm is issued (1).
ALM5074

ALM022
ce
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :
3404 Parameter for M function
nc

#7 M3B : The number of M code that can be specified in

one block is one (0)/up to three (1)
#6 EOR : When EOR(%) is read, an alarm is issued (0)/
not issued (1).
#5 M02 : The cursor returns to the beginning of the
.c

program when M02 is read (0)/not return (1)

#4 M30 : When M30 is read, the cursor returns to the
beginning of the program (0)/does not return to
the beginning of the program (1).
#3 :
w

#2 SBP : An address P of the block including M198 is PRM 6030

indicating a file number (0)/a program number
(1)
#1 POL : For a command address allowing a decimal ALM5073
w

point, omission of the decimal point is enabled

(0)/disabled (1)
#0 NOP : In program execution, only O, EOB, and N are M series
not ignored (0)/ignored (1).
w

279
 Number Contents Remarks

3405 Parameter for Direct drawing dimension 1

program

#7 QAB : Passing point signal output specifies a T series

remaining distance to travel (0)/coordinate
along a major axis (1).
#6 QLC : A remaining distance to travel, specified by the T series
2

om
passing point signal output, represents a total
distance along all axes (0)/distance along a
major axis (1).
#5 DDP : An angle commands by direct drawing
dimension programming is normal specification 3
(0)/a supplementary angle is given (1)
#4 CCR : The addresses “C” “R” are used for chamfering T series
and corner rounding (0)/The address “I” “K”

r.c
“,R” “,C” (1)
#3 G36 : G code for automatic tool compensation is T series 4
G36/G37 (0)/G37.1/G37.2 (1).
#2 PPS : Passing point signal output is not used (0)/used T series
(1).
#1 DWL : Dwell operation is performed on an

e
every-second basis at all times (0)/on an 5
every-rotation basis during feed per rotation
(1).

3406
nt
#0 AUX : The least increment of the command of the
second miscellaneous function specified with a
decimal point is assumed to be 0.001 (0)/
depending on the input increment (1)
G code clear
T series

PRM
6
ce
3402#6=1

#7 C07 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 07 are 7

cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#6 :
#5 C05 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 05 are
nc

cleared (0)/not cleared (1).

#4 C04 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 04 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
8
#3 C03 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 03 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#2 C02 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 02 are
.c

cleared (0)/not cleared (1).

#1 C01 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 01 are 9
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#0 :
w

10
w
w

280
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3407 G code clear PRM

3402#6=1

#7 C15 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 15 are M series

cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#6 C14 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 14 are M series
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).

om
#5 C13 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 13 are M series
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#4 :
#3 C11 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 11 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#2 C10 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 10 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#1 C09 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 09 are M series

r.c
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#0 C08 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 08 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).

3408 G code clear PRM

3402#6=1

e
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 C20

#3 C19

#2 C18
nt
: Upon reset, the G codes in group 20 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
: Upon reset, the G codes in group 19 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
: Upon reset, the G codes in group 18 are
M series

M series

M series
ce
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#1 C17 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 17 are M series
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#0 C16 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 16 are
cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
nc

3409 Clear PRM

3402#6=1

#7 CFH : Upon reset, F, H, and D (M series) or F and T

(T series) are cleared (0)/not cleared (1).
#6 :
#5 :
.c

#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 C24 : Upon reset, the G codes in group 24 are M series
w

cleared (0)/not cleared (1).

3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Setting unit]
w

3411 M code preventing buffering 1

3412 M code preventing buffering 2

w

3419 M code preventing buffering 9

3420 M code preventing buffering 10

281
 Number Contents Remarks

3421 Minimum value 1 of M code preventing 1

buffering

3422 Maximum value 1 of M code preventing

buffering

3423 Minimum value 2 of M code preventing 2

om
buffering

3424 Maximum value 2 of M code preventing

buffering

3425 Minimum value 3 of M code preventing 3

buffering

3426 Maximum value 3 of M code preventing

r.c
buffering

3427 Minimum value 4 of M code preventing

4
buffering

3428 Maximum value 4 of M code preventing

buffering

e
5
3429 Minimum value 5 of M code preventing
buffering

3430

3431
nt
Maximum value 5 of M code preventing
buffering

Minimum value 6 of M code preventing

buffering
6
ce
3432 Maximum value 6 of M code preventing
buffering
7
3441 Start number of the M codes corresponding to
the set numbers 100 to 199
nc

3442 Start number of the M codes corresponding to

the set numbers 200 to 299
8
3443 Start number of the M codes corresponding to
the set numbers 300 to 399

3444 Start number of the M codes corresponding to

.c

the set numbers 400 to 499

9
w

10
w
w

282
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3450 Second miscellaneous function command

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 :
#1 :
#0 AUP : When a command for the second M series
miscellaneous function contains a decimal
point or negative sign the command is invalid
(0)/valid (1).
3460 Address for second miscellaneous function M series

r.c
Addres A B C U V W
Set value 65 66 67 85 86 87
Address B is assumed when a value other than
the above is set.

e
12) Parameters for Pitch Error Compensation

Number

3620

3621
nt Contents

Number of the pitch error compensation point

for the reference position for each axis

Number of pitch error compensation points of

Remarks

Valid data
range :
0 - 1023
ce
negative direction for each axis

3622 Number of pitch error compensation points of

positive direction for each axis

3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for 0 - 100

each axis
nc

3624 Interval between pitch error compensation

points for each axis [Setting unit]

13) Parameters for Spindle Control

.c

Number Contents Remarks

3700 Parameter for Cs axis

w

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
w

#3 :
#2 :
#1 NRF : At the first G00 command after the serial Serial
spindle is switched to C axis conturing control spindle
w

mode, the positioning is done after returning to

the reference position (0)/with normal
positioning (1)
#0 :

283
 Number Contents Remarks

3701 Parameter for the number of connections in 1

serial spindle control

#7 :
#6 :
#5 SS3 : The third spindle is not used (0)/used (1)
#4 SS2 : The second spindle is not used (0)/used (1)
2

om
#3 :
#2 :
#1 ISI : Specifies whether the serial spindle interface is
used (0)/note used (1)
#0 : 3
3702 Parameter for spindle orientation function
(O.S.S)

r.c
#7 ECS : With tool post 1, Cs contour control is used (0)/ T series
not used (1). (2-path 4
control)
#6 ESS : With tool post 1, a serial spindle is used (0)/not T series
used (1). (2-path
control)

e
#5 EAS : With tool post 1, S analog output is used (0)/ T series 5
not used (1). (2-path
control)
nt
#4 ESI : The spindle positioning function is used (0)/not
used (1).

#3 OR2 : The stop position external-setting type

orientation function O.S.S is not used at the
T series
(2-path
control) 6
ce
second spindle motor (0)/ used (1)
#2 OR1 : The stop position external-setting type
orientation function O.S.S is not used at the 7
first spindle motor (0)/ used (1)
#1 EMS : Multi–spindle control function is used (0)/not T series
used (1) (2-path
nc

control)
#0 OR3 : The spindle orientation function based on an
externally set stop position is not used (0)/
8
used (1) by the third spindle motor.
3703 Number of spindles T series
(2-path
.c

control) 9
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
w

#4 :
#3 :
10
#2 :
#1 RSI : Spindle command selection affects (0)/does
w

not affect (1) commands from SIND for the first

spindle
#0 2SP : 1 spindle control (0)/2 spindle control (1)
w

284
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3705 Parameter for gear shift of spindle

#7 :
#6 SFA : The SF signal is output when gears are M series
switched (0)/irrespective of whether gears are
switched (1)
#5 NSF : When an S code command is issued in M series

om
constant surface-speed control, SF is output
(0)/not output (1)
#4 EVS : With an S command, S codes and SF are not T series
output (0)/output (1).
#3 SGT : The gear switching method during G84 and M series
G74 is method A (0)/method B (1) PRM3761,
3762
#2 SGB : The gear switching method is method A (0)/ M series

r.c
method B (1) PRM3741,
3743
#1 GST : The SOR signal is used for spindle orientation M series
(0)/gear shift (1) PRM3751,
3752
#0 ESF : The SF signal output condition is such that S PRM

e
codes and SF are output with all S commands 3705#5
(0)/not output when constant surface speed
control is used or the spindle speed is clamped

3706
(1).
nt
Parameter for the voltage polarity of spindle

#7 TCW : The voltage polarity when the spindle speed

voltage is output
ce
#6 CWM : The voltage polarity when the spindle speed
voltage is output
#5 ORM : The voltage polarity during spindle orientation
is positive (0)/negative (1)
#4 GTT : Spindle gear selection is based on M type (0)/ M series
T type (1). PRM
nc

3705#0
#3 PCS : When multi-spindle control is used, feedback T series
signal selection, independent of the position (2-path
coder selection signal of the other tool post, is control)
disabled (0)/enabled (1). SLPCA
signal
.c

SLPCB
signal
#2 :
#1 PG2 : The gear ratio of spindle to position coder
(
1,
2,
4,
8)
w

#0 PG1 : The gear ratio of spindle to position coder

(
1,
2,
4,
8)
PG2 PG1 TCW CWM Volt. polarity

1
w

0 0 0 0 M03, M04 = +

2 0 1 0 1 M03, M04 = –

4 1 0 1 0 M03 = +, M04 = –

8 1 1 1 1 M03 = –, M04 = +
w

285
 Number Contents Remarks

3707 Parameter for gear shift of spindle T series 1

#7 :
P22 P21
#6 :
#5 : 0 0
1
#4 : 0 1
2
#3 : 1 0
4 2

om
#2 : 1 1
8
#1 P22 : The gear ratio of spindle to second position
coder
#0 P21 : The gear ratio of spindle to second position
coder 3
3708 Parameter for spindle speed arrival signal

r.c
#7 :
#6 :
#5 : 4
#4 SVD : When the SIND signal is on, the detection of
spindle speed fluctuation is disable (0)/enable
(1)
#3 :

e
#2 : 5
#1 SAT : The check of the spindle speed arrival signal at T series
the start of executing the thread cutting block is
nt
performed with PRM3708#0=1 (0)/always
performed (1)
#0 SAR : The spindle speed arrival signal is not checked
(0)/checked (1)
SAR signal 6
ce
3709 Parameter for spindle

#7 :
#6 : 7
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
nc

#2 MSI : The SIND signal in multi-spindle control is valid

only when the first spindle is selected (0)/for 8
each spindle (1)
#1 :
#0 SAM : The sampling frequency to obtain the average T series
spindle speed is 4 (0)/1 (1)
.c

3730 Dta used for adjusting the gain of the analog 9

output of spindle speed [0.1%]

3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of

w

the analog output of the spindle speed

10
w
w

286
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3732 The number of spindle revolutions during PRM

spindle orientation or the spindle motor velocity 3705#1
during spindle gear shift [rpm]
For a serial spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle
gear shift
Set value =

om
Maximum spindle motor speed

16383
For an analog spindle
Spindle motor speed during spindle
gear shift
Set value =
Maximum spindle motor speed

4095

3735 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor M series

r.c
Minimum clamp speed of the
spindle motor
Set value =
Maximum spindle motor speed

4095

3736 Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor M series

e
Maximum clamp speed of the
spindle motor
Set value =
Maximum spindle motor speed

4095

3740

3741
nt
Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle
speed arrival signal (SAR)

Maximum spindle speed for gear 1

[msec]

[rpm]
ce
3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 [rpm]

3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 [rpm]

3744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [rpm] T series

3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear M series

nc

1 to gear 2 PRM
3705#2 1
3705#2=1
3752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear
2 to gear 3
Spindle motor speed when the
gears are switched
Set value =
Maximum spindle motor speed
.c

4095

3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to M series

gear 2 during tapping [rpm] PRM
w

3705#3 1
3705#3=1
3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to
gear 3 during tapping [rpm]

3770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant M series

w

surface speed control

3771 Minimum spindle speed in constant

surface-speed control mode (G96) [rpm]
w

3772 Maximum spindle speed (constant

surface-speed control) [rpm]

287
 Number Contents Remarks

3811 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the 2nd 1

spindle [rpm]

3812 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the 2nd

spindle [rpm]

3820 Gain adjustment data for the 3rd spindle [0.1%] 2

om
3821 Velocity offset compensation value for the 3rd
spindle

3822 Maximum speed of the third spindle [rpm]

3
3831 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 of the 3rd
spindle [rpm]

r.c
3832 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 of the 3rd
spindle [rpm]
4
[Parameters for Cs conturing control axis]

Number Contents Remarks

e
5
3900 Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to 1st group
be changed according to the set value of for the 1st
parameter 3901 to 3904 when the Cs conturing spindle

3901
nt
axis is controlled
(Set value 0 to 8)

Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle

gear 1 selection
6
ce
3902 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 2 selection 7
3903 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 3 selection
nc

3904 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 4 selection 8
3910 Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to 2nd group
be changed according to the set value of for the 1st
parameter 3911 to 3914 when the Cs conturing spindle
axis is controlled
.c

(Set value 0 to 8) 9
3911 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 1 selection
w

3912 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 2 selection 10
3913 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
w

gear 3 selection

3914 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 4 selection
w

288
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

3920 Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to 3rd group
be changed according to the set value of for the 1st
parameter 3921 to 3924 when the Cs conturing spindle
axis is controlled
(Set value 0 to 8)

3921 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle

om
gear 1 selection

3922 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 2 selection

3923 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 3 selection

3924 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle

r.c
gear 4 selection

3930 Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to 4th group
be changed according to the set value of for the 1st
parameter 3931 to 3934 when the Cs conturing spindle
axis is controlled
(Set value 0 to 8)

e
3931 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 1 selection

3932

3933
nt
Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 2 selection

Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle

gear 3 selection
ce
3934 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 4 selection

3940 Number of the servo axis whose loop gain is to 5th group
be changed according to the set value of for the 1st
parameter 3941 to 3944 when the Cs conturing spindle
nc

axis is controlled
(Set value 0 to 8)

3941 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 1 selection

3942 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
.c

gear 2 selection

3943 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 3 selection
w

3944 Loop gain for the servo axis when the spindle
gear 4 selection
w
w

289
 [Parameters for serial spindle (
series spindle amplifier)]

Number Contents Remarks 1

4000 Parameter of rotation direction of spindle

#7 :
#6 DEFDRT : The direction to which the differential
speed function is applied and the direction 2

om
specified in the feedback signal is the
same (0)/reversed (1)
#5 DEFMOD : The differential speed function is not used
(0)/used (1)
#4 RETSV : In reference position return in the servo 3
mode, the return direction viewed from the
spindle is counterclockwise (0)/clockwise
(1)

r.c
#3 RETRN : The direction of return to reference From
position is CCW (0)/ CW (1) spindle 4
#2 POSC1 : The spindle and the position coder rotate side
the same direction (0)/ the opposite
direction each other (1)
#1 ROTA2 : The spindle rotate to CCW with

e
+command (0)/to CW (1)
#0 ROTA1 : The spindle and the spindle motor rotate
5
to the same direction (0)/ to the opposite
direction each other (1)

4001
nt
Parameter for using of detector

#7 CAXIS3 : The position coder of Cs axis control and

the spindle rotate to the same direction (0)/
6
ce
to opposite direction each other (1)
#6 CAXIS2 : The position coder signal for Cs axis control
is not used to detection of speed (0)/used
(1)
7
#5 CAXIS1 : Not use the position coder of Cs axis control
(0)/use (1)
nc

#4 :
#3 MGSEN: The magnetic senser and the spindle rotate
to the same direction (0)/opposite direction 8
each other (1)
#2 POSC2 : The position coder is not used (0)/used (1)
#1 :
#0 MRDY1 : The MRDY signal is not used (0)/used (1)
.c

9
w

10
w
w

290
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4002 Cs contour control

#7 PCEN : In servo mode, CMR is disabled (0)/

enabled (1).
#6 SYCDRT : When spindle synchronous control is
applied, the rotation direction function is
enabled (0)/disabled (1).

om
#5 SVMDRT : In servo mode, the rotation direction
function is enabled (0)/disabled (1).
#4 CSDRCT : When Cs contour control is applied, the
rotation direction function is enabled (0)/
disabled (1).
#3 :
#2 CSDET3 : CSDET CSDET CSDET Number of
#1 CSDET2 :

r.c
3 2 1 pulses
#0 CSDET1 :
0 0 0 360000 p/rev
0 0 1 180000
0 1 0 120000
0 1 1 90000
1 0 0 60000

e
1 0 1 40000
1 1 0 20000
1 1 1 10000

nt
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

291
 Number Contents Remarks

4003 1
#7 PCPL2 : Position coder signal setting (See the
table below.)
#6 PCPL1 : Position coder signal setting (See the
table below.) 2

om
#5 :
#4 PCTYPE : Position coder signal setting (See the
table below.)
High-
Built-in resolution
PCPL2 PCPL1 PCTYPE
sensor magnetic
Remarks 3
pulse coder
0 0 0 256 λ/rev 65 φ Position coder,
high-resolution

r.c
position coder
0 0 1 128 λ/rev – – 4
0 1 0 512 λ/rev 130 φ –
0 1 1 64 λ/rev – –
1 0 0 – 195 φ –
384 λ/rev 97.5 φ

e
1 1 0 –
5
#3 DIRCT2 : The direction of rotation at the spindle
orientation
nt
#2 DIRCT1 : The direction of rotation at the spindle
orientation
DIRECT 2 DIRECT 1
0 0 Direction of rotation
6
ce
immediately before
spindle orientation
0 1 Direction of rotation 7
immediately before
spindle orientation
1 0 The counter-clockwise
nc

in view of the motor

shaft 8
0 1 The clockwise in view
of the motor shaft

#1 PCCNCT : A motor’s built-in sensor is not used (0)/

.c

used (1).
#0 PCMGSL : The system of the orientation is position 9
coder system (0)/magnetic senser system
(1)
w

10
w
w

292
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4004 Detector selection

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 BISGAN : A standard built-in sensor is used (0)/a PRM
built-in sensor with a non-standard gain is 4003#1=1

om
used (1).
#3 REFTYP : The external one-rotation signal is detected
on its rising edge (0)/falling edge (1).
#2 EXTRF : The external one-rotation signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#1 SPDBIS : A separate built-in sensor is not used (0)/
used (1).
#0 HRPC : A high-resolution position coder is not used

r.c
(0)/used (1).

4006

#7 BLTRGD : Rigid tapping using a motor’s built-in

sensor is not performed (0)/performed (1).
#6 PRMCHK : Parameters are transferred from the NC

e
(0)/the data being used currently is
checked (1).
#5 ALGOVR : The spindle analog override value is 0% to

#4 :
nt
100% (0)/0% to 120% (1).

#3 SYCREF : In spindle synchronization, the

one-rotation signal is automatically
detected (0)/not detected (1).
ce
#2 SPDUNT : The unit of motor speed is 1 rpm (0)/10
rpm (1).
#1 GRUNIT : The gear ratio resolution is 0.01 (0)/0.001 PRM4056
(1). to 4059
#0 :
nc

4007

#7 PHAICL : Motor voltage pattern when no load is

applied
#6 PCALCL : Alarms related to the position coder signal
are detected (0)/not detected (1).
#5 PCLS : Disconnection of a high-resolution
.c

magnetic pulse coder and position coder is

detected (0)/not detected (1).
#4 :
#3 :
w

#2 :
#1 :
#0 :
w
w

293
 Number Contents Remarks

4009 1
#7 :
#6 OVRTYP : Analog override is of linear function type
(0)/quadratic function type (1).
#5 TRSPRM : Output compensation method
#4 LDTOUT : During acceleration/deceleration, the load Depends
2

om
detection signal is not output (0)/output on the
(1). motor
#3 PCGEAR : The arbitrary gear function between the model.
spindle and position coder is disabled (0)/
enabled (1). 3
#2 ALSP : When a serial communication alarm is
issued, the power is not turned off until the
motor has stopped (0)/the power is turned

r.c
off immediately (1).
#1 RVSVCM : In slave operation, the sub-spindle and 4
main spindle rotate in the same direction
(0)/opposite directions (1).
#0 VLPGAN : The setting of a velocity loop gain is used
without modification (0)/used after division

e
by 16 (1). 5
4011 Number of speed detector pulses

#6 :
nt
#7 POLE2: The number of motor poles is set by bit 3 (0)/
is 8 (1).

#5 ADJG : Acceleration/deceleration status

determination condition (for each model)
6
ce
#4 MXPW : Setting of maximum power during
acceleration/deceleration (for each model)
#3 POLE1: The number of motor poles is 2 (0)/4 (1). 7
#2 VDT3 : Speed detector setting (Following table)
#1 VDT2 : Speed detector setting (Following table)
#0 VDT1 : Speed detector setting (Following table)
nc

VDT3 VDT2 VDT1 Number of pulse

0 0 0 64 λ/rev
8
0 0 1 128 λ/rev
0 1 0 256 λ/rev
0 1 1 512 λ/rev
.c

1 0 0 192 λ/rev
1 0 1 384 λ/rev
9

4012
w

#7 :
#6 :
10
#5 :
#4 :
w

#3 :
#2 :
#1 PWM2 :
#0 PWM1 : } PWM setting (Set 00 usually.)
w

294
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4013 Data of the dead zone of current

#7 PWM3K: Setting of a PWM carrier wave in the

output switching low-speed characteristics
area (for each model)
#6 DS5 :
#5 DS4 :

om
The data of the dead zone of current
#4 DS3 : (Set automatically)
#3 DS2 :
#2 DS1 :
#1 ESED : The Cs contour control one-rotation signal
is detected on either edge (0)/on the rising
edge at all times (1).
#0 ESEC : The position coder one-rotation signal is
detected on either edge (0)/on the rising

r.c
edge at all times (1).

4014 Spindle switching, MCC confirmation

#7 :
#6 :
#5 SLVEN : The slave operation function is disabled

e
(0)/enabled (1).
#4 :
#3 CHGCLT : Output switching (between high speed and
nt
low speed) is checked using the RCH
signal (0)/the MCC contact signal (1).
#2 AXSLCT : The spindle switching (between the main
spindle and sub-spindle) MCC contact
check function is disabled (0)/enabled (1).
ce
#1 AXSUB : During sub-spindle rotation, the spindle
switching function is disabled (0)/enabled
(1).
#0 AXISSL : The spindle switching function is disabled
(0)/enabled (1).
nc

4015 Parameter of rotation direction of spindle

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
.c

#2 SPDSW : The output switching function is not

provided (0)/provided (1)
#1 SPLDMT: The spindle load monitor function is
disabled (0)/enabled (1).
w

#0 ORIENT : The orientation function is not provided (0)/

provided (1)
w
w

295
 Number Contents Remarks

4016 One-rotation signal error detection function 1

#7 RFCHK3 : In spindle orientation, spindle
synchronization, or rigid tapping reference
position return mode, the position coder
one-rotation signal is not detected again
(0)/detected again (1).
2

om
#6 RFCHK2 : The position coder one-rotation signal error
detection function is disabled (0)/enabled
(1).
#5 RFCHK1 : The Cs contour control one-rotation signal
error detection function is disabled (0)/ 3
enabled (1).
#4 CMTVL : Cs contour control setting (Usually 0.)
#3 FFSMTH: The feed-forward smoothing function is

r.c
disabled (0)/enabled (1).
#2 : 4
#1 :
#0 :

4017 One-rotation signal error detection function

e
#7 NRROEV : With an orientation command from the 5
stop state, the shortcut function is
disabled (0)/enabled (1).
#6
#5
#4
#3
:
:
:
:
nt
#2 RFCHK4 : During normal rotation, the position coder
6
ce
one-rotation signal error detection function
is disabled (0)/enabled (1).
#1 : 7
#0 :
4019
nc

#7 PRLOAD : Automatic parameter setting is not

performed (0)/performed (1). 8
#6 :
#5 :
#4 SDTCHG : In output switching, the function for
switching at a speed detection level or
.c

lower operates independently of speed 9

detection (0)/at the speed detection level
or lower (1).
#3 :
#2 SSTTRQ : When the speed is 0, speed clamping is
w

disabled (0)/enabled (1).

#1 :
10
#0DTTMCS : Cs contour control dead zone
compensation is disabled (0)/enabled (1).
w

4020 Maximum motor speed [rpm]

4021 Maximum speed when the C axis is controlled

w

[rpm]

4022 Speed arrival detection level [0.1%]

296
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4023 Speed detection level [0.1%]

4024 Speed zero detection level [0.01%]

4025 Torque limit value [%]

4026 Load detection level 1 (LDT1 signal) [%]

om
4027 Load detection level 2 (LDT2 signal) [%]

4028 Output limit pattern

4029 Output limit value [%]

4030 Soft start (0)/stop time (1) [rpm/sec]

4031 Position coder method orientation stop position

r.c
4032 Acceleration deceleration time constant when
the spindle synchronization is controlled
[rpm/sec]

4033 Arrival level for the spindle synchronization

speed [rpm]

e
4034 Shift amount when the spindle phase
synchronization is controlled [p]

4035

4036
data
nt
Spindle phase synchronization compensation

Feed forward factor

ce
4037 Velocity loop feed forward factor

4038 Spindle orientation speed [rpm]

4040 Normal velocity loop proportional gain

(High gear)

4041 Normal velocity loop proportional gain

nc

(Low gear)

4042 Velocity loop proportional gain during

orientation (High gear)

4043 Velocity loop proportional gain during

.c

orientation (Low gear)

4044 Velocity loop proportional gain in servo mode/

synchronous control (High gear)

4045 Velocity loop proportional gain in servo

w

mode/synchronous control (Low gear)

4046 Velocity loop proportional gain when the Cs

axis is controlled (High gear)
w

4047 Velocity loop proportional gain when the Cs

axis is controlled (Low gear)

4048 Normal velocity loop integral gain (High gear)

w

4049 Normal velocity loop integral gain (Low gear)

297
 Number Contents Remarks

4050 Velocity loop integral gain during orientation 1

(High gear)

4051 Velocity loop integral gain during orientation

(Low gear)

4052 Velocity loop integral gain in servo 2

om
mode/synchronous control (High gear)

4053 Velocity loop integral gain in servo

mode/synchronous control (Low gear)

4054 Velocity loop integral gain when the Cs axis is 3

controlled (High gear)

4055 Velocity loop integral gain when the Cs axis is

r.c
controlled (Low gear)

4056 Number of motor rotation in one revolution of

4
the spindle (High gear) [
100]

4057 Number of motor rotation in one revolution of

the spindle (Medium high gear) [
100]

e
5
4058 Number of motor rotation in one revolution of
the spindle (Medium low gear) [
100]

4059

4060

4061
nt
Number of motor rotation in one revolution of
the spindle (Low gear) [
100]

Position gain during orientation

Position gain during orientation

(High gear)
6
ce
(Medium high gear)

4062 Position gain during orientation 7

(Medium low gear)

4063 Position gain during orientation (Low gear)

nc

4064 Position gain change ratio when orientation is

completed [%] 8
4065 Position gain in servo mode/synchronous
control (High gear)
.c

4066 Position gain in servo mode/synchronous

control (Medium high gear) 9
4067 Position gain in servo mode/synchronous
control (Medium low gear)
w

4068 Position gain in servo mode/synchronous

control (Low gear) 10
4069 Position gain when the Cs axis is controlled
w

(High gear)

4070 Position gain when the Cs axis is controlled

(Medium high gear)
w

4071 Position gain when the Cs axis is controlled

(Medium low gear)

298
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4072 Position gain when the Cs axis is controlled

(Low gear)

4073 Grid shift amount in servo mode [0 – 4095p]

4074 Reference position return speed in Cs

contouring control mode or servo mode [rpm]

om
4075 Orientation completion signal detection level

4076 Motor velocity limit value during orientation [%]

4077 Orientation stop position shift amount [%]

4078 MS signal constant (Magnetic senser system

orientation)

r.c
4079 MS signal gain adjustment (Magnetic senser
system orientation)

4080 Regenerative power limit

4081 Delay time prior motor power shut-off [msec]

e
4082 Acceleration/deceleration time setting [sec]

4083 Motor voltage during normal rotation [%]

4084

4085

4086
nt
Motor voltage during orientation

Motor voltage in servo mode

Motor voltage when the Cs axis is controlled

[%]

[%]
ce
[%]

4087 Over-speed level [%]

4088 Excessive velocity deviation detection level

when the motor is constrained [0.01%]

4089 Excessive velocity deviation detection level

nc

when the motor is rotated [0.1%]

4090 Overload detection level [%]

4091 Position gain change ratio when returning to

the origin in the servo mode [%]
.c

4092 Position gain change ratio when returning to

the reference position in Cs axis control [%]

4094 Disturbance torque compensation constant

w

4095 Speed meter output voltage adjustment value

[0.1%]

4096 Load meter output voltage adjustment value

w

[0.1%]

4097 Spindle velocity feedback gain

4098 Speed that enables position coder signal

w

detection [rpm]

4099 Delay time for energizing the motor [msec]

299
 Number Contents Remarks

4100 Base velocity of the motor output specification 1

[rpm]

4101 Limit value of the motor output specification [%]

4102 Base speed [rpm]

2

om
4103 Magnetic flux weakening start velocity [rpm]

4104 Current loop proportional gain during normal

operation

4105 Current loop proportional gain when the Cs 3

axis is controlled

4106 Current loop integral gain during normal

r.c
operation

4107 Current loop integral gain when the Cs axis is 4

controlled

4108 Zero point of current loop integral gain

4109 Current loop proportional gain velocity factor

e
[%] 5
4110 Current conversion sconstant

4111

4112

4113
nt
Secondary current factor for exceiting current

Current expectation constant

Slip constant
6
ce
4114 High-speed rotation slip compensation
constant
7
4115 Compensation constant of voltage applied to
motor in the dead zone [%]
nc

4116 Electromotive force compensation constant [%]

4117 Electromotive force phase compensation 8

constant [%]

4118 Electromotive force compensation velocity

factor [%]
.c

4119 Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive 9

force compensation [msec]

4120 Dead zone compensation data [%]

w

4121 Time constant for changing the torque [msec]

10
4122 Velocity filter [0.1 msec]
w

4123 Overload detection time setting [sec]

4124 Voltage compensation factor during

deceleration
w

4125 Time during automatic running [0.1sec]

4126 Velocity command during automatic running

[rpm]

300
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4127 Load meter displayed value for maximum

output [%]

4128 Maximum output zero point [rpm]

4129 Secondary current factor during rigid tapping

om
4130 Constant for compensating for the phase of the
electromotive force at deceleration

4131 Time constant of the speed detection filter at

the Cs contour control

4132 Conversation constant of the phase-V current

4133 Motor model code

r.c
4135 Grid shift amount when the Cs axis is
controlled

[Parameter for low speed driving when the output switching function is used]

e
Number Contents Remarks

4136

4137

4138
nt
Motor voltage during normal rotation

Motor voltage in the servo mode

Base speed of the motor output specifications

[rpm]
[%]

[%]
ce
4139 Limit value of the motor output specifications
[%]

4140 Base speed [rpm]

4141 Magnetic flux weakening start velocity [rpm]

nc

4142 Current loop proportional gain during normal

operation

4143 Current loop integral gain during normal

operation
.c

4144 Zero point of the current loop integral gain

4145 Velocity factor of the current loop proportional

gain [%]
w

4146 Current conversion constan

4147 Secondary current factor for activating current

4148 Current expectation constant

w

4149 Slip constant

4150 High speed rotation slip compensation constant

w

4151 Compensation constant for voltage applied to

motor in the dead zone [%]

4152 Electromotive force compensation constant [%]

301
 Number Contents Remarks

4153 Electromotive force phase compensation 1

constant [%]

4154 Voltage factor of the electromotive force

compensation [%]

4155 Voltage compensation factor during 2

om
deceleration

4156 Slip compensation gain

4157 Time constant for changing the torque [msec]

3
4158 Maximum output zero point [rpm]

4159 Secondary current factor during rigit tapping

r.c
4160 Hysteresis of the speed detection level
4
4161 Constsnt for compensating for the phase of the
electromotive for at deceleration

4162 Velocity loop integral gain (High) in Cs contour

control cutting feed

e
5
4163 Velocity loop integral gain (Low) in Cs contour
control cutting feed

4164

4165
nt
Conversion constant of phase V current

Time constant of voltage filter for eletromotive

force compensation
6
ce
4166 Regenerative power limit

4167 Reserved
7
4168 Overload current alarm detection level
(for low speed characteristic)
nc

4169 Overload current alarm detection time constant

4170 Overload current alarm detection level 8

(for high speed characteristic)

4171 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and

Position coder
.c

(HIGH no. of teeth on the spindle)

9
4172 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and
position coder (HIGH no. of teeth on PC)
w

4173 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and

position coder (LOW no. of teeth on spindle) 10
4174 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and
position coder (LOW no. of teeth on PC)
w

4175 Delay timer at ON of electromagnetic contactor

in unit (S series)
Spindle analog override zero level (α series)
w

302
 8. PARAMETERS

[Parameters for spindle switching function is used (Sub–spindle)]

Number Contents Remarks

4176 Bit parameter

to
4190
4191 Bit parameter (User can not set)

om
4192 Bit parameter
to
4194
4195 Bit parameter (Automatic setting by parameter)
4196 Maximum motor speed
4197 Reached speed level

r.c
4198 Speed detection level
4199 Speed zero detection level
4200 Torque limit value
4201 Load detection level 1

e
4202 Output limit pattern
4203 Output limit value
4204
4205
4206
nt
Position coder method orientation stop position
Orientation speed
Proportional gain (HIGH) of the normal velocity
ce
loop
4207 Proportional gain (LOW) of the normal velocity
loop
4208 Velocity loop proportional gain during
orientation (HIGH)
nc

4209 Velocity loop proportional gain during

orientation (LOW)
4210 Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo
mode (HIGH)
4211 Velocity loop proportional gain in the servo
.c

mode (LOW)
4212 Normal velocity loop integral gain
4213 Velocity loop integral gain during orientation
w

4214 Velocity loop integral gain in the servo mode

(HIGH)
4215 Reserved
w

4216 Gear ratio (HIGH)

4217 Gear ratio (LOW)
4218 Position gain during orientation (HIGH)
w

4219 Position gain during orientation (LOW)

303
 Number Contents Remarks

4220 Position gain change ratio when orientation is 1

completed
4221 Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH)
4222 Position gain in the servo mode (LOW)
4223 Grid shift amount in the servo mode
2

om
4224 Reserved
4225 Reserved
4226 Detection level of orientation completion signal 3
4227 Motor velocity limit value during orientation
4228 Shift amount of orientation stop position

r.c
4229 MS signal constant = (L/2)/(2
π
H)
4096
4
4230 MS signal gain adjustment
4231 Regenerative power limit
4232 Delay time up to motor power shut–off

e
4233 Acceleration/deceleration time setting
5
4234 Spindle load monitor observer gain 1
4235
4236
4237
nt
Spindle load monitor observer gain 2
Motor voltage during normal rotation
Motor voltage during orientation
6
ce
4238 Motor voltage in the servo mode
4239 Position gain change ratio when returning to
the origin in the servo mode
7
4240 Feed forward coefficient
nc

4241 Feed forward coefficient in velocity loop

4242 Reserved 8
4243 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and
position coder
(SUB/HIGH no. of teeth on spindle)
.c

4244 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and 9

position coder (SUB/HIGH no. of teeth on PC)
4245 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and
position coder
w

(SUB/LOW no. of teeth on spindle)

10
4246 Arbitrary gear data between spindle and
position coder (SUB/LOW no. of teeth on PC)
w

4247 Spindle load monitor magnetic flux

compensation time constant (for high–speed
characteristic on the MAIN side)
4248 Spindle load motor torque constant (for
w

high–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)

304
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4249 Spindle load monitor observer gain 1

(on the MAIN side)
4250 Spindle load monitor observer gain 2
(on the MAIN side)
4251 Spindle load monitor magnetic flux

om
compensation time constant (for low–speed
characteristic on the MAIN side)
4252 Spindle load monitor magnetic flux
compensation time constant
(for high–speed characteristic)
4253 Spindle load monitor magnetic flux
compensation time constant

r.c
(for low–speed characteristic)
4254 Slip correction gain
(for high–speed characteristic)
4255 Slip correction gain
(for low–speed characteristic)

e
4256 Base velocity of the motor output specifications
4257 Limit value for the motor output specifications
4258
4259
4260
nt
Base speed
Magnetic flux weakening start velocity
Current loop proportional gain during normal
operation
ce
4261 Current loop integral gain during normal
operation
4262 Zero point of current loop integral gain
4263 Velocity factor of current loop proportional gain
nc

4264 Current conversion constant

4265 Secondary current factor for excitation current
4266 Current expectation constant
4267 Slip constant
.c

4268 Compensation constant for high–speed rotation

slip
4269 Compensation constant for voltage applied to
motor in the dead zone
w

4270 Electromotive force compensation constant

4271 Phase compensation constant of electromotive
force
w

4272 Compensation velocity factor for electromotive

force
4273 Time constant for changing the torque
w

4274 Displayed value of load meter for maximum

output

305
 Number Contents Remarks

4275 Maximum output zero point 1

4276 Secondary current factor in rigid tapping
4277 Constant for compensating for the phase of
the electromotive force at deceleration
4278 Time constant of the speed detection filter
2

om
4279 Reserved
4280 Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive
force compensation
3
4281 Spindle load monitor torque constant (for
low–speed characteristic on the MAIN side)

r.c
4282 Spindle load monitor torque constant
(for high–speed characteristic)
4
4283 Spindle load monitor torque constant
(for low–speed characteristic)
4284 Motor voltage during normal rotation

e
4285 Motor voltage in the servo mode 5
4286 Base speed of the motor output specifications
4287
4288
4289
4290
nt
Limit value for the motor output specifications
Base speed
Magnetic flux weakening start velocity
Current loop proportional gain during normal
6
ce
operation
4291 Current loop integral gain during normal 7
operation
4292 Zero point of current loop integral gain
nc

4293 Velocity factor of current loop proportional gain

4294 Current conversion constant 8
4295 Secondary current factor for excitation current
4296 Current expectation constant
.c

4297 Slip constant 9

4298 Compensation constant for high–speed rotation
slip
w

4299 Compensation constant for voltage applied to

motor in the dead zone 10
4300 Electromotive force compensation constant
w

4301 Phase compensation constant for

electromotive force
4302 Compensation velocity factor for electromotive
force
w

4303 Time constant for changing the torque

4304 Maximum output zero point

306
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4305 Secondary current factor in rigid tapping

4306 Constant for compensating for the phase of the
electromotive force at deceleration
4307 Limit of regenerative power
4308 Time constant of voltage filter for electromotive

om
voltage compensation
4309 Motor model code
4310 Reserved
4311 Reserved
4312 Position coder method orientation end signal

r.c
width 2 (MAIN)
4313 Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal
width 1 (MAIN)
4314 Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal
width 2 (MAIN)

e
4315 Magnetic sensor method orientation stop
position shift amount (MAIN)
4316 Position coder method orientation end signal

4317

4318
nt
width 2 (SUB)
Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal
width 1 (SUB)
Magnetic sensor method orientation end signal
ce
width 2 (SUB)
4319 Magnetic sensor method orientation stop
position shift amount (SUB)
4320 Spindle orientation deceleration constant
(MAIN/HIGH)
nc

4321 Spindle orientation deceleration constant

deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM HIGH)
4322 Spindle orientation deceleration constant
deceleration (MAIN/MEDIUM LOW)
.c

4323 Spindle orientation deceleration constant

deceleration (MAIN/LOW)
4324 Spindle orientation deceleration constant
deceleration (SUB/HIGH)
w

4325 Spindle orientation deceleration constant

deceleration (SUB/LOW)
4326 Width of pulses when switching to the spindle
w

orientation control mode (MAIN)

4327 Width of pulses when switching to the spindle
orientation control mode (SUB)
w

4328 Position coder–based spindle orientation

command multiplication (MAIN)

307
 Number Contents Remarks

4329 Position coder–based spindle orientation 1

command multiplication (SUB)
4330 Motor excitation delay time at spindle
orientation (MAIN)
4331 Motor excitation delay time at spindle 2

om
orientation (SUB)
4332 Reserved
4333 Reserved
4334 No. of arbitrary pulses of speed detector 3
(MAIN)
4335 No. of arbitrary pulses of speed detector (SUB)

r.c
4336 Magnetic flux change point for spindle
synchronus acc./dec. time calculation. 4
4337 Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop
gain (MAIN)
4338 Velocity compensation factor of velocity loop

e
gain (SUB) 5
4339 Torque clamp level
4340

4341
4342
nt
Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration time
constant for spindle synchronization
Abnormal load detection level
Reserved
6
ce
4343 N pulse suppress
4344 Loock–ahead feed forward coefficient 7
4345 Spindle motor speed command detection level
4346 Incomplete integral coefficient
nc

4347 Detection level for spindle 1–to–2 speed 8

difference at slave operation
4348 Overload current alarm detection level
(for low speed characteristic)
.c

4349 Overload current alarm detection time constant

9
4350 Overload current alarm detection level
(for high speed characteristic)
4351 Compensation for current detection offset
w

10
w
w

308
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

4800 Parameter for synchronization control of

spindle

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :

om
#3 :
#2 :
#1 ND2 : In controlling the spindle synchronization, the
direction of the second spindle motor rotation is
the direction indicated by the command sign
(0)/the opposite direction (1)
#0 ND1 : In controlling the spindle synchronization, the
direction of the first spindle motor rotation is the

r.c
direction indicated by the command sign (0)/the
opposite direction (1)

4810 Error pulse between two spindles when phase

synchronizing in the serial spindle
synchronization control mode

e
4811 Allowable error count for the error pulse
between two spindles in the serial spindle
synchronization control mode

4900

#7
#6
#5
:
:
:
nt
Spindle fluctuation detection T series
ce
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 FLR : The allowable rate and fluctuation rate of
parameter No. 4911 and No. 4912 are
nc

indicated in 1% steps (0)/0.1% steps (1).

4911 Ratio (q) of the spindle speed which is
assumed to the specified spindle speed

4912 Spindle speed fluctuation ratio (r) for which no

alarm is activated in the spindle speed
.c

fluctuation detection function

4913 Spindle speed fluctuation value (d) for which no

alarm is activated in the spindle speed
w

fluctuation detection function

4914 Time (p) elapsed from when the commanded

spindle speed is changed to the start of spindle
speed fluctuation detection
w
w

309
 Number Contents Remarks

4950 Spindle positioning T series 1

#7 IMB : Semi-fixed angle positioning by M code follows
specification A (0)/specification B (1).
#6 ESI : Spindle positioning conforms to the
conventional specification (0)/extended
specification (1).
2

om
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 ISZ : When an M code for orientation is specified,
orientation by canceling rotation mode is 3
performed (0)/not performed (1).
#1 IDM : The positioning direction for the spindle using a
M code is the positive direction (0)/the negative

r.c
direction (1)
#0 IOR : Resetting the system in the spindle positioning 4
mode does not releases the mode (0)/releases
the mode (1)

4960 M code specifying the spindle orientation

e
4961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode 5
4962 M code specifying the angle for the spindle

4963

4964
nt
positioning

Basic rotation angle specified by a M code in

the spindle positioning mode

Number of M codes for specifying a spindle

T series 6
ce
positioning angle

4970 Servo loop gain of the spindle

7
4971 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for
gear 1
nc

4972 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for

gear 2
8
4973 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for
gear 3

4974 Servo loop gain multiplier of the spindle for

.c

gear 4
9
w

10
w
w

310
 8. PARAMETERS

14) Parameters for tool offset

Number Contents Remarks

5000 M series

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :

om
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 SBK : For a block that is internally created by cutter
compensation, single block mode is disabled
(0)/enabled (1).

r.c
5001 Parameter for tool offset M series

#7 :
#6 EVO : Tool offset is effective from next H code (0)/
next block (1)
#5 TPH : Tool offset number is D (0)/H (1)
#4 :

e
#3 TAL : In the tool length compensation C, generates
an alarm when two or more axes are offset (0)/
not generate (1)

nt
#2 OFH : The address to appoint the offset number of
tool length and tool radius is D (0)/H (1)
#1 TLB : Tool length compensation axis is always Z axis
(0)/axis perpendicular to plane specification (1)
(G17, G18, G19 )
ce
#0 TLC : Tool length compensation A·B (0)/Tool length PRM
compensation C (1) 5001#1

5002 Parameter for tool offset T series

#7 WNP: Specifies whether the valid direction of the

virtual tool used for tool-tip radius
nc

compensation is specified with a geometry

offset number (0)/a wear offset number (1)
when the tool geometry and wear
compensation option is selected.
#6 LWM : Tool offset is executed in the T code block (0)/ PRM
together with the axis movement (1) 5002#4=1
.c

#5 LGC : Tool geometry compensation is not canceled

by offset number 0 (0)/canceled (1)
#4 LGT : Tool geometry compensation is compensated
by the shift of the coordinate system (0)/by the
tool movement (1)
w

#3 :
#2 :
#1 LGN : Geometry offset number of tool offset is the PRM
same as wear offset number (0)/executed by 5002#0
w

the tool selection number (1)

#0 LD1 : Wear offset number of tool offset is specified
using the lower two digits of a T code (0)/lower
one digit of a T code (1)
w

311
 Number Contents Remarks

5003 Parameter for tool offset 1

#7 TGC : Tool geometry compensation is not cleared by PRM
reset (0)/cleared by reset (1) 5003#6=1
T series
#6 LVC : Tool compensation vector is not cleared by T series
reset (0)/cleared by reset (1)
2

om
LVK : Tool length compensation vector is cleared by M series
reset (0)/not cleared (1)
#5 :
#4 BCK : When a cutter compensation interference
check finds that the direction of movement 3
differs from the offset direction of machining by
90 to 270 degrees, an alarm is issued (0)/not
issued (1).

r.c
#3 ICK : In MPCC mode, a cutter compensation
interference check is made (0)/not made (1). 4
#2 CCN : During movement to a middle point in
automatic reference position return operation,
the offset vector is canceled (0)/not canceled
(1).

e
#1 SUV : When G40,G41,G42 are specified M series 5
independently, the start up conforms to the
standard specification (0)/moves by a distance

5004
B (1)
nt
corresponding to the offset vector which is
vertical to the next block movement (1)
#0 SUP : Start up in cutter compensation C is type A (0)/

Parameters for tool offset

M series 6
ce
#7 :
#6 : 7
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
nc

#2 ODI : The cutter compensation value is a radius M series

value (0)/diameter value (1). 8
#1 ORC : Tool compensation value is set by the diameter T series
specification (0)/set by the radius specification
(1)
#0 :
.c

5005 Parameters for tool offset T series 9

#7 :
#6 :
w

#5 QNI : The tool compensation number in the offset 0:

write mode by the tool compensation direct PRM5020
input B is not selected automatically (0)/
10
selected automatically (1)
#4 :
w

#3 :
#2 PRC : When direct input of tool offset value, a PRC
signal is not used (0)/used (1)
#1 :
w

#0 CNI : On the offset screen, Y-axis offset screen, and

macro screen, [INP.C] is displayed (0)/not
displayed (1).

312
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

5006

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 :
#1 TGC : A T code, specified in a block containing G50, T series
G04, or G10, is valid (0)/causes ALM254 to be
issued (1).
#0 OIM : Inch-metric conversion of tool compensation
values is not performed (0)/performed (1).
5008 Cutter compensation C, Tool nose radius

r.c
compensation

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

e
#2 :
#1 CNC : During interference check for cutter
compensation C (M series) or tool nose radius
nt
compensation (T series), when the direction of
movement after application of the offset differs
from the programmed direction by between 90°
and 270° an alarm (0)/no alarm (1) is issued.
#0 CN1 : Interference check for cutter compensation C
ce
(M series) or tool–tip radius compensation (T
series) is performed (0)/not performed (1).

5010 Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool T series
moves on the outside of a corner during tool
nose radius compensation
nc

Limit value that ignores the vector when a tool M series

moves on the outside of a corner during cutter
compensation C

5011 Value for determining the norm of a tool M series

compensation vector in three-dimensional tool
.c

compensation

5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation T series

5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool T series

wear compensation
w

5015 Distance (XP) between reference position and T series

X axis + contact surface
w

5016 Distance (XM) between reference position and

X axis – contact surface

5017 Distance (ZP) between reference position and

Z axis + contact surface
w

5018 Distance (ZM) between reference position and

Z axis – contact surface

313
 Number Contents Remarks

5020 Tool compensation number in the measured T series 1

tool compensation value direct input B function PRM
5005#5=0

5030 Minimum acceptable diameter of the grinding M series

wheel for wear check
2

om
15) Parameters for grinding–wheel wear compensation

Number Contents Remarks

3
5071 Number of first axis for grinding–wheel wear M series
compensation

r.c
5072 Number of second axis for grinding–wheel M series
wear compensation
4
5081 Coordinate of first compensation center along M series
first axis on compensation plane

5082 Coordinate of first compensation center along M series

e
second axis on compensation plane 5
5083 Coordinate of second compensation center M series
along first axis on compensation plane

5084

5085
nt
Coordinate of second compensation center
along second axis on compensation plane

Coordinate of third compensation center along

M series

M series
6
ce
first axis on compensation plane

5086 Coordinate of third compensation center along M series

second axis on compensation plane 7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

314
 8. PARAMETERS

16) Parameters for canned cycles

Number Contents Remarks

5101 Parameter for canned cycles

#7 M5B : In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87, output M series

M05 before an oriented spindle stop (0)/not
output (1)

om
#6 M5T : In tapping cycles G74 and G84, not output M05 T series
(0)/output M05 (1) before the spindle rotation
direction is turned to reverse
#6 M5T : In tapping cycles G74 and G84, output M05 M series
(0)/not output M05 (1) before the spindle
rotation direction is turned to reverse
#5 RD2 : Set the axis and direction in which the tool in M series
G76 and G87 is got free

r.c
#4 RD1 : Set the axis and direction in which the tool in M series
G76 and G87 is got free
RD2 RD1 G17 G18 G19
0 0 +X +Z +Y
0 1 –X –Z –Y
1 0 +Y +X +Z

e
1 1 –Y –X –Z
#3 ILV : The initial point position in drilling canned cycle T series
is not updated by reset (0)/updated by reset (1)
nt
#2 RTR : G83 and G87 specify a high-speed peck
drilling cycle (0)/specify a peck drilling cycle (1)
#1 EXC : An external operation command (EF) is not
sent out #y G81 (0)/sent out by G81 (1)
#0 FXY : The drilling axis in drilling canned cycle is
T series
PRM5114
M series

M series
ce
always Z axis (0)/an axis selected using
program (1)

5102 Canned cycle T series

#7 RDI : In the FS15 format, R in a canned cycle for

nc

drilling specifies a radius (0)/axis (1).

#6 RAB : In the FS15 format, R in a canned cycle for
drilling is incremental (0)/absolute with G code
system A, or depends on G90/G91 for G code
systems B and C (1).
#5 :
#4 :
.c

#3 F16 : In a canned cycle for drilling, the FS15 format

is enabled (0)/disabled (1).
#2 QSR : Before execution of G70 to G73, a Q sequence
number check is not made (0)/made (1).
w

#1 RMC : With G71/72, a command other than for

monotone increase or decrease does not issue
an alarm (0)/issues an alarm (1).
#0 :
w
w

315
 Number Contents Remarks

5103 Canned cycle M series 1

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
2

om
#2 :
#1 :
#0 SIJ : In the FS15 format, a shift value in a boring
canned cycle G76 or G86 is specified by
address Q (0)/address I, J, or K (1). 3
5110 C-axis clamp M code in drilling canned cycle T series

r.c
5111 Dwell time when C axis unclamping is specified T series
in drilling canned cycle
4
5112 Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling T series
canned cycle

5113 Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling T series

canned cycle

e
5
5114 Return and clearance of drilling canned cycle T series
G83 PRM

5115
nt
Return of high-speed, peck drilling cycle G73

Clearance of canned cycle G83

5101#2

M series

M series
6
ce
5130 Chamfering in thread cutting cycles G76 and T series
G92

5132 Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned T series

7
cycles G71 and G72

5133 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles

nc

G71 & G72

5135 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73

8
in X axis direction

5136 Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycle G73

in Z axis direction
.c

9
5137 Division count in multiple repetitive canned
cycle G73

5139 Return in multiple canned cycle G74 and G75

w

5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive 10

canned cycle G76

5141 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive

w

canned cycle G76

5142 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple

repetitive canned cycle G76
w

5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned

cycle G76

316
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

5160 M series

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 NOL : When the depth of cut per action is satisfied in
a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the
feed and spindle speed are not changed (0)/
changed (1)
#1 OLS : When an overload torque signal is received in
a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the
feed and spindle speed are not changed (0)/
changed (1)

r.c
#0 :

5163 M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle M series

mode of a small diameter

5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed M series

when the tool is retracted after an overload

e
torque signal is received [%]

5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed M series

5166
nt
when the tool is retracted without an overload
torque signal received

Percentage of cutting feedrate to be changed

when the tool is retracted after an overload
torque signal is received
[%]

[%]
M series
ce
5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be M series
changed when the tool is retracted without an
overload torque signal received [%]

5168 Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting M series

nc

feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small

diameter [%]

5170 Number of the macro variable to which the total M series

number of retractions during cutting is output

5171 Number of the macro variable to which the total M series

.c

umber of retractions because of an overload

signal is output

5172 Speed of retraction to point R when no address M series

I is issued [mm/min]
w

5173 Speed of advancing to the position just before M series

the bottom of a hole when no address I is
issued [mm/min]
w

5174 Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small M series

diameter [0.001mm]
w

317
 17) Parameters for rigid tapping

Number Contents Remarks 1

5200 Parameter for rigid tapping

#7 SRS : When multi-spindle control is used, the spindle T series

selection signal is G027.0 and G027.1 (0)/
G061.4 and G061.5 (1). 2

om
#6 FHD : Feed hold and single block in rigid tapping are
validated (0)/invalidated (1)
#5 PCP : In rigid tapping, a high-speed peck tapping M series
cycle is used (0)/not used (1) PRM5213
#4 DOV : Override during extraction in rigid tapping is PRM5211 3
invalidated (0)/validated (1)
#3 SIG : When gears are changed for rigid tapping, the
use of SIND is not permitted (0)/permitted (1)

r.c
#2 CRG : When a rigid mode cancel command is
specified, the rigid mode is not canceled before 4
RGTAP signal is set low (0)/canceled (1)
#1 VGR : Any gear ration between spindle and position PRM3706,
coder in rigid tapping is not used (0)/used (1) 5221 to
5234

e
#0 G84 : G74 and G84 are not used as a rigid tapping G PRM5210
code (0)/used (1)
5
5201 Parameter for rigid tapping

#7
#6
#5
#4 OV3
:
:
:
nt
: Overriding by program is disabled (0)/enabled
6
ce
(1)
#3 OVU : The increment unit of the override PRM5211 is
1% (0)/ 10% (1)
#2 TDR : Cutting time constant in rigid tapping uses a PRM5261
7
same parameter during cutting and extraction to 5264,
(0)/not use a same parameter (1) 5271 to
nc

5274
#1 :
#0 NIZ : Rigid tapping smoothing processing is disabled M series 8
(0)/enabled (1).

5202 Rigid tapping

.c

#7 :
#6 :
9
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
w

#2 :
#1 : 10
#0 ORI : When rigid tapping is started, orientation is not M series
performed (0)/performed (1).
w
w

318
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

5203 Rigid tapping by the manual handle M series

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 :
#1 HRM : When the tapping axis moves in the negative
direction, the direction in which the spindle
rotates is determined as follows:
In G84 mode, the spindle rotates in a normal
direction (0)/reverve (1).
In G74 mode, the spindle rotates in reverse (0)/
a normal derection (1).

r.c
#0 HRG : Rigid tapping by the manual handle is disabled
(0)/enabled (1).

5204 Rigid tapping

#7 :
#6 :

e
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2
#1
:
:
nt
#0 DGN : The diagnosis screen displays a rigid tapping
synchronization error (0)/spindle and tapping
axis error ratio difference (1).
ce
5210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code 0=M29

5211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction PRM

5200#4

5212 M code that specifies a rigid tapping mode PRM5210

nc

(0 – 65535)

5213 Escape or cutting start point in peck tapping PRM

cycle 5200#5

5214 Rigid tapping synchronization error width ALM411

.c
w
w
w

319
 Number Contents Remarks

5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in PRM 1

rigid tapping (1st gear) 5200#1

5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in

rigid tapping (2nd gear)

5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in 2

om
rigid tapping (3rd gear)

5224 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in T series

rigid tapping (4th gear)

5231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder 3

side in rigid tapping (1st gear)

5232 Number of gear teeth on the position coder

r.c
side in rigid tapping (2nd gear)

5233 Number of gear teeth on the position coder 4

side in rigid tapping (3rd gear)

5234 Number of gear teeth on the position coder T series

side in rigid tapping (4th gear)

e
5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping
5
(1st gear)

5242

5243
nt
Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping
(2nd gear)

Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping

(3rd gear)
6
ce
5244 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping T series
(4th gear)
7
5261 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for PRM
every gear in rigid tapping (1st gear) 5201#2

5262 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for

nc

every gear in rigid tapping (2nd gear)

8
5263 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for
every gear in rigid tapping (3rd gear)

5264 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for T series

every gear in rigid tapping (4th gear)
.c

9
5271 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during PRM
extraction in rigid tapping (1st gear) 5201#2

5272 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during

w

extraction in rigid tapping (2nd gear)

10
5273 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during
extraction in rigid tapping (3rd gear)
w

5274 Acceleration/deceleration time constant during T series

extraction in rigid tapping (4th gear)

5280 Position control loop gain of spindle and PRM5281

w

tapping axis in rigid tapping to 5284

(Common in each gear)

320
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

5281 Position control loop gain of spindle and PRM

tapping axis in rigid tapping (1st gear) 5280=0

5282 Position control loop gain of spindle and

tapping axis in rigid tapping (2nd gear)

5283 Position control loop gain of spindle and

om
tapping axis in rigid tapping (3rd gear)

5284 Position control loop gain of spindle and T series

tapping axis in rigid tapping (4th gear)

5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping

mode (for gear 1)

5292 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping

r.c
mode (for gear 2)

5293 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping

mode (for gear 3)

5294 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping T series

mode (for gear 4)

e
Loop gain multiplier = 2048
E/L
α
1000
E : Voltage in the velocity command at 1000
rpm
L : Rotation angle of the spindle per one

5300
nt
rotation of the spindle motor
α : Unit used for the detection

Imposition width of tapping axis in rigid tapping

[Detection unit]
ce
5301 Imposition width of spindle in rigid tapping
[Detection unit]

5310 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation PRM5314

during movement in rigid tapping
nc

5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation

during movement in rigid tapping

5312 Limit value of tapping axis positioning deviation

during stop in rigid tapping

5313 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation

.c

during stop in rigid tapping

5314 Limit of position deviation during movement PRM5310

along the tapping axis for rigid tapping when 0 is
(0 to 99999999) specified
w

5321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (1st gear) T series

Spindle backlash in rigid tapping M series

w

5322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (2nd gear) T series

5323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (3rd gear) T series

5324 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (4th gear) T series

w

5382 Overshoot in rigid tapping return M series

321
 18) Parameters for scaling/coordinate rotation

Number Contents Remarks

1
5400 Parameter for scaling/coordinate rotation

#7 SCR : Scaling magnification unit is 0.00001 times (0)/ M series

0.001 times (1)
#6 XSC : Axis scaling and programmable mirror image M series 2

om
are invalidated (0)/validated (1) PRM
#5 : 5401#0
#4 :
#3 :
#2 : 3
#1 :
#0 RIN : Angle command of coordinate rotation is
specified by an absolute method (0)/by an

r.c
incremental method (1)
5401 Parameter for scaling M series 4
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :

e
#4 :
#3 :
5
#2 :
#1 :
#0 SCL

5410
nt
: Scaling for each axis is invalidated (0)/
validated (1)

Angle used when coordinate rotation angle is

not specified
PRM5421

6
ce
5411 Magnification used when scaling magnification M series
is not specified PRM
5400#6
7
5421 Scaling magnification for each axis M series
PRM
nc

5400#7
8
19) Parameter for uni-direction positioning

Number Contents Remarks

.c

5431 Uni–direction positioning M series 9

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
w

#4 :
#3 : 10
#2 :
#1 :
w

#0 MDL : Specifies whether the G code for uni-directional

positioning (G60) is included in one-shot G
codes (00 group) (0)/modal G codes (01
group) (1)
w

5440 Positioning direction and approach in M series

uni-directional positioning for each axis
[Detection unit]

322
 8. PARAMETERS

20) Parameters for polar coordinate interpolation

Number Contents Remarks

5450 Automatic speed control

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :

om
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 AFC : In polar coordinate interpolation mode,
automatic speed control is not applied (0)/
applied (1).

r.c
5460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar
coordinate interpolation

5461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar

coordinate interpolation

5462 Maximum cutting feedrate during polar

coordinate interpolation [mm/min]

e
5463 Allowable automatic override percentage in
polar coordinate interpolation

Number
nt
21) Parameter for normal direction control

Contents Remarks
ce
5480 Number of the axis for controlling the normal M series
direction

5481 Rotation speed of normal direction control axis M series

5482 Limit value that ignores the rotation insertion of M series

nc

direction control axis

5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the M series

normal direction angle of a preceding block
.c
w
w
w

323
 22) Parameters for indexing index table

Number Contents Remarks 1

5500 Parameters of indexing index table M series

#7 IDX : Index table indexing sequence is Type A (0)/

Type B (1)
#6 : 2

om
#5 :
#4 G90 : Indexing command is judged according to the
G90/G91 mode (0)/judged by an absolute
command (1)
#3 INC : Rotation in the G90 mode is not set to the PRM 3
shorter way around the circumference (0)/set 5511=0
to the shorter way around the circumference
(1)

r.c
#2 ABS : Displaying absolute coordinate value is not PRM
rounded by 360 degrees (0)/rounded by 360 5500#3 4
degrees (1)
#1 REL : Relative position display is not rounded by 360
degrees (0)/rounded by 360 degrees (1)
#0 DDP : Decimal point input method is conventional PRM

e
method (0)/electronic calculator method (1) 3401#0=0
5
5511 Negative-direction rotation command M code M series

5512
nt
Unit of index table indexing angle

23) Parameter for involute interpolation

M series

6
ce
Number Contents Remarks

5610 Limit of initial permissible error during involute M series

interpolation [0.001mm] 7

24) Parameters for exponential interpolation

nc

Number Contents Remarks 8

5630 Distribution amount M series

#7 :
.c

#6 :
#5 : 9
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
w

#1 :
#0 SPN : A distribution amount along a linear axis in 10
exponential interpolation is specified by
PRM5643 (0)/K in G02.3 or G03.3 (1).
w

5641 Number of a linear axis subject to exponential M series

interpolation

5642 Number of a rotation axis subject to M series

w

exponential interpolation

5643 Distribution amount (span value) for a linear M series

axis subject to exponential interpolation

324
 8. PARAMETERS

25) Parameters for straightness compensation

Number Contents Remarks

5711 Axis number of moving axis 1

5712 Axis number of moving axis 2

5713 Axis number of moving axis 3

om
5721 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving
axis 1

5722 Axis number of compensation axis 2 for moving

axis 2

5723 Axis number of compensation axis 3 for moving

axis 3

r.c
5731 Compensation point number a of moving axis 1

5732 Compensation point number b of moving axis 1

5733 Compensation point number c of moving axis 1

5734 Compensation point number d of moving axis 1

e
5741 Compensation point number a of moving axis 2

5742 Compensation point number b of moving axis 2

5743

5744

5751
nt
Compensation point number c of moving axis 2

Compensation point number d of moving axis 2

Compensation point number a of moving axis 3

ce
5752 Compensation point number b of moving axis 3

5753 Compensation point number c of moving axis 3

5754 Compensation point number d of moving axis 3

nc

5761 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number a of moving axis 1

5762 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number b of moving axis 1

5763 Compensation corresponding compensation

.c

point number c of moving axis 1

5764 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number d of moving axis 1
w

5771 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number a of moving axis 2

5772 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number b of moving axis 2
w

5773 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number c of moving axis 2

5774 Compensation corresponding compensation

w

point number d of moving axis 2

325
 Number Contents Remarks

5781 Compensation corresponding compensation 1

point number a of moving axis 3

5782 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number b of moving axis 3

5783 Compensation corresponding compensation 2

om
point number c of moving axis 3

5784 Compensation corresponding compensation

point number d of moving axis 3
3
26) Parameters for custom macro

r.c
Number Contents Remarks

6000 Parameter for custom macro 4

#7 :
#6 :
#5 SBM : In the custom macro statement, the single

e
block stop is not valid (0)/valid (1) 5
#4 :
#3 V15 : The system variables for tool compensation M series
are the same as those used with FS16 (0)/

#2
#1
:
:
nt
FS15 (1).

#0 G67 : A G67 specified in modal call cancel mode

6
ce
issues an alarm (0)/is ignored (1).
6001 Parameter for custom macro

#7 CLV : Local variables #1 through #33 are cleared to

7
“vacant” by reset (0)/not cleared by reset (1)
#6 CCV : Common variables #100 through #149 are
nc

cleared to “vacant” by reset (0)/not cleared by

reset (1)
#5 TCS : Custom macro is not called using a T code (0)/ O9000 8
called (1)
#4 CRD : When ISO code is used in the B/D PRINT
mode, output only “LF” (0)/output “LF” and
“CR” (1)
.c

#3 PV5 : The output macro variables are #500 and up 9

(0)/#100 and up and #500 and up (1).
#2 :
#1 PRT : When data is output using a DPRINT
w

command, outputs a space for reading zero

(0)/outputs no data (1) 10
#0 :
w
w

326
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

6003 Parameter for custom macro

#7 MUS : Interrupt-type custom macro is not used (0)/

used (1)
#6 MCY : Custom macro interrupt during cycle operation
is not performed (0)/performed (1)
#5 MSB : The local variable of interrupt program is

om
macrotype (0)/subprogram type (1)
#4 MPR : M code for custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M96:
is standard (M96/M97) (0)/using parameter PRM6033
setting (1) to 6034
#3 TSE : Interrupt signal UNIT uses edge trigger method
(0)/status trigger method (1)
#2 MIN : Custom macro interrupt is Type I (0)/Type II (1)
#1 MSK : Absolute coordinate during custom macro

r.c
interrupt is not set to the skip coordinate (0)/set
(1)
#0 :

6010 Setting of hole pattern “*” of EIA code (*0 to *7)

6011 Setting of hole pattern “=” of EIA code

e
(=0 to =7)

6012 Setting of hole pattern “#” of EIA code

6013

6014
nt
(#0 to #7)

Setting of hole pattern “ [ ” of EIA code ([0 to [7)

Setting of hole pattern “ ] ” of EIA code (]0 to ]7)

ce
6030 M code that calls the program entered in file M198

6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt PRM

6003#4=1
6003#4 1
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro
interrupt
nc

6036 Number of custom macro valiables common to T series

paths (100 - 199) (2-path
control)

6037 Number of custom macro valiables common to T series

paths (500 - 599) (2-path
control)
.c

6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9010

6051 G code that calls the custom macro of program

w

number 9011

6052 G code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9012
w

6053 G code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9013

6054 G code that calls the custom macro of program

w

number 9014

6055 G code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9015

327
 Number Contents Remarks

6056 G code that calls the custom macro of program 1

number 9016

6057 G code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9017

6058 G code that calls the custom macro of program 2

om
number 9018

6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9019

6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program 3

number 9001

6072 M code that calls the subprogram of program

r.c
number 9002

6073 M code that calls the subprogram of program

4
number 9003

6074 M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9004

e
5
6075 M code that calls the custom macro of program
number 9005

6076

6077
nt
M code that calls the custom macro of program
number 9006

M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9007
6
ce
6078 M code that calls the custom macro of program
number 9008
7
6079 M code that calls the custom macro of program
number 9009
nc

6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9020
8
6081 M code that calls the custom macro of program
number 9021

6082 M code that calls the custom macro of program

.c

number 9022
9
6083 M code that calls the custom macro of program
number 9023
w

6084 M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9024 10
6085 M code that calls the custom macro of program
number 9025
w

6086 M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9026

6087 M code that calls the custom macro of program

w

number 9027

328
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

6088 M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9028

6089 M code that calls the custom macro of program

number 9029

6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of

om
program number 9004

6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of

program number 9005

27) Parameters for pattern data input

r.c
Number Contents Remarks

6101 First variable number displayed on pattern data

screen 1

6102 First variable number displayed on pattern data

screen 2

e
6103 First variable number displayed on pattern data
screen 3

6104

6105
nt
First variable number displayed on pattern data
screen 4

First variable number displayed on pattern data

screen 5
ce
6106 First variable number displayed on pattern data
screen 6

6107 First variable number displayed on pattern data

screen 7

6108 First variable number displayed on pattern data

nc

screen 8

6109 First variable number displayed on pattern data

screen 9

6110 First variable number displayed on pattern data

.c

screen 10
w
w
w

329
 28) Parameters for skip function

Number Contents Remarks 1

6200 Parameter for skip function

#7 SKF : Dry run, override and automatic

acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip
command are disabled (0)/enabled (1) 2

om
#6 SRE : The edge of the high-speed skip signal which
triggers skipping is the rising edge (0)/falling
edge (1)
#5 SLS : For multi-step skip, high-speed skip is not used PRM6202,
(0)/used (1). to 6206 3
#4 HSS : The high-speed skip signal is not used (0)/used
(1)
#3 MIT : For skip, the MIT signal is disabled (0)/enabled T series

r.c
(1).
#2 : 4
#1 SK0 : SKIP and the multi-step skip signal are valid X004
when set to 1 (0)/0 (1).
#0 GSK : For skip, SKIPP (G06.6) is disabled (0)/ T series
enabled (1).

e
6201 High-speed skip 5
#7 :
#6 :
nt
#5 CSE : For repetitive high–speed skip command
G31P90, either the rising or falling edge of the
high–speed skip signal is effective depending
on the setting of PRM6200#6 (0)/ both edges
M series
6
ce
are effective (1).
#4 IGX : For high-speed skip, SKIP (X4.7), SKIPP
(G06.6), and +MIT1 to –MIT2 (X4.2 to X4.5)
are enabled (0)/disabled (1).
7
#3 TSA : When the torque limit skip is used, torque limit T series
arrival is monitored for :
nc

All axes (0)

those axes that are specified in G31.
#2 TSE : When the skip function, based on the torque T series 8
limit arrival signal is used, the skip position
stored in a system variable is a position
reflecting a servo system delay (0)/a position
independent of a servo system delay (1).
.c

#1 SEB : Acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are 9

not considered (0)/considered (1) using the
actual values
#0 SEA : Acceleration/deceleration and servo delay are
w

not considered (0)/considered (1) using the

calculated values 10
w
w

330
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

6202 High-speed skip signal/multi-step skip signal

selection

#7 1S8 : For high-speed skip, the HD17 signal is not

used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP8 signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#6 1S7 : For high-speed skip, the HD16 signal is not

om
used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP7 signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#5 1S6 : For high-speed skip, the HD15 signal is not
used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP6 signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#4 1S5 : For high-speed skip, the HD14 signal is not
used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP5 signal is not used (0)/used (1).

r.c
#3 1S4 : For high-speed skip, the HD13 signal is not
used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP4 signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#2 1S3 : For high-speed skip, the HD12 signal is not
used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP3 signal is not used (0)/used (1).

e
#1 1S2 : For high-speed skip, the HD11 signal is not
used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP2 signal is not used (0)/used (1).

6203
nt
#0 1S1 : For high-speed skip, the HD10 signal is not
used (0)/used (1). Alternatively, for G31 P1/Q1,
the SKIP signal is not used (0)/used (1).
Multi-step skip signal selection
ce
#7 2S8 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP8 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#6 2S7 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP7 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#5 2S6 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP6 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
nc

#4 2S5 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP5 signal is not used

(0)/used (1).
#3 2S4 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP4 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#2 2S3 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP3 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
.c

#1 2S2 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP2 signal is not used

(0)/used (1).
#0 2S1 : For G31 P2/Q2, the SKIP signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
w
w
w

331
 Number Contents Remarks

6204 Multi-step skip signal selection 1

#7 3S8 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP8 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#6 3S7 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP7 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#5 3S6 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP6 signal is not used
2

om
(0)/used (1).
#4 3S5 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP5 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#3 3S4 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP4 signal is not used
(0)/used (1). 3
#2 3S3 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP3 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#1 3S2 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP2 signal is not used

r.c
(0)/used (1).
#0 3S1 : For G31 P3/Q3, the SKIP signal is not used 4
(0)/used (1).

6205 Multi-step skip signal selection

#7 4S8 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP8 signal is not used

e
(0)/used (1). 5
#6 4S7 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP7 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
nt
#5 4S6 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP6 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#4 4S5 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP5 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#3 4S4 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP4 signal is not used
6
ce
(0)/used (1).
#2 4S3 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP3 signal is not used
(0)/used (1). 7
#1 4S2 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP2 signal is not used
(0)/used (1).
#0 4S1 : For G31 P4/Q4, the SKIP signal is not used
nc

(0)/used (1).

6206 Multi-step skip signal selection 8

#7 DS8 : For G04, the SKIP8 signal is not used (0)/used
(1).
#6 DS7 : For G04, the SKIP7 signal is not used (0)/used
.c

(1). 9
#5 DS6 : For G04, the SKIP6 signal is not used (0)/used
(1).
#4 DS5 : For G04, the SKIP5 signal is not used (0)/used
w

(1).
#3 DS4 : For G04, the SKIP4 signal is not used (0)/used
(1).
10
#2 DS3 : For G04, the SKIP3 signal is not used (0)/used
(1).
w

#1 DS2 : For G04, the SKIP2 signal is not used (0)/used

(1).
#0 DS1 : For G04, the SKIP signal is not used (0)/used
(1).
w

332
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

6207 High-speed skip

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 :
#1 :
#0 IOC : For the high-speed skip signal, the option 2
board is used (0)/the I/O card is used (1).

6208 Continuous high-speed skip signal selection M series

#7 9S8 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD17

r.c
signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#6 9S7 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD16
signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#5 9S6 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD15
signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#4 9S5 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD14
signal is not used (0)/used (1).

e
#3 9S4 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD13
signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#2 9S3 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD12
nt
signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#1 9S2 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD11
signal is not used (0)/used (1).
#0 9S1 : For continuous high-speed skip, the HD10
signal is not used (0)/used (1).
ce
6220 Period during which input is ignored for M series
continuous high–speed skip signal [8msec]
nc
.c
w
w
w

333
 29) Parameters for automatic tool compensation (T series) and
automatic tool length compensation (M series)
1
Number Contents Remarks

6240 Signal logic

#7 :
#6 : 2

om
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 : 3
#0 AE0 : A measuring position is assumed to be
reached when XAE, YAE, or ZAE is 1 (0)/0 (1).

r.c
6241 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool T series
compensation
4
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool M series
length compensation

6251 γ value on X axis during automatic tool T series

compensation

e
5
γ value during automatic tool length M series
compensation

6252

6254
nt
γ value on Z axis during automatic tool
compensation

ε value on X axis during automatic tool

compensation
T series

T series
6
ce
ε value during automatic tool length M series
compensation
7
6255 ε value on Z axis during automatic tool T series
compensation
nc

30) Parameters for external data input/output 8

Number Contents Remarks

6300 Parameter for external program number search

.c

#7 : 9
#6 :
#5 :
#4 ESR : External program number search is disabled
w

(0)/ enabled (1)

#3 : 10
#2 :
#1 :
w

#0 :
w

334
 8. PARAMETERS

31) Parameters for graphic display

Number Contents Remarks

6500 Parameter for graphic display

#7 :
#6 NZM : The screen image is not enlarged (0)/enlarged T series
(1) by specifying the center of the screen and

om
magnification.
#5 DPO : Current position is not appear on the machining M series
profile drawing or tool path drawing screen (0)/
appear (1)
#4 :
#3 DPA : Current position display is the actual position to T series
ensure tool nose radius compensation (0)/
programmed position (1)

r.c
#2 GUL : The positions of X1– and X2–axes are not T series
replaced (0)/are replaced (1) with each other in (2-path
the coordinate system specified with control)
PRM6509.
#1 SPC : Graphic display (2–path control) is done on two T series
spindles and two tool posts (0)/on one spindle (2-path

e
and two tool posts (1) control)
#0 GRL : Graphic display T series
Tool post 1 is displayed on the left, and tool (2-path
post 2 is displayed on the right (0) control)

6501
nt
Tool post 1 is displayed on the right, and tool
post 2 is displayed on the left (1)
Parameter for graphic display
ce
#7 :
#6 :
#5 CSR : Center position of tool in tool path drawing is
marked with
(0)/with
(1)
#4 FIM : Machining profile drawing in solid drawing is M series
displayed in the coarse mode (0)/fine mode (1)
nc

#3 RID : In solid drawing, a plane is drawn without M series

edges (0)/with edges (1)
#2 3PL : Tri-plane drawing in solid drawing is drawn by M series
the first angle projection (0)/third angle
projection (1)
#1 TLC : In solid drawing, the tool length compensation M series
is not executed (0)/executed (1)
.c

#0 ORG : Drawing when coordinate system is altered M series

during drawing, draws in the same coordinate
system (0)/draws in the new coordinate system
(1)
w

6509 Coordinate system for drawing a single spindle T series

(2–path
control)
w

6510 Drawing coordinate system T series

w

335
 Number Contents Remarks

6511 Right margin in solid drawing M series 1

6512 Left margin in solid drawing

6513 Upper margin in solid drawing

6514 Lower margin in solid drawing 2

om
6515 Change in cross-section position in tri-plane
drawing

6520 C-axis number for dynamic graphic display T series

3

32) Parameters for displaying operation time and number of parts

r.c
Number Contents Remarks 4
6700 Parameter for number of parts

#7 :
#6 :

e
#5 : 5
#4 :
#3 :
#2
#1
:
:
nt
#0 PCM : M code that counts the number of machined
parts are specified by M02, M30 and PRM
6710 (0)/only M code specified by PRM 6710
PRM6710 6
ce
(1)
6710 M code that counts the total number of
machined parts and the number of machined
7
parts

6711 Number of machined parts

nc

6712 Total number of machined parts (M02, M03, 8

PRM 6710)

6713 Number of required parts DGN

(Required parts finish signal PRTSF is output F62.7
to PMC)
.c

9
6750 Integrated value of power-on period [Minute]

6751 Operation time [msec]

(Integrated value of time during automatic
w

operation)
10
6752 Operation time [Minute]
(Integrated value of time during automatic
w

operation)

6753 Integrated value of cutting time [msec]

6754 Integrated value of cutting time [Minute]

w

6755 Integrated value of general-purpose [msec] DGN

integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON G53.0
time

336
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

6756 Integrated value of general-purpose [Minute]

integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON
time

6757 Operation time [msec]

(Integrated value of one automatic operation
time)

om
6758 Operation time [Minute]
(Integrated value of one automatic operation
time)

33) Parameters for tool life management

r.c
Number Contents Remarks

6800 Parameter for tool life management

#7 M6T : T code in the same block as M06 is judged as M series

a back number (0)/as a next tool group
command (1)

e
#6 IGI : Tool back number is not ignored (0)/ignored (1) M series
#5 SNG : At the input of a tool skip signal when tools
other than those under tool life management
nt
are selected, skips a tool that is used last or
specified (0)/ignores a tool skip signal (1)
#4 GRS : Data clear during the input of tool exchange
reset signal clears only the execution data of
specified groups (0)/the execution data of all
ce
entered groups (1)
#3 SIG : Not input the group number using a tool group
signal during tool skip (0)/input the group
number (1)
#2 LTM : Tool life is specified by the number of times (0)
/by time (1)
nc

#1 GS2 : Setting the combination of the number of tool

life
: groups and the number of tools
#0 GS1 : Setting the combination of the number of tool
life
: groups and the number of tools
.c

M series T series
GS2 GS1 Group Tool Group Tool
count count count count
0 0 1–16 1–16 1–16 1–16
w

1–64 1–32 1–16 1–32

0 1 1–32 1–8 1–32 1–8
1–28 1–16 1–32 1–16
1 0 1–64 1–4 1–64 1–4
w

1–256 1–8 1–64 1–8

1 1 1–128 1–2 1–16 1–16
1–512 1–4 1–128 1–4
w

The values on the lower row in the table apply

when the 512–(M series) or 128–(T series)
–tool–life–management–group option is
provided.

337
 Number Contents Remarks

6801 Parameter for tool life management 1

#7 M6E : When T code is specified in the same block as PRM
M06, the T code is processed as a next 6800#7
selected group number/the tool group life is
counted immediately
#6 EXG : Using G10, tool life management data is T series
2

om
registered after data for all tool groups has
been cleared (0)/data can be
added/modified/deleted for a specified group
only (1).
#6 EXT : Specifies whether the extended tool life M series 3
management function is not used (0) / is used
(1)
#5 EIS : When the life of a tool is measured in PRM

r.c
time–based units, the life is counted every four 6800#2
seconds (0)/every second (1) 4
#4 :
#3 EMD : Specifies when an asterisk (*) indicating that a M series
tool has been exhausted is displayed.
When the next tool is selected (0) / When the

e
tool life is exhausted (1) 5
#2 LFV : Specifies whether life count override is M series
disabled (0) / enabled (1) when the extended

nt
tool life management function is used.
#1 TSM : When a tool takes several tool numbers, life is
counted for each of the same tool numbers (0)/
for each tool (1)
#0 CUT : The tool life management using cut length is
T series

M series
6
ce
not performed (0) / is performed (1)

6810 Tool life control ignored number M series

7
6811 Tool life count restart M code T series
nc

34) Parameters of position switch functions

8
Number Contents Remarks

6901 Position switch

.c

#7 :
#6 :
9
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
w

#2 :
#1 : 10
#0 IGP : During follow–up for the absolute position
detector, position switch signals are output (0)/
w

not output (1)

6910 Axis corresponding to the 1st position switch

6911 Axis corresponding to the 2nd position switch

w

6912 Axis corresponding to the 3rd position switch

6913 Axis corresponding to the 4th position switch

338
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

6914 Axis corresponding to the 5th position switch

6915 Axis corresponding to the 6th position switch

6916 Axis corresponding to the 7th position switch

6917 Axis corresponding to the 8th position switch

om
6918 Axis corresponding to the 9th position switch

6919 Axis corresponding to the 10th position switch

6930 Maximum operation range of the 1st position

switch

6931 Maximum operation range of the 2nd position

switch

r.c
6932 Maximum operation range of the 3rd position
switch

6933 Maximum operation range of the 4th position

switch

e
6934 Maximum operation range of the 5th position
switch

6935 Maximum operation range of the 6th position

6936
nt
switch

Maximum operation range of the 7th position

switch
ce
6937 Maximum operation range of the 8th position
switch

6938 Maximum operation range of the 9th position

switch

6939 Maximum operation range of the 10th position

nc

switch

6950 Minimum operation range of the 1st position

switch

6951 Minimum operation range of the 2nd position

switch
.c

6952 Minimum operation range of the 3rd position

switch

6953 Minimum operation range of the 4th position

w

switch

6954 Minimum operation range of the 5th position

switch
w

6955 Minimum operation range of the 6th position

switch

6956 Minimum operation range of the 7th position

w

switch

6957 Minimum operation range of the 8th position

switch

339
 Number Contents Remarks

6958 Minimum operation range of the 9th position 1

switch

6959 Minimum operation range of the 10th position

switch
2

om
35) Manual operation / Automatic operation

Number Contents Remarks

7001 Manual intervention/return function 3

#7 MFM : For the manual linear or circular interpolation
function, modifying a value specified with a

r.c
command during jog feed in the guidance
direction, immediately starts moving according
to the new value (0)/stops moving (1).
4
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

e
#2 : 5
#1 :
#0 MIN : The manual intervention/return function is

#7
#6
7050

:
:
nt
disabled (0)/enabled (1).
Retrace function 6
ce
#5 :
#4 :
#3 : 7
#2 :
#1 :
#0 RV1 : When the tool moves backwards after feed
nc

hold during forward feed with the retrace

function, the block is split at the feed hold 8
position and stored (0)/stored without being
split (1).
.c

9
w

10
w
w

340
 8. PARAMETERS

36) Parameters for manual handle feed / Interrupts

Number Contents Remarks

7100 Parameter for manual pulse generator

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :

om
#4 HPF : If the specified manual handle feedrate
exceeds the rapid traverse rate, handle pulses
exceeding the rapid traverse rate are ignored
(0)/are not ignored such that the tool is moved
then stopped (1).
#3 HCL : The clearing of a handle interrupt travel
distance is invalid (0)/valid (1).
#2 :

r.c
#1 THD : Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG
mode is invalid (0)/valid (1)
#0 JHD : Manual pulse generator in JOG mode is invalid
(0)/valid (1)

7101 Parameter for manual pulse generator

e
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0 IOL
:
:
:
:
nt
: Manual pulse generator interface on the main
ce
CPU board (0) / provided in the machine
operator’s panel interface for I/O link (1)
7102 Rotation direction <Axis>

#7 :
#6 :
nc

#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 HNG : Axis movement direction for rotation direction T series
.c

of manual pulse generator is same in direction

(0) / reverse in direction (1)
w
w
w

341
 Number Contents Remarks

7104 Handle feed in the tool axis direction M series 1

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 3D2 : For tool axis direction handle feed and right
angle direction handle feed, the machine
2

om
coordinates when the mode is set or when a
reset is performed (0)/the coordinates specified
with PRM7145 (1) are set as the coordinates of
the second rotation axis.
#3 3D1 : For tool axis direction handle feed and right 3
angle direction handle feed, the machine
coordinates when the mode is set or when a
reset is performed (0)/the coordinates specified

r.c
with PRM7144 (1) are set as the coordinates of
the first rotation axis. 4
#2 CXC : Tool axis direction handle feed or perpendicular
direction handle feed is performed with 5–axis
machine (0)/4–axis machine (1).
#1 :

e
#0 TLX : When the rotation axis is at the origin, the tool 5
axis is in the Z direction (0)/X direction (1).

7110 Number of manual pulse generator used

7113

7114

7120
nt
Manual handle feed magnification m (1–127)

Manual handle feed magnification n (0–1000)

Axis configuration for using the tool axis M series

6
ce
direction handle feed or perpendicular direction
handle feed
1: A-C 2: B-C 3: A-B (A: Master) 7
4: A-B (B: Master)

7121 Axis selection in tool axis direction handle feed M series

nc

mode

7141 Axis selection in the X direction for the radial M series 8

tool axis handle feed

7142 Axis selection in the Y direction for the radial M series

tool axis handle feed
.c

7144 Coordinate of the first rotation axis for tool axis M series
9
direction handle feed and radial tool axis
handle feed
w

7145 Coordinate of the second rotation axis for tool M series

axis handle feed and radial tool axis handle 10
feed
w
w

342
 8. PARAMETERS

37) Parameters for butt-type reference position setting

Number Contents Remarks

7181 First withdrawal distance in butt-type reference

position setting

7182 Second withdrawal distance in butt-type

om
reference position setting

7183 First butting feedrate in butt-type reference

position setting

7184 Second butting feedrate in butt-type reference

position setting

7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and

r.c
second butting operations) in butt-type
reference position setting

7186 Torque limit value in butt-type reference

position setting

e
38) Parameters for software operator’s panel

Number Contents Remarks

#7
7200

:
nt
Parameter for software operator’s panel

#6 OP7 : Feed hold is not performed on software

ce
operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#5 OP6 : Protect key is not performed on software
operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#4 OP5 : OBS,SBK,MLK,DRN are not performed on
software operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#3 OP4 : Override is not performed on software
nc

operator’s panel (0) /performed (1)

#2 OP3 : MPG’s axis selection is not performed on
software operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#1 OP2 : JOG feed axis selection is not performed on
software operator’s panel (0) / performed (1)
#0 OP1 : Mode selection is not performed on software
.c

operator’s panel (0) /performed (1)

7210 Jog movement axis and its direction on
software operator’s panel °

7211 Jog movement axis and its direction on

w

software operator’s panel ±

7212 Jog movement axis and its direction on

software operator’s panel ³
w

7213 Jog movement axis and its direction on

software operator’s panel ²
7214 Jog movement axis and its direction on
w

software operator’s panel ¼

7215 Jog movement axis and its direction on

software operator’s panel ½

343
 Number Contents Remarks

7216 Jog movement axis and its direction on 1

software operator’s panel

7217 Jog movement axis and its direction on

software operator’s panel

7220 Name of general-purpose switch on software 2

om
operator’s panel

[Link].7220 - No.7227 -SIGNAL 1 Sets the

character code
[Link].7228 - No.7235 -SIGNAL 2 Sets the 3
character code
[Link].7236 - No.7243 -SIGNAL 3 Sets the
character code

r.c
[Link].7244 - No.7251 -SIGNAL 4 Sets the
character code
4
[Link].7252 - No.7259 -SIGNAL 5 Sets the
character code
[Link].7260 - No.7267 -SIGNAL 6 Sets the
character code
[Link].7268 - No.7275 -SIGNAL 7 Sets the

e
character code 5
[Link].7276 - No.7283 -SIGNAL 8 Sets the
character code
7283 nt
Name of general-purpose switch on software
operator’s panel 6
ce
39) Parameters for program restart

Number Contents Remarks

7
7310 Movement sequence to program restart
position
nc

7351 Macro variable start number where data for the

tool retract and recover 8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

344
 8. PARAMETERS

40) Parameter for high-speed machining

Number Contents Remarks

7501 Parameter for high speed cycle machining

#7 IPC : The system does not monitor (0)/monitors (1)

whether a distribution process is stopped with
high–speed remote buffer or in a high–speed

om
cycle.
#6 IT2 : IT2 IT1 IT0
#5 IT1 : 0 0 0 Interpolates the G05 data in 8ms
#4 IT0 : 0 0 1 Interpolates the G05 data in 4ms
#3 : 0 1 0 Interpolates the G05 data in 2ms
#2 : 0 1 1 Interpolates the G05 data in 1ms
#1 : 1 0 0 Interpolates the G05 data in 16ms
#0 CSP : Cs contouring control function dedicated to a T series

r.c
piston lathe is not used (0)/used (1).
7502 High speed machining

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :

e
#4 :
#3 L8M : In high-speed machining with an interpolation
period of 8 msec, learning control is not

#2 : nt
exercised (0)/exercised (1).

#1 PMC : A PMC axis control command in high-speed

machining is ignored (0)/executed (1).
#0 SUP : In high-speed remote buffer operation and M series
ce
high-speed cycle machining, acceleration/
deceleration is not used (0)/used (1).
7505 High–speed cutting <Axis>

#7 :
#6 :
nc

#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 HUN : Unit of data to be distributed during machining T series
a high–speed cycle is the same as the least
.c

input increment (0)/ten times the least input

increment (1).
#0 HSC : Not used (0)/used (1) for high–speed
distribution in each axis.
w
w
w

345
 Number Contents Remarks

7510 Control axis count in high-speed remote buffer T series 1

Maximum number of simultaneously controlled M series
axes when G05 is specified during high-speed
cycle machining (0) /control axis count in
high-speed remote buffer (1)
2

om
7511 Extension of data variables used for machining
in a high–speed cycle
Set Value Means
0 Variables #200000 to #85535 are used.
3
1 Variables #200000 to #232767 are used.
2 Variables #200000 to #265535 are used.
3 Variables #200000 to #298303 are used.

r.c
4 Variables #200000 to #331072 are used.
5 Variables #200000 to #363839 are used.
4
6 Variables #200000 to #396607 are used.
7 Variables #200000 to #429375 are used.
8 Variables #200000 to #462143 are used.

e
5

41) Parameters for polygon turning

Number

7600
nt Contents

Parameter for returns to reference position

Remarks

T series
6
ce
#7 PLZ : The sequence of returns to the reference
position of synchronous axis using G28
command is same as a return to reference 7
position manually (0)/by positioning (1)
#6 :
#5 :
nc

#4 :
#3 : 8
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :
.c

7602 Inter-spindle polygon function T series

9
#7 :
#6 :
#5 COF : In spindle polygon turning, phase control is
w

exercised (0)/not exercised (1).

#4 HST : The spindle does not stop (0)/stops to set the 7602#5=0 10
polygon mode (1).
#3 HSL : For phase synchronization, the second spindle 7602#5=0
w

is shifted (0)/the first spindle is shifted (1).

#2 HDR : The phase synchronization shift direction is not 7602#5=0
reversed (0)/reversed (1).
#1 SNG : In spindle polygon turning, the synchronization
w

axis rotation direction is not reversed (0)/

reversed (1).
#0 MNG: In spindle polygon turning, the spindle rotation
direction is not reversed (0)/reversed (1).

346
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

7603 Inter-spindle polygon function T series

#7 PST : The polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST

(G038.0) is not used (0)/used (1).
#6 :
#5 RDG : As the phase command value R, the diagnosis
screen displays a specified value (0)/actual

om
shift pulse data (1).
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 QDR : The synchronization axis rotation direction ALM218
depends on the sign of Q (0)/the rotation
direction of the first spindle (1).
#0 RPL : Upon reset, spindle polygon mode is canceled

r.c
(0)/not canceled (1).

7610 Control axis number of tool rotation axis for T series

polygon turning

7620 Movement of tool rotation axis per revolution

e
7621 Upper-limit rotation speed of tool rotation axis

7631 Allowable spindle speed deviation level in

spindle polygon turning

7632
nt
Steady state confirmation time duration in
spindle polygon turning
ce
42) Parameters for the external pulse input

Number Contents Remarks

7681 Setting 1 for the ratio of an axis shift amount to M series

external pulses (M)
nc

7682 Setting 2 for the ratio of an axis shift amount to M series

external pulses (N)
.c
w
w
w

347
 43) Parameters for the hobbing machine and electric gear box

1
Number Contents Remarks

7700 Hobbing machine/electric gear box M series

#7 :
#6 DPS : Display of actual spindle speed the hob–axis 2

om
(0)/the spindle speed (1) speed is displayed.
#5 RTO : Gear ratio for the spindle and position coder
specified in parameter 3706 disabled (0)/
enabled (1) (Always specify 0.)
#4 : 3
#3 MLT : Unit of data for the magnification for PRM7714
compensating C–axis servo delay 0.001 (0)/
0.0001 (1)

r.c
#2 HDR : Setting of the direction for compensating a
helical gear (1 is usually specified.)
#1 CMS : The position manually set with a single rotation
4
signal is canceled (0)/not canceled (1) when a
synchronization cancel command is issued.
#0 HBR : Performing a reset does not cancel (0)/cancel
(1) synchronization of the C–axis to the hob

e
axis (G81). 5
7701 Hobbing machine M series

#7
#6
:
:
nt
#5 DLY : Compensating C–axis servo delay with G84 is
disabled (0)/enabled (1)
#4 JHD : While the C–axis and hob axis are
6
ce
synchronized with each other, jogging and
handle feeds around the C–axis are disabled
(0)/enabled (1) 7
#3 :
Number of times the
#2 SM3 : SM3 SM2 SM1
pulse is sampled
#1 SM2 :
nc

#0 SM1 : 0 0 0 4
0 0 1 1 8
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 16
1 0 0 32
.c

1 1 0 4
1 1 1 4
9

7709 Number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear M series
w

7710 Number of the axis synchronized with the hob M series

axis 10
7711 Gear ratio for the hob axis and position coder M series
w

7712 Time constant for C–axis M series

acceleration/deceleration during rotation with
the hob axis and C–axis synchronized with
each other [ms]
w

7713 FL speed of C–axis acceleration/deceleration M series

during rotation with the hob axis and C–axis
synchronized each other [deg/min]

348
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

7714 Magnification 2 for compensation of C–axis M series

servo delay by G83 PRM
7700#3

7715 Magnification 1 for compensation of C–axis M series

servo delay by G83 PRM
7700#3

om
7730 Retraction function <Axis>
M series

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :

r.c
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 RTR : Specifies whether the retraction function is
effective for each axis.
Retraction is disabled (0)/enabled (1).

e
7740 Feedrate during retraction for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min] M series

7741 Retracted distance for each axis [0.001mm] <Axis>

7771

7772
nt
Number of EGB axis

Number of position detector pulses per rotation

M series

M series

M series
ce
about tool axis [Detection unit]

7773 Number of position detector pulses per rotation M series

about workpiece axis [Detection unit]
nc
.c
w
w
w

349
 44) Parameters for axis control by PMC

Number Contents Remarks 1

8001 Parameter for axis control by PMC

#7 SKE : Skip signal uses same as CNC (0) / PMC DGN

particular signal (1) X004#7
#6 AUX : The number of bytes for the code of an DGN 2

om
auxiliary function (12H) command to be output X004#6
is 1 (0 to 255) (0)/2 (0 to 65535) (1)
#5 NCC : If a program command is specified for a P/S 139
PMC–controlled axis, an alarm is issued if the
axis is controlled by the PMC, the CNC 3
command otherwise being valid (0)/an alarm is
always issued (1).
#4 :

r.c
#3 RDE : Dry run signal for rapid traverse command is
invalid (0) / valid (1) 4
#2 OVE : Dry run and override signals use the same DGN
signal as CNC (0) / PMC particular signal (1) G150,151
#1 :
#0 MLE : Machine lock for PMC control axis is valid (0)

e
/invalid (1)
5
8002 Parametr for axis control by PMC

#6 FR1 :

0
1
nt
#7 FR2 : Set the command unit of feedrate per revolution
FR2 FR1 Metric input
0
1
Inch input

0.0001 mm/rev 0.000001 inch/rev

6
ce
0 1 0.001 mm/rev 0.00001 inch/rev
1 0 0.01 mm/rev 0.0001 inch/rev
#5 PF2 : Set the the feedrate unit of feed
7
#4 PF1 :
PF2 PF1 Feedrate unit
0 0 1/1
nc

0 1 1/10
8
1 0 1/100
1 1 1/1000
#3 F10 : Sets the command unit of feedrate per minute
(1mm/min, 10mm/min)
.c

#2 SUE : In external pulse synchronization, 9

acceleration/deceleration is enabled
(exponential) (0)/disabled (1).
#1 DWE: With IS-C, the unit of dwell is 1 msec (0)/
w

0.1 msec (1).

#0 RPD : Rapid traverse rate of PMC control axis is set 10
by PRM 1420 (0) / specified by PMC control
command (1)
w
w

350
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

8003 Inch input/Metric input

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 :
#1 :
#0 PIM : When only the axes controlled by the PMC are
used, the linear axis is influenced (0)/not
influenced (1) by inch/millimeter input.
8004 Axis control

r.c
#7 NDI : A move command along a PMC axis is T series
specified using a diameter value (0)/radius PRM
value (1). 1006#3=1
#6 NCI : In deceleration, an in-position check is made
(0)/not made (1).
#5 DSL : If axis switching is specified when axis ALM139
switching is disabled, ALM139 is issued (0)/

e
axis switching is valid for a system not
specified (1).
#4 G8R : For rapid traverse and cutting feed along a PRM
nt
PMC axis, look-ahead control is disabled (0)/
enabled (1).
#3 G8C : For cutting feed along a PMC axis, look-ahead
control is disabled (0)/enabled (1).
#2 JFM : A feedrate for continuous feed is normal (0)/
1819#7=0

PRM
1819#7=0
ce
multiplied by 200 (1).
#1 NMT : If the PMC and NC specify commands at the ALM130
same time, an alarm is issued (0)/no alarm is
issued if the commands do not include a move
command (1).
#0 :
nc

8005

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
.c

#3 :
#2 :
#1 CDI : If diameter input is specified for T series
PMC–controlled axes, the amount of travel PRM
becomes double the specified value while the 1006#3
w

specified feedrate is used as is (0)/both the

specified amount of travel and feedrate are
used as is (1).
#0 :
w

8010 DI/DO group selection for each axis during

PMC axis control

8022 Upper-limit rate of feed per revolution during

w

PMC axis control

351
 45) Parameters for two-path control

Number Contents Remarks 1

8100 2-path
control

#7 :
#6 DSB : The special single block function is disabled T series 2

om
(0)/enabled (1).
#5 COF : A separate tool compensation memory area is T series
used for each tool post (0)/a common tool
compensation memory area is shared by the
tool posts (1). 3
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :

r.c
#1 IAL : When an alarm is raised in one tool post in the T series
automatic operation mode, the other tool post 4
enters the feed hold state and stops (0)/
continues operation without stopping (1)
#0 RST : Reset key on the CRT/MDI panel effective for
both paths (0)/for the tool post selected by the

e
path select signal (1)
5
8110 Queuing M code range (minimum value) 2-path
control
8111

8140
nt
Queuing M code range (maximum value)

Checking interference between tool posts T series

(2-path
control)
6
ce
#7 :
#6 :
#5 ZCL : Specifies whether interference along the Z axis 7
is checked (0)/is not checked (1)
#4 IFE : Specifies whether interference between tool
posts is checked (0)/is not checked (1)
nc

#3 IFM : Specifies whether interference between tool

post is checked (0)/is not checked (1) in the
manual operation mode
8
#2 IT0 : When offset number 0 is specified by the T
code, checking interference between tool posts
is stopped until an offset number other than 0 is
.c

specified by the next T code (0)/checking

interference between tool posts is continued 9
according to the previously specified offset
number (1)
#1 TY1 : Specifies the relationship between the
w

#0 TY0 : coordinate systems of the two tool posts.

10
8151 Distance along the X axis between the T series
reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2 (2-path
w

control)
8152 Distance along the Z axis between the
reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2
w

352
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

8160 Synchronous, composite, or superimposed <Axis>

control T series
(2-path
control)

#7 NRS : When the system is reset, synchronous,

composite, or superimposed control is released

om
(0)/not released (1)
#6 SPE : The synchronization deviation is the difference
between the positioning deviation of the master
axis and that of the slave axis (0)/the slave
axis plus the acceleration/deceleration delay
(1)
#5 :
#4 :

r.c
#3 :
#2 ZSI : Machine coordinates along the Z–axis for the PRM
other path subject to mixed control are fetched 8160#0
with the sign as is (0)/inverted (1)
#1 XSI : The machine coordinates along the X–axis for PRM
the other path subject to mixed control are 8160#0

e
fetched with the sign as is (0)/inverted (1)
#0 MXC : During mixed control of the X– or Z–axis,
measurement direct input function B for tool

8161
nt
compensation performs calculation based on:
Machine coordinates for the path being
controlled (0)/another path subject to mixed
control (1)
Composite control <Axis>
ce
T series
(2-path
control)

#7 :
#6 :
nc

#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 CZM : When two Cs contour axes are subject to
mixed control, the function for mixing zero point
.c

return commands for Cs contour axes is not

used (0)/used (1)
#0 NMR : When an axis subject to mixed control is
placed in servo–off state mixed control is
stopped (0)/mixed control is not stopped to
w

disable follow–up for the axis (1)

w
w

353
 Number Contents Remarks

8162 Synchronous, composite, superimposed <Axis> 1

control T series
(2-path
control)

#7 MUM: During axis recomposition, a movement along

an axis is enabled (0)/disabled (1).
2

om
#6 MCD : When mixed control is applied, the coordinate
system direction for the relevant axes remains
the same without applying mirror image (0)/is
reversed by applying mirror image (1).
#5 MPS : When composite control is terminated, the 3
workpiece coordinate system is not set (0)/set
(1) automatically
#4 MPM: When composite control is started, the

r.c
workpiece coordinate system is not set
automatically (0)/set automatically (1) 4
#3 OMR: Superimposed mirror–image control is not
applied (0)/applied (1)
#2 PKU : In the parking state,
The absolute, relative, and machine

e
coordinates are not updated (0)/ 5
The absolute and relative coordinates are
updated. The machine coordinates are not

nt
updated (1)
#1 SER : The synchronization deviation is not detected
(0)/detected (1)
#0 SMR : Synchronous mirror–image control is not
applied (0)/applied (1)
6
ce
8163 Axis recomposition <Axis>
T series
(2-path 7
control)

#7 NUM : In cases other than synchronous axis

nc

recomposition, a command for movement

along an axis can be specified (0)/cannot be
specified (1).
8
#6 :
#5 :
#4 SCD : In synchronous control, the coordinates of the
.c

master axis and slave axis are the same (0)/

opposite (1). 9
#3 SCM : Workpiece coordinates are calculated from the
master axis and slave axis (0)/from the slave
axis (1).
w

#2 SPS : When synchronous control is terminated, the

coordinate system of the master axis is set (0)/ 10
not set (1).
#1 SPM : When synchronous control is started, the
w

coordinate system of the master axis is set

(0)/not set (1).
#0 MDX : During axis recomposition, the coordinates of
the local system are displayed (0)/the
w

coordinates of the other system are displayed

(1).

354
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

8180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized T series

under synchronous control (2-path
control)

8181 Synchronization error limit of each axis T series

[Detection unit] (2-path
control)

om
8182 Display of the synchronization error of an axis T series
[Detection unit] (2-path
control)

8183 Axis under composite control in path 1 T series

corresponding to an axis of path 2 (2-path
control)

r.c
8184 Coordinates of the reference point of an axis T series
on the coordinate system of another axis under (2-path
composite control [0.001mm] control)

8185 Workpiece coordinates at the reference <Axis>

position T series

e
(2-path
control)

8186 Master axis under superimposed control T series

8190
nt
Rapid traverse rate of an axis under
superimposed control [mm/min]
(2-path
control)

T series
(2-path
ce
control)

8191 F0 velocity of rapid traverse override of an axis T series

under superimposed control [mm/min] (2-path
control)

8192 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant T series

nc

in rapid traverse of an axis under (2-path

superimposed control [msec] control)

8193 Maximum cutting feedrate under superimposed T series

control [mm/min] (2-path
control)
.c

8194 Maximum cutting feedrate of an axis under T series

superimposed control [mm/min] (2-path
control)
w
w
w

355
 46) Parameters for inclined axis control

Number Contents Remarks 1

8200 Inclined axis control

#7 :
#6 :
#5 : 2

om
#4 :
#3 AZR : The machine tool is moved (0)/is not moved (1)
along the Z axis during manual reference
position return along the Y axis under inclined
axis control 3
#2 :
#1 :
#0 AAC : Does not perform (0)/performs (1) inclined axis

r.c
control
8210 Inclination angle for inclined axis control 4
8211 Axis number of a slanted axis subject to
slanted axis control

8212 Axis number of a Cartesian axis subject to

e
slanted axis control
5

Number

8240
nt
47) Parameters for B-axis function (T series)

Contents Remarks

T series
6
ce
#7 MST : When an M command for starting B-axis
operation is specified, FIN is awaited (0)/not
awaited (1).
7
#6 ABS : A B-axis command is incremental (0)/absolute
(1).
nc

#5 SOV : G110 overlaps the next block (0)/does not

overlap the next block (1).
#4 TEM : When offsetting is performed in a T block, a 8
movement along the axis is made after the M
function (0)/the M function is performed after a
movement along the axis (1).
#3 REF : Reference position return operation is the
.c

same as manual reference position return 9

operation (0)/positioning is performed when a
reference position is established (1).
#2 :
w

#1 :
#0 : 10
w
w

356
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

8241 Miscellaneous function T series

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 MDF : When the execution of a B-axis operation
command is started, G98 mode is set (0)/G99
mode is set (1).
#1 MDG: When the execution of a B-axis operation
command is started, G00 mode is set (0)/G01
mode is set (1).
#0 FXC : G84 rotates the spindle in the forward or
reverse direction after M05 (0)/without M05.

r.c
8242 Offset value T series

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :

e
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 COF

8250
nt
: A separate B-axis offset value is used for each
tool post (0)/a common B-axis offset value is
shared by the tool posts (1).
Axis number used for B-axis control
T series
(2-path
control)
T series
ce
8251 M code for specifying the start of first program T series
operation

8252 M code for specifying the start of second T series

program operation

8253 M code for specifying the start of third program T series

nc

operation

8257 T code number for tool offset cancellation T series

8258 Clearance, used in canned cycle G83, for the T series

B–axis
.c
w
w
w

357
 48) Parameters for simple synchronous control

Number Contents Remarks 1

8301 Axis number of the master axis M series

#7 SOF : The synchronization function is not used (0)/

used (1).
#6 : 2

om
SY1 SY0
#5 :
#4 : 0 0 The simple synchronous
#3 : control is not performed
#2 : 0 1 The X axis is the master axis
#1 SY1 : 1 0 The Y axis is the master axis 3
#0 SY0 : 1 1 The Z axis is the master axis

8302 Simple synchronous control M series

r.c
#7 :
#6 : 4
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :

e
#1 ATS : Automatic setting of grid positioning for 5
simplified synchronous control is not started
(0)/started (1)

8311
nt
#0 ATE : Automatic setting of grid positioning for
simplified synchronous control is disabled (0)/
enabled (1)
Axis number of the master axis for an axis
subject to synchronous control
<Axis>
6
ce
T series : Set the axis number (0 to 7) of the
master axis for each axis.
Setting 7
Tens digit Units digit
Parameter for Master axis for Master axis for
the first axis the second the first axis
nc

axis
Parameter for Master axis for Master axis for 8
the second the fourth axis the third axis
axis
Parameter for Master axis for Master axis for
the third axis the sixth axis the fifth axis
.c

Parameter for Master axis for Master axis for 9

the fourth axis the eighth axis the seventh
axis
When the master axis for the fourth axis is the
second axis, set 00, 20, 00, and 00.
w

M series: Set the axis number (1 to 8) of the

master axis for each axis.
10
8312 Slave axis mirror image setting (100 or more: <Axis>
w

Reversed) T series

8313 Limit of the difference between the amount of

positioning deviation of the m
w

8314 Allowable error in synchronization error check <Axis>

M series

358
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

8315 Maximum compensation value for <Axis>

synchronization M series
Alarm 407

8316 Difference between reference counters for M series

master and slave axes [Detection unit]

om
8317 Torque difference alarm detection time [msec] M series

49) Program check termination

Number Contents Remarks

8341 Program number subject to check termination

r.c
8342 Sequence number subject to check termination

8343 Program number where collation is to be

stopped (when an 8–digit program number is
used)

e
50) Parameters for chopping

Number

8360
nt
Chopping
Contents

#7 CHPX : On the chopping screen, the chopping

Remarks

M series
ce
speed can be set (0)/not be set (1)
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
nc

#1 :
#0 CPRPD : A rapid traverse override for a section from
the current position to the R point is
determined as follows:
A chopping override is enabled (0)/
An ordinary rapid traverse override is
.c

enabled (1)

8370 Chopping axis M series

8371 Chopping reference point (R point) M series

w

[Increment system]

8372 Chopping upper dead point [Increment system] M series

8373 Chopping lower dead point [Increment system] M series

w

8374 Chopping speed [mm/min] M series

8375 Maximum chopping feedrate [mm/min] M series

w

8376 Chopping compensation scaling factor [%] M series

8377 Compensation start tolerance M series

[Increment system]

359
 51) High–precision control (M series)

Number Contents Remarks 1

8400 Parameter 1 for determining a linear M series
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

8401 Parameter 2 for determining a linear M series

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation 2

om
8402 Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation M series

#7 BADO:
#6 :
#5 DST : Be sure to set 1. 3
#4 BLK : Be sure to set 0.
#3 :
#2 : BADO NWBL Meaning

r.c
#1 NWBL: 0 0 Linear type is used for
#0 : acceleration/deceleration prior to 4
pre–read interpolation
1 1 Bell–shape type is used for
acceleration/deceleration prior to
pre–read interpolation

e
8403 Stored stroke limit M series 5
#7 SGO : When a G00 code is specified in the RISC PRM
mode, the setting of #1 is followed (0)/G00 is 8403#1=1

#6
#5
#4
:
:
:
nt
executed in a simplified manner in HPCC
mode (1).
6
ce
#3 PLC2 : In HPCC mode, a strokek check before
movement for the stored stroke limit –2 is not
performed (0)/performed (1) 7
#2 PLC1 : In HPCC mode, a strokek check before
movement for stored stroke limit 1 is not
performed (0)/performed (1)
nc

#1 MSU : If A G00, M, S, T, or B code is specified in

HPCC mode, an alarm is issued (0)/the 8
command is executed (1).
#0 :

8410 Allowable velocity difference in velocity M series

.c

determination considering the velocity

difference at corners [mm/min]
9
8416 Look-ahead bell-shaped M series
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
w

10
w
w

360
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

8451 Automatic velocity control M series

#7 NOF : In a block where automatic velocity control is

validated, the F command is validated (0)/
ignored (1)
#6 :
#5 :

om
#4 ZAG : The velocity is not determined (0)/determined
(1) according to the angle at which the machine
descends along the Z–axis
#3 :
#2 :
#1 :
#0 USE : Automatic velocity control is not applied (0)/
applied (1)

r.c
8452 Range of velocity fluctuation to be ignored [%] M series
(Standard setting: 10)

8456 Area–2 override [%] (Standard setting: 80) M series

8457 Area–3 override [%] (Standard setting: 70) M series

e
8458 Area–4 override [%] (Standard setting: 60) M series

8455 Automatic velocity control

#7
#6
#5
#4
:
:
:
:
nt
ce
#3 :
#2 :
#1 CTY : Be sure to set to 1.
#0 CDC : Be sure to set to 0.

8464 Initial feedrate for automatic feedrate control M series

nc

8465 Maximum allowable feedrate for automatic M series

feedrate control

8470 Parameter for determining allowable M series

acceleration in velocity calculation considering
acceleration [msec]
.c

8475 Automatic velocity control M series

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
w

#4 :
#3 CIR : The function of automatic velocity control
considering acceleration and deceleration
during circular interpolation is not used (0)/
w

used (1)
#2 BIP : The function of deceleration at corners is not
used (0)/used (1). (Always set 1.)
#1 :
w

#0 :

361
 Number Contents Remarks

8480 Interpolation period M series 1

#7 :
#6 RI2 : Always set the following values.
#5 RI1 : RI2 RI1 RI0
#4 RI0 :
#3 : 0 1 0 2

om
#2 :
#1 :
#0 :

8481 Rapid traverse rate in HPCC mode M series 3

PRM
8403#7

r.c
8485 Smooth interpolation M series

#7 : 4
#6 :
#5 CDSP: Disables (0)/enables (1) smooth interpolation
in HPCC mode.
#4 :

e
#3 : 5
#2 :
#1 :
#0

8486
:
nt
Maximum travel distance of a block where
smooth interpolation is applied
[Input increment]
M series
6
ce
52) Parameters for macro executor and etc.
7
Number Contents Remarks

8650 Key code

nc

#7 :
#6 : 8
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
.c

#1 CNA : If an NC alarm is issued while the C executor 9

user screen is displayed, the screen is
changed according to PRM3111#7 (0)/is not
changed (1).
w

#0 RSK : Upon reset, key codes are not passed to the

application (0)/passed to the application (1). 10
w
w

362
 8. PARAMETERS

Number Contents Remarks

8701 Read method

#7 :
#6 CTV : When CAP II is provided, 1 must be specified.
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :

om
#2 :
#1 PLD : Read operation is performed after the P-code
loader is cleared (0)/without clearing the
P-code loader (1).
#0 :
8703 MAP

r.c
#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
#2 :
#1 LCL : A change in the internal state of the NC is not

e
reported to the host (0)/reported to the host (1).
#0 DLF : If file transfer using MAP, for example, is
terminated, an incomplete file is not deleted (0)/

8760

8781
nt
deleted (1).
Number of a program transferred to the Power
Mate by using the I/O Link

Amount of DRAM used with the C executor

ce
[64k Byte]

8801 Bit parameter 1 for machine tool builder

8802 Bit parameter 2 for machine tool builder

8811 2–word parameter 1 for machine tool builder

nc

8812 2–word parameter 2 for machine tool builder

8813 2–word parameter 3 for machine tool builder

8901 Maintenance
.c

#7 :
#6 :
#5 :
#4 :
#3 :
w

#2 :
#1 :
#0 FAN : A fan motor error is detected (0)/not detected
(1). (Use inhibited)
w
w

363
 Number Contents Remarks

9000 Macro executor 1

#7 :
#6 :
#5 MKG : The graphic screen is displayed (0)/not
displayed (1)
#4 RSC : When reset, #100 to #149 in the P-CODE is
2

om
cleared (0)/not cleared (1)
#3 :
#2 STP : Conversational macros are executed (0)/not
executed (1)
#1 NDP : The P-CODE variables screen is not displayed PRM9002, 3
(0)/displayed (1) 9003
#0 SQN : While the P-CODE is executed, O and N
numbers represent those for the user program

r.c
(0)/those for the P-CODE (1)
4
9002 Break program number for the conversational PRM
macro 9000#2

9003 Break sequence number for the conversational

macro

e
5

nt 6
ce
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

364
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

9.1 Alarms Displayed on NC Screen

9.1.1 Program errors (P/S alarm)

Number Message Contents

000 PLEASE TURN OFF A parameter which requires the pow-
POWER er off was input, turn off power.

om
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect
parity was input).
Correct the program or tape.

002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters

in a block is odd). This alarm will be
generated only when the TV check is
effective.

003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allow-

r.c
able number of digits was input. (Re-
fer to the item of max. programmable
dimensions.)

004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign “ – ” was input

without an address at the beginning
of a block. Modify the program .

e
005 NO DATA AFTER The address was not followed by the
ADDRESS appropriate data but was followed by
another address or EOB code.
Modify the program.

006 nt
ILLEGAL USE OF
NEGATIVE SIGN
Sign “ – ” input error (Sign “ – ” was
input after an address with which it
cannot be used. Or two or more “ – ”
signs were input.)
Modify the program.
ce
007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL Decimal point “ . ” input error (A deci-
POINT mal point was input after an address
with which it can not be used. Or two
decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.

009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Unusable character was input in sig-

nc

nificant area.
Modify the program.

010 IMPROPER G–CODE An unusable G code or G code corre-

sponding to the function not provided
is specified. Modify the program.

011 NO FEEDRATE Feedrate was not commanded to a

.c

COMMANDED cutting feed or the feedrate was inad-

equate. Modify the program.
014 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND In variable lead threading, the lead
(T series) incremental and decremental out-
putted by address K exceed the
w

maximum command value or a com-

mand such that the lead becomes a
negative value is given.
Modify the program.
w

CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified

(M series) without the option for threading / syn-
chronous feed.
Modify the program.
w

365
 Number Message Contents
015 TOO MANY AXES An attempt was made to move the
COMMANDED machine along the axes, but the
1
(M series) number of the axes exceeded the
specified number of axes controlled
simultaneously. Alternatively, in a
block where where the skip function
activated by the torque–limit
reached signal (G31 P99/P98) was
2

om
specified, either moving the machine
along an axis was not specified, or
moving the machine along multiple
axes was specified. Specify move-
ment only along one axis.
3
TOO MANY AXES An attempt has been made to move
COMMANDED the tool along more than the maxi-
(T series) mum number of simultaneously con-

r.c
trolled axes. Alternatively, no axis
movement command or an axis
movement command for two or more 4
axes has been specified in the block
containing the command for skip us-
ing the torque limit signal (G31
P99/98). The command must be ac-
companied with an axis movement

e
command for a single axis, in the 5
same block.

020 OVER TOLERANCE OF In circular interpolation (G02 or G03),

nt
RADIUS difference of the distance between
the start point and the center of an
arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded
the value specified in parameter No.
3410.
6
ce
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected
COMMANDED plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
commanded in circular interpolation. 7
Modify the program.

022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS The command for circular interpola-

tion lacks arc radius R or coordinate
nc

I, J, or K of the distance between the

start point to the center of the arc.
8
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS In circular interpolation by radius
COMMAND designation, negative value was
(T series) commanded for address R. Modify
the program.
.c

025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 9

G02/G03 (M series) –digit column feed in circular inter-
polation. Modify the program.

027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN No axis is specified in G43 and G44

w

G43/G44 (M series) blocks for the tool length offset type

C.
Offset is not canceled but another 10
axis is offset for the tool length offset
type C. Modify the program.
w

028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT In the plane selection command, two

or more axes in the same direction
are commanded.
Modify the program.
w

366
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H
(M series) code is too large.
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by T
(T series) code is too large.
Modify the program.

om
030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by D/H
(M series) code for tool length offset or cutter
compensation is too large. Modify
the program.

ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number in T function spe-

(T series) cified for tool offset is tool large.
Modify the program.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN In setting an offset amount by G10,
G10 the offset number following address

r.c
P was excessive or it was not speci-
fied.
Modify the program.

032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE In setting an offset amount by G10 or

IN G10 in writing an offset amount by system
variables, the offset amount was ex-

e
cessive.
Modify the program.

033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be de-

(M series) termined for cutter compensation.
nt
NO SOLUTION AT CRC
(T series)
Modify the program.
A point of intersection cannot be de-
termined for tool nose radius com-
pensation. Modify the program.
ce
034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to
ST–UP /EXT BLK (M series) be performed in the G02 or G03
mode in cutter compensation C.
Modify the program.

NO CIRC ALLOWED IN The start up or cancel was going to

ST–UP /EXT BLK (T series) be performed in the G02 or G03
mode in tool nose radius compensa-
nc

tion. Modify the program.

035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G39 is commanded in cutter com-
G39 pensation B cancel mode or on the
(M series) plane other than offset plane. Modify
the program.

CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in

.c

G31 tool nose radius compensation

(T series) mode. Modify the program.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED Skip cutting (G31) was specified in
G31 cutter compensation mode.
w

(M series) Modify the program.

037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE G40 is commanded on the plane oth-
IN CRC er than offset plane in cutter com-
(M seires) pensation B. The plane selected by
using G17, G18 or G19 is changed in
w

cutter compensation C mode. Modify

the program.

CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE The offset plane is switched in tool

IN NRC nose radius compensation.
w

(T seires) Modify the program.

367
 Number Message Contents
038 INTERFERENCE IN Overcutting will occur in cutter com-
CIRCULAR BLOCK pensation C because the arc start
1
(M seires) point or end point coincides with the
arc center.
Modify the program.

INTERFERENCE IN Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-

CIRCULAR BLOCK dius compensation because the arc 2

om
(T series) start point or end point coincides with
the arc center.
Modify the program.

039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED Chamfering or corner R was speci-

IN NRC fied with a start–up, a cancel, or 3
(T series) switching between G41 and G42 in
tool nose radius compensation. The
program may cause overcutting to
occur in chamfering or corner R.

r.c
Modify the program.
040 INTERFERENCE IN Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra- 4
G90/G94 BLOCK (T series) dius compensation in canned cycle
G90 or G94. Modify the program.
041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter com-
(M seires) pensation C. Two or more blocks are

e
consecutively specified in which 5
functions such as the auxiliary func-
tion and dwell functions are per-
formed without movement in the cut-
nt
INTERFERENCE IN NRC
(T seires)
ter compensation mode. Modify the
program.

Overcutting will occur in tool nose ra-

dius compensation.
Modify the program.
6
ce
042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN Tool offset (G45 to G48) is comman-
CRC ded in cutter compensation. Modify
(M series) the program. 7
043 ILLEGAL T–CODE In a system using the DRILL–MATE
COMMAND with an ATC, a T code was not speci-
(M series) fied together with the M06 code in a
nc

block. Alternatively, the Tcode was

out of range.
8
044 G27–G30 NOT ALLOWED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in
IN FIXED CYC (M sries) canned cycle mode.
Modify the program.

046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE Other than P2, P3 and P4 are com-

.c

RETURN COMMAND manded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th refer- 9

ence position return command.
Modify the program.

047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Two or more parallel axes (in parallel
w

(M series) with a basic axis) have been speci-

fied upon start–up of three–dimen-
sional tool compensation or three– 10
dimensional coordinate conversion.

048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND Start–up of three–dimensional tool

w

(M series) compensation or three–dimensional

coordinate conversion has been at-
tempted, but the three basic axes
used when Xp, Yp, or Zp is omitted
are not set in parameter No. 1022.
w

368
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED Optional chamfering or corner R is
IN THRD BLK (M series) commanded in the thread cutting
block.
Modify the program.

CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED Chamfering or corner R is comman-

IN THRD BLK(T series) ded in the thread cutting block.
Modify the program.

om
051 MISSING MOVE AFTER Improper movement or the move dis-
CHF/CNR tance was specified in the block next
(M series) to the optional chamfering or corner
R block.
Modify the program.

MISSING MOVE AFTER Improper movement or the move dis-

CHF/CNR tance was specified in the block next
(T series) to the chamfering or corner R block.

r.c
Modify the program.

052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or
CHF/CNR (M series) corner R block is not G01,G02 or
G03.
Modify the program.

CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or

e
CHF/CNR (T series) corner R block is not G01.
Modify the program.
053 TOO MANY ADDRESS For systems without the arbitary
COMMANDS (M series) angle chamfering or corner R cutting,
nt
TOO MANY ADDRESS
a comma was specified. For sys-
tems with this feature, a comma was
followed by something other than R
or C Correct the program.

In the chamfering and corner R com-

ce
COMMANDS (T seires) mands, two or more of I, K and R are
specified. Otherwise, the character
after a comma(”,”) is not C or R in di-
rect drawing dimensions program-
ming. Modify the program.

054 NO TAPER ALLOWED A block in which chamfering in the

nc

AFTER CHF/CNR specified angle or the corner R was

(T series) specified includes a taper command.
Modify the program.

055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In the arbitrary angle chamfering or

CHF/CNR (M series) corner R block, the move distance is
less than chamfer or corner R
amount.
.c

Modify the program.

MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In chamfering or corner R block, the

CHF/CNR (T series) move distance is less than chamfer
or corner R amount.
w

Modify the program.

056 NO END POINT & ANGLE Neither the end point nor angle is
IN CHF/CNR (T series) specified in the command for the
block next to that for which only the
angle is specified (A). In the cham-
w

fering comman, I(K) is commanded

for the X(Z) axis.
Modify the program.
057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK Block end point is not calculated cor-
w

END rectly in direct dimension drawing

(T series) programming.

369
 Number Message Contents
058 END POINT NOT FOUND In a arbitrary angle chamfering or
(M series) corner R cutting block, a specified
1
axis is not in the selected plane.
Modify the program.

END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct
(T series) dimension drawing programming.
Modify the program. 2

om
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT In an external program number
FOUND search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program
specified for searching is being
edited in background processing.
Check the program number and ex-
3
ternal signal. Or discontinue the
background eiting.

r.c
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT Commanded sequence number was
FOUND not found in the sequence number
search. Check the sequence num- 4
ber.

061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT Address P or Q is not specified in

FOUND IN G70–G73 G70, G71, G72, or G73 command.
(T series) Modify the program.

e
062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1) The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is 5
G71–G76 zero or negative value.
(T series) 2) The repetitive count in G73 is
nt zero or negative value.
3) The negative value is specified
to ∆i or ∆k is zero in G74 or G75.
4) A value other than zero is speci-
fied to address U or W though ∆i
6
ce
or ∆k is zero in G74 or G75.
5) A negative value is specified to
∆d, though the relief direction in
G74 or G75 is determined. 7
6) Zero or a negative value is speci-
fied to the height of thread or
depth of cut of first time in G76.
nc

7) The specified minimum depth of

cut in G76 is greater than the 8
height of thread.
8) An unusable angle of tool tip is
specified in G76.
Modify the program.
.c

063 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT The sequence number specified by 9

FOUND address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73
(T series) command cannot be searched.
Modify the program.
w

064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which cannot be

MONOTONOUSLY made by monotonic machining was
(T series) specified in a repetitive canned cycle
10
(G71 or G72).
w
w

370
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

065 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 1) G00 or G01 is not commanded at
G71–G73 the block with the sequence
(T series) number which is specified by ad-
dress P in G71, G72, or G73
command.
2) Address Z(W) or X(U) was com-
manded in the block with a se-

om
quence number which is speci-
fied by address P in G71 or G72,
respectively.
Modify the program.

066 IMPROPER G–CODE IN An unallowable G code was com-

G71–G73 manded beween two blocks speci-
(T series) fied by address P in G71, G72, or
G73. Modify the program.

r.c
067 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI G70, G71, G72, or G73 command
MODE with address P and Q.
(T series) Modify the program.

069 FORMAT ERROR IN The final move command in the

G70–G73 blocks specified by P and Q of G70,
(T series) G71, G72, and G73 ended with
chamfering or corner R.

e
Modify the program.

070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.

MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs,

071
nt
DATA NOT FOUND
then retry.

The address to be searched was not

found. Or the program with specified
program number was not found in
program number search.
ce
Check the data.

072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored

exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option),
200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000
(option). Delete unnecessary pro-
grams and execute program regis-
teration again.
nc

073 PROGRAM NUMBER The commanded program number

ALREADY IN USE has already been used.
Change the program number or de-
lete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration
again.
.c

074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM The program number is other than 1

NUMBER to 9999.
Modify the program number.

075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a

w

program whose number was pro-

tected.

076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (program number) was

not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 com-
w

mand. Modify the program.

077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING The subprogram was called in five

ERROR folds. Modify the program.
w

371
 Number Message Contents
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence
number which was specified by ad-
1
dress P in the block which includes
an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not
found. The sequence number speci-
fied by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program
is being edited in background pro-
2

om
cessing. Correct the program, or dis-
continue the background editing.

079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR In memory or program collation, a

program in memory does not agree
with that read from an external I/O 3
device. Check both the programs in
memory and those from the external
device.

r.c
080 G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT In the automatic tool length mea-
ASSERTED surement function (G37), the mea- 4
(M series) surement position reach signal
(XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turned on
within an area specified in parameter
6254 6255 (value ε).
This is due to a setting or operator er-

e
ror. 5
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT In the automatic tool compensation
ASSERTED function (G36, G37), the measure-

nt
(T series) ment position reach signal (XAE or
ZAE) is not turned on within an area
specified in parameter 6254 (value
ε).
This is due to a setting or operator er-
ror.
6
ce
081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT Tool length automatic measurement
FOUND IN G37 (G37) was specified without a H
(M series) code. (Automatic tool length mea- 7
surement function) Modify the pro-
gram.

OFFSET NUMBER NOT Automatic tool compensation (G36,

nc

FOUND IN G37 (T series) G37) was specified without a T code.

(Automatic tool compensation func-
tion) Modify the program. 8
082 H–CODE NOT ALLOWED H code and automatic tool com-
IN G37 pensation (G37) were specified in
(M series) the same block. (Automatic tool
length measurement function)
.c

Modify the program. 9

T–CODE NOT ALLOWED IN T code and automatic tool com-
G37 pensation (G36, G37) were specified
(T series) in the same block. (Automatic tool
w

compensation function)
Modify the program.
10
083 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND In automatic tool length measure-
IN G37 ment, an invalid axis was specified
w

(M series) or the command is incremental.

Modify the program.

ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND In automatic tool compensation

IN G37 (G36, G37), an invalid axis was spe-
(T series) cified or the command is incremen-
w

tal. Modify the program.

372
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory
by using Reader / Puncher interface,
an overrun, parity or framing error
was generated. The number of bits of
input data or setting of baud rate or
specification No. of I/O unit is incor-
rect.

om
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory
by using Reader / Puncher interface,
the ready signal (DR) of reader /
puncher was turned off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or
cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is
defective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory
by using Reader / Puncher interface,

r.c
though the read terminate command
is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or
P.C.B. is defective.

088 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR File data transfer via OSI–ETHER-
(CHANNEL–1) NET has been stopped due to a
transfer error.

e
089 LAN FILE TRANS ERROR File data transfer via OSI–ETHER-
(CHANNEL–2) NET has been stopped due to a
transfer error.

090 nt
REFERENCE RETURN
INCOMPLETE
The reference position return cannot
be performed normally because the
reference position return start point
is too close to the reference position
or the speed is too slow. Separate
ce
the start point far enough from the
reference position, or specify a suffi-
ciently fast speed for reference posi-
tion return. Check the program con-
tents.

091 REFERENCE RETURN Manual reference position return

nc

INCOMPLETE cannot be performed when automat-

ic operation is halted.

092 AXES NOT ON THE The commanded axis by G27 (Refer-

REFERENCE POINT ence position return check) did not
return to the reference position.

094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the

.c

(COORD CHG) program is restarted. (After the auto-

matic operation was interrupted, the
coordinate system setting operation
was performed.)
Perform the correct operation ac-
cording to th operator’s manual.
w

095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the

(EXT OFS CHG) program is restarted. (After the auto-
matic operation was interrupted, the
external workpiece offset amount
w

changed.)
Perform the correct operation ac-
cording to th operator’s manual.
w

373
 Number Message Contents
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the
(WRK OFS CHG) program is restarted. (After the auto-
1
matic operation was interrupted, the
workpiece offset amount changed.)
Perform the correct operation ac-
cording to the operator’s manual.

097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be directed when the 2

om
(AUTO EXEC) program is restarted. (After power
ON, after emergency stop or P / S 94
to 97 reset, no automatic operation is
performed.) Perform automatic op-
eration.
3
098 G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE A command of the program restart
RETURN was specified without the reference
position return operation after power
ON or emergency stop, and G28 was

r.c
found during search.
Perform the reference position re- 4
turn.
099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED After completion of search in pro-
AFT. SEARCH gram restart, a move command is
given with MDI. Move axis before a
move command or don’t interrupt

e
MDI operation. 5
100 PARAMETER WRITE On the PARAMETER (SETTING)
ENABLE screen, PWE (parameter writing en-

101
nt
PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY
abled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then re-
set the system.

The power turned off while rewriting

the memory by program edit opera-
tion. If this alarm has occurred,
6
ce
press <RESET> while pressing
<PROG>, and only the program be-
ing edited will be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
7
109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was speci-
fied after P in the G08 code, or no val-
nc

ue was specified.

110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal

point display data exceeds the allow-
8
able range. Modify the program.

111 CALCULATED DATA The result of calculation turns out to

OVERFLOW be invalid, an alarm No.111 is issued.
.c

–1047 to –10–29, 0, 10–29 to 1047

Modify the program. 9
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (in-
cluding tan 90°)
Modify the program.
w

113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in

custom macro is commanded. 10
Modify the program.

114 FORMAT ERROR IN There is an error in other formats

w

MACRO than <Formula>.

Modify the program.
w

374
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE A value not defined as a variable
NUMBER number is designated in the custom
macro or in high–speed cycle ma-
chining.
The header contents are improper.
This alarm is given in the following
cases:

om
High speed cycle machining
1) The header corresponding to the
specified machining cycle num-
ber called is not found.
2) The cycle connection data value
is out of the allowable range (0 –
999).
3) The number of data in the header
is out of the allowable range (0 –

r.c
32767).
4) The start data variable number of
executable format data is out of
the allowable range (#20000 –
#85535).
5) The last storing data variable
number of executable format

e
data is out of the allowable range
(#85535).
6) The storing start data variable

116
nt
WRITE PROTECTED
number of executable format
data is overlapped with the vari-
able number used in the header.
Modify the program.

The left side of substitution state-

ce
VARIABLE ment is a variable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.

118 PARENTHESIS NESTING The nesting of bracket exceeds the

ERROR upper limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.

119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative. Or

nc

BCD argument is negative, and other

values than 0 to 9 are present on
each line of BIN argument.
Modify the program.

122 FOUR FOLD MACRO The macro modal call is specified

MODAL–CALL four fold.
.c

Modify the program.

123 CAN NOT USE MACRO Macro control command is used dur-
COMMAND IN DNC ing DNC operation.
Modify the program.
w

124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO – END does not correspond to 1

: 1. Modify the program.

125 FORMAT ERROR IN <Formula> format is erroneous.

MACRO Modify the program.
w

126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1
n
3 is not established.

Modify the program.

127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT NC and custom macro commands

IN SAME BLOCK coexist.
w

Modify the program.

375
 Number Message Contents
128 ILLEGAL MACRO The sequence number specified in
SEQUENCE NUMBER the branch command was not 0 to
1
9999. Or, it cannot be searched.
Modify the program.

129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT An address which is not allowed in

ADDRESS <Argument Designation > is used.
Modify the program. 2

om
130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION An axis control command was given
by PMC to an axis controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command
was given by CNC to an axis con-
trolled by PMC. Modify the program. 3
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL Five or more alarms have generated
ALARM MESSAGES in external alarm message.
Consult the PMC ladder diagram to

r.c
find the cause.

132 ALARM NUMBER NOT No alarm No. concerned exists in ex- 4

FOUND ternal alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.

133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. Small section data is erroneous in

ALARM MSG external alarm message or external

e
operator message. Check the PMC
ladder diagram.
5
135 ILLEGAL ANGLE The index table indexing positioning
COMMAND angle was instructed in other than an
nt
(M series)

SPINDLE ORIENTATION
PLEASE
integral multiple of the value of the
minimum angle.
Modify the program.

Without any spindle orientation , an

attept was made for spindle index-
6
ce
(T series) ing. Perform spindle orientation.
136 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND In index table [Link] con-
(M series) trol axis was instructed together with 7
the B axis.
Modify the program.

C/H–CODE & MOVE CMD A move command of other axes was

nc

IN SAME BLK. (T series) specified to the same block as

spindle indexing addresses C, H. 8
Modify the program.

137 M–CODE & MOVE CMD IN A move command of other axes was
SAME BLK. specified to the same block as M–
(T series) code related to spindle indexing.
.c

Modify the program.

9
138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA The total distribution amount of the
OVERFLOW CNC and PMC is too large during su-
perimposed control of the extended
functions for PMC axis control.
w

139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC An axis is selected in commanding

CONTROL AXIS by PMC axis control.
10
Modify the program.
w

141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in

IN CRC the tool offset mode.
(M series) Modify the program.

142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE Scaling magnification is comman-

(M series) ded in other than 1 – 999999.
w

Correct the scaling magnification

setting (G51 Pp… or parameter 5411
or 5421).

376
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

143 SCALED MOTION DATA The scaling results, move distance,
OVERFLOW coordinate value and circular radius
(M series) exceed the maximum command val-
ue. Correct the program or scaling
mangification.

144 ILLEGAL PLANE The coordinate rotation plane and

SELECTED arc or cutter compensation C plane

om
(M series) must be the same. Modify the pro-
gram.

145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN The conditions are incorrect when

POLAR COORDINATE the polar coordinate interpolation
INTERPOLATION starts or it is canceled.
1) In modes other than G40,
G12.1/G13.1 was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane

r.c
selection. Parameters No. 5460
and No. 5461 are incorrectly spe-
cified.
Modify the value of program or
parameter.

146 IMPROPER G CODE G codes which cannot be specified

in the polar coordinate interpolation

e
mode was specified. See Chapter 4
and modify the program.

148 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA Automatic corner override decelera-

149
nt
(M series)

FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3

(M series)
tion rate is out of the settable range
of judgement angle. Modify the pa-
rameters (No.1710 to No.1714)

A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2

was specified as the life count type in
ce
the extended tool life management.

150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP Tool Group No. exceeds the maxi-
NUMBER mum allowable value.
Modify the program.

151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER The tool group commanded in the

NOT FOUND machining program is not set.
nc

Modify the value of program or pa-

rameter.

152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL The number of tools within one group
ENTRY exceeds the maximum value regis-
terable. Modify the number of tools.

153 T–CODE NOT FOUND In tool life data registration, a T code

.c

was not specified where one should

be. Modify the program.

154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE When the group is not commanded,
GROUP (M series) H99 or D99 was commanded.
Modify the program.
w

155 ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 In the machining program, M06 and

(M series) T code in the same block do not cor-
respond to the group in use.
Modify the program.
w

ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 Group No.∆∆ which is specified with

(T series) T∆∆ 88 of the machining program do
not included in the tool group in use.
Modify the program.
w

156 P/L COMMAND NOT P and L commands are missing at

FOUND the head of program in which the tool
group is set. Modify the program.

377
 Number Message Contents
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set
exceeds the maximum allowable
1
value. (See parameter No. 6800 bit 0
and 1) Modify the program.

158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA The tool life to be set is too exces-
sive. Modify the setting value.
2

om
159 TOOL DATA SETTING During executing a life data setting
INCOMPLETE program, power was turned off.
Set again.
160 MISMATCH WATING Diffrent M code is commanded in
M–CODE heads 1 and 2 as waiting M code.
T series (At two–path) Modify the program. 3
G72.1 NESTING ERROR A subprogram which performs rota-
(M series) tional copy with G72.1 contains

r.c
another G72.1 command.
161 G72.2 NESTING ERROR A subprogram which performs paral-
(M series) lel copy with G72.2 contains another
4
G72.2 command.

163 COMMAND G68/G69 G68 and G69 are not independently

INDEPENDENTLY (T series commanded in balance cut.
(At two–path)) Modify the program.

e
169 ILLEGAL TOOL Incorrect tool figure data in interfer-
5
GEOMETRY DATA ence check.
(T series (At two–path)) Set correct data, or select correct

175
nt
ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND
tool figure data.

Conditions when performing circular

interpolation start or cancel not cor-
rect. To change the mode to the cy-
lindrical interpolation mode, specify
6
ce
the command in a format of “G07.1
rotation–axis name radius of cylin-
der.”
7
176 IMPROPER G–CODE IN Any of the following G codes which
G107 cannot be specified in the cylindrical
(M series) interpolation mode was specified.
nc

1) G codes for positioning: G28,,

G73, G74, G76, G81 – G89, in-
cluding the codes specifying the 8
rapid traverse cycle
2) G codes for setting a coordinate
system: G52,G92,
3) G code for selecting coordinate
.c

system: G53, G54–G59

9
Modify the program.

IMPROPER G–CODE IN Any of the following G codes which

G107 cannot be specified in the cylindrical
w

(T series) interpolation mode was specified.

1) G codes for positioning: G28, 10
G76, G81 – G89, including the
codes specifying the rapid tra-
verse cycle
w

2) G codes for setting a coordinate

system: G50, G52
3) G code for selecting coordinate
system: G53, G54–G59
w

Modify the program.

177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error

(G05 MODE) Modify the program.

378
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

178 G05 COMMANDED IN G05 was commanded in the
G41/G42 MODE G41/G42 mode.
Correct the program.

179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) The number of controlled axes set by

SETTING ERROR the parameter 7510 exceeds the
maximum number. Modify the pa-
rameter setting value.

om
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR Remote buffer connection alarm has
(REMOTE BUF) generated. Confirm the number of
cables, parameters and I/O device.

181 FORMAT ERROR IN G81 G81 block format error

BLOCK
1) T (number of teeth) has not been
(M series)
instructed.
(hobbing machine, EGB)
2) Data outside the command

r.c
range was instructed by either T,
L, Q or P.
3) Calculation of the synchroniza-
tion coefficient has resulted in an
overflow.
Modify the program.

182 G81 NOT COMMANDED G83 (C axis servo lag quantity offset)

e
(M series) was instructed though synchroniza-
(hobbing machine) tion by G81 has not been instructed.
Correct the program.

183

184
nt
DUPLICATE G83
(COMMANDS)
(M series)
(hobbing machine)

ILLEGAL COMMAND IN
G83 was instructed before canceled
by G82 after compensating for the C
axis servo lag quantity by G83.

A command not to be instructed dur-

ce
G81 ing synchronization by G81 was
(M series) instructed.
(hobbing machine, EGB)
1) A C axis command by G00, G27,
G28, G29, G30, etc. was
instructed.
2) Inch/Metric switching by G20,
G21 was instructed.
nc

185 RETURN TO REFERENCE G81 was instructed without perform-

POINT ing reference position return after
(M series) power on or emergency stop. Per-
(hobbing machine) form reference position return.

186 PARAMETER SETTING Parameter error regarding G81

ERROR
.c

1) The C axis has not been set to be

(M series)
a rotary axis.
(hobbing machine, EGB)
2) A hob axis and position coder
gear ratio setting error.
Modify the parameter.
w

190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed con-

(M series) trol, the axis specification is wrong.
(See parameter No. 3770.) The spe-
cified axis command (P) contains an
w

illegal value.
Modify the program.
w

379
 Number Message Contents
194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle
SYNCHRO–MODE positioning (Cs–axis control) mode,
1
or rigid tapping mode was specified
during the serial spindle
synchronous control mode. Correct
the program so that the serial spindle
synchronous control mode is re-
leased in advance.
2

om
195 MODE CHANGE ERROR Switching command to contouring
mode, Cs axis control or rigid tap
mode or switching to spindle com-
mand mode is not correctly com-
pleted. 3
(This occurs when the response to
switch to the spindle control unit side
with regard to the switching com-

r.c
mand from the NC is incorrect.
This alarm is not for the purposes of
warning against mistakes in opera- 4
tion, but because continuing opera-
tion in this condition can be danger-
ous it is a P/S alarm.)

197 C–AXIS COMMANDED IN The program specified a movement

e
SPINDLE MODE along the Cs–axis when the signal
CON(DGN=G027#7) was off. Cor-
5
rect the program, or consult the PMC
ladder diagram to find the reason the

199

200
nt
MACRO WORD
UNDEFINED

ILLEGAL S CODE
signal is not turned on.

Undefined macro word was used.

Modify the custom macro.

In the rigid tap, an S value is out of

6
ce
COMMAND the range or is not specified.
Modify the program.

201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN In the rigid tap, no F value is speci-

RIGID TAP fied.
7
Modify the program.

202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tap, spindle distribution

nc

value is too large. (System error)

203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M 8
TAPPING code (M29) or an S command is in-
correct. Modify the program.

204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is

specified between the rigid M code
.c

(M29) block and G84 or G74 for M se-

ries (G84 or G88 for T series) block. 9
Modify the program.

205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when

OFF G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or G88
w

for T series) is executed though the

rigid M code (M29) is [Link]- 10
sult the PMC ladder diagram to find
the reason the DI signal
(DGNG061.1) is not turned on.
w

206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE Plane changeover was instructed in

(RIGID TAP) (M series) the rigid mode.
Modify the program.
w

380
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

210 CAN NOT COMAND M198 and M199 are executed in the
M198/M199 schedule operation. M198 is
executed in the DNC operation.
Modify the program.
1) The execution of an M198 or
M99 command was attempted
during scheduled operation. Al-

om
ternatively, the execution of an
M198 command was attempted
during DNC operation. Modify
the program.
2) The execution of an M99 com-
mand was attempted by an inter-
rupt macro during pocket ma-
chining in a multiple repetitive
canned cycle.

r.c
211 G31 (HIGH) NOT ALLOWED G31 is commanded in the per revolu-
IN G99 tion command when the high–speed
skip option is provided. Modify the
program.

212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The arbitrary angle chamfering or a

(M series) corner R is commanded or the plane
including an additional axis. Modify

e
the program.

ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawing dimensions pro-

(T series) gramming is commanded for the

213
nt
ILLEGAL COMMAND IN
SYNCHRO–MODE
(M series)
plane other than the Z–X plane.
Modify the program.

Movement is commanded for the

axis to be synchronously controlled.
Any of the following alarms occurred
ce
in the operation with the simple syn-
chronization control.
1) The program issued the move
command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual
continuous feed/manual handle
nc

feed/incremental feed command

to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the auto-
matic reference position return
command without specifying the
manual reference position return
after the power was turned on.
.c

4) The difference between the posi-

tion error amount of the master
and slave axes exceeded the
value specified in parameter
NO.8313.
w

ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A move command has been speci-

SYNCHRO–MODE fied for an axis subject to synchro-
(T series) nous control.
214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Coordinate system is set or tool com-
w

SYNCHRO–MODE pensation of the shift type is

executed in the synchronous con-
trol. Modify the program.

217 DUPLICATE G51.2 G51.2/G251 is further commanded

w

(COMMANDS) in the G51.2/G251 mode. Modify the

(T series) program.

381
 Number Message Contents
218 NOT FOUND P/Q P or Q is not commanded in the G251
COMMAND IN G251 block, or the command value is out of
1
(T series) the range. Modify the program.

219 COMMAND G250/G251 G251 and G250 are not independent

INDEPENDENTLY (T series) blocks.

220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, move- 2

om
SYNCHR–MODE (T series) ment is commanded by the NC pro-
gram or PMC axis control interface
for the synchronous axis.

221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Polygon machining synchronous op-

SYNCHR–MODE (T series) eration and axis control or balance
cutting are executed at a time. 3
Modify the program.

222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN Input and output are executed at a

r.c
BG.–EDIT (M series) time in the background edition.
Execute a correct operation.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE Reference position return has not
4
POINT been performed before the automat-
(M series) ic operation starts. Perform refer-
ence position return only when bit 0
of parameter 1005 is 0.

e
TURN TO REFERENCE Reference position return is neces- 5
POINT sary before cycle start.
(T series)
225 nt
SYNCHRONOUS/MIXED
CONTROL ERROR
(T series (At two–path))
This alarm is generated in the follow-
ing circumstances. (Searched for
during synchronous and mixed con-
trol command.)
1) When there is a mistake in axis
6
ce
number parameter setting.
2) When there is a mistake in con-
trol commanded.
7
Modify the program or the parameter.

226 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN A travel command has been sent to

SYNCHRO–MODE the axis being synchronized in syn-
nc

(T series (At two–path)) chronous mode. Modify the program

or the parameter.
8
229 CAN NOT KEEP This alarm is generated in the follow-
SYNCHRO–STATE ing circumstances.
(T series (2–path control))
1) When the synchro/mixed state
could not be kept due to system
.c

overload.
2) The above condition occurred in
9
CMC devices (hardware) and
synchro–state could not be kept.
(This alarm is not generated in nor-
w

mal use conditions.)

230 R CODE NOT FOUND The infeed quantity R has not been
10
(M series (grinding instructed for the G161 block. Or the
machine)) R command value is negative.
w

Modify the program.

w

382
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 Any of the following errors occurred
OR L50 in the specified format at the pro-
grammable–parameter input.
1) Address N or R was not entered.
2) A number not specified for a pa-
rameter was entered.
3) The axis number was too large.

om
4) An axis number was not speci-
fied in the axis–type parameter.
5) An axis number was specified in
the parameter which is not an
axis type. Correct the program.
6) An attempt was made to reset bit
4 of parameter 3202 (NE9) or
change parameter 3210

r.c
(PSSWD) when they are pro-
tected by a password.
Modify the program.

232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS Three or more axes (in the normal
COMMANDS (M series) direction control mode two or more
axes) were specified as helical axes
in the helical interpolation mode.

e
Modify the program

233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a

unit such as that connected via the

239
nt
BP/S ALARM
RS–232–C interface, other users
were using it.

While punching was being per-

formed with the function for control-
ling external I/O units ,background
ce
editing was performed.

240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed

during MDI operation.

241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN The end point, I, J, K, or R is missing

G02.2/G03.2 from a command for involute inter-
(M series) polation.
nc

242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN An invalid value has been specified

G02.2/G03.2 for involute interpolation.
(M series)
S The start or end point is within the
basic circle.
S I, J, K, or R is set to 0.
S The number of rotations between
.c

the start of the involute curve and

the start or end point exceeds
100.

243 OVER TOLERANCE OF The end point is not on the involute

w

END POINT curve which includes the start point

(M series) and thus falls outside the range spe-
cified with parameter No. 5610.

244 P/S ALARM In the skip function activated by the

w

(T series) torque limit signal, the number of ac-

cumulated erroneous pulses exceed
32767 before the signal was input.
Therefore, the pulses cannot be cor-
rected with one distribution.
w

Change the conditions, such as feed

rates along axes and torque limit,
and try again.

383
 Number Message Contents
245 T–CODE NOT ALOWEE IN One of the G codes, G50, G10, and
THIS BLOCK (T series) G04, which cannot be specified in
1
the same block as a T code, was
specified with a T code.

250 Z AXIS WRONG COMMAND A value for the Z–axis has been spe-
(ATC) cified in a block for the tool exchange
(M series) command (M06T_) on a system with 2

om
DRILL–MATE ARC installed.

251 ATC ERROR This alarm is issued in the following

(M series) cases (DRILL–MATE):
S An M06T_ command contains
an unusable T code. 3
S An M06 command has been spe-
cified when the Z machine coordi
nate is positive.

r.c
S The parameter for the current
tool number (No. 7810) is set to
0.
4
S An M06 command has been spe-
cified in canned cycle mode.
S A reference position return com-
mand (G27 to G44) and M06

e
command have been specified 5
in the same block.
S An M06 command has been spe-

nt S
cified in tool compensation mode
(G41 to G44).
An M06 command has been spe-
cified without performing refer-
ence position return after power–
on or the release of emergency
6
ce
stop.
S The machine lock signal or Z–
axis ignore signal has been 7
turned on during tool exchange.
S A pry alarm has been detected
during tool exchange.
nc

Refer to diagnosis No. 530 to deter-

mine the cause.
8
252 ATC SPINDLE ALARM An excessive error arose during
(M series) spindle positioning for ATC. For de-
tails, refer to diagnosis No. 531.
(Only for DRILL–MATE)
.c

253 G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE Binary input operation using high–

(M series) speed remote buffer (G05) or high–
9
speed cycle machining (G05) has
been specified in advance control
mode (G08P1). Execute G08P0; to
w

cancel advance control mode, be-

fore executing these G05 com-
mands.
10
5000 ILLEGAL COMMAND CODE The specified code was incorrect in
(M series) the high–precision contour control
w

(HPCC) mode.

5003 ILLEGAL PARAMETER There is an invalid parameter.

(HPCC)
(M series)
w

5004 HPCC NOT READY High–precision contour control is not

(M series) ready.

384
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE The number of words specified in a
BLOCK block exceeded 26 in the HPCC
(M series) mode.

5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE In the HPCC mode, the machine

(M series) moved beyond the limit.

5009 PARAMETER ZERO The maximum feedrate (parameter

om
(DRY RUN) No. 1422) or the feedrate in dry run
(M series) (parameter No. 1410) is 0 in the
HPCC model.

5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.

I/O is incorrect. modify the program.

5011 PARAMETER ZERO The maximum cutting feedrate (pa-

(CUT MAX) rameter No. 1422)is 0 in the HPCC

r.c
(M series) mode.

5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL G05 P10000 has been specified in a

START UP mode from which the system cannot
(HPCC) enter HPCC mode.
(M series)

5013 HPCC: CRC OFS REMAIN G05P0 has been specified in

AT CANCEL (M series) G41/G42 mode or with offset remain-

e
ing.

5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Transfer cannot be performed be-

(M series) cause no trace data exists.

5015

5016
nt
NO ROTATION AXIS
(M series)

ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF
The specified rotation axis does not
exist for tool axis direction handle
feed.

M codes which belonged to the same

ce
M CODE group were specified in a block. Al-
ternatively,an M code which must be
specified without other M codes in
the block was specified in a block
with other M codes.

5018 POLYGON SPINDLE In G51.2 mode, the speed of the

SPEED ERROR spindle or polygon synchronous axis
nc

(T series) either exceeds the clamp value or is

too small. The specified rotation
speed ratio thus cannot be main-
tained.

5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART An erroneous parameter was speci-

ERROR fied for restarting a program.
.c

A parameter for program restart is in-

valid.

5030 ILLEGAL COMMAND The end command (G110) was spe-

(G100) cified before the registratioin start
(T series) command (G101, G102, or G103)
w

was specified for the B–axis.

5031 ILLEGAL COMMAND While a registration start command

(G101, G102, G103) (G101, G102, or G103) was being
(T series) executed, another registration start
w

command was specified for the B–

axis.

5032 NEW PRG REGISTERED IN While the machine was moving

B–AXS MOVE (T series) about the B–axis, at attempt was
w

made to register another move com-

mand.

385
 Number Message Contents
5033 NO PROG SPACE IN Commands for movement about the
MEMORY B–AXS (T series) B–axis were not registered because
1
of insufficient program memory.

5034 PLURAL COMMAND IN Multiple movements were specified

G110 with the G110 code for the B–axis.
(T series)
2

om
5035 NO FEEDRATE A feedrate was not specified for cut-
COMMANDED B–AXS (T ting feed about the B–axis.
series)

5036 ADDRESS R NOT DEFINED Point R was not specified for the
IN G81–G86 (T series) canned cycle for the B–axis.
3
5037 ADDRESS Q NOT DEFINED Depth of cut Q was not specified for
IN G83 the G83 code (peck drilling cycle).
(T series) Alternatively, 0 was specified in Q for

r.c
the B–axis.

5038 TOO MANY START More than six M codes for starting
M–CODE COMMAND movement about the B–axis were
4
(T series) specified.

5039 START UNREGISTERED An attempt was made to execute a

B–AXS PROG (T series) program for the B–axis which had not
been registered.

e
5
5040 CAN NOT COMMANDED The machine could not move about
B–AXS MOVE (T series) the B–axis because parameter
No.8250 was incorrectly specified,

5041
nt
CAN NOT COMMANDED
G110 BLOCK (T series)
or because the PMC axis system
could not be used.

Blocks containing the G110 codes

were successively specified in tool–
tip radius compensation for the B–
6
ce
axis.

5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING Three–dimensional coordinate con-

(M series) version G68 has been specified 7
three or more times.

5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR A G68 command block contains a

(M series) format error. This alarm is issued in
nc

the following cases:

1) I, J, or K is missing from a G68 8
command block (missing coordi
nate rotation option).
2) I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 com-
mand block.
.c

3) R is missing from a G68 com-

mand block. 9
w

10
w
w

386
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER The parameter settings for straight-
([Link]) ness compensation contain an error.
Possible causes are as follows:
1) A parameter for a movement axis
or compensation axis contains
an axis number which is not
used.

om
2) More than 128 pitch error com-
pensation points exist between
the negative and positive end
points.
3) Compensation point numbers for
straightness compensation are
not assigned in the correct order.
4) No straightness compensation
point exists between the pitch er-

r.c
ror compensation points at the
negative and positive ends.
5) The compensation value for
each compensation point is too
large or too small.

5050 ILL–COMMAND IN A command for switching the major

e
CHOPPING MODE axis has been specified for circular
(M series) threading. Alternatively, a command
for setting the length of the major
axis to 0 has been specified for circu-

5051

5052
nt
M–NET CODE ERROR

M–NET ETX ERROR

lar threading.

Abnormal character received (other

than code used for transmission)

Abnormal ETX code

ce
5053 M–NET CONNECT ERROR Connection time monitoring error
(parameter No. 175)

5054 M–NET RECEIVE ERROR Polling time monitoring error

(parameter No. 176)

5055 M–NET PRT/FRT ERROR Vertical parity or framing error

nc

5057 M–NET BOARD SYSTEM Transmission timeout error

DOWN (parameter No. 177)
ROM parity error
CPU interrupt other than the above

5058 G35/G36 FORMAT ERROR A command for switching the major

(T series) axis has been specified for circular
.c

threading. Alternatively, a command

for setting the length of the major
axis to 0 has been specified for circu-
lar threading.

5059 RADIUS IS OUT OF RANGE A radius exceeding nine digits has

w

(T series) been specified for circular interpola-

tion with the center of the arc speci-
fied with I, J, and K.
w
w

387
 Number Message Contents
5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN Parameter setting is illegal.
G02.3/G03.3 No. 5641 (setting of the linear axis) is
1
(M series) not specified.
No. 5641 specifies an axis other than
a linear axis.
No. 5642 (setting of the rotation axis)
is not specified.
No. 5642 specifies an axis other than
2

om
a rotation axis.
The CNC cannot control the linear or
rotation axis (the value of No. 1010 is
exceeded).

5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN The command for exponential inter- 3

G02.3/G03.3 polation (G02.3/G03.3) contains a
(M series) format error.
Address I, J, or K is not specified.

r.c
Addresses I, J, and K are 0.

5062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The command for exponential inter- 4

G02.3/G03.3 polation (G02.3/G03.3) contains an
(M series) illegal value.
The specified value is not suitable for
exponential interpolation (for exam-
ple, a negative value is subject to ln).

e
5063 IS NOT PRESET AFTER The position counter was not preset 5
REF. before the start of workpiece thick-
(M series) ness measurement. This alarm is is-

nt sued in the following cases:

(1) An attempt has been made to
start measurement without first
establishing the origin.
(2) An attempt has been made to
6
ce
start measurement without first
presetting the position counter
after manual return to the origin.

5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT Circular interpolation has been spe-

7
(IS–B, IS–C) cified on a plane consisting of axes
(M series) having different increment systems.
nc

5065 DIFFERENT AXIS UNIT Axes having different increment sys-

(PMC AXIS) tems have been specified in the
(M series) same DI/DO group for PMC axis con- 8
trol. Modify the setting of parameter
No. 8010.

5066 RESTART ILLEGAL Sequence number 7xxx has been

SEQUENCE NUMBER read during search for the next se-
.c

(M series) quence number at program restart 9

for the return/restart function.

5068 G31 P90 FORMAT ERROR No movement axis or more than one
(M series) movement axis has been specified.
w

5069 WHL–C ; ILLEGAL P–DATA Erroneous P data has been specified

for center selection during grinding 10
wheel wear compensation.

5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified

w

for an address requiring a decimal

point.

5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION The same address has been speci-

ERROR fied two or more times in a single
w

block. Alternatively, two or more G

codes in the same group have been
specified in a single block.

388
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

5082 DATA SERVER ERROR This alarm is detailed on the data
server message screen.

5085 SMOOTH IPL ERROR 1 The smooth interpolation command

block contains an invalid command
format.

om
NOTE HPCC : High precision contour control

9.1.2 Background edit alarm (BP/S alarm)

Number Message Contents

??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same num-
ber as the P/S alarm that occurs in

r.c
ordinary program edit. (070, 071,
072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.)

140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in

the background a program being se-
lected in the foreground. (Note) Use
background editing correctly.

e
NOTE Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the
background edit screen instead of the ordinary alarm screen and
is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.

9.1.3
nt
Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm
ce
Number Message Contents
300 nth–axis origin return Manual reference position return is
required for the nth–axis (n=1 – 8).

301 APC alarm: nth–axis nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC communica-

communication tion error. Failure in data transmis-
nc

sion
Possible causes include a faulty
APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.

302 APC alarm: nth–axis over nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC overtime er-
time ror.
Failure in data transmission.
.c

Possible causes include a faulty

APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.

303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC framing error.
w

Failure in data transmission.

Possible causes include a faulty
APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.

304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC parity error.
w

Failure in data transmission.

Possible causes include a faulty
APC, cable, or servo interface mod-
ule.
w

305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC pulse error
error alarm.
APC [Link] or cable may be
faulty.

389
 Number Message Contents
306 APC alarm: nth–axis battery nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC battery volt-
voltage 0 age has decreased to a low level so
1
that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm. Battery or cable may be
faulty.

307 APC alarm: nth–axis battery nth–axis (n=1 – 8) axis APC battery
low 1 voltage reaches a level where the 2

om
battery must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery.

308 APC alarm: nth–axis battery nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC battery volt-
low 2 age has reached a level where the
battery must be renewed (including 3
when power is OFF).
APC alarm .Replace battery.

309 APC ALARM: Return to the origin has been at-

r.c
n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL tempted without first rotating the mo-
tor one or more times. Before return-
ing to the origin, rotate the motor one 4
or more times then turn off the power.

9.1.4 Serial pulse coder (APC) alarm

e
When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty
5
serial pulse coder or cable.

Number
350
nt Message
SPC ALARM: n AXIS
PULSE CODER
Contents
The n axis (axis 1–8) pulse coder has
a fault. Refer to diagnosis display
No. 202 for details.
6
ce
351 SPC ALARM: n AXIS n axis (axis 1–8) serial pulse coder
COMMUNICATION communication error (data transmis-
sion fault)
Refer to diagnosis display No. 203 7
for details.
nc

D The details of serial pulse coder alarm No.350

The details of serial pulse corder alarm No. 350 (pulse corder alarm) are
displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 202) as shown below.
8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
.c

#6 (CSA) : The serial pulse corder is defective. Replace it. 9

#5 (BLA) : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries.
This alarm has nothing to do with alarm No. 350
(serial pulse coder alarm).
w

#4 (PHA) : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is

defective. Replace the serial pulse coder or cable. 10
#3 (RCA) : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
#2 (BZA) : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first
w

time.
Make sure that the batteries are connected.
Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform
a reference position return. This alarm has nothing to
w

do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder alarm).

#1 (CKA) : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
#0 (SPH) : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is
defective. Replace the serial pulse coder or cable.
390
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

D The details of serial pulse coder alarm No.351

The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351 (communication alarm)
are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 203) as shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC STB PRM

om
#7 (DTE) : The serial pulse coder encountered a
communication error. The pulse coder, feedback
cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or
NC–axis board.
#6 (CRC) : The serial pulse coder encountered a
communication error. The pulse coder, feedback
cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.

r.c
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or
NC–axis board.
#5 (STB) : The serial pulse coder encountered a
communication error. The pulse coder, feedback
cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or
NC–axis board.

e
#4 (PRM) : An invalid parameter was found. Alarm No. 417
(invalid servo parameter) is also issued.

9.1.5
nt
Servo alarms
ce
Number Message Contents
400 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS The n–th axis (axis 1–8) overload
OVERLOAD signal is on. Refer to diagnosis dis-
play No. 201 for details.

401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS The n–th axis (axis 1–8) servo ampli-
VRDY OFF fier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
nc

Refer to procedure of trouble shoot-

ing.

404 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS Even though the n–th axis (axis 1–8)
VRDY ON READY signal (MCON) went off, the
servo amplifier READY signal
(DRDY) is still on. Or, when the pow-
er was turned on, DRDY went on
.c

even though MCON was off.

Check that the servo interface mod-
ule and servo amp are connected.

405 SERVO ALARM: Position control system fault. Due to

w

(ZERO POINT RETURN an NC or servo system fault in the

FAULT) reference position return, there is the
possibility that reference position re-
turn could not be executed correctly.
Try again from the manual reference
w

position return.

407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS The difference in synchronous axis

ERROR position deviation exceeded the set
value.
w

409 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS Abnormal servo motor load has been
TORQUE ALM detected. Alternatively, abnormal
spindle motor load has been de-
tected in Cs mode.

391
 Number Message Contents
410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS The position deviation value when
– EXCESS ERROR the n–th axis (axis 1–8) stops is larg-
1
er than the set value.
Refer to procedure of troubleshoot-
ing.

411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS The position deviation value when
– EXCESS ERROR the n–th axis (axis 1–8) moves is 2

om
larger than the set value.
Refer to procedure of troubleshoot-
ing.

413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS The contents of the error register for
– LSI OVERFLOW the n–th axis (axis 1–8) exceeded 3

231 power. This error usually oc-
curs as the result of an improperly
set parameters.

r.c
414 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS N–th axis (axis 1–8) digital servo
– DETECTION RELATED system fault. Refer to diagnosis dis-
ERROR play No. 200 and No.204 for details. 4
415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS A speed higher than 511875 units/s
– EXCESS SHIFT was attempted to be set in the n–th
axis (axis 1–8). This error occurs as
the result of improperly set CMR.

e
416 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS Position detection system fault in the
5
– DISCONNECTION n–th axis (axis 1–8) pulse coder (dis-
connection alarm). Refer to diagno-

417
nt
SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS
– PARAMETER
INCORRECT
sis display No. 201 for details.

This alarm occurs when the n–th axis

(axis 1–8) is in one of the conditions
listed below. (Digital servo system
alarm)
6
ce
1) The value set in Parameter No.
2020 (motor form) is out of the
specified limit.
7
2) A proper value (111 or –111) is
not set in parameter No.2022
(motor revolution direction).
nc

3) Illegal data (a value below 0,

etc.) was set in parameter No.
2023 (number of speed feedback 8
pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a value below 0,
etc.) was set in parameter No.
2024 (number of position feed-
.c

back pulses per motor revolu-

tion). 9
5) Parameters No. 2084 and No.
2085 (flexible field gear rate)
have not been set.
w

6) A value outside the limit of {1 to

the number of control axes} or a
non–continuous value (Parame-
10
ter 1023 (servo axis number)
contains a value out of the range
w

from 1 to the number of axes, or

an isolated value (for example, 4
not prceded by 3).was set in pa-
rameter No. 1023 (servo axis-
number).
w

392
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

420 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS During simple synchronous control,
SYNC TORQUE the difference between the torque
(M series) commands for the master and slave
axes exceeded the value set in pa-
rameter No. 2031.

421 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS The difference between the errors in

EXCESS ER (D) the semi–closed loop and closed

om
loop has become excessive during
dual position feedback. Check the
values of the dual position conver-
sion coefficients in parameters No.
2078 and 2079.

NOTE If any of servo alarms 400 to 421 occurs, investigate the cause of
the alarm and take appropriate action, as described in the mainte-

r.c
nance manual.

D Details of servo alarm No.414

The details of servo alarm No. 414 are displayed in the diagnosis display
(No. 200 and No.204) as shown below.

e
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

nt
#7 (OVL) : An overload alarm is being generated.

#6 (LV)
(This bit causes servo alarm No. 400. The details are
indicated in diagnostic data No.201).
: A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
ce
#5 (OVC) : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of
digital servo.
#4 (HCA) : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in
servo amp.
#3 (HVA) : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo
amp.
nc

#2 (DCA) : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being

generated in servo amp.
#1 (FBA) : A disconnection alarm is being generated.
(This bit causes servo alarm No.416. The details are
indicated in diagnostic data No.201).
.c

#0 (OFA) : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital

servo.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
w

204 OFS MCC LDA PMS

#6 (OFS) : A current conversion error has occured in the digital

servo.
w

#5 (MCC) : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier

has welded.
#4 (LDA) : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is
w

defective
#3 (PMS) : A feedback pulse error has occured because the
feedback cable is defective.

393
 D Details of servo alarms No.400 and No. 416
The details of servo alarms No. 400 and No. 416 are displayed in the
diagnosis display (No. 201) as shown below. 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP

When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 400 is 2

om
being generated):
#7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 416
is being generated): 3

ALD EXP Alarm details

r.c
1 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware)

1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection 4

(hardware)

0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software.

e
5
9.1.6 Overtravel alarms
If this alarm occurs, manually move the machine in the direction

Number
nt
opposite to that in which the machine was moving when the alarm
occurred, then reset the alarm.

Message Contents
6
ce
500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) + side
stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1320 or 1326 Note)
7
501 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) – side
stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1321 or 1327 Note)
nc

502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) + side
stored stroke limit II.
(Parameter No.1322 ) 8
503 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) – side
stored stroke limit II.
(Parameter No.1323)
.c

504 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) + side
stored stroke limit III.
9
(Parameter No.1324 )

505 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) – side
stored stroke limit III.
w

(Parameter No.1325 )

506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) + side
10
hardware OT.
w

507 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis (axis 1–8) – side
hardware OT.

508 INTERFERENCE: +n A tool moving in the positive direction

(T series (two–path along the n axis has fouled another tool
w

control)) post.

509 INTERFERENCE: –n A tool moving in the negative direction

(T series (two–path along the n axis has fouled another tool
control)) post.

394
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

510 OVER TRAVEL: +n Alarm for stroke check prior to movement.
The end point specified in a block falls
within the forbidden area defined with the
stroke limit in the positive direction along
the N axis. Correct the program.

511 OVER TRAVEL: –n Alarm for stroke check prior to movement.

The end point specified in a block falls

om
within the forbidden area defined with the
stroke limit in the negative direction along
the N axis. Correct the program.

NOTE1 Overtravel alarm numbers 504 and 505 apply only to the T series.
NOTE2 Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM(stroke limit
switch signal) is on.

r.c
9.1.7 Overheat alarms

Number Message Contents

700 OVERHEAT: Control unit overheat
CONTROL UNIT Check that the fan motor operates normal-

e
ly, and clean the air filter.

701 OVERHEAT: FAN The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for
MOTOR the contorl unit is overheated. Check the

704
nt
OVERHEAT: SPINDLE
operation of the fan motor and replace the
motor if necessary.

Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuation

detection
1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the
ce
cutting condition.
2) Check whether the cutting tool is
share.
3) Another possible cause is a faulty
spindle amp.
nc

9.1.8 Rigid tapping alarms

Number Message Contents

740 RIGID TAP ALARM: The positional deviation of the stopped
.c

EXCESS ERROR spindle has exceeded the set value dur-

ing rigid tapping.

741 RIGID TAP ALARM: The positional deviation of the moving

EXCESS ERROR spindle has exceeded the set value dur-
ing rigid tapping.
w

742 RIGID TAP ALARM: An LSI overflow has occurred for the
LSI OVERFLOW spindle during rigid tapping.
w
w

395
 9.1.9 Serial spindle alarms

1
Number Message Contents
749 S–SPINDLE LSI It is serial communication error while sys-
ERROR tem is executing after power supply on.
Following reasons can be considered. 2

om
1) Optical cable connection is fault or
cable is not connected or cableis cut.
2) MAIN CPU board or option 2 board is
fault.
3) Spindle amp. printed board is fault. 3
If this alarm occurs when CNC power
supply is turned on or when his alarm
can not be cleared even if CNC is re-

r.c
set, turn off the power supply also turn
off the power supply in spindle side.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL This alarm is generated when the spindle
4
LINK START FAULT control unit is not ready for starting correct-
ly when the power is turned on in the sys-
tem with the serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as fol-

e
lows:
5
1) An improperly connected optic cable,
or the spindle control unit’s power is
OFF.
nt 2) When the NC power was turned on un-
der alarm conditions other than SU–01
or AL–24 which are shown on the LED
display of the spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier
6
ce
power off once and perform startup
again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination
of hardware) 7
This alarm does not occur after the
system including the spindle control
unit is activated.
nc

4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of

parameter No. 3701, is 1) is in one of
the above conditions 1) to 3).
8
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.

751 FIRST SPINDLE This alarm indicates in the NC that an

ALARM DETECTION alarm is generated in the spindle unit of the
.c

(AL–XX) system with the serial spindle. The alarm

is displayed in form AL–XX (XX is a num-
9
ber). Refer to 9.1.11 Alarms displayed on
spindle servo unit .The alarm number XX
is the number indicated on the spindle am-
w

plifier. The CNC holds this number and dis-

plays on the screen.
10
752 FIRST SPINDLE This alarm is generated if the system does
MODE CHANGE not properly terminate a mode change.
FAULT The modes include the Cs contouring,
w

spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and

spindle control modes. The alarm is acti-
vated if the spindle control unit does not re-
spond correctly to the mode change com-
w

mand issued by the NC.

754 SPINDLE–1 Abnormal first spindle motor load has been

ABNORMAL TORQUE detected.
ALM

396
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Number Message Contents

761 SECOND SPINDLE Refer to alarm No. 751. (For 2nd axis)
ALARM DETECTION
(AL–XX)

762 SECOND SPINDLE Refer to alarm No. 752.(For 2nd axis)

MODE CHANGE
FAULT

om
764 SPINDLE–2 Same as alarm No. 754 (for the second
ABNORMAL TORQUE spindle)
ALM

771 SPINDLE–3 Same as alarm No. 751 (for the third

ALARM DETECT spindle)
(AL–XX)

772 SPINDLE–3 Same as alarm No. 752 (for the third

MODE CHANGE spindle)
EROR

r.c
774 SPINDLE–3 Same as alarm No. 754 (for the third
ABNORMAL TORQUE spindle)
ALM

D The details of spindle alarm No.750

e
The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis
display (No. 409) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 nt SPE S2E S1E SHE

#3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle

parameters fulfill the spindle unit startup
ce
conditions.
1 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle
parameters do not fulfill the spindle unit startup
conditions.
#2 (S2E) 0 : The second spindle is normal during the spindle
serial control startup.
nc

1 : The second spindle was detected to have a fault

during the spindle serial control startup.
#1 (S1E) 0 : The first spindle is normal during the spindle serial
control startup.
1 : The first spindle was detected to have a fault
.c

during the spindle axis serial control startup.

#0 (SHE) 0 : The serial communications module in the CNC is
normal.
1 : The serial communications module in the CNC
w

was detected to have a fault.

w
w

397
 9.1.10 System alarms
(These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)
1
Number Message Contents
900 ROM PARITY ROM parity error (CNC/OMM/Servo)
Replace the number of ROM.

914 SRAM PARITY (2N) A RAM parity error occurred in RAM for
2

om
part program storage or additional SRAM.
Clear the memory, or replace
re lace the main
915 SRAM PARITY (2+1) CPU board or additional SRAM. Then, set
all data, including parameters, again.

916 DRAM PARITY RAM parity error in DRAM module. Re- 3

place the DRAM module.

920 SERVO ALARM Servo alarm (1st to 4th axis). A watchdog

r.c
(MAIN) alarm or a RAM parity error in the servo
module occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the 4
main CPU board.

922 SERVO ALARM Servo alarm (5th to 8th axis). A watchdog

(OPT2) alarm or a RAM parity error in the servo
module occurred.

e
Replace the servo control module on the
option 2 board.
5
924 SERVO MODULE The digital servo module is not installed.

930
nt
SETTING ERROR

CPU INTERRUPUT
Check that the servo control module or ser-
vo interface module on the main CPU or
option 2 board is mounted securely.

CPU error (abnormal interrupt)

The main CPU board is faulty.
6
ce
950 PMC SYSTEM Fault occurred in the [Link] PMC con-
ALARM trol module on the main CPU board or op-
tion 3 board may be faulty.
7
951 PMC WATCH DOG Fault occurred in the PMC–RC (watchdog
ALARM alarm).Option 3 board may be faulty.

972 NMI OCCURRED IN NMI occurred in a board other than the

nc

OTHER MODULE main CPU board.

Option 1 to 3 may be faulty. 8
973 NON MASK NMI occurred for an unknown reason.
INTERRUPT

974 F–BUS ERROR FANUC BUS is error.

.c

MAIN CPU board and option 1 to 3 boards

may be faulty. 9
975 BUS ERROR (MAIN) MAIN CPU board is BUS error.
MAIN CPU board may be faulty.
w

10
w
w

398
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

9.1.11 Alarms displayed on spindle servo unit

Alarm
Meaning Description Remedy
No.
“A” Program ROM Detects that control pro- Install normal pro-
display abnormality (not gram is not started (due gram ROM
installed) to program ROM not
installed, etc.)

om
AL–01 Motor Detects motor speed Check load status.
overheat exceeding specified Cool motor then re-
speed excessively. set alarm.
AL–02 Excessive speed Detects motor speed Check load status.
deviation exceeding specified Reset alarm.
speed excessively.
AL–03 DC link section fuse Detects that fuse F4 in Check power tran-

r.c
blown DC link section is blown sistors, and so forth.
(models 30S and 40S). Replace fuse.
AL–04 Input fuse blown. Detects blown fuse (F1 Replace fuse.
Input power open to F3), open phase or Check open phase
phase. momentary failure of and power supply
power (models 30S and regenerative circuit
40S). operation.

e
AL–05 Control power supply Detects that control Check for control
fuse blown power supply fuse AF2 power supply short
or AF3 is blown (models circuit .
30S and 40S). Replace fuse.
AL–07

AL–08
nt
Excessive speed

High input voltage

Detects that motor rota-
tion has exceeded
115% of its rated speed.
Detects that switch is
Reset alarm.

Flip switch to 230

ce
flipped to 200 VAC VAC.
when input voltage is
230 VAC or higher
(models 30S and 40S).

AL–09 Excessive load on Detects abnormal tem- Cool radiator then

main circuit section perature rise of power reset alarm.
transistor radiator.
nc

AL–10 Low input voltage Detects drop in input Remove cause,

power supply voltage. then reset alarm.

AL–11 Overvoltage in DC link Detects abnormally Remove cause,

section high direct current pow- then reset alarm.
er supply voltage in
power circuit section.
.c

AL–12 Overcurrent in DC link Detects flow of abnor- Remove cause,

section mally large current in di- then reset alarm.
rect current section of
power cirtcuit.
w

AL–13 CPU internal data Detects abnormality in Remove cause,

memory abnormality CPU internal data then reset alarm.
memory. This check is
made only when power
is turned on.
w

AL–15 Spindle switch/output Detects incorrect Check sequence.

switch alarm switch sequence in
spindle switch/output
switch operation.
w

399
 Alarm
Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–16 RAM abnormality Detects abnormality in Remove cause,
1
RAM for external data. then reset alarm.
This check is made only
when power is turned
on.

AL–18 Program ROM sum Detects program ROM Remove cause, 2

om
check error data [Link] check is then reset alarm.
made only when power
is turned on.
AL–19 Excessive U phase Detects excessive U Remove cause,
current detection phase current detection then reset alarm. 3
circuit offset ciucuit offset.
This check is made only
when power is turned
on.

r.c
AL–20 Excessive V phase Detects excessive V Remove cause,
current detection phase current detection then reset alarm. 4
circuit offset circuit offset.
This check is made only
when power is turned
on.

e
AL–24 Serial transfer data Detects serial transfer Remove cause, 5
error data error (such as NC then reset alarm.
power supply turned off,
etc.)
AL–25

AL–26
nt
Serial data transfer
stopped

Disconnection of
speed detection
Detects that serial data
transfer has stopped.

Detects abnormality in
position coder sig-
Remove

Remove
cause,
then reset alarm.

cause,
then reset alarm.
6
ce
signal for Cs nal(such as uncon-
contouring control nected cable and pa-
rameter setting error).

AL–27 Position coder signal Detects abnormality in Remove cause,

7
disconnection position coder signal then reset alarm.
(such as unconnected
cable and adjustment
nc

error).

AL–28 Disconnection of Detects abnormality in Remove cause, 8

position detection position detection sig- then reset alarm.
signal for Cs nal for Cs contouring
contouring control control (such as uncon-
nected cable and ad-
.c

justment error).
9
AL–29 Short–time overload Detects that overload Remove cause,
has been continuously then reset alarm.
applied for some period
of time (such as re-
w

straining motor shaft in

positioning). 10
AL–30 Input circuit Detects overcurrent Remove cause,
overcurrent flowing in input circuit. then reset alarm.
w
w

400
 9. ERROR CODE LIST

Alarm
Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–31 Speed detection Detects that motor can- Remove cause,
signal disconnection not rotate at specified then reset alarm.
motor restraint alarm speed or it is detected
or motor is clamped. that the motor is
clamped. (but rotates at
very slow speed or has

om
stopped).
(This includes checking
of speed detection sig-
nal cable.)

AL–32 Abnormality in RAM Detects abnormality in Remove cause,

inside the LSI used for RAM inside the LSI then reset alarm.
serial data transfer. used for serial data
This check is made transfer. This check is
only when power is made only when power

r.c
turned on. is turned on.

AL–33 Insufficient DC link Detects insufficient Remove cause,

section charging charging of direct cur- then reset alarm.
rent power supply volt-
age in power circuit
section when magnetic
contactor in amplifier is

e
turned on (such as open
phase and defectifve
charging resistor).
AL–34

AL–35
nt
Parameter data
setting beyond
allowable range of
values
Excessive gear ratio
Detects parameter data
set beyond allowable
range of values.

Detects gear ratio data

Set correct data.

Set correct data.

ce
data setting set beyond allowable
range of values.
AL–36 Error counter overflow Detects error counter Correct cause, then
overflow. reset alarm.

AL–37 Speed detector Detects incorrect set- Set correct data.

parameter setting ting of parameter for
nc

error number of speed detec-

tion pulses.
AL–39 Alarm for indicating Detects 1–rotaion sig- Make 1–rotaion sig-
failure in detecting nal detection failure in nal adjustment.
1–rotation signal for Cs contouring contorl. Check cable shield
Cs contouring control status.
.c

AL–40 Alarm for indicating Detects that 1–rotation Make 1–rotaion sig-
1–rotation signal for signal has not occurred nal adjustment.
Cs contouring control in Cs contouring con-
not detected trol.
AL–41 Alarm for indicating Detects failure in de- Make signal adjust-
w

failure in detecting tecting position coder ment for signal con-

position coder 1–rotation signal. version circuit.
1–rotaion signal. Check cable shield
status.
w

AL–42 Alarm for indicating Detects that position Make 1–rotation sig-
position coder coder 1–rotation signal nal adjustment for
1–rotation signal not has not issued. signal conversion
detected circuit.
w

401
 Alarm
Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–43 Alarm for indicating Detects that main Check that main
1
disconnection of spindle position coder spindle position
position coder signal signal used for differen- coder signal is con-
for differential speed tial speed mode is not nected to connector
mode connected yet (or is dis- CN12.
connected). 2

om
AL–46 Alarm for indicating Detects failure in de- Make 1–rotation sig-
failure in detecting tecting position coder nal adjustment for
position coder 1–rotation signasl in signal conversion
1–rotation signal in thread cutting opera- circuit.
thread cutting tion. Check cable shield
operation. status. 3
AL–47 Position coder signal Detects incorrect posi- Make signal adjust-
abnormality tion coder signal count ment for signal con-
operation. version circuit.

r.c
Check cable shield
status. 4
AL–48 Position coder Detects that occur- Make 1–rotation sig-
1–rotation signal rence of position coder nal adjustment for
abnormailty 1–rotation signal has signal conversion
stopped. circuit.

e
AL–49 The converted Detects that speed of Calculate differen- 5
differential speed is other spindle converted tial speed by multi-
too high. to speed of local plying speed of oth-
spindle has exceeded er spindle by gear
nt allowable limit in differ-
ential mode.
ratio. Check if calcu-
lated value is not
greater than maxi-
mum speed of mo-
tor.
6
ce
AL–50 Excessive speed Detects that speed Calculate motor
command calculation command calculation speed by multiply-
value in spindle value exceeded allow- ing specified spindle
synchronization able range in spindle speed by gear ratio. 7
control synchronization con- Check if calculated
trol. value is not greater
than maximum
nc

speed of motor.
AL–51 Undervoltage at DC Detects that DC power Remove cause, 8
link section supply voltage of power then reset alarm.
circuit has dropped
(due to momentary
power failure or loose
contact of magnetic
.c

contactor). 9
AL–52 ITP signal abnormality Detects abnormality in Replace servo amp.
I synchronization signal PCB.
(ITP signal) used in
w

software.
AL–53 ITP signal abnormality Detects abnormality in Replace servo amp. 10
II synchronization signal PCB.
(ITP signal) used in
hardware.
w

AL–54 Overload current Detects that excessive Remove overload of

alarm current flowed in motor motor and reset the
for long time. alarm.
w

AL–55 Power line Detects that switch re- Check if power line
abnormality in spindle quest signal does not status, check signal
switching/output match power line status is processed nor-
switching check signal. mally.

402
 10. PMC

10.1 Dynamic Display of Sequence Program

(1) Display method

1 Press the SYSTEM key, then press the soft key [PMC].

2 Dynamic display of sequence program by pressing [PMCLAD] soft

key.

om
(2) Display contents
Display of current net number
RUN/STOP
status
LADDER NET 0001–0004 MONIT RUN
Comment
LOG1 LOG1
ALWAYS1

r.c
LOG1
Green
X008.4 *ESP color
EMERGENCY (dark) :
STOP Signal is
END1 turned
PORD POR ON
POWER ON
White

e
RESET
color
(bright) :
Signal is
[ SEARCH ] [ ADRESS ] [ TRIGER ] [WINDOW ] [ ] turned
nt
(3) Searching for the signal (SEARCH)
1 Press the [SEARCH] soft key.
OFF
ce
2 Using the following keys as described below, search for desired
signal.
D The signals being displayed can be changed by using the
PAGE
, PAGE , , and keys.
nc

D [TOP]: Locates the top of the ladder program.

D [BOTTOM] : Locates the end of the ladder program.

D [Link] [SRCH] or Single name [SRCH] :

Search a specified address unconditionally.
.c

D [Link] [W-SRCH] or Single name or [W-SRCH] :

Searches for a specified address, for the write coils.

D Net number [N-SRCH]:

w

Displays the ladder program from the specified net address.

D Function instruction number [F-SRCH] or

Function instruction name [F-SRCH]: Searches for the
w

specified function instruction.

D [ADRESS]:
Displays the address and bit number of the specified signal.
D [SYMBOL]:
w

Displays the symbol of the specified signal. (The address of

the specified signal is displayed if a symbol was not specified
when the program was created.)

403
 (4) Turning off the monitor display when the trigger signal changes
(TRIGER)
When the preset trigger signal changes, the system turns off the monitor 1
display. By using this function, the states of all signals can be accurately
read when the trigger signal changes.
1 Press the [TRIGER] soft key.
2 Press the [INIT] soft key to initialize the trigger parameters.
3 Specify the trigger conditions. 2

om
D To turn off the monitor display at the signal’s rising edge (as the
signal changes from 0 to 1), enter the desired data and press
the required keys in the order shown below.
Signal name/address EOB Trigger checkpoint EOB
3
Count [TRGON]

r.c
: Trigger checkpoint:
0: Before the first level of the ladder program is executed 4
1: After the first level of the ladder program is executed
2: After the second level of the ladder program is executed
3: After the third level of the ladder program is executed

e
Example) To set the system so that it turns off the monitor display when 5
the external reset signal (ERS) is input three times, enter the
required data and press the required keys in the order
shown below:
ERS
nt
EOB
2 EOB
3 [TRGON]

The specified trigger conditions are displayed at the top of the screen.
6
ce
TRIGER *MODE : ON G008. 7 : 2 : 003 NET 0001-00005
7
Specified conditions are displayed.
nc

To turn off the monitor display at the signal’s falling edge (as the signal
changes from 1 to 0), enter the desired data and press the required keys 8
in the order shown below.
Signal name/address EOB Trigger checkpoint EOB
.c

Count [TRGOFF] 9

4 Press the [START] soft key to activate the trigger function.

w

: While the trigger function is operating, TRG is displayed at

the lower right corner of the screen. When the trigger 10
conditions are satisfied, TRG disappears and the monitor
w

screen is locked.
5 To interrupt the trigger function, press the [STOP] soft key while the
function is effective.

In this case, the specified trigger conditions remain effective.
w

Pressing the [START] soft key reinstates the trigger function.

6 To search for the instruction where the program was stopped by the
trigger function and blink that instruction, press the [TRGSRC] soft
key.
404
 10. PMC

(5) Displaying a divided ladder program (WINDOW)

A ladder program can be divided into up to six sections, and the
individual sections displayed on the screen simultaneously.
1 Press the [WINDOW] soft key.
2 Press the [DIVIDE] soft key to divide the dynamic display screen
into the desired number of sections.
: Each time the key is pressed, the screen is divided.

om
LADDER * XXX. . . . . . . . . . . . . XXX * MONIT RUN

NET 0001-0002

LOG1 LOG1

LOG1 An unselected divided screen

is indicated by a blue low-in-

r.c
tensity bar.
*SP. *SP

NET 0020-0021
DOOR. ST. ST

A selected divided screen is

e
SKIP1. SKIP1 indicated by the purple high-
intensity bar.

3
nt
To select the desired divided screen, press the [SELECT] soft key
as many times as necessary to move the purple bar to the desired
screen.
ce
: The normal search function can be used within each divided
screen.
4 To change the width of a selected divided screen, press the
[WIDTH] soft key.
D Pressing the [EXPAND] soft key increases the number of lines
displayed on a divided screen.
nc

D Pressing the [SHRINK] soft key decreases the number of lines

displayed on a divided screen.
5 To terminate the display of a selected divided screen, press the
[DELETE] soft key.
: To terminate screen division, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
.c

(6) Dumping (DUMP)

The states of the signals corresponding to a ladder program can be
displayed in hexadecimal, together with the ladder program itself.
w

1 Press the [DUMP] soft key.

w
w

405
 LADDER * XXX. . . . . . . . . . . . XXX * NET 0001-0004 MONIT RUN

1
LOG1 LOG1 LOG1 C1

LOG1

*ESP EMERGENCY STOP

2

om
*ESP.

END1 3

ADDRESS DUMP

r.c
G0000 00 1A 5C 32 22 0D 65 10 01 02 00 10 00 00 10 40. . . . . . .
G0016 01 00 10 23 40 0F 03 20 1A FF 00 00 3A 9B 16 84 . . . . . . . 4
: When the screen is divided, the states of the signals are displayed
in the lower divided screen.
D To change the data notation

e
[BYTE] : Data is displayed in units of bytes.
5
Example) G0000 00 16 84 00 ...
[WORD] : Data is displayed in units of two bytes.
nt Example) G0000 1600 0084 ...
[[Link]] : Data is displayed in units of two words,
or four bytes.
Example) G0000 00841600 ...
6
ce
: When WORD or [Link] is specified, data is displayed
with the high-order byte placed first.
D To search for an address 7
PAGE
Use the , PAGE , and [SRCH] keys, as in the normal
search function.
nc

(7) Displaying the function-instruction parameters (DPARA/NDPARA) 8

The states of the control parameters used in function instructions are
displayed together with the ladder program.
1 Press the [DPARA] soft key.
.c

LADDER * XXX. . . . . . . . . . . . XXX * NET 0001-0004 MONIT RUN 9

w

RST ERR1 JOG FEEDRATE

SUB 27 2 10
JOG CODEB
6
w

R002

[ 4] The current value of a

control parameter is
G014 displayed below the pa-
w

[ 800] rameter.

406
 10. PMC

: The data notation (binary or BCD) varies with the function

instructions.
2 To terminate the display of parameters, press the [NDPARA] soft
key.

(8) Editing the program being executed (ONLEDT: on-line editing)

A sequence program can be edited while a program is being executed,
without stopping its execution.

om
: This function is available only while the edit function is enabled.
1 Press the [ONLEDT] soft key to start the on-line editing function.
The cursor appears on the screen.
2 Modify the program, following the usual editing procedure.
The following changes can be made by means of on-line editing.
D Changing the type of contacts ( , )
D

r.c
Changing the addresses of contacts and coils
D Changing the addresses of control parameters used in
function instructions
: The operations that can be performed in on-line editing
are restricted to those that do not change the memory
size of the program. To perform other operations, such
as addition, insertion, and deletion, use the ordinary

e
editing function.
3 To terminate on-line editing, press the key.
: nt
Changes made in on-line editing are temporary. To save a
changed program, set K18.3 (K901.3 for the RB6/RC4) to 1 or
transfer the program to the DRAM by using the COPY function
from the I/O screen. To enable the use of the program when
the system is next turned on, write it to the FROM from the I/O
ce
screen.

ÂÂ
PMCPRM
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K018
or
ÂÂ
nc

K901

#3 0: The ladder program is not transferred to the RAM after on-line

editing.

To transfer the program, press the following keys in the
order shown, using the COPY function from the I/O screen:
.c

[COPY], [EXELAD], [EXEC]

1: A ladder program is automatically transferred to the RAM after
on-line editing.
w
w
w

407
 10.2 Display of PMC Diagnosis Screen
(1) Display method 1
1 Press the SYSTEM
key.

2 Press the [PMC] soft key.

3 Display of PMC diagnosis screen by pressing [PMC/DGN] soft key.
2

om
10.2.1 Title screen (TITLE)
Display of the title data which is wrote at the ladder programming time.

PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN 3

PMC PROGRAM NO. :
EDITION NO. :

r.c
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : 4067 EDITION : 01
4
(SERIES : EDITION : )
PMC TYPE CONTROL : RB5 PROGRAM : RB5
MEMORY USED : KB

e
LADDER : KB 5
SYMBOL : KB
MESSAGE : KB
nt
SCAN TIME
SCAN MAX

[ TITLE ] [ STATUS]
:
:

[ ANALYS]
MS
MS MIN :

[ TRACE ] [
MS

]
6
ce
1) 1st page 7
PMC PROGRAM NO. : Set at
LADDER
EDITION NO. : programming
nc

time.
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM 8
SERIES : EDITTION :
(SERIES: EDITTION : ) Display of a
serial number
PMC TYPE CONTROL : PROGRAM :
and version
.c

MEMORY USED : KB number of 9

PMC control
LADDER : KB
software, used
SYMBOL : KB memory area
and scan time.
w

MESSAGE : KB
SCAN TIME : MS 10
SXAN MAX : MS MIN : MS
w
w

408
 10. PMC

2) 2nd page
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :
MACHINE TOOL NAME :
CNC & PMC TYPE NAME : Set at
PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : LADDER
diagram
3) 3rd page programming
time.

om
DATE OF PRGRAMING :
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
ROM WRITTEN BY :
REMARKS :

10.2.2 Status screen (STATUS)

r.c
Display of ON/OFF condition for I/O signals, internal relays, etc.

PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN

ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal
G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 name

e
ED15ED14ED13ED12ED11ED10ED9ED8
G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Status
ESTBEA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 of
G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 signal
G0003

G0003
nt 0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0
FIN
0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0 : ON
1 : OFF
ce
[ SEARCH] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

PAGE
1 Search the diagnosis number by pressing PAGE keys.

2 Searching the specified address or signal name by pressing

nc

[SEARCH] soft key when inputted of Address and number or

Single name

10.2.3 Alarm screen (ALARM)

.c

Display of an alarm when an alarm occured in PMC program.

PMC ALARM MESSAGE MONIT RUN

ALARM NOTHING
w
w
w

[ TITLE ] [ STATUS ] [ ALARM ] [ TRACE ] [ ]

409
 10.2.4 Trace screen (TRACE)
Record the signal status to the trace memory when the specified signal is 1
changed.
(1) Trace parameter screen (TRCPRM)

PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

2

om
TRACE MODE :
(0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD)
1ST TRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA
2ND TRACE ADDRESS CONDITION 3
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :

r.c
4
[ [Link] ] [ EXEC ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

(a) TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode.

e
5
0= 1 byte address signal trace
1= Independent 2 byte address signal trace
nt
(b) ADDRESS TYPE:
2= Continuous 2 byte address signal trace
0= Set the trace address by PMC address
1= Set the trace address by physical
address (Using mainly by C language)
6
ce
(c) ADDRESS : Set the trace address
(d) MASK DATA : Specify the trace bit by hexadecimal code. 7
For example, set the “E1” when trace the bit
7, 6, 5 and 0. Not execute the tracing when
the bit 4, 3, 2 and 1 is changed, but, the signal
nc

status should recorded at tracing time.

(e.g) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1:E1

Ơ Correspond table between binary and hexadecimal code ơ

.c

00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316

9
01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716
10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16
w

11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16

(e) [EXEC] soft key : 10
Start of tracing.
Clear the trace memory and trace memory contents are update
w

when the specified signal are changed from previous ones.

The trace memory are always maintained up to the previous
results for 256 bytes from the latest ones regardless of the time
lapse.
w

(2 byte tracing = 128 times.)

(f) [[Link]] soft key : Display of trace memory contents.

410
 10. PMC

(2) Trace memory screen ([Link])

PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN

1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace ad-

NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 dress and
0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mask
0001 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 data in ( )
0002 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0003 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Newest

om
0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . status
0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[TRCPRM] [ STOP ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

r.c
[TRCPRM] soft key : Return to trace parameter setting screen
[STOP] soft key : Stop the trace operation.
[EXEC] soft key : Re-start of tracing (Clear the memory).

10.2.5 Displaying memory data ([Link])

e
(1) Displaying memory data on the screen
D Enter the physical start address of the memory area storing the

D
nt
data to be displayed, then press the [SEARCH] soft key. Then, 256
bytes of memory data, starting from the specified address, appear
on the screen.
The memory storing the data to be displayed can be changed by
ce
PAGE
using the PAGE and keys.

D The display format can be changed by using the [BYTE], [WORD],

and [[Link]] soft keys.
(2) Memory data input function
D Setting K17.4 (K900.4 for the RB6/RC4) to 1 enables data to be
nc

input, in hexadecimal, to the address to which the cursor is

positioned.

10.2.6 Signal waveform display function screen (ANALYS)

(1) Parameter setting screen (1st page)
.c

PMC SIGNAL ANALISYS(PARAM) MONIT STOP

SAMPLING TIME : 10(1–10 SEC)

TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2

w

CONDITON : 0
(0:START 1:TRIGGER–ON 2:TRIGGER–OFF)

TRIGGER MODE : 0
w

(0:AFTER 1:ABOUT 2:BEFORE 3:ONLY)

w

[ SCOPE ] [ DELETE ] [ INIT ] [ADDRESS] [ ]

SAMPLE TIME: Set the sampling time.

411
 TRIGGER ADDRESS: Specify the trigger address when execute the
record by trigger.
CONDITION: Set the recording start condition. 1
0: Execute by [START] soft key.
1: Press [START] soft key than execute a
rising edge of trigger signal.
2: Press [START] soft key than execute a
fall edge of trigger signal.
2

om
TRIGGER MODE: Set the trigger mode.
0: Record the PMC signal AFTER trigger
signal.
1: Record the PMC signal AROUND trigger 3
signal.
2: Record the PMC signal BEFORE trigger
signal.

r.c
3: Record the PMC signal ONLY trigger
signal be formed. 4
(2) Parameter setting screen (2nd page)

PMC SIGNAL ANALISYS (PARAM) MONIT STOP

e
SIGNAL ADDRESS
5
1 : X0000.0 9 : Y0000.0

5:
6:
7:
8:
nt
2 : X0000.1
3 : X0002.0
4 : X0005.0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
: R0000.1
:
:
:
:
:
:
Specify
16 kinds
recording
signals
6
ce
7
[ SCOPE ] [ DELETE ] [ INIT ] [ ADRESS ] [ ]
nc

(a) [SCOPE] soft key : Select the signal wave display screen.
(b) [DELETE] soft key : Delete of the data on the cursor. 8
(c) [INIT] soft key : Initializes the signal waveform display
parameters.
(d) [ADRESS] or [SYMBOL] soft key : Toggles between address
display and symbol display.
.c

9
PMC SIGNAL ANALISYS(PARAM) MONIT STOP

SAMPLING TIME : 10 CONDITION : 1

w

TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2 TRIGGER MODE : 0

10
X0000.0
w

X0000.1
X0002.0
X0005.0

0 256(MSEC)
w

[SGNPRM ] [ START ] [ [Link] ] [ADDRESS ] [ ]

412
 10. PMC

NOTE The above figure is a screen for the attachment to a graphic func-
tion.
If a graphic function is not attached, it is displayed “ J ”.

(a) [SGNPRM] soft key : Return to PMC parameter screen

(b) [START] soft key : Start register
(c) [T. SRCH] soft key :

om
(d) [ADRESS] or [SYMBOL] soft key : Change to address or sym-
bol of signal.
(e) [EXCHG] soft key : Change the signal displaying procedure
D Press [EXCHG] soft key.
D Move the cursor to an exchanging signal.
D Press [SELECT] soft key.
D

r.c
Move the cursor to one’ s new address.
D Exchange the signal when press [TO] soft key then press
[EXEC] soft key.
(f) [SCALE] soft key : Change the holizontal scaling time for
graphics.
Scaling time is changed 256, 512 and
1024msec when press this key.

e
(g) CURSOR : Move the holizontal time of displaying

nt on CRT to BEFORE/REVERSE.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w

413
 10.3 PMC Parameter
10.3.1 Input of PMC parameter from MDI 1
1 Select MDI mode or depress EMERGENCY STOP button.
2 [PWE] set to “1” on SETTING screen or PROGRAM PROTECT
signal (KEY4) turn to “1”.

PWE KEY4 2

om
Timer f
Counter f f either one

Keep relay f
f
3
Data table f either one

3 Select the display screen by soft key.

r.c
[TIMER] : Timer screen
[COUNTER] : Counter screen 4
[KEEPRL] : Keep relay screen
[DATA] : Data table screen
4 Move the cursor to desired number.

e
5 Input the Numeral and press INPUT
key then the data 5
inputted.
6
nt
[PWE] on SETTING screen or [KEY4] return to “0” after data set.

10.3.2 Timer screen (TIMER)

The variable timer (SUB 3) time is set.
6
ce
Page number (change by page cursor key)
Specified timer number by program
Refer the address by ladder 7
program

PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 MONIT RUN

nc

NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA

01 T00 480 11 T20 0 Setting
02 T02 960 12 T22 0 time by 8
03 T04 0 13 T24 0 msec unit
04 T06 0 14 T26 0
05 T08 0 15 T28 0
06 T10 0 16 T30 0
07 T12 0 17 T32 0
.c

08 T14 0 18 T34 0
09 T16 0 19 T36 0 9
10 T18 0 20 T38 0
w

[ TIMER ] [ COUNTR ] [ KEEPRL ] [ DATA ] [ SETING ]

10
Setting time : Timer No. 1 – 8 =Max.=1572.8 sec, each 48msec.
w

Up to 262.1 seconds in units of 8 ms for timer Nos.

9 to 40 subsequent timers (timer Nos. 9 to 150 in
the RB6/RC4)
w

414
 10. PMC

10.3.3 Counter screen (COUNTER)

Set and display the preset values and integrated values of the counter
instruction (SUB 5).
Page number (change by page cursor key)
Preset value (MAX. value)
(The min. value specified in
the program)
Integrated value

om
PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER) #001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT

01 C00 100 1 Up to 9999
02 C04 50 2 can be set
03 C08 0 0 for PRE-
04 C12 0 0 SET and
05 C16 0 0 CURRENT
06 C20 0 0 for counter
07 C24 0 0

r.c
Nos. 1 to
08 C28 0 0 20 (1 to 50
09 C32 0 0 for the
10 C36 0 0 RB6/RC4)

[ TIMER ] [ COUNTR] [ KEEPRL] [ DATA ] [ SETING ]

e
Refer the address by ladder program
Specified counter number by program

nt
10.3.4 Keep relay screen (KEEPRL)

PMC PARAMETER (KEEP RELAY)

Refer the address by ladder program

MONIT STOP
ce
NO. ADDRESS DATA NO. ADDRESS DATA
01 K00 00000000 11 K10 00000000
02 K01 00000000 12 K11 00000000
03 K02 00000000 13 K12 00000000 :
04 K03 00000000 14 K13 00000000
nc

05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000 Reserved

06 K05 00000000 16 K15 00000000 by PMC
07 K06 00000000 17 K16 00000000 control
08 K07 00000000 18 K17 00000000 software.
09 K08 00000000 19 K18 00000000 Can’ t used
10 K09 00000000 20 K19 00000000 other pur-
pose.
.c

[TIMER] [COUNTR] [KEEPRL] [DATA] [SETING]

i) Control of battery-powered memory

w

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K16 MWRTF2 MWRTF1

#7 MWRTF2
w

#6 MWRTF1 : Write status for battery-powered memory

w

415
 ii) PMC system parameter
Since the system uses keep relays K17 to K19 (K900 to K902 for the
RB6/RC4), they cannot be used by a sequence program. 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K17 DTBLDSP ANASTAT TRCSTART MEMINP AUTORUN PRGRAM LADMASK
or
K900 2

om
#7 (DTBLDSP) 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is
displayed.
1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is
not displayed. 3
#6 (ANASTAT) 0 : Pressing the soft key to execution starts sampling
by the signal waveform display function.

r.c
1 : The signal waveform display function
automatically starts sampling at power on.
: This bit is only effective for those models for which the signal
4
waveform display function is applicable.
#5 (TRCSTAT) 0 : Pressing the [EXEC] soft key starts tracing by the
signal trace function.

e
1 : The signal trace function automatically starts 5
tracing at power on.
#4 (MEMINP) 0 : Data cannot be input by using the memory
nt contents display function.
1 : Data can be input by using the memory contents
display function.
#2 (AUTORUN) 0 : The sequence program automatically starts at
power on.
6
ce
1 : Pressing the soft key to sequence program
execution starts the sequence program.
#1 (PRGRAM) 0 : The built-in programmer function does not
7
operate. (Also, the programmer menu is not
displayed.)
nc

1 : The built-in programmer function operates. (The

programmer menu is displayed.)
8
#0 (LADMASK) 0 : The ladder programs are displayed dynamically
(PCLAD).
1 : The ladder programs are not displayed
dynamically (PCLAD).
.c

9
w

10
w
w

416
 10. PMC

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K018 IGNDINT CHKPRTY CALCPRTY TRNSRAM TRGSTAT DBGSTAT IGNKEY
or
K901

#7 (IGNDINT) 0 : The system initializes the CRT when the screen

is switched to the PMCMDI screen.

om
1 : The system does not initialize the CRT when the
screen is switched to the PMCMDI screen.
: This flag is valid for the PMC-RC3/RC4. When the screen is
switched to the PMCMDI screen, PMC control software
determines whether the system initialize the CRT, by checking this
flag. When this flag is on, an application program must initialize the
CRT.
#5 (CHKPRTY) 0 : The system performs parity check for the system

r.c
ROM, program ROM and program RAM.
1 : The system does not perform parity check for the
system ROM, program ROM, or program RAM.
#4 (CALCPRTY)0 : The built-in programmer function calculates the
RAM parity.

e
1 : The built-in programmer function does not
calculate the RAM parity.
#3 (TRNSRAM) 0 : After on-line editing, the ladder program is not
automatically transferred to the backup RAM.
nt 1 : After on-line editing, the ladder program is
automatically transferred to the backup RAM.
#2 (TRGSTAT) 0 : The trigger stop function does not automatically
start at power on.
ce
1 : The trigger stop function starts automatically at
power on.
#1 (DBGSTAT) 0 : The C debug function does not start automatic
break processing at power on.
1 : The C debug function starts automatic break
nc

processing at power on.

: This flag is effective for the PMC-RC3/RC4.
#0 (IGNKEY) 0 : Function keys are enabled for a user program on
the user screen.
1 : Function keys are disabled for a user program on
the user screen.
.c

: This flag is effective for the PMC-RC3/RC4. When this bit is set to
1, the user screen cannot be switched to the NC screen by using
the function keys. A program which invariably sets this bit to 0, or
which switches the user screen to the NC screen, must be
w

prepared.
w
w

417
 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K019 C-REJECT FROM–WRT
1
or
K902

#1 (C-REJECT) 0 : The system activates a C program.

1 : The system does not activate a C program. 2

om
: This flag is effective for the PMC-RC3/RC4.
#0 (FROM_WRT) 0 : After editing a ladder or C program, does not
automatically write it to F–ROM.
1 : After editing a ladder or C program, automatically
writes it to F–ROM. 3
NOTE Set all unused bits to 0.

r.c
10.3.5 Data table screen (DATA)
1) DATA TABLE SETTING screen (C. DATA) 4
PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN Number
GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 of data
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE [Link] DATA table

e
group
001 D0000 00000000 0 10
5
Number
002 D0020 00000011 1 20 of data of
each data
003
004
005
006
nt table
Data
length
Table
parameter
6
ce
007
008 Head
address of
[ [Link] ] [ [Link]] [ [Link]] [ ] [ INIT ] data table 7
(a) [[Link]] soft key : Select the data display screen of data table.
(b) No. of group [[Link]] : Set the number of group for data table.
nc

(c) No. of group [[Link]] : Move the cursor to specified group.

8
(d) [INIT] soft key : Initialize of data table setting.
No. of group is 1, ADDRESS is D0000,
PARAMETER is 00000000, TYPE is 0, NO. OF
DATA is 3000 (8000 for the RB6/RC4).
.c

9
ƠTable parameterơ

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
w

10
0 : Binary format 1 : BCD format
Protection of input data,
w

0 : not provided.
1 : provided.
0 : Displayed in binary or BCD
(bit 0 is enabled)
1 : Displayed in hexadecimal
w

(bit 0 is disabled)

ƠTYPEơ
0 : 1byte 1 : 2bytes 2 : 4bytes
418
 10. PMC

2) Data setting screen (G. DATA)

Group number
Number of page

PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS DATA

000 D0000 0
001 D0001 0

om
002 D0002 0
003 D0003 0
004 D0004 0
005 D0005 0
006 D0006 0
007 D0007 0
008 D0008 0
009 D0009 0

r.c
[ [Link] ] [G–SRCH ] [ SEARCH] [ ] [ ]

(a) [[Link]] soft key : Return to data table setting screen.

(b) Group No. [G-SRCH] : Move the cursor to head of specified
group.

e
(c) Address [SEARCH] : Searching the specified address in
currentup group.

10.3.6 Setting screen

nt
Part of the PMC system parameters can be set on this screen.
ce
PMC PRM (SETTING) MONIT RUN (K17.1)
(K17.2)
PROGRMMER ENABEL = 0(0:NO 1:YES) (K17.4)
LADDER START = 0(0:AUTO 1:MANUAL) (K17.5)
RAM WRITE ENABLE = 0(0:NO 1:YES) (K17.6)
SIGNAL TRACE START = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K17.7)
(K18.0):
SIGNAL ANALYS START = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K18.1):
nc

DATA TBL CNTL SCREEN = 0(0:YES 1:NO) (K18.2)

FUNC KEY INP (CUSTOM) = 0(0:AVAL 1:IGNORE) (K18.3)
DEBUG FUNC START = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO) (K-18.7):
SIGNAL TRIGGER START = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO)
TRANS LADDER (ONLEDT) = 0(0:MANUAL 1:AUTO)
INIT PMC-MDI SCREEN = 0(0:YES 1:NO)
.c

[ NO ] [ YES ] [ ] [ ] [ ]

: Only for the PMC-RC3/RC4

: Values in parentheses indicate the addresses of the corresponding
w

keep relays.
w
w

419
 10.4 Input/Output of PMC Data
10.4.1 Start of the built-in type PMC programmer 1
When the PMC data are input/output with I/O device unit via reader/puncher
interface, the built-in type PMC programmer should starts by as following
operation.
2

om
: As following operation is not required when the data set from MDI.
1 Select the PMC screen
Press SYSTEM
key and press [PMC] softkey.

2 Confirm to the built-in type PMC programmer is running.

3

PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU MONIT RUN

r.c
SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS
4
PMCLAD : DYNAMIC LADDER DISPLAY
PMCDGN : DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
PMCPRM : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D)
RUN/STOP : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM
EDIT : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM

e
I/O : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM
SYSPRM : SYSTEM PARAMETER 5
MONIT : PMC MONITOR

[ PMCLAD]
nt
[ PMCDGN] [ PMCPRM] [ ] [ ] 6
ce
parts are displayed, starts of the built-in type PMC programmer.
The card editor is not used on FS16 but it has PMC-RB system.
This case, [RUN/STOP] and [I/O] function can used but editing of 7
sequence program is impossible.
3 Keep relay K17.1 (K900.1 for the RB6/RC4) should set to “1” if the
built-in type PMC programmer is not start yet.
nc

10.4.2 Input/output method

8

1 Press key in the initial menu screen, then display to [I/O] softkey.

2 Display next screen

.c

9
PMC I/O PROGRAM MONIT RUN

CHANNEL = 1
w

DEVICE = HOST
10
FUNCTION =

DATA KIND =
w
w

[ EXEC ] [ CANCEL] [ (NO.) ] [ ] [ ]

420
 10. PMC

3 Enter the desired channel number, then press the INPUT

key to set the
number for CHANNEL.
1 : JD5A of the main CPU board
2 : JD5B of the main CPU board
4 Specify the I/O unit to be used for DEVICE.
HOST: I/O operation with FAPT LADDER (on the P-G, P-G Mate,

om
or personal computer)
FDCAS: I/O operation with a Floppy Cassette Adaptor
F-ROM: I/O operation with a flash EEPROM
M-CARD: I/O operation with a memory card
OTHERS: I/O operation with other I/O units
5 Specify the desired function with FUNCTION.
WRITE: Outputting data

r.c
READ: Inputting data
COMPARE: Comparing data in memory with that in an external device
DELETE: Deleting files on a floppy disk or memory card
LIST: Listing the files on a floppy disk or memory card
BLANK: Checking whether the flash EEPROM is empty

e
ERASE: Clearing the data in the flash EEPROM
FORMAT: Formatting a memory card (all data on the memory card

6
ALL:
LADDER:
ntis deleted.)
Specify the desired type of data to be output at KIND DATA.
Ladder programs and executable C data
Ladder programs
ce
PARAM: PMC parameters
7 When FDCAS or M-CARD is specified for the device, a file can be
specified for FILE NO. by either its file number or file name.
8 Specify the RS-232C conditions for each device with SPEED.
9 Check that the settings are correct. Then, press the [EXEC] soft key.
nc

10.4.3 Copy function (COPY)

Changes made during on-line editing are transferred to the corresponding
editing ladder program.
.c
w
w
w

421
 10.5 Functional Instruction

10.5.1 Functional instruction list 1

1) Kind of functional instruction and contents of processing

No. Instruc- SUB Contents of PMC PMC PMC PMC

tion No. processing -RB5 -RB6 -RC3 -RC3 2

om
1 END 1 1 1st level
program end
2 END 2 2 2nd level
program end
3 END 3 48 3rd level Not Not 3
program end Pro- pro-
vided vided
4 TMR 3 Timer

r.c
5 TMRB 24 Fixed timer
6 TMRC 54 Timer
4
7 DEC 4 Decording
8 DECB 25 Binary code de-
cording

e
9 CTR 5 Counter 5
10 CTRC 55 Counter
11 ROT 6 Rotation

12

13
ROTB

COD
nt26

7
control
Binary rotation
control
Code
conversion
6
ce
14 CODB 27 Binary code
conversion
15 MOVE 8 Data transfer 7
after logical
product
16 MOVOR 28 Data transfer
nc

after logical
sum
8
17 MOVB 43 One-byte
transfer
18 MOVW 44 Two-byte
transfer
.c

19 MOVN 45 Specified-byte 9
transfer
20 COM 9 Common line
control
w

21 COME 29 Common line

control end 10
22 JMP 10 Jump
23 JMPE 30 Jump end
w

24 JMPB 68 Label jump 1

25 JMPC 73 Label jump 2
26 LBL 69 Label
designation
w

27 PARI 11 Parity check

28 DCNV 14 Data
conversion

422
 10. PMC

No. Instruc- SUB Contents of PMC PMC PMC PMC

tion No. processing -RB5 -RB6 -RC3 -RC3
29 DCNVB 31 Binary data
conversion
30 COMP 15 Comparison
31 COMPB 32 Binary
comparison

om
32 COIN 16 Coincidence
check
33 SFT 33 Shift register
34 DSCH 17 Data search
35 DSCHB 34 Binary data
search
36 XMOV 18 Index data
transfer

r.c
37 XMOVB 35 Binary index
data transfer
38 ADD 19 BCD addition
39 ADDB 36 Binary addition
40 SUB 20 BCD
subtraction

e
41 SUBB 37 Binary
subtraction
42 MUL 21 BCD

43

44
MULB

DIV
nt
38

22
multiplication
Binary
multiplication
BCD division
ce
45 DIVB 39 Binary division
46 NUME 23 Definition of
constant
47 NUMEB 40 Definition of
binary constant
48 DISP 49 Message Note) Note) Note) Note)
nc

display
49 DISPB 41 Extended
message
display
50 EXIN 42 External data
input
.c

51 AXCTL 53 PMC axis

control
52 WINDR 51 Window data
read
w

53 WINDW 52 Window data

write
54 FNC9X 9X Specified Not Not
function instruc- pro- pro-
tion vided vided
w

55 MMC3R 88 MMC–III win-

dow data read
56 MMC3W 89 MMC–III win-
dow data write
w

57 MMCWR 98 MMC–II window

data read

423
 No. Instruc- SUB Contents of PMC PMC PMC PMC
tion No. processing -RB5 -RB6 -RC3 -RC3
58 MMCWW 99 MMC–II window 1
data write
59 DIFU 57 Rising-edge
detection
60 DIFD 58 Falling-edge
detection 2

om
61 EOR 59 Logical
exclusive OR
62 AND 60 Logical AND
63 OR 61 Logical OR
3
64 NOT 62 Logical not
65 END 64 Program end
66 CALL 65 Subprogram

r.c
conditional call
67 CALLU 66 Subprogram 4
unconditional
call
68 SP 71 Subprogram
69 SPE 72 Subprogram

e
end 5
NOTE For the Series 16–C, the DISP instruction can be used to support

nt
compatibility with the Series 16–A. For the Series 16–C, however,
the DISPB instruction is recommended, as it supports extended
functions, such as high-speed display and Kanji character display.
When both DISP and DISPB instructions are used in the Series
6
ce
16–C, the Kanji character display function supported by the DISPB
instruction cannot be used.
7
nc

8
.c

9
w

10
w
w

424
 10. PMC

10.5.2 Detail of function command

(1) END1
1st level program end SUB 1

(2)
END2
2nd level program end SUB 2

om
(3)
END3
3rd level program end SUB 48
(PMC–RC3/RC4 only)

(4) ACT W1
Valiable timer TMR

SUB 3

r.c
ff Timer no. (1-40)
*1-150 for the RB6/RC4

(5) ACT W1
Fixed timer TMRB

SUB 24 ff Timer no. (1-100)

ffff

e
Preset time (unit : msec)

(6) ACT W1
Valiable timer nt TMRC

SUB 54
ff Timer type
(0:8ms unit,1:48ms unit)
ffff Timer address (2-byte)
ffff Timer register address (4-byte)
ce
(7) ACT W1
Decode DEC

SUB 4 ffff Address of BCD output

ffff Decode instruction
nc

[Decode instruction]
ff ff ← Pos. of digit
01 : Decodes lower 1-digit only.
10 : Decodes upper 1-digit only.
11 : Decodes 2-digit.

Number : Number to be decoded.

.c

(8) ACT W1
Binary DECB
decode
SUB 25 f Length of byte
w

(1:1-byte, 2:2-byte, 4:4-byte)

ffff Address of code data
ffff Decode instruction
ffff Output address
w

(9) CNO W1 (Count up)

Counter CTR
UPDOWN
SUB 5 ff Counter no. (1-20)
w

RST *1-50 for the RB6/RC4

ACT

425
 (10) CNO W1 (Count up)
CTRC
Counter
UPDOWN
SUB 55 ffff Address of preset value 1
RST (2-byte)
ffff Counter register address
ACT (4-byte)

om
(11) RNO W1 (Direction output ;
ROT 0: Forward,
Rotation control 1 : Reverse)
BYT
SUB 6 fff No. of indexing
DIR
ffff Current position address 3
POS
ffff Goal position address
INC
ffff Output address

r.c
ACT
4

(12) W1 (Direction output ;

RNO
Binary rotation ROTB 0: Forward,

e
control 1 : Reverse) 5
SUB 26 f No. of byte (1 : 1-byte,
DIR 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte)
ffff No. of indexing
nt POS

INC

ACT
ffff

ffff

ffff
Current position address

Goal position address

Output address
6
ce
(13) BYT W1 (1 : Error) 7
COD
Code conversion
RST
SUB 7 ffff Size of data table
ACT ffff Convert data address
nc

ffff Output address

8
(14) RST W1 (1 : Error)
CODB
Binary code ACT
conversion SUB 27 f No. of byte
.c

ffff Size of data table 9

ffff Convert data address
ffff Output address
w

(15) ACT
Logical
MOVE ffff 10
ffff High-order 4-bit comparison
product SUB 8 ffff Low-order 4-bit comparison
transfer ffff Process data address
w

Output address

(16) ACT
MOVOR ffff
w

Data
Transfer ffff High–order 4–bit comparison
SUB 28 ffff Low–order 4bit comparison
after logical
sum ffff Process data address
Output address

426
 10. PMC

(17) ACT
One–byte transfer MOVB

SUB 43 ffff Transfer source address

ffff Transfer destination ad-
dress

(18) ACT
Two–byte transfer MOVW

om
SUB 44 ffff Transfer source address
ffff Transfer destination address

(19) ACT
Specified–byte MOVN
transfer Number of bytes to be
SUB 45 f transferred (1–200)
ffff Transfer source address

r.c
ffff Transfer destination ad-
dress

(20, 21) ACT

Common COM COME
line control ffff Specify 0.
SUB 9 SUB 29

e
(22, 23) ACT
Jump JMP JMPE

(24)
nt
ACT
SUB 10
ffff Specify 0.
SUB 30
ce
Label JMPB
jump 1 SUB 68 ffff Label number of jump destination
(L1–L9999)

(25) ACT
Label JMPC
jump 2 SUB 73 ffff Label number of jump destination
nc

(L1–L9999)

(26) LBL
Label SUB 69 ff Label number (L1–L9999)
designation
.c

(27) OE W1 (1 : Error)
Parity PARI
check RST
SUB11 ffff Check data address
ACT
w

OE 0 : Even-parity check, 1 : Odd-parity check

w

(28) BYT W1 (1 : Error)

Data DCNV
conversion CNV
SUB14 ffff Input data address
RST
ffff Output data address
w

ACT

CNV 0 : Binary to BCD-code, 1 : BCD to Binary-code

427
 W1 (1 : Error)
(29) SIN
DCNVB
Extended
data
CNV
f No. of byte
1
SUB 31
conversion (1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte)
RST
ffff Input data address
ACT
ffff Output address

SIN When converts BCD to binary ; 0 : Positive, 1 : Negative

2

om
[Operation output register]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000 V N Z
3
V : Overflow, Z : Zero, N : Negative

(30) BYT W1 (0 : Ref. data > Comp. data),

r.c
Comparison COMP (1 : Ref. data v Comp. data)
ACT
4
SUB 15 f Format of reference data
(0 : Constant data, 1 : Address)
ffff Reference value
(Constant data or address)
ffff Comparison value

e
5
(31) ACT
COMPB
Comparison
for binary
data
nt SUB 32
ffff
ffff

ffff
Format of reference data
Reference value
(Constant data or address)
Comparison value
6
ce
[Format of ref. data]
0 0 1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte
7
0 : Constant data, 1 : Address

[Operation output register]

nc

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R9000 V N Z 8
V : Overflow, Z : Ref. data=Comp. data,
N : Ref. data<Comp. data
.c

(32) (0 : Ref. data0Cop. data,

Coincidence BYT W1 1 : Ref. data=Cop. data) 9
check COIN
ACT
SUB 16 f Format of reference data
(0 : Constant data, 1 : Address)
w

ffff Reference value

(Constant data or address)
ffff Comparison value 10
w
w

428
 10. PMC

(33) DIR W1 (Shufted out)

SFT
Shift CONT
register SUB 33 ffff Data address
RST

ACT

DIR 0 : Left-shift, 1 : Right-shift

om
CONT 0 : Shift in with 0, 1 : Shift in with 0/1 depend last bit

(34) BYT W1 (0 : Searched data exist,

Data DSCH 1 : Searched data not exist)
serch RST
SUB 17 ffff Size of data table
ACT ffff Starting address of data table
ffff Search data address
ffff

r.c
Output address

(35) RST W1 (0 : Searched data exist,

DSCHB 1 : Searched data not exist)
Binary
ACT
data
SUB 34 f No. of byte (1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 :
search

e
4-byte)
ffff Address for size of data table

ffff Starting address of data table

ffff Search data address

(36)
nt
BYT
XMOV
ffff Output address

W1 (1 : Error)
ce
Indexed
data RW
SUB 18 ffff Size of data table
transfer
RST ffff Starting address of data table
ffff Input/output data storage address
ACT ffff Table no. storage address
nc

RW 0 : Read mode, 1 : Write mode

(37) RW W1 (1 : Error)
Binary XMOVB
index RST
modifier SUB 35 f No. of byte (1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 :
.c

data 4-byte)
transfer ffff Storage address of no. of data
ACT ffff Starting address of data table
ffff Input/output data storage address
ffff Table no. storage address
w

RW 0 : Read mode, 1 : Write mode

w

(38) BYT W1 (1 : Error)

Addition ADD
RST
SUB 19 f Data format
(0 : Constant data, 1 : Address)
ffff
w

ACT Summand address

ffff Addend value
(Address or constant data)
ffff Output address

429
 (39) RST W1 (1 : Error)
ADDB
Binary ACT
addition SUB 36 ffff Data format 1
ffff Summand address
ffff Addend value
(Address or constant data)
ffff Output address

[Data format]
0 0
2

om
1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte

0 : Addend value or address, 1 : Address

[Operation output register]

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3
R9000 V N Z

V : Overflow, Z : Zero, N : Negative

r.c
(40) BYT W1 (1 : Error, in case of the 4
Subtraction SUB result is negative.)
RST
SUB20 f Data format
(0 : Constant data, 1 : Address)
ACT ffff Subtrahend address
ffff Subtrahend value

e
(Address or constant data) 5
ffff Output address

(41)
Binary
Subtraction
nt
RST

ACT
SUBB
SUB37 ffff

ffff
W1 (1 : Error)

Data format
(The conditions are same as ADDB.)
Subtrahend address
6
ce
ffff Subtrahend value
(Address or constant data)
ffff Output address
7
(42) BYT W1 (1 : Error)
Multiplication MUL
RST
nc

SUB21 f Data format

(0 : Constant data, 1 : Address)
ACT ffff Multiplicand address 8
ffff Multiplier value
(Address or constant data)
ffff Output address
.c

(43) RST W1 (1 : Error) 9

Binary MULB
Multiplication ACT
SUB38 ffff Data format
(The conditions are same as ADDB.)
ffff
w

Multiplicand address
ffff Multiplier value
(Address or constant data) 10
ffff Output address
w
w

430
 10. PMC

(44) BYT W1 (1 : Error)

Division DIV
RST
SUB22 f Data format
(0 : Constant data, 1 : Address)
ACT ffff Dividend address
ffff Devier value
(Address or constant data)
ffff Output address

om
(45) W1 (1 : Error)
RST
Binary DIVB
division ACT
SUB39 ffff Data format
(The conditions are same as ADDB.)
ffff Dividend address
ffff Devier value
(Address or constant data)
ffff Output address

r.c
(The remainder-data is putput to
operation register R9002-R9005.)

(46) BYT
Definition of NUME
constant ACT
SUB23 ffff Constant data
ffff Output address

e
(47) ACT
Binary NUMEB
definition of
constant
nt SUB40 f

ffff
ffff
No. of byte
(1 : 1-byte, 2 : 2-byte, 4 : 4-byte)
Constant data
Output address
ce
(48) ACT W1 (Processing end)
Message DISP
display
SUB49 ffff Sum of step for message data
ffff No. of step for 1-message data

ffff Message control address

nc

(49) ACT W1 (Processing end)

Extended DISPB
message
display SUB41 ffff Number of message data
.c

(50) ACT W1 (Processing end)

External EXIN
data
input SUB42 ffff Control data address
w

(51) RST W1 (processing completed)

PMC axis AXCTL
ACT
w

control
SUB 53 f DI/DO signal group number
ffff Data address for axis control
instruction

(52)
w

ACT W1 (Transfer end)

Window WINDR
data
reading SUB51 ffff Control data address

431
 (53)
ACT W1 (Transfer end)
Window WINDW
data
writing
1
SUB52 ffff Control data address

(54) ACT W1 (Processing end)

Arbitrary FNC9X 2

om
function SUB
command 90–97 ffff Control data address
(PMC–RC3/RC4)

(55) ACT W1 (processing completed)

MMC3R 3
MMC–III
window
data read
SUB88 ffff Buffer designation address
ffff Offset address

r.c
ffff Data length address
ffff Input data address 4

(56) ACT W1 (processing completed)

MMC–III MMC3W

e
window
data write 5
SUB89 ffff Buffer designation address
ffff Offset address
ffff Data length address

(57)
Window
nt
ACT
MMCWR
ffff Input data address

W1 (Transfer end)
6
ce
data
reading SUB 98 ffff Input data storage address
for MMC–II ffff Input data length storage address
7
(58)
ACT W1 (Transfer end)
Window MMCWW
nc

data
writing SUB 99 ffff Output data storage address
for MMC–II ffff Output data length storage address 8

(59) W1 (rising–edge detection)

ACT
Rising edge DIFU
.c

detection
SUB 57 ffff Rising edge number (1 – 256) 9

(60) ACT W1 (falling–edge detection)

w

Falling edge DIFD

detection 10
SUB 58 ffff Falling edge number (1 – 256)
w

(61) ACT
EOR
Logical SUB 59 j 0 0 j Format designation
exclusive ffff Address of data to be manipu-
OR
w

lated
ffff Operating data (address or
constant)
ffff Operation result output address

432
 10. PMC

(62) ACT
Logical AND
AND SUB 60 j 0 0 j Format designation
ffff Address of data to be manipu-
lated
ffff Operating data (address or
constant)
ffff Operation result output address

om
(63) ACT
OR
Logical j 0 0 j Format designation
SUB 61
OR ffff Address of data to be manipu-
lated
ffff Operating data (address or
constant)
ffff Operation result output address

(64) ACT

r.c
Logical NOT
SUB 62 j00j Format specification
NOT
ffff Address of data to be manipu-
lated
ffff Operation result output address

e
(65)
END
Program end SUB 64

(66)
Subprogram
conditional
call
nt
ACT
CALL
SUB 65 ffff Subprogram number
(P1 to P512 for the PMC–
RB5/RC3)
ce
(P1 to P2000 for the PMC–
RB6/RC4)

(67)
CALLU
Subprogram SUB 66 ffff Subprogram number
uniconditional (P1 to P512 for the PMC–
call RB5/RC3)
nc

(P1 to P2000 for the PMC–

RB6/RC4)

(68)
SP
Subprogram SUB71 ffff Subprogram number
(P1 to P512 for the PMC–
RB5/RC3)
.c

(P1 to P2000 for the PMC–

RB6/RC4)

(69)
SPE
Subprogram SUB72
w

end
w
w

433
 11. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY
AND SYMBOLIC KEY

Table : Correspondence between English key and Symbolic key

Name English key Symbolic key 1

CANCEL key CAN

POSITION key POS

2

om
PROGRAM key PROG

OFFSET/SETTING key OFFSET

SETTING
3
CUSTOM key CUSTOM

r.c
SYSTEM key SYSTEM
4
MESSAGE key MESSAGE

e
GRAPH key GRAPH
5
CNC
CNC/MMC key

SHIFT key

INPUT key
nt MMC

SHIFT
6
ce
INPUT

ALTER key ALTER

7

INSERT key INSERT

nc

DELETE key DELETE

8
PAGE UP key PAGE
.c

PAGE
PAGE DOWN key
9

HELP key HELP

w

RESET key RESET 10

w

CUSTOM/GRAPH key CUSTOM

GRAPH

11
w

434
w
w
w
MEMO

.c
nc
ce
nt
er.c
om
 om
r.c
· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

e
· All specifications and designs
nt
are subject to change without
notice.
ce
nc
.c
w
w
w